2010 S Class PDF

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 1
d2ugruen, Version: 2.11.8.1
S-Class
Operator’s Manual
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 2
Symbols i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
Trademarks:
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of X This symbol points to instructions
Bluetooth SIG Inc. for you to follow.
RDTS
X A number of these symbols
is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
appearing in succession indicates
RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks a multiple-step procedure.
of Dolby Laboratories. Y page This symbol tells you where to look
RPRE-SAFE® is a registered trademarks of for further information on a topic.
Daimler. YY This continuation symbol marks a
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of warning or procedure which is
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company. continued on the next page.
RiPod®
Display Text in displays, such as the control
and iTunes® are registered system, are printed in the type
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the shown here.
U.S.A. and other countries.
RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries,
Incorporated.
RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
RHD Radio and related marks are
trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation.
RWindows media® is a registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
RGracenote® is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
RZagatSurvey® and related marks are
trademarks of Zagat.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
2215847682 É2215847682>ËÍ
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 2
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27
Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety and security ............................. 39
Control systems .................................. 75
Controls in detail .............................. 273
Operation ........................................... 401
Practical hints ................................... 449
Technical data ................................... 523

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Air bags ................................................ 41

Emergency call upon deployment . . 390
4-ETS Front, driver and passenger ............. 44
see ETS/4-ETS Front passenger front air bag off
4MATIC indicator lamp .......................... 46, 498
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Messages in the multifunction
911 emergency call .......................... 150 display ........................................... 455
OCS (Occupant Classification
A System) ........................................... 46
ABC (Active Body Control) ................ 345 Safety guidelines ............................. 43
Messages in the multifunction Side impact ...................................... 45
display ........................................... 457 Window curtain ................................ 45
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 63 Air conditioning refrigerant and
Indicator lamp ................................ 490 lubricant ............................................. 540
Messages in the multifunction Air distribution .................................. 370
display ................................... 467, 468 AIRMATIC
Accessory weight .............................. 430 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 343
Accidents ........................................... 314 Introduction ................................... 343
Air bags ........................................... 41 Messages in the multifunction
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 390 display ........................................... 476
Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 150 Vehicle level control ...................... 344
NECK-PRO active front head Air pressure
restraints ........................................ 55 see Tire inflation pressure
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Air pressure (tires) ............................ 430
see Headlamps Air recirculation mode ...................... 371
Active Body Control Air volume .......................................... 370
see ABC Alarm system
Adaptive Brake .................................... 65 see Anti-theft systems
Adaptive Brake Lights ......................... 66 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
Adaptive Damping System kit) .............................................. 450, 511
see ADS All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 347
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............... 301 Alternator
Setting ........................................... 235 Messages in the multifunction
Additives display ................................... 463, 482
Engine oil ....................................... 540 Alternator (Technical data)
Gasoline ......................................... 541 see Vehicle specification
Address book ..................................... 159 AMG menu ......................................... 227
Address change ................................... 22 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 543
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 343 Antilock Brake System
Advanced Parking Guidance see ABS
Messages in the multifunction Anti-theft systems ............................... 71
display ........................................... 461 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 72
Advanced Tire Pressure Immobilizer ...................................... 71
Monitoring System (Advanced Aquaplaning
TPMS) ................................................. 414 see Hydroplaning
Messages in the multifunction Armrest, front
display ........................................... 464 Storage compartment .................... 382
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
Armrest, rear B
Control panel ........................... 80, 293
Cup holder ..................................... 385 Backrest
Storage compartment .................... 383 see Seats
Ashtrays ............................................. 387 Backup lamps
Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 430 Messages in the multifunction
Assistance menu ............................... 231 display ........................................... 485
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................... 355 Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 430
Messages in the multifunction BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 64
display ........................................... 476 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
Switching on or off ......................... 232 PLUS) .................................................... 64
Audio Aux ........................................... 186 Batteries, replacing
Audio menu ........................................ 226 Headphone .................................... 502
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ..... 295 Remote control (Rear Seat
Automatic central locking ................ 278 Entertainment System) .................. 502
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 299 Remote control (SPLITVIEW) .......... 502
Automatic interior lighting control .. 304 SmartKey ....................................... 502
Automatic shift program .................. 322 Batteries, SmartKey
Automatic transmission ................... 317 Checking condition ........................ 277
Battery, Vehicle ................................. 512
Automatic shift program ................ 322
Gear range indicator ...................... 321 Charging ........................................ 514
Gear ranges ................................... 321 Jump starting ................................. 514
Gear selector lever ........................ 317 Messages in the multifunction
Hill-start assist system .................. 341 display ................................... 463, 482
Kickdown ....................................... 321 Bead (tire) .......................................... 430
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 325 Beverage holders
Manual shift program ..................... 324 see Cup holders
One-touch gearshifting .................. 323 Blind Spot Assist ............................... 359
Program mode indicator ................ 322 Messages in the multifunction
Program mode selector switch display ........................................... 460
(automatic shift program) .............. 322 Switching on or off ......................... 233
Program mode selector switch Bluetooth® interface ......................... 151
(manual shift program) .................. 324 Brake Assist System
Shifting procedure ......................... 319 see BAS
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 323 Brake Assist System PLUS
Transmission position indicator ..... 320 see BAS PLUS
Transmission positions .................. 320 Brake fluid
AUX Checking level ............................... 409
Audio ............................................. 186 Messages in the multifunction
Media interface .............................. 200 display ........................................... 472
Sockets .......................................... 187 Brake lamps
Video ............................................. 186 Cleaning lenses ............................. 443
Axle oils .............................................. 538 Brake pads
Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 466
Brakes ................................................ 435
High-performance brake system .... 437
Warning lamp ................................. 490
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Break-in period .................................. 402 Climate control system .................... 363

Bulbs Air conditioning ............................. 366
see Replacing bulbs Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 540
Air distribution ............................... 370
C Air recirculation mode ................... 371
Air volume ..................................... 370
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 24
Automatic mode ............................ 366
California retail buyers and
Deactivating system ...................... 366
lessees, important notice for ............. 22 Front defroster .............................. 370
Calls (phone) .............................. 148, 230 Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 371
Can holders Residual heat and ventilation ......... 372
see Cup holders Temperature .................................. 367
Capacities and recommended Coat hooks ......................................... 380
fuel/lubricants .................................. 537 Cockpit ................................................. 30
Carpets, cleaning .............................. 446 Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 430
CD player ............................................ 176 Collapsible wheel chock ................... 450
Central locking COMAND .............................................. 76
Automatic ...................................... 278 Address book ................................. 159
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 275 Audio playback .............................. 176
Locking/unlocking from inside ...... 279 AUX sockets .................................. 186
SmartKey ....................................... 274 Components .................................... 77
Central locking/unlocking switch ... 279 Controller ......................................... 79
Certification label .............................. 524 FM/AM Radio ................................ 165
Children in the vehicle
Gracenote® Media Database ......... 185
Air bags ........................................... 41
HD Radio™ .................................... 167
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 61
Headphone ...................................... 82
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type
Inserting/ejecting CDs and DVDs . 179
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 60
Introduction ..................................... 76
Indicator lamp, front passenger
iPod® ............................................. 200
front air bag off ................................ 46
Media interface .............................. 200
Infant and child restraint systems .... 57
Music Register ............................... 196
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –
Navigation ........................................ 95
LATCH-type) ..................................... 60
Operating ......................................... 84
OCS (Occupant Classification
Phone book .................................... 159
System) ........................................... 46
Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 189
Override switch ................................ 61
Remote control (Rear Seat
Safety notes ..................................... 56
Entertainment System) .................... 81
Tether anchorage points .................. 59
Remote control (SPLITVIEW) ............ 81
Top tether ........................................ 59
Reset to factory settings .................. 95
Child safety
Satellite radio ................................ 170
see Children in the vehicle
SD card .......................................... 180
Shortcut buttons .............................. 77
(ISOFIX)
SPLITVIEW ....................................... 90
Switching on or off ........................... 77
Chrome-plated exhaust tip,
System settings ............................... 91
cleaning .............................................. 447
Telephone ...................................... 148
Cigarette lighters .............................. 387
Telephone keypad ............................ 79
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Upload/Download of Data ............... 95 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 299

USB socket ...................................... 80 Switching on or off ......................... 234
Vehicle settings ............................. 206 Deep water
Video DVD ..................................... 191 see Standing water
Voice Control System .................... 237 Defogging (windshield) ..................... 371
Combination switch .......................... 301 Defroster
Controller (COMAND) .......................... 79 Front (Climate control system) ...... 370
Control system .................................. 220 Rear window .................................. 372
Multifunction display ..................... 222 Department of Transportation
Multifunction steering wheel ......... 221 see DOT
Control system menus ...................... 222 Difficulties
AMG ............................................... 227 While driving .................................. 314
Assistance ..................................... 231 With starting .................................. 312
Audio ............................................. 226 Digital speedometer
Navi ............................................... 225 Additional speedometer ................. 235
Service ........................................... 233 Dimensions (vehicle)
Settings ......................................... 234 see Vehicle specification
Telephone ...................................... 230 Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 422
Trip ................................................ 223 Displays
Coolant COMAND display ............................. 78
Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 543 DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 333
Capacities .............................. 538, 539 Maintenance service indicator ....... 439
Checking level ............................... 408 Messages in the multifunction
Messages in the multifunction display ........................................... 452
display ........................................... 480 Multifunction display ..................... 222
Temperature gauge ........................ 327 Symbol messages .......................... 466
Corner-illuminating lamps ................ 303 Text messages ............................... 454
Cruise control .................................... 328 Trip computer ................................ 223
Activating ....................................... 328 Vehicle status message memory ... 233
Canceling ....................................... 329 Display settings (COMAND) ................ 92
Changing the set speed ................. 329 DISTRONIC PLUS ............................... 330
Last stored speed .......................... 330 Cleaning system sensors ............... 443
Lever .............................................. 328 Displaying the distance graphic ..... 334
Messages in the multifunction Displays in the multifunction
display ........................................... 458 display ........................................... 333
Resume function ............................ 330 Distance warning lamp .......... 333, 496
Setting current speed .................... 329 Driving ........................................... 336
Cup holders ........................................ 384 Driving with .................................... 339
Curb weight ....................................... 430 Lever .............................................. 335
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24 Messages in the multifunction
Customer Relations Department ....... 24 display ........................................... 459
Resume function ............................ 338
D Sensor cover .................................. 443
Speed settings ............................... 337
Dashboard
Stopping ........................................ 337
see Instrument cluster
Doors
Data recording ..................................... 25
Child safety locks ............................ 61
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) . 275
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 274 Parktronic system .......................... 347

Messages in the multifunction Rear view camera .......................... 354
display ........................................... 478 Driving tips, automatic
Opening from inside ...................... 278 transmission ...................................... 321
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 394 DVD, audio ......................................... 176
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 394 DVD, video ......................................... 191
Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 499
DOT (Department of E
Transportation) .................................. 430
EBP (Electronic Brake
Drinking and driving ......................... 434
Proportioning) ...................................... 66
Drive-dynamic multicontour seats . . 219
Electrical system
Driving
Improper work on or
Abroad ........................................... 438
modifications ................................... 23
Hydroplaning ................................. 437
Power outlets ................................. 388
Instructions ........................... 311, 434
Electrical system (Technical data)
In winter ........................................ 433
Problems ....................................... 314 see Vehicle specification
Safety systems ................................ 63 Electronic parking brake .................. 315
Systems ......................................... 327 Electronic Stability Control
Through standing water ................. 437 see ESC
With DISTRONIC PLUS ................... 339 Electronic Traction System
Driving and parking see ETS/4-ETS
Safety notes .................................. 311 Emergency, in case of
Driving off .................................. 313, 437 First aid kit ..................................... 450
Driving safety systems ....................... 63 Flat tire .......................................... 508
ABS .................................................. 63 Hazard warning flasher .................. 302
Adaptive Brake ................................ 65 Roadside Assistance ................ 22, 391
Adaptive Brake Lights ...................... 66 Towing the vehicle ......................... 516
BAS .................................................. 64 Emergency calls
BAS PLUS ........................................ 64 Tele Aid .......................................... 390
EBP .................................................. 66 Telephone ...................................... 150
ESC .................................................. 66 Emergency engine shutdown ........... 521
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 67 Emergency operations
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 394
PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 69
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 394
Driving systems
Trunk lid, emergency release ......... 282
Active Body Control (ABC) ............. 345
Emergency Tensioning Device
AIRMATIC ...................................... 343
see ETD
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 347
Emission control ............................... 438
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 355
Information label ............................ 525
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 359
System warranties ........................... 21
Cruise control ................................ 328
Engine
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 330
Hill-start assist system .................. 341 Break-in recommendations ............ 402
HOLD function ............................... 342 Cleaning ......................................... 442
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 362 Compartment ................................ 404
Night View Assist Plus ................... 356 Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 496
Parking Guidance ........................... 350 Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 480
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
Number .......................................... 525 Fluids

Starting .......................................... 311 ABC fluid ................................ 408, 538
Turning off ..................................... 316 Automatic transmission fluid ......... 538
Engine (Technical data) Brake fluid ..................................... 538
see Vehicle specification Capacities ...................................... 537
Engine coolant Engine coolant ....................... 538, 539
see Coolant Engine oil ....................................... 537
Engine oil Power steering fluid ....................... 538
Adding ........................................... 407 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Additives ........................................ 540 system ........................................... 539
Checking level ............................... 405 Fog lamps ........................................... 300
Consumption ................................. 405 Messages in the multifunction
Messages in the multifunction display ................................... 485, 487
display ........................................... 483 Fold-in function for exterior rear
Oil dipstick ..................................... 406 view mirrors ...................................... 296
Recommended engine oils and oil Four-wheel drive
filter ............................................... 539 see All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ...... 66 Front air bags
ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 67 see Air bags
Messages in the multifunction Front lamps
display ........................... 467, 468, 473 see Headlamps
Warning lamp ................................. 495 Front passenger front air bag ............ 44
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Messages in the multifunction
Device) ................................................. 53 display ........................................... 455
Safety guidelines ............................. 43 Front passenger front air bag off
ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction indicator lamp ............................. 46, 498
System) ................................................ 67 Fuel ..................................................... 402
Express operation Additives ........................................ 541
Panorama roof ............................... 377 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 539
Power windows .............................. 307 Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 434
Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 373 Fuel consumption statistics ........... 223
Exterior lamp switch ......................... 298 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 403
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 295 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp ..... 496
Fold-in function .............................. 296 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 541
Parking position ............................. 295 Refueling ........................................ 402
Power-folding ................................. 296 Requirements ................................ 541
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 28 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 403
Fuel gauge ......................................... 327
F Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 537
Fuel tank
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 51
Capacity ........................................ 539
First aid kit ......................................... 450
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 403
Flat tire ............................................... 508
Refueling ........................................ 402
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 512
Fuses .................................................. 519
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 509
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 508
Spare wheel ........................... 508, 536
Floormats ........................................... 399
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
G Low-beam headlamps .................... 299

Messages in the multifunction
Garage door opener .......................... 395 display ........................................... 485
Gasoline Replacing bulbs ............................. 504
see Fuel Switch ............................................ 298
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 431 Headliner and shelf below rear
Gear range ......................................... 321 window, cleaning and care of .......... 446
Indicator ........................................ 321 Headphone ........................................... 82
Limiting .......................................... 323 Replacing batteries ........................ 502
Shifting into optimal ...................... 324 Head restraints ................................. 286
Gear selector lever ............................ 317 Adjustment ............................ 286, 289
Cleaning ......................................... 446 Comfort head restraint .................. 289
Gearshift pattern ........................... 317 Folding back .................................. 290
Shifting procedure ......................... 319 NECK-PRO active front head
Transmission position indicator ..... 320 restraints ......................................... 55
Transmission positions .................. 320 Rear seat head restraints ............... 290
Generator Heated steering wheel ...................... 294
see Alternator Height adjustment
Global locking/unlocking Seat belt outlet ................................ 52
see Key, SmartKey Seats ............................................. 286
Glove box ........................................... 381 Vehicle level control ...................... 344
Gracenote® Media Database ............ 185 High-beam flasher ............................. 302
Gross Axle Weight Rating High-beam headlamps .............. 301, 505
see GAWR Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 301
Gross Vehicle Weight Indicator lamp .................................. 32
see GVW High-performance brake system ..... 437
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Hill-start assist system ..................... 341
see GVWR HOLD function ................................... 342
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 431 Hood ................................................... 404
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Messages in the multifunction
Rating) ................................................ 431 display ........................................... 478
Horn ...................................................... 30
H Hydroplaning ..................................... 437
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 446
Hazard warning flasher .................... 302 I
HD Radio™ ......................................... 167 Identification labels .......................... 524
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 303 Identification number, vehicle
Headlamps (VIN) ................................................... 525
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ........... 298 Ignition ....................................... 284, 311
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 301 Immobilizer .......................................... 71
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 299 Indicator lamps
Bi-Xenon ................................ 298, 505 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Cleaning lenses ............................. 443 Infant and child restraint systems
Cleaning system ............................ 303 see Children in the vehicle
Daytime running lamp mode .......... 299 Inflation pressure
High-beam flasher ......................... 302 see Tires, Inflation pressure
High-beam headlamps ................... 301 Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 399
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
Inside door handle ...................... 38, 278 Global unlocking (KEYLESS-

Instrument cluster ...................... 32, 326 GO) ................................................ 277
Illumination .................................... 326 Global unlocking
Lamps ............................................ 489 (SmartKey) ..................................... 275
Multifunction display ..................... 222 Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ... 276
Instrument lighting Locking/unlocking ........................ 274
see Instrument cluster, Illumination Loss of ........................................... 277
Instrument panel Messages in the multifunction
see Instrument cluster display ........................................... 478
Instruments and controls Opening, trunk ............................... 279
see Cockpit Opening and closing the power
Interior lighting tilt/sliding sunroof or the
Emergency lighting ........................ 304 panorama roof ............................... 309
Front .............................................. 304 Opening and closing the windows . 309
Front reading lamps ....................... 304 Remote control .............................. 274
Rear ............................................... 304 Replacing ....................................... 278
Rear reading lamps ........................ 304 Replacing batteries ........................ 502
Interior rear view mirror ................... 294 Restoring to factory setting ... 275, 277
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors .... 295 Selective setting .................... 275, 277
Interior storage spaces Starter switch positions ................. 284
see Storage compartments KEYLESS-GO
Intermittent wiping ........................... 306 Starter switch positions ................. 284
Rain sensor .................................... 306 Keypad (COMAND) .............................. 79
iPod® (media interface) .................... 200 Kickdown ........................................... 321
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 325
LATCH-type) Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 431
L
J Labels
Jack ..................................................... 451 Certification ................................... 524
Jump starting ..................................... 514 Emission control information ......... 525
Tire and Loading Information
K placard ........................................... 418
Tire inflation pressure .................... 412
Key, Mechanical Lamps, exterior
Loss of ........................................... 277 Exterior lamp switch ...................... 298
Replacing ....................................... 278 Front .............................................. 505
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 499 Messages in the multifunction
Valet locking .................................. 283 display ........................................... 485
Key, SmartKey Switching on/off ........................... 298
Battery check lamp ........................ 277 Lamps, indicator and warning
Checking batteries ......................... 277 ABS .......................................... 32, 490
Factory setting ...................... 275, 277 Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 301
Global locking (KEYLESS- Brakes ........................................... 490
GO) ................................................ 277 Distance warning lamp .......... 333, 496
Global locking (SmartKey) ............. 275 Engine malfunction ........................ 496
ESC .......................................... 32, 495
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
ESC OFF ........................................ 495 M

Fog lamps ...................................... 300
Front passenger front air bag Maintenance ........................................ 22
off ............................................ 46, 498 Maintenance Call, automatic (Tele
Fuel tank reserve ........................... 496 Aid) ..................................................... 395
High-beam headlamps ............. 32, 301 Maintenance System
Instrument cluster ......................... 489 Service indicator display ................ 439
Low-beam headlamps .................... 299 Service indicator message ............. 439
Low tire pressure/TPMS Service term exceeded .................. 439
malfunction telltale ........................ 497 Manual headlamp mode (Low-
Seat belt telltale ................ 32, 52, 493 beam headlamps) .............................. 299
SRS .......................................... 40, 494 Manual shift program ....................... 324
Turn signals ..................................... 32 Maximum engine speed
Lane Keeping Assist .......................... 362 see Vehicle specification
Messages in the multifunction Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 431
display ........................................... 462 Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 431
Switching on or off ......................... 233 Maximum permissible tire
Language settings ............................... 94 inflation pressure .............................. 431
LATCH-type child seat anchors (ISOFIX) Mechanical key
see Children in the vehicle see Key, Mechanical
License plate lamps Media interface ................................. 200
Messages in the multifunction Memory function ............................... 297
display ........................................... 486 Menus
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 445 see Control system menus
Lighters Minispare wheel
see Cigarette lighters see Spare wheel
Lighting .............................................. 298 Mirrors ............................................... 294
Daytime running lamp mode .......... 299 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors .... 295
Exterior .......................................... 298 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Interior ........................................... 304 position .......................................... 295
Limp-home mode .............................. 325 Exterior rear view mirrors .............. 295
Load index (tires) ...................... 426, 431 Front vanity mirrors ....................... 386
Loading Interior rear view mirror ................. 294
see Vehicle loading Memory function ........................... 297
Locking the vehicle Power-folding exterior rear view
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 275 mirrors ........................................... 296
Manually ........................................ 500 Rear vanity mirrors ........................ 386
SmartKey ....................................... 274 MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 541
Loss of Motor Octane Number
Key ................................................ 277 see MON
Service and Warranty Information MP3 .................................................... 176
booklet .......................................... 524 Multicontour seats, front ................. 218
Low-beam headlamps ....................... 299 Multicontour seats, rear ................... 293
Exterior lamp switch ...................... 298 Multifunction display ........................ 222
Switching on .................................. 299 Symbol messages .......................... 466
Lubricants .......................................... 537 Text messages ............................... 454
Vehicle status messages ............... 452
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
Multifunction display messages Trunk ............................................. 478

ABC (Active Body Control) ............. 457 Turn signals ................................... 488
ABS ....................................... 467, 468 Multifunction steering wheel
Active headlamps .......................... 485 Adjustment .................................... 293
Advanced Parking Guidance .......... 461 Buttons .......................................... 221
Advanced TPMS ............................. 464 Cleaning ......................................... 446
Air bags ......................................... 455 Gearshift control ............................ 323
AIRMATIC ...................................... 476 Heating .......................................... 294
Alternator .............................. 463, 482 Memory function ........................... 297
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 476 Music Register ................................... 196
Automatic
transmission .......................... 462, 463 N
Battery ................................... 463, 482
Navigation ............................................ 95
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 460
Brake fluid ..................................... 472 Alternative route ............................ 138
Brake pads ..................................... 466 Compass ........................................ 137
Coolant .......................................... 480 Destination memory ...................... 145
Corner-illuminating lamps .............. 488 Entering a destination .................... 106
Cruise control ................................ 458 Entering a stopover ........................ 122
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 459 Introduction ..................................... 95
Doors ............................................. 478 Lane recommendation ................... 131
EBP ................................................ 468 Last destinations ........................... 147
Engine oil ....................................... 483 Map software version ...................... 96
ESC ............................... 467, 468, 473 Points of interest (POI) ................... 124
Fog lamps .............................. 485, 487 Route guidance .............................. 129
Front passenger front air bag ........ 455 Traffic messages ............................ 138
Gas cap .......................................... 484 Zagat® Rating Service .................... 128
High-beam lamps ........................... 486 “Where am I?” function .................. 136
Hood .............................................. 478 Navi menu .......................................... 225
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 462 NECK-PRO active front head
License plate lamps ....................... 486 restraints ............................................. 55
Light sensor ................................... 487 Resetting ....................................... 501
Low-beam lamps ............................ 487 Nets, parcel ....................................... 380
Night View Assist Plus ................... 477 Night security illumination .............. 208
Parking lamps ................................ 486 Night View Assist Plus ...................... 356
PRE-SAFE® .................................... 454 Cleaning the windshield in front of
Radar sensors ................................ 461 the camera .................................... 444
Reserve fuel ................................... 484 Messages in the multifunction
Reverse lamp ................................. 485 display ........................................... 477
Side marker lamps ......................... 485 Normal occupant weight .................. 431
SmartKey ....................................... 478 Number, vehicle identification
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 478 (VIN) ................................................... 525
SRS ................................................ 474
Tele Aid .......................................... 474
Tire inflation pressure ............ 464, 489
Tire pressure monitor .................... 464
Tires ...................................... 464, 489
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
O Parking ............................................... 314

Parking Guidance .................. 350, 352
Occupant Classification System Parktronic system .......................... 347
see OCS (Occupant Classification Parking Guidance .............................. 350
System) Canceling ....................................... 354
Occupant distribution ....................... 431 Detecting a parking space ............. 351
Occupant safety Parking .......................................... 352
Air bags ........................................... 41 Parking position
Children and air bags ....................... 41 Exterior rear view mirrors .............. 295
Children in the vehicle ..................... 56 Transmission position .................... 320
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Parktronic system
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 60 Cleaning system sensors ............... 443
Fastening the seat belts ................... 51 Malfunction .................................... 350
Front passenger front air bag off Minimum distance ......................... 348
indicator lamp .......................... 46, 498 Sensor range ................................. 348
Infant and child restraint systems .... 57 Switching on/off ........................... 349
Introduction ..................................... 40 System sensors ............................. 348
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – Warning indicators ......................... 349
LATCH-type) ..................................... 60 Parts service ...................................... 524
OCS (Occupant Classification PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
System) ........................................... 46 see Front passenger front air bag
PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 54 off indicator lamp
Seat belts .................................. 43, 49 Passenger safety
OCS (Occupant Classification see Occupant safety
System) ................................................ 46 Pedals ................................................. 434
Self-test ........................................... 49 Phone
Odometer ........................................... 223 see Telephone
Oil, oil level Phone book ........................................ 159
see Engine oil Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 446
On-board computer Power assistance .............................. 435
see Control system Power closing assist for doors and
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 323 trunk lid .............................................. 283
Operating safety .................................. 23 Power outlets .................................... 388
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 443 Power seats
Overhead control panel ...................... 37 see Seats
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
P Operation ....................................... 373
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 441 Synchronizing ................................ 375
Paintwork code ................................. 525 Power washer .................................... 441
Panic alarm .......................................... 62 Power windows ................................. 307
Panorama roof with power tilt/ Cleaning ......................................... 445
sliding panel ...................................... 377 Operation ....................................... 307
Cleaning ......................................... 445 Rear door window, override
Operation ....................................... 377 switch .............................................. 61
Roller sunblinds ............................. 375 Rear door window sunshades ........ 308
Synchronizing ................................ 378 Synchronizing ................................ 308
Parcel nets ......................................... 380 Practical hints ................................... 450
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 54 Headphone ...................................... 82

Messages in the multifunction Remote control ................................ 81
display ........................................... 454 Rear seat head restraints
PRE-SAFE® Brake ................................. 69 see Head restraints
Activating/deactivating ................. 232 Rear view camera .............................. 354
Messages in the multifunction Cleaning the camera lens .............. 444
display ........................................... 454 Rear window defroster ..................... 372
Problems Recommended tire inflation
While driving .................................. 314 pressure ..................................... 411, 431
With vehicle ..................................... 24 Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 540
With wipers .................................... 306 Refueling ............................................ 402
Product information ............................ 21 Regular checks .................................. 403
Production options weight ............... 431 Reminder, Seat belt
Program mode selector switch see Seat belts, Telltale
Automatic shift program ................ 322 Remote control
Manual shift program ..................... 324 see Key, SmartKey
Proximity key Remote control (Rear Seat
see Key, SmartKey Entertainment System) ....................... 81
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 431 Replacing batteries ........................ 502
Remote control (SPLITVIEW) .............. 81
R Replacing batteries ........................ 502
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ............. 394
RACETIMER ........................................ 228 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 394
Radar sensors Replacing
Messages in the multifunction Key ................................................ 278
display ........................................... 461 Replacing bulbs ................................. 504
Switching on or off ......................... 236 Reporting safety defects .................... 24
Radio .................................................. 165 Research Octane Number
HD Radio™ .................................... 167 see RON
Satellite radio ................................ 170 Reserve fuel
Selecting stations .......................... 226 Messages in the multifunction
Radio transmitters ............................ 438 display ........................................... 484
Rain sensor Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front
see Intermittent wiping head restraints) ................................. 501
Rear axle oil ....................................... 538 Restraint systems
Rear door ashtray see Occupant safety
see Ashtrays Retaining hook .................................. 381
Rear doors Rims ........................................... 431, 532
Child safety locks ............................ 61 Roadside Assistance ................... 22, 391
Rear door window Roller sunblinds ................................. 375
Override switch ................................ 61 RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 541
Sunshades ..................................... 308
Roof rack ............................................ 380
Rear fog lamp
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 446
see Fog lamps
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 189
AUX sockets .................................. 187
CD/DVD drive ............................... 180
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
S Service intervals
see Maintenance System, Service
Safety indicator message
Driving safety systems ..................... 63 Service life (tires) .............................. 423
Occupant safety ............................... 40 Service menu ..................................... 233
Reporting defects ............................ 24 Settings
Safety belts Automatic locking .......................... 210
see Seat belts Automatic mirror folding ................ 209
Satellite radio .................................... 170 Display settings (COMAND) ............. 92
SD card ............................................... 180 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 208
Seat belt force limiter ......................... 53 Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 277
Seat belts ............................................. 49 Factory setting (SmartKey) ............ 275
Adjustment function ........................ 52 Individual (vehicle) ......................... 234
Automatic comfort-fit feature .......... 54 Interior ambient lighting ................ 209
Children in the vehicle ..................... 56 Language ......................................... 94
Cleaning ......................................... 446 Locator lighting .............................. 210
Fastening ......................................... 51 Memory function ........................... 297
Height adjustment ........................... 52 Night security illumination ............. 208
Proper use of ................................... 50 Rear window sunshade .................. 207
Safety guidelines ............................. 43 Seat belt adjustment function ....... 236
Safety notes ..................................... 49 Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ..... 277
Telltale ..................................... 32, 493 Selective setting (SmartKey) .......... 275
Seat heating ....................................... 292 Time ................................................. 92
Seating capacity ................................ 419 Trunk opening-height restriction .... 210
Seats .................................................. 286 Voice Control System ...................... 93
Adjustment .................................... 286 Shelf below rear window, cleaning .. 446
Drive-dynamic ................................ 219 Shortcut buttons ................................. 77
Heating .......................................... 292 Side impact air bags ........................... 45
Memory function ........................... 297 Side marker lamps
Multicontour, front ......................... 218 Cleaning lenses ............................. 443
Multicontour, rear .......................... 293 Messages in the multifunction
Ventilation ..................................... 292 display ........................................... 485
Securing cargo Sidewall (tires) .................................. 432
Cargo tie-down hooks .................... 381 SmartKey
Selective setting see Key, SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Selector lever see Key, SmartKey
see Gear selector lever Snow chains ...................................... 433
Self-test Snow tires
OCS (Occupant Classification see Winter tires
System) ........................................... 49 Spare wheel ....................................... 532
Tele Aid .......................................... 389 Mounting ....................................... 509
Service Storage location ............................ 451
see Maintenance Speedometer ....................................... 32
Service, parts .................................... 524
Service and warranty information ..... 21
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Speed settings Capacities fuels, coolants,

Cruise control ................................ 329 lubricants etc. ................................ 537
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 337 Coolant .................................. 538, 542
Resume function ................... 330, 338 Engine oil additives ........................ 540
SPLITVIEW ............................................ 90 Engine oils ............................. 537, 539
Headphone ...................................... 82 Fuel requirements .......................... 541
Remote control ................................ 81 Gasoline additives .......................... 541
SRS Identification labels ....................... 524
Indicator lamp .................................. 32 Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 541
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) Rims and tires ................................ 532
Indicator lamp ......................... 40, 494 Spare wheel ................................... 536
Messages in the multifunction Vehicle specification
display ........................................... 474 S 450 4MATIC ............................... 527
Standing water, driving through ...... 437 Vehicle specification S 550 ........... 527
Starter switch positions Vehicle specification
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 284 S 550 4MATIC ............................... 528
SmartKey ....................................... 284 Vehicle specification S 600 ........... 529
Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 312 Vehicle specification S 63 AMG ..... 530
Starting the engine ........................... 311 Vehicle specification S 65 AMG ..... 531
Steering column Washer and headlamp cleaning
see Multifunction steering wheel, system ................................... 539, 544
Adjustment Technical data (dimensions)
Steering wheel see Vehicle specification
see Multifunction steering wheel Technical data (electrical system)
Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 323 see Vehicle specification
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 395 Technical data (engine)
Storage compartments ..................... 381 see Vehicle specification
Storing tires ....................................... 424 Technical data (weights)
Sunroof see Vehicle specification
see Power tilt/sliding sunroof Tele Aid ............................................... 389
Sunshade Automatic Maintenance Call .......... 395
Rear door window .......................... 308 Emergency calls ............................. 390
Rear window .................................. 386 Information button ......................... 392
Sun visors .......................................... 386 Initiating an emergency call
Suspension tuning manually ........................................ 391
see AIRMATIC Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 474
T Remote door lock .......................... 394
Remote door unlock ...................... 394
Tachometer .................................. 33, 327 Roadside Assistance button .......... 391
Overspeed range ........................... 327 Search & Send ............................... 393
Tail lamps SOS button .................................... 391
Cleaning lenses ............................. 443 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 395
Tar stains ........................................... 441 System self-test ............................. 389
Technical data Telephone .......................................... 148
Air conditioning refrigerant .... 539, 540 Answering/ending a call ................ 230
Brake fluid ............................. 538, 540 Bluetooth® interface ...................... 151
Call lists ......................................... 163
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 18
18 Index
Call waiting, call holding, and Inflation pressure ........................... 413

conference ..................................... 158 Information placard ....................... 418
Emergency call “911” .................... 150 Inspection ...................................... 423
Functions during a single party Labeling ......................................... 426
call ................................................. 157 Load index ............................. 426, 431
Making calls ................................... 156 Load rating .................................... 431
Menu ............................................. 230 Messages in the multifunction
Operation ....................................... 230 display ................................... 464, 489
Phone book ........................... 159, 231 Ply composition and material
Redialing ........................................ 231 used ............................................... 432
Telephone keypad ............................... 79 Problems under-/overinflation ...... 413
Temperature Retreads ........................................ 410
Coolant .......................................... 327 Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 532
Interior temperature ...................... 367 Rotation ......................................... 425
Outside .......................................... 327 Service life ..................................... 423
Tether anchorage points Sizes .............................................. 532
see Children in the vehicle Snow chains .................................. 433
Tie-down hooks ................................. 381 Speed rating .......................... 427, 432
Tightening torque Storing ........................................... 424
Wheels ........................................... 512 Temperature .......................... 412, 425
Time settings ....................................... 92 Terminology ................................... 430
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 432 Tire Identification Number ............. 432
Tire and Loading Information TPMS low tire pressure/
placard ............................................... 418 malfunction telltale ........................ 497
Tire and loading terminology ........... 430 Traction ................................. 424, 432
Tire Identification Number Tread ............................................. 432
see TIN Tread depth ........................... 423, 432
Tire inflation pressure Treadwear ...................................... 424
Checking ........................................ 413 Treadwear indicators ............. 423, 432
Important notes on ........................ 412 Vehicle maximum load on .............. 432
Label on the inside of fuel filler Wear pattern .................................. 425
flap ................................................ 412 Winter tires ............................ 432, 532
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 418 Tire speed rating ....................... 427, 432
Tire labeling ....................................... 426 Top tether
Tire load rating .................................. 431 see Children in the vehicle
Tire ply composition and material Total load limit ................................... 432
used .................................................... 432 Towing
Tires ........................................... 410, 532 Towing eye bolt .............................. 517
Advanced Tire Pressure Vehicle ........................................... 516
Monitoring System (Advanced Towing eye bolt ................................. 517
TPMS) ............................................ 414 Traction ...................................... 424, 432
Air pressure ................................... 411 Traffic messages ............................... 138
Care and maintenance ................... 423 Transfer case ..................................... 325
Cleaning ......................................... 424 Transmission
Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 422 see Automatic transmission
Important notes on tire inflation Transmission fluid level .................... 408
pressure ........................................ 412 Transmission gear selector lever
see Gear selector lever
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 19
Index 19
Transmission positions .................... 320 Control system .............................. 220

Traveling abroad ............................... 438 Identification Number (VIN) ........... 524
Tread (tires) ....................................... 432 Individual settings .......................... 234
Tread depth (tires) .................... 423, 432 Locking/unlocking ........................ 274
Treadwear .......................................... 424 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 512
Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 423, 432 Modifications and alterations,
Trip menu ........................................... 223 Operating safety .............................. 23
Trunk Towing ........................................... 516
Closing ........................................... 280 Unlocking/locking manually .......... 499
Messages in the multifunction Vehicle dimensions
display ........................................... 478 see Vehicle specification
Opening ......................................... 279 Vehicle Identification Number
Opening/closing system ............... 281 (VIN) ................................................... 524
Opening-height restriction ............. 210 Vehicle jack
Tie-down hooks .............................. 381 see Jack
Trunk lid emergency release .......... 282 Vehicle level control
Unlocking manually ....................... 500 see AIRMATIC
Valet locking .................................. 283 Vehicle lighting .................................. 298
Turning off the engine ...................... 316 Vehicle loading
Turn signals ....................................... 301 Instructions .................................... 379
Cleaning lenses ............................. 443 Load limit ....................................... 419
Indicator lamps ................................ 32 Roof rack ....................................... 380
Messages in the multifunction Terminology ................................... 430
display ........................................... 488 Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 432
Vehicle specification
U S 450 4MATIC ............................... 527
S 550 ............................................. 527
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
S 550 4MATIC ............................... 528
Standards .................................. 424, 432 S 600 ............................................. 529
Units S 63 AMG ...................................... 530
Selecting speedometer display S 65 AMG ...................................... 531
mode ............................................. 235 Vehicle status message memory .... 233
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 541 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 450
Unlocking the vehicle Vehicle washing
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 275 see Vehicle care
Manually ........................................ 499 Vehicle weights
SmartKey ....................................... 274 see Vehicle specification
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 446 Video .................................................. 191
USB devices (media interface) ......... 200 Video Aux ........................................... 186
USB socket ........................................... 80 Voice Control System
Useful features .................................. 384 Address book ................................. 249
CD/DVD changer/MP3 ................. 255
V Command list ................................ 257
Valet locking ...................................... 283 External devices ............................. 257
Vehicle Individualization ............................. 271
Battery ........................................... 512 Introduction ................................... 237
Care ............................................... 440 Navigation ..................................... 240
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 20
20 Index
Radio ............................................. 252 Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 447

Settings ........................................... 93
Telephone ...................................... 245 Z
Troubleshooting ............................. 267
ZAGAT® Rating Service ..................... 128
W
Warning sounds
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 333
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 52
Electronic parking brake ................ 469
Parking Guidance ........................... 352
Parktronic system .......................... 350
Seat belt telltale ............................ 493
Warranty coverage ............................ 524
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 544
Washer fluid
Mixing ratio .................................... 544
Refilling .......................................... 409
Washing the vehicle .......................... 440
Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 425
Weights (vehicle)
see Vehicle specification
Wheel
Changing ....................................... 508
Removing ....................................... 511
Spare ............................................. 508
Tightening torque ........................... 512
Wheels, sizes ..................................... 532
Wheels, Tires and .............................. 410
Window curtain air bags ..................... 45
Windows
see Power windows
Windows, cleaning ............................ 445
Windshield
Cleaning wiper blades .................... 445
Defogging ...................................... 371
Infrared reflecting .......................... 399
Washer fluid ................................... 544
Wipers ........................................... 305
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades .................. 507
Winter driving
Instructions .................................... 433
Snow chains .................................. 433
Tires ............................................... 432
Winter tires ................................ 432, 532
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail Maintenance

buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered
by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
more of the following occurs: (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (in the USA) or the
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Roadside Assistance section of the Service
writing of the need for its repair, and Warranty Information Booklet (in
(2) the same substantial defect or Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or ownership
notified us in writing of the need for its If you change your address, be sure to send
repair, or in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of the Service and Warranty Information
repair of the same or different substantial Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
total of more than 30 calendar days. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
Written notification should not be sent to a
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
dealer, it should be addressed to
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 23
Introduction 23
contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all G Warning!
literature with the vehicle to make it available Work improperly carried out on electronic
to the next operator. components and associated software could
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to cause them to cease functioning. Because the
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” vehicle’s electronic components are
found in the Service and Warranty interconnected, any modifications made may
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- produce an undesired effect on other
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the systems. Electronic malfunctions could
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes seriously impair the operating safety of your
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in vehicle.
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Operating your vehicle outside the
Other improper work or modifications on the
USA or Canada
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign the operating safety of the vehicle.
countries, please be aware that: Some safety systems only function while the
RService facilities or replacement parts may engine is running. You should therefore never
not be readily available. turn off the engine while driving.
RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with G Warning!
catalytic converters may not be available;
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
catalysts.
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower Such blows can be caused, for example, by
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause running over an obstacle, road debris or a
engine damage. pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
for delivery in Europe under our European that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Delivery Program. For details, consult an Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: Rslow down carefully
In the USA:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
European Delivery Department distance from the road
One Mercedes Drive Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
In Canada: appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
European Delivery Department qualified maintenance or repair facility for
98 Vanderhoof Avenue further inspection or repairs.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 24
24 Introduction
Proper use of the vehicle Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

In Canada:
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
Customer Relations Department
familiar with the following information and
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
rules:
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
Rtraffic rules and regulations

Reporting safety defects
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
For the USA only:
G Warning!
The following text is published as required of
Various warning labels are attached to your manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
make you and others aware of various risks. “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Do not remove any of these warning labels of 1966”.
unless explicitly instructed to do so by
information on the label itself. Removing
warning labels may cause you and others to Reporting safety defects
be unaware of certain risks which may result
in an accident and/or personal injury. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
G Warning! injury or death, you should immediately
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
Instructions included in your vehicle literature notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
necessary safety information and warning for open an investigation, and if it finds that a
the operation of your vehicle. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 25
Introduction 25
Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to
diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
Please check the Tele Aid subscription
service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 26
26
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 27
27
Exterior view ....................................... 28

Rear passenger compartment ........... 29
Cockpit ................................................. 30
At a glance
Instrument cluster .............................. 32
Control systems .................................. 34
Center console .................................... 36
Overhead control panel ...................... 37
Driver’s door control panel ................ 38
Rear door control panel ...................... 38
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 28
28 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Trunk: Rims and tires 532
Locking and unlocking 274 E Hood 404
Opening and closing 279, F Headlamp cleaning system 303
280
Valet locking 283 G Front lamps 504
; Rear lamps 504 H Wipers 305
Wiper blades, replacing 507
= Rear window defroster 372
Wiper blades, cleaning 445
? Fuel filler flap 402
I Windshield:
A Doors: Wiping with washer fluid 305
Locking and unlocking 274, Cleaning 445
499
J Roof:
B Exterior rear view mirrors 295 Power tilt/sliding sunroof 373
Parking position 295 Panorama roof with power
Power-folding 296 tilt/sliding panel 375
C Towing eyes 517
D Tires and wheels 410
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 29
Rear passenger compartment 29
Rear passenger compartment
At a glance
Function Page
: Cupholder under the rear
center armrest 384
; Cupholder in the rear
center armrest 384
= Control panel for rear
multicontour seats 293
? Armrest with integrated
storage compartment 383
A Rear storage box 383
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 30
30 Cockpit
Cockpit
At a glance

: Combination switch: Suspension tuning switch 343,
346
Turn signals 301
Parktronic/Parking
Wipers 305
Guidance deactivation 347,
High beam 301 switch 350
; Cruise control lever: Swiveling COMAND display 78
Cruise control 328 COMAND display
DISTRONIC PLUS 330 illumination 78
Instrument cluster display
= Horn illumination 326
? Multifunction steering E COMAND display 78
wheel 221
F Overhead control panel 37
A Instrument cluster 326
G Climate control 363
B Steering wheel gearshift
Center console 36
control 323
H Glove box lock 381
C Gear selector lever 317
I CD/DVD changer 179
D Control panel with:
SD card slot 180
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 46 J Control systems controls 34
Vehicle level control switch 344, K Starter switch 284
345
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 31
Cockpit 31

KEYLESS-GO start/stop O Hood lock release 404
At a glance
button 284
P On-board diagnostics
L Steering wheel adjustment (OBD) socket
stalk 294
Heated steering wheel 294 Q Night View Assist Plus 356
M Electronic parking brake 315 R Exterior lamp switch 298
N Door control panel 38
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 32
32 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: Coolant temperature gauge 327 ! Electronic parking
brake warning or indicator
; Fuel gauge with: lamps, Canada only 492
Fuel tank reserve warning $ Brake warning lamp,
lamp 496 USA only 492
K High-beam headlamp J Brake warning lamp,
indicator lamp 301 Canada only 492
! Antilock Brake 7 Seat belt telltale 493
System (ABS) indicator h Combination low tire
lamp 490 pressure/TPMS
6 Supplemental malfunction telltale, USA 414,
Restraint System (SRS) only 497
indicator lamp 494 h Low tire pressure 414,
= Parktronic/Parking telltale, Canada only 497
Guidance warning indicator # Left turn signal
for left front area 349 indicator lamp
? Multifunction display with: ! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
Speedometer
÷ ESC warning lamp 473
F Electronic parking
brake warning or indicator · Distance warning
lamps, USA only 492 lamp1 496
1 Vehicles without DISTRONIC PLUS: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It
should go out when the engine is running.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 33
Instrument cluster 33

å ESC OFF warning D Program mode indicator 322
At a glance
lamp 473
j Parking space indicator E Main menus for instrument
lamp 350 cluster control system 222
é Recuperative Brake F Outside temperature 327
System (RBS) warning
G Display with:
lamp, S 400 HYBRID only2
Additional speedometer 235
Green or yellow READY
indicator lamp for the _ Adaptive Highbeam
HYBRID system, S 400 Assist indicator lamp 301
HYBRID only2 Ã Lane Keeping
Assistance indicator lamp 362
A Parktronic/Parking
À Attention Assist
Guidance warning indicator
indicator lamp 355
for right front area 349
Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake
B Transmission position/ indicator lamp 232
range indicator 321
or
C Tachometer with: HOLD function indicator
; Engine malfunction lamp 342
indicator lamp 496
2 See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 34
34 Control systems
Control systems
At a glance

: Press button % briefly to Press and hold
button : or 9:
cancel Voice Control
System, back, confirm within Audio to select
messages. previous or next station in
Press and hold button station list or wave band
% to select the standard within Telephone menu to
display. start the quick search in the
phone book
; Press button = or ; Press button a to
to select menus. confirm selection or
Press button : or 9 messages.
briefly:
= Multifunction display 222
to select function or scroll
through lists ? Press button ~:
within Audio menu to to end a call 158
select previous or next to reject an incoming call 156
track, scene or stored
Press button 6:
station
within Telephone menu to to answer a call 156
switch to the phone book to dial 156
and select a name or to redial 157
number Press button 8 to mute.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 35
Control systems 35

Press button W or X: Q COMAND on/off button 77
At a glance
to set the volume
R Volume control 88
to operate the RACETIMER3
S Favorite button 94
A Press button ?:
to activate Voice Control T Telephone keypad 150
System 239 U COMAND controller 79
to accept a call 156
B Instrument cluster
illumination 326
C Swiveling COMAND display 78
D COMAND display
illumination 78
E COMAND display 78
F Clock 92
G CD/DVD changer 179
H SD card slot 180
I Rear window sunshade
switch 386
J Head restraint release
switch 291
K Program mode selector
switch for automatic
transmission 322
L Shortcut button for:
CD/DVD/SD card 181
Radio 166
M Back button 87
N Hazard warning flasher
switch 302
O Seat menu button 216
P Shortcut button for:
Telephone 150
Navigation 101
3 AMG vehicles only
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 36
36 Center console
Center console Function Page

G Manual fan speed
At a glance
adjustment, passenger side 370

H Temperature control,
passenger side 367
I Air distribution and air
volume, passenger side
(automatic mode) 366
J Alarm system indicator
lamp 72
K Cup holder 384
L Ashtray 387
Cigarette lighter 387
M CD/DVD changer 179
SD card slot 180
Function Page
: Thumbwheel for air volume
control for left center air
vent 368
; Thumbwheel for air volume
control for right center air
vent 368
= Air distribution and air
volume, driver’s side
(automatic mode) 366
? Temperature control,
driver’s side 367
A Manual fan speed
adjustment, driver’s side 370
B Front defroster 370
C Air recirculation 371
D Climate control on/off 366
E Residual engine heat and
ventilation (REST) 372
F Rear window defroster 372
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 37
Overhead control panel 37
Overhead control panel Function Page

Tele Aid (emergency call
At a glance
system) 389
Telephone 148
Voice Control System 237
Function Page
: Eyeglasses compartment 381
; Left reading lamp on/off 304
= Rear interior lighting on/off 304
? Front interior lighting on/
off 304
A Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch or panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding 373,
panel switch 375
B SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 389
C Automatic interior lighting
control 304
D Opening/closing rear roller
sunblinds 376
E Right reading lamp on/off 304
F Interior rear view mirror 294
G Garage door opener 395
H Hands-free microphone for:
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 38
38 Rear door control panel
Driver’s door control panel Rear door control panel

At a glance

: Inside door handle 278 : Selector button for front
passenger seat
; Central unlocking switch 279 adjustment, on the right
Central locking switch 279 rear door only 288
= Seat adjustment switch 287 ; Memory function, Canada
? Memory function 297 only 297
Selector button for front = Seat adjustment switch 287
passenger seat 288
? Inside door handle 278
A Seat heating switch 292
A Switch for extending/
Seat ventilation switch 292
retracting rear window
B Exterior rear view mirror sunshade 386
adjustment 295 B Button for extending/
Power-folding exterior rear retracting panorama roof
view mirrors 296 sunblind 375
C Switches for opening/ C Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door closing door windows 307
windows 307
Switches for opening/
D Remote trunk opening/ closing rear side window
closing switch 279 sunshades 308
E Override switch 61 D Seat heating switch 292
Seat ventilation switch 292
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 39
39
Vehicle equipment .............................. 40

Occupant safety .................................. 40
Panic alarm .......................................... 62
Driving safety systems ....................... 63
Anti-theft systems .............................. 71
Safety and security

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 56) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH) also known as ISOFIX
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp 6 is not lit while the engine is running.
- Front passenger seat with Occupant
Classification System (OCS)
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
6 to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rfails to go out after approximately asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
4 seconds after the engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on after the engine was started or soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
while driving breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
For your safety, we strongly recommend that air by opening a window or door.
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system G Warning!
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
activated when needed in an accident, which bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS and front passenger to always be in a properly
might also deploy unexpectedly and seated position and to wear their respective
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seat belt.
as well.
For maximum protection in the event of a
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates collision always be in normal seated position
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or with your back against the seat backrest.
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
on the SRS must therefore only be performed properly positioned on your body.
by qualified technicians. Contact an
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
speed and force, a proper seating position
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system and correct positioning of the hands on the
to accommodate a person with disabilities, steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes properly or are too close to the air bag can be
(1-800-367-6372) for details. seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
Air bags
position that is as upright as possible with
G Warning! your back against the seat backrest.
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
of injury and fatality in certain possible, still permitting proper operation
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags) of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center of
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and the air bag cover on the steering wheel
window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) You should be able to accomplish this by
However, no system available today can adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an door where the side impact air bag
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. inflates. This could result in
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the serious injuries or death should
steering wheel or dashboard. the side impact air bag be
deployed.
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
(2) Always sit as upright as possible,

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
wear the seat belt properly and use
the rim can increase the risk and potential
an appropriately sized infant
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
restraint, toddler restraint, or
front air bag inflates.
booster seat recommended for the
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as size and weight of the child. and
possible rearward from the dashboard for children 12 years old and
when the seat is occupied. under, use an appropriately sized
ROccupants, especially children, should infant restraint, toddler restraint,
never place their bodies or lean their heads or booster seat recommended for
in the area of the door where the side the size and weight of the child.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in (3) Always wear seat belts properly.
serious injuries or death should the side If you believe that, even with the use of these
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as guidelines, it would be safer for your rear seat
upright as possible, wear the seat belt occupants to have the rear mounted side
properly and use an appropriately sized impact air bags deactivated, then
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or deactivation can be carried out upon your
booster seat recommended for the size and written request at an authorized Mercedes-
weight of the child. Benz Center at an additional cost.
Failure to follow these instructions can result Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. Center or call the Customer Assistance
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you Center (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
make the buyer aware of this safety (1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Canada) at 1-800-387-0100 for details.
Operator’s Manual.
Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
G Warning! Rfrontal impacts (front air bags)
Accident research shows that the safest place Rside impacts (side impact and window
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. curtain air bags) if the system determines
There is a possibility for a side impact air bag- the need for air bag deployment
related injury if occupants, especially Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
children, are not properly seated or restrained
when next to a side impact air bag which Only in the event of such a situation will they
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in provide their supplemental protection.
order to do its job. The driver and passengers should always
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
follow these guidelines: possible for the air bags to provide their
supplemental protection.
(1) Occupants, especially children,
should never place their bodies or In case of other types of impacts and impacts
lean their heads in the area of the below air bag deployment thresholds, air
bags will not deploy. The driver and
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
passengers will then be protected to the RDo not make any modification that could
extent possible by a properly fastened seat change the effectiveness of the seat belts.
belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
needed to provide the best possible
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
protection in a rollover.
not be able to provide adequate protection.
Safety and security

Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
RNo modifications of any kind may be made
Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with to any components or wiring of the SRS.
air bags. RDo no change or remove any component or
It is important to your safety and that of your part of the SRS.
passengers to have deployed air bags RDo not install additional trim material, seat
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air covers, badges, etc. over the steering
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
air bags will continue to provide supplemental cover, outboard sides of the seat
crash protection for occupants. backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
trims.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, RDo not install additional electrical/
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
electronic equipment on or near SRS
and air bag
components and wiring.
G Warning! RKeep area between air bags and occupants
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
been subjected to stress in an accident umbrellas, etc.).
must be replaced. Their anchoring points RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must also be checked. Only use seat belts from the coat hooks or handles over the
installed or supplied by an authorized door. These items may be thrown around in
Mercedes-Benz Center. the vehicle and cause head and other
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency injuries when the window curtain air bag is
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain deployed.
perchlorate material, which may require RAir bag system components will be hot after
special handling and regard for the an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
environment. Check with your local
RNever place your feet on the instrument
government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ keep both feet on the floor in front of the
Perchlorate/index.cfm. seat.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- causing unintended air bag deployment.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible Work on the SRS must therefore only be
pre-tensioners in addition to the performed by qualified technicians.
pyrotechnic ETDs. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
RFor your protection and the protection of
They could tear.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
ETD, our safety instructions must be
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
followed. These instructions are available The front air bags in this vehicle have been
from any authorized Mercedes-Benz designed to inflate in two stages. This allows
Center. the air bags to have different rates of inflation.
RGiven
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle
the considerable deployment speed,
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag
required inflation volume, and the material
control unit.
Safety and security
of the air bags, there is the possibility of

abrasions or other, potentially more serious The front passenger front air bag deployment
injuries resulting from air bag deployment. is additionally influenced by the passenger’s
weight category as identified by the Occupant
If you sell your vehicle, we strongly Classification System (OCS) (Y page 46).
recommend that you inform the subsequent The lighter the front passenger-side
owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS. occupant, the higher the vehicle deceleration
Also refer them to the applicable section in rate required for second stage inflation of the
the Operator’s Manual. front passenger front air bag.
The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
Front air bags do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
G Observe Safety notes, see page 41. protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rthe system, based on OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front passenger
seat is occupied
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
front air bag ; are designed to provide center console is not lit (Y page 46)
increased protection for the driver and front Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
passenger against the risk of injuries to the
threshold
head and thorax.
Driver and front passenger front air bags are
deployed
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
Rif the system determines that air bag
deployment can offer additional protection
to that provided by the seat belt
Rdepending on whether the respective seat
belt is in use
Rindependently of the side impact air bags
and/or the window curtain air bags
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45
Side impact air bags G Warning!

G Observe Safety notes, see page 41. Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
interfere with or prevent the deployment of
Safety and security

the side impact air bags. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
availability.
Window curtain air bags

G Observe Safety notes, see page 41.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side

impact air bags ; are designed to provide
increased protection for the thorax but not
the head, neck and arms.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
Window curtain air bags : are designed to
impacted side of the vehicle are in use provide increased protection for the head but
Rindependently of the front air bags not the chest or arms.
Rindependently of the ETDs Window curtain air bags : are deployed
The front passenger side impact air bag will Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
not deploy if the OCS senses that the front Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
passenger seat is empty and the front vehicle deceleration or acceleration
passenger seat belt is not fastened. With the Rindependently of the front air bags
front passenger seat empty and the seat belt
fastened, the front passenger side impact air Rregardless of whether the front passenger
bag will deploy independently of the empty seat is occupied
seat. Whether a seat belt is recognized as Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the
fastened depends on whether or not the latch impacted side of the vehicle is in use
plate is properly inserted into the buckle.
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system
The side impact air bags are not deployed in
determines that air bag deployment can
side impacts which do not exceed the
offer additional protection to that provided
system’s deployment threshold.
by the seat belt
The side impact air bags will not deploy in the
event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
the preset deployment threshold for the side deployment threshold.
impact air bags. Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
indicated by the arrows.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System In the event of a collision, the air bag control
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
deployment when the OCS has classified the
activates or deactivates the front passenger
front passenger seat occupant as weighting
front air bag automatically. The respective
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
status is based on the classified occupant
Safety and security
old child in a standard child restraint or if the

weight category determined by weight sensor
front passenger seat is classified as being
readings from the front passenger seat.
empty.
The system does not deactivate
When the OCS senses that the front
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag passenger seat occupant is classified as
Rthe window curtain air bag being up to or less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
To be classified correctly, the front passenger will illuminate when the engine is started and
must sit remain illuminated, indicating that the front
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rin When the OCS senses that the front
a position that is as upright as possible
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
with the back against the seat backrest
the 42 indicator lamp will
Rwith the feet on the floor illuminate when the engine is started and
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to remain illuminated, indicating that the front
another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning passenger front air bag is deactivated.
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to When the OCS senses that the front
properly approximate the occupant’s weight passenger seat occupant is classified as
category. being heavier than the weight of a typical
If your seat, including the trim cover and 12-month-old child seated in a standard child
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take restraint or as being a small individual (such
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz as a young teenager or a small adult), the
Center. 42 indicator lamp will illuminate
Only seat accessories approved by for approximately 6 seconds when the engine
Mercedes-Benz may be used. is started and then, depending on occupant
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
Both the driver and the front passenger
illuminated or go out. With the
should always use the 42
42 indicator lamp illuminated,
indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
the front passenger front air bag is
not the front passenger is properly
deactivated. With the 42
positioned.
indicator lamp out, the front passenger front
G Warning! air bag is activated.
If the 42 indicator lamp When the OCS senses that the front
illuminates when an adult or someone larger passenger seat occupant is classified as an
than a small individual is in the front adult or someone larger than a small
passenger seat, have the front passenger individual, the 42 indicator lamp
reposition himself or herself in the seat until will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
the 42 indicator lamp goes out. when the engine is started and then goes out,
indicating that the front passenger front air
bag is activated.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 47
Occupant safety 47
If the 42 indicator lamp is recommended for the size and weight of the
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag child.
is deactivated and will not be deployed. Children can be killed or seriously injured by
If the 42 indicator lamp is not an inflating air bag. Note the following
illuminated, the front passenger front air bag important information when circumstances
Safety and security

is activated and will be deployed require you to place a child in the front
Rin
passenger seat:
the event of certain frontal impacts
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
technology designed to deactivate the front
threshold
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Rindependently of the side impact air bags when the system senses the weight of a
If the front passenger front air bag is typical 12-month-old child or less along
deployed, the rate of inflation will be with the weight of a standard appropriate
influenced by child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger seat will be seriously
injured or even killed if the front passenger
Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
front air bag inflates in a collision which
identified by the OCS
could occur under some circumstances,
For more information on air bag display even with the air bag technology installed
messages in the multifunction display, see in your vehicle. The only means to
(Y page 455). completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
G Warning! in the front seat. We therefore strongly
According to accident statistics, children are recommend that you always place a child
safer when properly restrained in the rear in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
seating positions than in the front seating RIf you must install a rear-facing child
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that restraint on the front passenger seat
children be placed in the rear seats whenever because circumstances require you to do
possible. Regardless of seating position, so, make sure the 42
children 12 years old and under must be indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
seated and properly secured in an appropriate that the front passenger front air bag is
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster deactivated. Should the 42
seat recommended for the size and weight of indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the child. the restraint is installed, please check
The infant or child restraint must be properly installation. Periodically check the
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat 42 indicator lamp while
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and driving to make sure the 42
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 42 indicator lamp goes out or
Occupants, especially children, should always remains out, do not transport a child on the
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt front passenger seat until the system has
properly and use an appropriately sized infant been repaired.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 48
48 Occupant safety

front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
Safety and security
use the proper child restraint

recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical 12-month-
42 indicator lamp : will be
old child, the front passenger front air bag
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
may or may not be activated.
removed from the starter switch or with the
Deployment of the driver front air bag does starter switch in position 0.
not mean that the front passenger front air G Warning!
bag also should have deployed. If the red SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
The OCS may have determined instrument cluster and the 42
Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
weight up to or less than that of a typical is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
child restraint – both of which are instances this case. Have the system checked by
where the system suppresses deployment qualified technicians as soon as possible.
of the front passenger front air bag even Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
though the impact met the criteria and was Center.
of sufficient severity to deploy the driver Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
front air bag authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small In order to ensure proper operation of the air
individual (such as a young teenager or a bag system and OCS:
small adult) or a child who weighs more RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old position that is as upright as possible with
child in a standard child restraint – both of your back against the seat backrest.
which are instances where the system may
RWhile seated, an occupant should not
suppress deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the position him/herself in such a way as to
impact met the criteria and was of cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front from the seat bottom as this may result in
air bag the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 49
Occupant safety 49
OCS Self-test Seat belts

After turning the SmartKey in the starter Safety notes
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or The use of seat belts and infant and child
twice, the 42 indicator lamp restraint systems is required by law in all 50
Safety and security

illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.
sitting on the front passenger seat and the territories and all Canadian provinces.
system classifies the occupant as an adult, Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
the 42 indicator lamp will occupants should have their seat belts
illuminate and go out after approximately fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
6 seconds. i See “Children in the vehicle”
If the seat is not occupied and the system (Y page 56) for information on
classifies the front passenger seat as being Rinfants and children traveling with you in
empty, the 42 indicator lamp the vehicle
will illuminate and not go out. Rrestraint systems for infants and children
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp does not
G Warning!
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Always make sure all of your passengers are
Center before seating any child on the front properly restrained. You and your passengers
passenger seat. should always wear seat belts.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
For more information, see the “Practical position your seat belt greatly increases your
hints” section (Y page 498). risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
G Warning! accident.
Never place anything between seat cushion If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces be considerably more severe without your
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
back of the child seat must make full contact belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
with the passenger seat cushion and the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
backrest. it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
seat backrest. death is lessened if you are properly wearing
your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause
as intended if the occupants are properly
injuries to the child in case of an accident,
wearing their seat belts.
instead of increasing protection for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for G Warning!
installation of child seats. Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 50
50 Occupant safety
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, front passenger
wearer is in a position that is as upright as front air bag, side impact air bags, window
possible and the seat belt is properly curtain air bags for door windows),
positioned on the body. Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
G Warning!
Safety and security
bolsters.
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than The system is designed to enhance the
there are seat belts available. Make sure protection offered to properly belted
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly occupants in certain frontal (front air bags
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never and ETDs) and side (side impact air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
time. which exceed preset deployment
thresholds and in certain rollovers (window
G Warning! curtain air bags and ETDs).
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
been subjected to stress in an accident must
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
In a frontal crash, your body would move
points must be checked.
too far forward. That would increase the
Only use seat belts which have been approved chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
by Mercedes-Benz. belt would also apply too much force to the
Do not make any modifications to the seat ribs or abdomen, which could severely
belts. This can lead to unintended activation injure internal organs such as your liver or
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when spleen.
necessary. Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may section is located as close as possible to
severely weaken them. In a crash they may the middle of the shoulder. It should not
not be able to provide adequate protection. touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
Have all work carried out only by qualified portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
technicians. Contact an authorized this purpose, you can adjust the height of
Mercedes-Benz Center. the seat belt outlet.
RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
Proper use of seat belts your hips and not across the abdomen. If
the lap belt is positioned across your
G Warning! abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY a crash.
RSeat belts can only protect when used RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other breakable objects in or on your clothing,
way than as described in this section, as such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
that could result in serious injuries in case these might cause injuries.
of an accident.
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
REach occupant should wear their seat belt snugly. Take special care of this when
at all times, because seat belts help reduce wearing loose clothing.
the likelihood of and potential severity of
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
The integrated restraint system includes
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 51
Occupant safety 51
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
crash, you would not have the full width of restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the size and weight of the child. For additional
Safety and security

The twisted seat belt against your body information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on
restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen.
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
as upright as possible.
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
sure it is properly positioned.
RNever place your feet on the instrument
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
keep both feet on the floor in front of the
seat.
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
booster seats, always follow the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt. of seat belt outlet :.
X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of across the top of your shoulder and the lap
the seat belts. portion across your hips.
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
Fastening the seat belts clicks.

Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
G Warning! belts on both front seats adjust to the
According to accident statistics, children are upper body automatically as necessary
safer when properly restrained in the rear (Y page 52).
seating positions than in the front seating X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that correct height (Y page 52).
children be placed in the rear seats whenever X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
possible. Regardless of seating position, snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 52
52 Occupant safety
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the
belt have special seat belt retractors to seat belts on both front seats to the upper
secure child restraints properly. For more body of the respective vehicle occupant. The
information on special seat belt retractors, seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that
see “Infant and child restraint systems” purpose when
(Y page 57).
Safety and security
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle

To release the seat belt with seat belt release and then turn the SmartKey in the starter
button ?, see (Y page 52). switch to position 2
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is in
Seat belt outlet height adjustment position 2 and you then engage the latch
plate in the buckle
The seat belt adjustment function takes place
with a certain amount of retracting force
when the system senses slack between the
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You
can activate or deactivate the seat belt
adjustment function via the control system
(Y page 236).
Releasing the seat belts

X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height
X Press seat belt release button ?
adjuster upward.
The seat belt outlet height adjuster (Y page 51).
engages in different positions. Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
X Lowering: Press and hold release (Y page 51).
button :.
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster ! Make sure the seat belt retracts
downward. completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
X Release release button : and make sure
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
the seat belt outlet height adjuster engages
damage the seat belt and impair its
into place.
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
The seat belts for the rear outer seats are door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
adjusted automatically. is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Seat belt adjustment function Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
Depending on vehicle production date, your Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
vehicle may be equipped with this function. Center.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system

When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 53
Occupant safety 53
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD),
the engine is started, an additional warning seat belt force limiter
chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
The seat belts for the front seats and rear
after approximately 6 seconds or once the
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
belt force limiters.
Safety and security

If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
The ETDs are designed to activate in the
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
following cases:
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
front doors closed, Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding
Rthe
the system’s preset deployment threshold
seat belt telltale 7 remains
illuminated for as long as either the driver’s Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s
or front passenger’s seat belt is not preset deployment threshold on the far
fastened. side of the impact
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds Rin certain vehicle rollovers
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale Rif the restraint systems are operational and
7 starts flashing and a warning chime functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator
sounds with increasing intensity for a lamp” (Y page 40)
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
fastened.
properly inserted into buckle).
If you and/or your passenger release the
The ETDs for the rear outer seats will activate
seat belt during driving, the seat belt
with or without the respective seat belts
telltale 7 starts flashing and the
fastened.
warning chime sounds as described before.
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
limiters, when activated, are employed to
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
help reduce the peak force exerted by the
continues to be illuminated. seat belts on occupants during a crash.
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The ETDs do not pull occupants back
toward the seat backrest.
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s G Warning!
seat belt (with the front passenger seat Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is replaced.
standing still and a front door is opened. For your safety, when disposing of the
For more information, see “Practical hints” pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
(Y page 493). instructions. These are available at any
The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
not require replacement after activation.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 54
54 Occupant safety
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt The PRE-SAFE® system takes the following
measures when it is activated:
The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces the
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
retracting force of the seat belts when they
are in normal use. It is available for the front automatically.
seats and for the rear outer seats (only for RIf the front passenger seat is in an
Safety and security
vehicles with rear power seats). unfavorable position, the seat will be
adjusted to a position that seeks to better
protect the occupant.
Preventive occupant safety (PRE- RIf a rear outer power seat (if so equipped)
SAFE®) is in an unfavorable position, the seat will
G Warning! be adjusted to a position that seeks to
better protect the occupant.
The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
the effects of an accident on vehicle RThe system increases the air pressure in
occupants who are wearing their seat belt the air pockets (on the sides of the seat
properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped cushion and backrest) of the multicontour
with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of and/or drive-dynamic multicontour front
personal injuries occurring as a result of an seats.
accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore, RIf the vehicle is equipped with multicontour
always drive carefully and adjust your driving rear seats, the system increases the air
to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic pressure in the air pockets (on the sides of
conditions. the seat backrest) of the multicontour rear
outer seats.
The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive
measures to better protect the occupants RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
from the possibility of personal injuries in the situation, the door windows and the tilt/
following hazardous situations: sliding sunroof or panorama roof with tilt/
sliding panel also closes, except for a
Remergency braking situations, e.g. if the
minimal gap that remains open.
Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 64) is
activated If the closing procedure of any of these
or when elements is blocked, it will stop and open
slightly.
vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS:
the BAS PLUS (Y page 64) or the PRE- Once the hazardous situation no longer exists
and an accident has been avoided, the PRE-
SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) is strongly
engaging SAFE® system loosens the seat belt pre-
tension and decreases the air pressure in the
Rwhen the radar sensors recognize the air pockets of the multicontour and/or drive-
immediate risk of collision in certain dynamic multicontour seats. All of the PRE-
situations (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS) SAFE® system settings can be re-adjusted
Rcriticaldynamic driving situations, e.g. following the critical driving event.
when the vehicle has been caused to If the seat belts do not release:
understeer or oversteer because it has
X Adjust the seat backrest to the rear until
exceeded its physical limitations or in case
of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds the seat belt tension is reduced.
above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h) The locking mechanism releases.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 55
Occupant safety 55
! When adjusting the seat backrests, make must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
sure there are no items behind the seats. active front head restraints cannot offer any
Otherwise, you could damage the seats additional protection in the event of another
and/or the items. rear-end collision.
For information on the seat belt adjustment For information on resetting the activated
Safety and security

function as an integrated comfort feature of NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
the PRE-SAFE® system, see (Y page 52). “Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 501).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
NECK-PRO active front head front head restraints.
restraints
G Warning!
The NECK-PRO active front head restraints For your protection, drive only with properly
are intended to offer the driver and front positioned head restraints.
passenger increased protection from Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear- to the head as possible and the center of the
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head head restraint supports the back of the head
restraints on the front seats are designed to at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
move forward in the direction of travel. They injury to the head and neck in the event of an
thus provide the head with increased support accident or similar situation.
earlier on in the collision sequence. The
NECK-PRO active front head restraints will For information on head restraint adjustment,
move forward whether the seats are occupied see “Head restraint height” (Y page 287), or
or not. see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”
(Y page 289).
G Warning!
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK- Correct driver seat adjustment
PRO active front head restraints may not be
able to function properly or offer the intended G Warning!
degree of protection they were designed for In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
in the event of a rear-end collision. control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion:
G Warning! Rseat adjustment
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
Rhead restraint adjustment
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model. Rsteering wheel adjustment
Using other seat or head restraint covers may Rrear view mirror adjustment
interfere with or prevent the activation of the
Rfastening of seat belts
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
or the deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
When the NECK-PRO active front head

restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 56
56 Occupant safety
Seat and head restraint

XPosition seat = and head restraint
properly. See (Y page 287) for seat and
head restraint adjustment.
Safety and security
Observe the following points:

RAlways be in a properly seated position.
RThe position should be as far rearward from
the front air bag in the steering wheel as
possible, while still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
Steering wheel
is as nearly upright as possible.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 293. RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front
XPosition steering wheel : properly edge of the seat cushion lightly supports
(Y page 294). your legs.
Make sure: RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
RYou can reach the steering wheel with your close to the head as possible and the
arms slightly bent at the elbows. center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level.
RYou can move your legs freely.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
RAll displays (including malfunction and any moving parts while the seat is being
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster adjusted.
are clearly visible.
Seat belt Children in the vehicle

G Observe Safety notes, see page 49. Safety notes
XFasten and position your seat belt ;
If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
correctly (Y page 51). vehicle:
Make sure:
X Secure the child using an infant or child
RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly. restraint appropriate to the age and size of
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder the child.
section is located as close as possible to X Make sure the infant or child is properly
the middle of the shoulder. secured at all times while the vehicle is in
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low motion.
as possible on your hips.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 57
Occupant safety 57
G Warning! Infant and child restraint systems

When leaving the vehicle, always remove the G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
We recommend all infants and children be
take the SmartKey with you and lock the
properly restrained at all times while the
vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
vehicle is in motion.
Safety and security

the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
restraint system, or with access to an All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised belt have special seat belt retractors for
access to a vehicle could result in an accident secure fastening of child restraints.
and/or serious personal injury. The children To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
could restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Rinjure
mounting.
themselves on parts of the vehicle
To activate the special seat belt retractor:
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and
let it retract.
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
vehicle equipment that can be operated During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting
even if the SmartKey is removed from the sound can be heard to indicate that the
starter switch or removed from the vehicle, special seat belt retractor is activated.
such as seat adjustment, steering wheel The seat belt is now locked.
adjustment, or the memory function X Push down on child restraint to take up any
slack.
If children open a door, they could injure other
persons or get out of the vehicle and injure To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
themselves or be injured by following traffic. X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
Do not expose the child restraint system to seat belt retract completely.
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s The seat belt can then again be used in the
metal parts, for example, could become very usual manner.
hot, and the child could be burned by these To deactivate the special seat belt retractor
parts. for the front passenger seat, the front
passenger seat must be in the most backward
G Warning! position.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are G Warning!
firmly secured in place. Never release the seat belt buckle while the
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event retractor will be deactivated.
of
Rstrong braking maneuvers i Information on child seats with mounting
Rsudden changes of direction
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 59).
Ran accident For information on LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
child seat anchors (Y page 60).
The use of infant or child restraints is required
by law in all 50 states, the District of
Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canadian provinces.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 58
58 Occupant safety
Infants and small children should be seated Children can be killed or seriously injured by
in an appropriate infant or child restraint an inflating air bag. Note the following
system. They must be properly secured in important information when circumstances
accordance with the manufacturer’s require you to place a child in the front
instructions for the child restraint. All infant passenger seat:
or child restraint systems must comply with
Safety and security
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
technology designed to deactivate the front
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
passenger front air bag in your vehicle
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
when the system senses the weight of a
A statement by the child restraint typical 12-month-old child or less along
manufacturer of compliance with these with the weight of a standard appropriate
standards can be found on the instruction child restraint on the front passenger seat.
label on the restraint and in the instruction
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
manual provided with the restraint.
front passenger seat will be seriously
When using any infant restraint, toddler
restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
front air bag inflates in a collision which
carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
could occur under some circumstances,
instructions for installation and use.
even with the air bag technology installed
Please read and observe warning labels in your vehicle. The only means to
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to completely eliminate this risk is to never
infant or child restraints. place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
G Warning! in the front seat. We therefore strongly
According to accident statistics, children are recommend that you always place a child
safer when properly restrained in the rear in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
seating positions than in the front seating RIf you must install a rear-facing child
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that restraint on the front passenger seat
children be placed in the rear seats whenever because circumstances require you to do
possible. Regardless of seating position, so, make sure the 42
children 12 years old and under must be indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
seated and properly secured in an appropriate that the front passenger front air bag is
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster deactivated. Should the 42
seat recommended for the size and weight of indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
the child. the restraint is installed, please check
The infant or child restraint must be properly installation. Periodically check the
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat 42 indicator lamp while
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and driving to make sure the 42
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. 42 indicator lamp goes out or
Occupants, especially children, should always remains out, do not transport a child on the
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt front passenger seat until the system has
properly and use an appropriately sized infant been repaired.
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
recommended for the size and weight of the front passenger seat will be seriously
child.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 59
Occupant safety 59
injured or even killed if the front passenger Top tether straps enable an additional
front air bag inflates. connection to be made between child
RIf
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
you have to place a child in a forward-
(ISOFIX) anchors and rear seats. This can
facing child restraint on the front passenger
further reduce the risk of injury.
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
Safety and security

use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical 12-month-
old child, the front passenger front air bag
may or may not be activated.
G Warning!
Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. During an X Vehicles with rear power seats: Bring the
accident, they could be crushed between the rear power seat backrest to a fully upright
occupant and seat belt. position (Y page 287).
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is X Remove anchorage ring cover : from the
significantly increased if the child restraints anchorage ring of the seat on which a child
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ seat is to be installed.
or the child is not properly secured in the child X Store anchorage ring cover : in a
restraint. convenient place (e.g. glove box).
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
X Guide top tether strap ? between the
accident.
head restraint and top of the seat backrest.
The head restraint must be positioned such
Installation of infant and child restraint
that top tether strap ? can pass freely
systems
between the head restraint and top of the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. seat backrest.
This vehicle is equipped with tether X Make sure top tether strap ? is not
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of twisted.
the rear seating positions.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 60
60 Occupant safety
X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
top tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;. instructions.
X For safety, make sure hook = is attached The child seat must be firmly attached to both
to anchorage ring ; beyond the safety anchors.
catch, as illustrated. An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
Safety and security
Once hook = is attached, the child restraint loose during an accident which could result in
serious injury or death to the child.
itself can be secured.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
X Install the child restraint system and child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
tighten top tether strap ? according to the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions. Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) anchors for the installation of a
After removing the child restraint system and
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat with matching
top tether strap ?:
mounting fittings.
X Reinstall anchorage ring cover :. Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
G Warning! vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat
Vehicles with rear power seats: according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Never change the rear seat position after The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors are
installing the child restraint. This could covered with upholstery blends.
Rdamage the child restraint
Rintroduce undesirable slack or tension into
the seat belt
Rloosen the child restraint
Rmisposition the child restraint
All of the above will lessen the
effectiveness of the child restraint and thus
increase the chance or severity of injury in
an accident.
Information sign : indicates the position of

anchor ;.
(ISOFIX)
X Bring the rear power seat backrest to a fully
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. upright position (Y page 287).
G Warning! X Fold upholstery blend = upward to access
Children too big for a toddler restraint must anchors ;.

ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position X Turn installation device ? to a vertical
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not position so that upholstery blend = does
face or neck. not fold down.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve X Install a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
proper seat belt positioning for children over according to the manufacturer’s
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where instructions.
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a A rigid connection between the child seat
booster. and the body of the vehicle is established.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 61
Occupant safety 61
X Vehicles with rear center seat: Make sure

that the seat belt for the rear center seat
can operate freely with a child seat
installed.
G Warning!
Safety and security

Vehicles with rear power seats:
Never change the rear seat position after
installing the child restraint. This could
Rdamage the child restraint
Rintroduce undesirable slack or tension into
X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of
the seat belt
arrow :.
Rloosen the child restraint X Check to make sure the child safety locks
Rmisposition the child restraint are working properly.
All of the above will lessen the X Releasing: Press the lever down in
effectiveness of the child restraint and thus direction of arrow ;.
increase the chance or severity of injury in
an accident. Override switch
Child safety You can disable select functions in the rear
passenger compartment for added safety.
Child safety locks This can be useful, for instance, when you
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. have children riding in the rear passenger
compartment.
G Warning!
You can disable the following functions:
Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury Rrear door window operation
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear Radjustment of front passenger seat from
doors with the child safety locks whenever the rear
children are riding in the back seats of the
Rrear center console lighter
vehicle.
Rrear roller sunblind for panorama roof
The child safety locks on the rear doors
Rrear window sunshade and rear door
enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear window sunshades
door from the inside. You can open the rear
G Warning!
door from the outside when the vehicle is
Activate the override switch when children
unlocked.
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
window opening.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 62
62 Panic alarm
X Activating: Press and hold !

button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate.
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
Safety and security
or
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
X Activating: Press override switch :. inside the vehicle.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
i USA only:
The functions in the rear are disabled.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
You can still operate the rear door windows FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
using the switches located on the door following two conditions:
control panel of the driver’s door.
1. This device may not cause harmful
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
interference, and
again.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. 2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
The functions in the rear are enabled again. interference that may cause undesired
For more information on power windows, see operation.
the “Controls in detail” section
(Y page 307). Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
Panic alarm i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
2. this device must accept any
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO device could void the user’s authority to
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 63
Driving safety systems 63
Driving safety systems or dangerous manner which could jeopardize

the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Introduction
Always adjust your driving style to the
This section contains information about the prevailing road and weather conditions and
following driving safety systems: keep a safe distance to other road users and
Safety and security

RABS (Antilock Brake System) objects on the street.
RAdaptive
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
Brake
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
RAdaptive Brake Lights indicator and warning lamps that may come
RBAS (Brake Assist System) on as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear.
RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)
REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning) G Warning!
RESC (Electronic Stability Control) HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Preventive Occupant Instructions included in your vehicle literature
Safety System Brake) portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
i In winter operation, the maximum necessary safety information and warning for
effectiveness of most of the driving the operation of your vehicle.
systems described in this section is only
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains
as required. ABS
Safety notes
G Warning!
G Warning! Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
The following factors increase the risk of brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
accidents: brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
RExcessive speed, especially in turns and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
RWet and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing another vehicle too closely The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
The driving safety systems described in this lock during braking. This allows you to
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
The ABS is functional above a speed of
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
of road surface conditions.
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded. On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
respond even to light brake pressure.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The ABS indicator lamp ! in the
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the instrument cluster comes on when you switch
driving safety systems described in this on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
section must never be exploited in a reckless is running.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 64
64 Driving safety systems
Braking When you release the brake pedal, the brakes

function again as normal. The BAS is then
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
deactivated.
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the G Warning!
ABS is in the regulating mode. If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
Safety and security
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake functions, but without the additional brake
pedal while you feel the pulsation. boost available that the BAS would normally
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
yields the advantages provided by the ABS, Therefore, the braking distance may increase.
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the vehicle.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an BAS PLUS
indication of hazardous road conditions and The Brake Assist System PLUS (BAS PLUS)
functions as a reminder to take extra care operates in emergency braking situations and
while driving. uses radar sensors to assess the traffic
situation. BAS PLUS assists you in braking at
Emergency brake maneuver speeds above approximately 20 mph
X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake (30 km/h).
pedal. When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
registered in Canada, you must switch off the
G Warning! radar sensor system (Y page 236). Canadian
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety law does not permit the use of the radar
systems such as the BAS or the ESC are also sensor system for vehicles from outside of
switched off. Observe indicator and warning Canada.
lamps that may come on as well as messages When you switch off the radar system, the
in the multifunction display that may appear. following functions are deactivated:
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock RBAS PLUS
during hard braking, reducing steering
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
capability and extending the braking distance.
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 330)
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 359)
BAS
G Warning!
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63. BAS PLUS is a convenience system designed
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in to assist the driver during vehicle operation.
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes The responsibility for the vehicle speed and
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake the distance to the vehicle ahead, including
boost automatically, thereby potentially most importantly brake operation to assure
reducing the braking distance. safe stopping distance, always remains with
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until the driver.
the emergency braking situation is over. Always pay attention to traffic conditions
The ABS will prevent the wheels from even while BAS PLUS is switched on.
locking. Otherwise, you may not be able to recognize
dangerous situations until it is too late and
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 65
could cause an accident. Personal or fatal speeds of up to approximately 40 mph

injury to you or others may be the result. (70 km/h).
BAS PLUS can only assist you when the radar
i This device has been approved by the FCC sensors are switched on and functional. You
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar can check whether the sensors are active by
Safety and security

sensor is intended for use in an automotive switching on DISTRONIC PLUS
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or (Y page 330) or using the Radar sensors
altering of the device will void any function (Y page 236) in the instrument
warranties, and is not permitted by the cluster control system.
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
G Warning!
any non-approved way.
BAS PLUS will only respond with brake
Any unauthorized modification to this assistance if it has clearly detected an object.
device could void the user’s authority to Detection can be impeded by
Rdirty or covered sensors
BAS PLUS detects obstacles that are in your
Rsnowfall or heavy rain
driving path for a sufficient period of time to
permit the system to recognize these Rdisturbance from other radar sources
obstacles. If you approach the detected Rstrong radar reflection such as in parking
obstacle quickly, BAS PLUS calculates the
garages
level of brake power boost appropriate for the
circumstance to supply when the driver BAS PLUS uses radar signals that are not
applies the brakes. reflected well by narrow objects and
When you step quickly on the brake pedal in absorptive materials. For this reason BAS
an emergency braking situation, BAS PLUS PLUS will not react to persons, animals, and
automatically regulates the brake power approaching traffic or cross-traffic.
boost to a level that is suitable for the traffic BAS PLUS may not detect narrow vehicles
situation. driving in front of you, such as motorcycles
If BAS PLUS requires a particularly high brake and vehicles driving offset from your vehicle
power boost, PRE-SAFE® is activated at the center.
same time. After a hard collision or damage to the front
X Keep constant pressure on the brake pedal of the vehicle from an accident, have the
until the emergency braking situation is adjustment and operation of the radar
over. sensors checked by an authorized Mercedes-
During this process, the ABS prevents the Benz Center.
wheels from locking up. If BAS PLUS is not available due to a radar
The brakes will resume normal operation sensor malfunction, the braking system will
after continue to function normally with full brake
Rthe brake pedal is released boost and full standard BAS function.
Rno obstacles are detected in your path
Rthe system no longer senses a risk of a Adaptive Brake
collision Adaptive Brake provides a high level of
BAS PLUS is then deactivated. braking safety as well as increased braking
BAS PLUS can react to stationary obstacles comfort. Adaptive Brake takes driver and
such as standing or parked vehicles at road
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 66
vehicle characteristics into consideration, You could lose control of the vehicle and
thus achieving an optimal braking effect. cause an accident.
In addiditon, Adaptive Brake provides the Adapt your driving style to the changed
HOLD function (Y page 342) and the hill-start driving characteristics.
assist system (Y page 341).
Safety and security
For more information on the brake system,

see (Y page 435). ESC
Adaptive Brake Lights The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is
operational as soon as the engine is running.
i This function is only available for the
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
S 600 and the S 65 AMG (USA only). adhesive friction between the tires and the
The brake lamps flash in quick intervals road surface) and handling.
Rwhile you are braking hard at a speed of The ESC recognizes that the vehicle deviates
more than 30 mph (50 km/h) from the direction of travel as intended by the
Rwhen
driver. By applying brakes to individual
you are braking with the aid of BAS
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
Rwhen you are braking with the aid of BAS ESC works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESC is
PLUS. especially useful while driving off and on wet
This helps to alert drivers behind you. or slippery road surfaces. The ESC also
If you bring the car to a complete stop by hard stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
braking at a speed of more than 40 mph steering maneuvers.
(70 km/h), the hazard warning flasher comes The ESC warning lamp ÷ in the instrument
on automatically as soon as the vehicle is at cluster comes on when you switch on the
a standstill. While the vehicle is stationary, ignition. It goes out when the engine is
the brake lamps are continuously lit up. Once running.
you drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) G Warning!
afterward, the hazard warning flasher goes
Never switch off the ESC when you see the
out.
ESC warning lamp ÷ flashing in the
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
EBP follows:
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63. possible.
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
pedal.
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
of the braking effort in straight-line braking RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
without a loss of vehicle stability. prevailing road conditions.
G Warning! Failure to observe these guidelines could

cause the vehicle to skid. The ESC cannot
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
prevent accidents resulting from excessive
still function with full brake boost. However,
speed.
the rear wheels could lock up during
emergency braking situations, for example.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 67
Because the ESC operates automatically, transfer more power to the wheel(s) with
the engine and ignition must be shut off traction.
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or When you switch off the ESC, the
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in ETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
Safety and security

Switching off the ESC
dynamometer.
Active braking action through the ESC may Switching off the ESC (except S 63 AMG)
otherwise seriously damage the brake G Warning!
system which is not covered by the The ESC should not be switched off during
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. normal driving other than in the
circumstances described below. Disabling
! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
the system will reduce vehicle stability in
Because the ESC operates automatically,
driving maneuvers.
the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in is mounted.
position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
brake is being tested on a brake test the ESC. This allows the drive wheels to spin
dynamometer or when the vehicle is being and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
towed with one axle raised. example
Active braking action through the ESC may Rwhen driving with snow chains
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the Rin deep snow
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rin sand or gravel
! The ESC will only function properly if you G Warning!
use wheels of the recommended tire size Switch on the ESC immediately if the
as specified in the “Technical data” section aforementioned circumstances do not apply
of this Operator’s Manual. anymore. Otherwise the ESC will not stabilize
the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
i The DISTRONIC PLUS and cruise control wheel is spinning.
switch off automatically when the ESC
engages. When you switch off the ESC,
Rthe ESC does not stabilize the vehicle
Electronic Traction System
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
(ETS/4-ETS)
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut
G Observe Safety notes, see page 63. into surfaces for better grip
The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and Rthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction a spinning wheel
System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are Rthe ESC continues to operate when you are
components of the ESC. The ETS/4-ETS
braking
improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
available traction, especially under slippery
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 68
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS and requires a highly skilled and experienced
cannot be activated driver able to handle these critical driving
Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS situations.
switch off if activated You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
i When the ESC is switched off and one or
Safety and security
Please be aware of these limits when you

more drive wheels are spinning, the ESC
switch off the ESC.
warning lamp ÷ in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESC will then Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel
not stabilize the vehicle. is mounted.
X With the engine running, switch off the ESC When you switch off the ESC,
via the control system (Y page 231). Rthe ESC does not stabilize the vehicle
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
G Warning!
allows the drive wheels to spin
When the ESC OFF warning lamp å is on,
Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
the ESC is switched off.
When the ESC warning lamp ÷ and the spinning wheel
ESC OFF warning lamp å are on Rthe ESC operates while you are braking
continuously, the ESC is not operational due Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
to a malfunction. cannot be activated
When the ESC is switched off or not Rthe cruise control or the DISTRONIC PLUS
operational, vehicle stability in standard
switch off if activated
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing i When the ESC is switched off and one or
road conditions and to the non-operating more drive wheels are spinning, the ESC
status of the ESC. warning lamp ÷ in the instrument
cluster flashes. However, the ESC will then
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an not stabilize the vehicle.
extended period with the ESC switched off. X With the engine running, switch off the ESC
This may cause serious damage to the
via the control system (Y page 231).
drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. G Warning!
Switching off the ESC (S 63 AMG only) When the ESC OFF warning lamp å is on,
the ESC is switched off.
G Warning!
When the ESC warning lamp ÷ and the
The ESC should not be switched off during
ESC OFF warning lamp å are on
normal driving.
continuously, the ESC is not operational due
Disabling of the system will result in the to a malfunction.
following:
When the ESC is switched off or not
Rno restriction to engine torque operational, vehicle stability in standard
Rloss of system-supported traction control driving maneuvers is reduced.
“ESC OFF” is designed for driving on closed Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer road conditions and to the non-operating
and understeer characteristics are desired status of the ESC.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 69
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an vehicle driving in front of you. The warning
extended period with the ESC switched off. sound is intended as a final caution that you
This may cause serious damage to the have not interceded with your own braking
drivetrain which is not covered by the inputs to avoid a potentially dangerous
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. situation. Do not wait for the operation of the
Safety and security

warning signal to intercede with your own
Switching on the ESC braking, as that will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will not
X Switch on the ESC via the control system
always result in an impact being avoided.
(Y page 231).
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
PRE-SAFE® Brake
The PRE-SAFE® Brake is a convenience
The PRE-SAFE® Brake is available in vehicles system designed to assist the driver during
equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. The PRE- vehicle operation. The responsibility for the
SAFE® Brake can assist you in minimizing the vehicle speed and the distance to the vehicle
risk of a rear-end collision with a vehicle in ahead, including most importantly brake
front of you. The PRE-SAFE® Brake may also operation to assure safe stopping distance,
reduce the severity of an accident. At speeds always remains with the driver.
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) it will Always pay attention to traffic conditions
issue a warning when your vehicle is even while the PRE-SAFE® Brake is switched
approaching the preceding vehicle very on. Otherwise, you may not be able to
quickly. An intermittent acoustic warning recognize dangerous situations until it is too
sounds and the distance warning lamp · late and could cause an accident resulting in
in the instrument cluster comes on. personal or fatal injury to you or others.
When the driver and front passenger have
fastened their seat belts, the PRE-SAFE® i USA only:
Brake can also This device has been approved by the FCC
Rbrake as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
the vehicle within a speed range of
sensor is intended for use in an automotive
up to 112 mph (180 km/h) automatically
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
Ractivate preventative occupant safety altering of the device will void any
measures (PRE-SAFE®) (Y page 54) warranties, and is not permitted by the
G Warning! any non-approved way.
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the PRE-SAFE® Brake operate the equipment.
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
indicate that the PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be
capable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to
maintain the preset following distance, which
creates a danger of a collision.
Immediately brake your vehicle to increase
the distance between your vehicle and the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 70
i Canada only: G Warning!

This device complies with RSS-210 of The PRE-SAFE® Brake will only respond with
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to brake assistance if it has clearly detected an
the following two conditions: object. Detection can be impeded by
1. This device may not cause interference, Rdirty or covered sensors
Safety and security
and
Rsnowfall or heavy rain
Rdisturbance from other radar sources
interference that may cause undesired Rstrong radar reflection such as in parking
operation of the device. garages
Removal, tampering, or altering of the The PRE-SAFE® Brake uses radar signals that
device will void any warranties, and is not are not reflected well by narrow objects and
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use absorptive materials. For this reason the PRE-
in any non-approved way. SAFE® Brake will not react to persons,
Any unauthorized modification to this animals, and approaching traffic or cross-
device could void the user’s authority to traffic.
operate the equipment. The PRE-SAFE® Brake may not detect narrow
Using the radar sensors, the PRE-SAFE® vehicles driving in front of you, such as
Brake detects obstacles that are in your motorcycles and vehicles driving offset from
driving path for a sufficient period of time for your vehicle center.
the system to recognize it. If you approach a
vehicle and the PRE-SAFE® Brake has G Warning!
established that the distance to the vehicle Depending on the vehicle speed, the
ahead at your current speed is so close that PRE-SAFE® Brake brakes your vehicle with a
the PRE-SAFE® Brake will not be capable of maximum of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2) before a
slowing the vehicle sufficiently, the system possible hard stop. This corresponds to about
will initially warn you visually and acoustically. 40% of the maximum deceleration ability of
If you do not apply the brakes yourself or your vehicle. The driver must apply the brakes
maneuver around a sensed obstacle, the additionally in order to prevent a collision. The
vehicle will brake lightly automatically. The self-acting hard stop will be initiated when the
PRE-SAFE® system (Y page 54) is activated imminent danger of a collision exists, e.g.
when the distance to the vehicle ahead at when an evasive driving maneuver cannot
your current speed is so close that the PRE- avoid an accident.
SAFE® Brake will not be capable of slowing The PRE-SAFE® Brake applies the brake pedal
the vehicle sufficiently. automatically which results in the brake pedal
When the danger of a collision still persists moving. Therefore keep driver’s foot area
and you do not brake or accelerate clear at all times, including the area under the
brake pedal. Objects stored in this area may
significantly, the PRE-SAFE® Brake may
impair pedal movement which could interfere
initiate full application of the brakes
with the braking ability of the PRE-SAFE®
automatically.
Brake.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 71
Anti-theft systems 71
To maintain the proper distance to the vehicle i The PRE-SAFE® Brake will remain passive
in front of you and thus prevent a rear-end while DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on
collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. (Y page 330).
X Brake the vehicle immediately to avoid a After a hard collision or damage to the front
collision. of the vehicle from an accident, have the
Safety and security

Under no circumstances should the driver settings and operation of the radar sensors
await the intermittent warning sound checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
before braking. Observe the following Center.
warning note. When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
The intermittent warning sound ceases and registered in Canada, you must switch off the
the distance warning lamp · goes out radar sensor system (Y page 236). Canadian
when the necessary distance to the vehicle law does not permit the use of the radar
ahead is again established. sensor system for vehicles from outside of
The PRE-SAFE® Brake can react to stationary Canada.
obstacles such as standing or parked vehicles When you switch off the radar system, the
at road speeds of up to approximately 40 mph following functions are deactivated:
(70 km/h). RPRE-SAFE® Brake
G Warning! RBAS PLUS (Y page 64)
If you do not receive visual or acoustic RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 330)
warning signals, the PRE-SAFE® Brake may
RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 359)
Rnot have recognized the collision risk
X Activating and deactivating: Activate or
Rhave been deactivated
deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake using the
Rbe malfunctioning instrument cluster control system
Apply the brakes yourself to avoid a collision. (Y page 232).
After the function has been activated, the
The PRE-SAFE® Brake does not always clearly PRE-SAFE® Brake indicator Ä appears
interpret complex traffic situations. If a visual in the instrument cluster. When the HOLD
and/or acoustic warning is issued in an function is switched on, the PRE-SAFE®
uncritical driving situation, or if the vehicle Brake indicator Ä will not appear.
brakes lightly, you can interrupt the PRE-
SAFE® Brake maneuver by pressing down all
the way on the accelerator pedal, using Anti-theft systems
kickdown, or releasing the brake pedal.
The PRE-SAFE® Brake maneuver is Immobilizer
terminated immediately when The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
Ryou avoid the obstacle by evasive steering persons from starting your vehicle.
Ryou drive less than 9 mph (15 km/h) When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
Ran obstacle can no longer be identified engine can be started by anyone with a valid
ahead of you SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Rthe system no longer senses the risk of a
collision
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 72
72 Anti-theft systems
Activating i If the alarm stays on for more than

X
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
call to the Customer Assistance Center
from the starter switch.
automatically. The Tele Aid system will
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
initiate the call provided that
open the driver’s door.
Safety and security
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

service
Deactivating
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
X Switch on the ignition. properly
i Starting the engine will also deactivate Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
the immobilizer. supply and GPS coverage are available
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
Anti-theft alarm system

Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
Ra door SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
Rthe trunk The turn signal lamps flash three times and
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
Rthe hood indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
The alarm will stay on even if the activating lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
element, a door, for example, is closed system is armed.
immediately.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
The alarm system will also be triggered when
times and the acoustic warning does not
Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical sound three times, a door or the trunk may
key not be properly closed.
Ra door is opened from the inside Close the respective element.
To cancel the alarm after it has been X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm” SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
(Y page 73). The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 73
Anti-theft systems 73
i Unless you open a door or the trunk within

approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
Safety and security

rearmed.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of
the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 74
74
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 75
75
Vehicle equipment .............................. 76 COMAND video DVD ......................... 191

COMAND introduction ........................ 76 Music Register .................................. 196
COMAND system settings ................. 91 Media Interface ................................. 200
COMAND navigation (introduction) ... 95 COMAND vehicle menu .................... 206
COMAND navigation system COMAND automatic climate control 211
(entering a destination) .................... 106 COMAND seats .................................. 216
COMAND navigation system (Point Instrument cluster control system . 220
Control systems
of interest entry) ............................... 124
Voice Control System introduction . 237
COMAND navigation system (route
guidance) ........................................... 129 Voice Control System navigation .... 240
COMAND navigation system (dur- Voice Control System telephone ..... 245
ing route guidance) ........................... 135 Voice Control System address book 249
COMAND navigation system (real- Voice Control System radio ............. 252
time traffic) ....................................... 138 Voice Control System CD/DVD
COMAND navigation system (des- changer/MP3 .................................... 255
tination memory) .............................. 143 Voice Control System external
COMAND navigation system (last devices ............................................... 257
destinations) ..................................... 147 Voice Control System command list 257
COMAND telephone .......................... 148 Voice Control System trouble-
COMAND FM/AM radio .................... 165 shooting ............................................. 267
COMAND satellite radio ................... 170 Voice Control System individuali-
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/ zation ................................................. 271
MP3 .................................................... 176
Audio AUX and video AUX ................ 186
Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 189
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 76
76 COMAND introduction
Vehicle equipment COMAND supplies you with information to

help you select your route more easily and
i This Operator’s Manual describes all guide you conveniently and safely to your
features, standard or optional, potentially destination. For safety reasons, we
available for your vehicle at the time of encourage the driver to stop the vehicle in a
purchase. Please be aware that your safe place before answering or placing a call,
vehicle might not be equipped with all or consulting the COMAND screen to read
features described in this manual. navigational maps, instructions, or
Control systems
downloaded information.
COMAND introduction G Warning!

While the navigation system provides
COMAND operating safety directional assistance, the driver must remain
COMAND (Cockpit Management and Data focused on safe driving behavior, especially
System) is an information and operating attention to traffic and street signs, and
center for vehicle sound and communications should utilize the system’s audio cues while
systems. It includes the radio and navigation driving.
system, as well as other optional equipment The navigation system does not supply any
(satellite radio, telephone, etc.). information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their
G Warning! observance always remains in the driver’s
Any alteration of electronic components or personal responsibility. Maps do not cover all
software can cause malfunctions. areas nor all routes within an area.
Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, CD/DVD
changer, navigation module, telephone and G Warning!
Voice Control Systems are interconnected. HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
Therefore, if one of the components is not the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
operational, or has not been removed/ Instructions included in your vehicle literature
replaced properly, the function of other portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
components could be impaired. necessary safety information and warning for
Such conditions might seriously impair the the operation of your vehicle.
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend to have any service work on
electronic components carried out by an Availability of functions while the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle is in motion
For safety reasons, certain COMAND
G Warning!
functions are not available while the vehicle
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
is in motion or they are only available to a
to an accident, the driver should enter system
limited extent. You will notice this, for
settings while the vehicle is at a standstill, and
example, by the fact that certain menu items
operate the system only when permitted by
cannot be selected or that the COMAND
road, weather and traffic conditions.
display shows a corresponding message.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 77
COMAND introduction 77
Switching COMAND on or off RAudio and video sockets on each screen

RAudio and video sockets on CD/DVD drive
X Press shortcut button u in the center
console (Y page 77). The Rear Seat Entertainment System
COMAND calls up the last selected menu. contains the following functions:
RDisc playback (CD audio, MP3, DVD audio
i When you switch off COMAND, you also
switch off the currently playing audio and DVD video)
source. During a telephone call, you cannot RAUX playback
Control systems
switch off COMAND. RSystem settings
SPLITVIEW contains the following:
COMAND components Rone remote control for the front passenger
COMAND can be used to operate: Rone wireless headphone for the front
RAudio functions passenger
RNavigation Rone 3.5 mm socket in the front passenger
system
footwell for SPLITVIEW wired headphones
RTelephone
RExternal audio and video sources i For information about cleaning and care
of displays, see (Y page 446).
RVideo DVD
RVarious vehicle settings COMAND shortcut buttons
COMAND consists of the following: Use the COMAND shortcut buttons to select
RCOMAND shortcut buttons main functions directly.
RCOMAND display (with SPLITVIEW, if so
equipped)
RTelephone keypad
RCOMAND controller
RBuilt-in USB socket to connect USB storage
devices
ROptional media interface in the glove box
to connect external devices via iPod®
cable, jack plug, or USB cable
The Rear Seat Entertainment System consists Function
of the following:
Rtwo
: Shortcut button for rear window
remote controls
sunshade (Y page 386)
Rtwo wireless headphones
; R Shortcut button for:
Rtwo screens in rear passenger
compartment RCD/DVD/SD card (Y page 181)
Rone RRadio (Y page 166)
CD/DVD drive in rear passenger
compartment
= % Back button (Y page 87)
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 78
Function Adjusting COMAND display illumination
? T Seat menu button

(Y page 216)
A S Shortcut button for:
RTelephone (Y page 148)
RNavigation (Y page 95)
Control systems
B u COMAND on/off button

(Y page 77)
C H Volume control (Y page 88)
X Increasing the illumination: Turn
D h Favorite button (Y page 94) knob : clockwise.
X Dimming the illumination: Turn knob :
COMAND display counterclockwise.
In the COMAND display, you will find the Swiveling COMAND display
function currently selected and the
corresponding menus. The COMAND display i This function is not available in vehicles
is divided into several areas. with SPLITVIEW.
: Status line
With button : or ; you can swivel the
; Main functions COMAND display to the left or right.
= Main area
? Submenus Instrument cluster multifunction
A Climate control settings display
The currently selected main function is This section describes features and controls
highlighted. via the COMAND controller, display and
Once you have selected a main function, main shortcut buttons only.
area = is active. Related COMAND features are described in
the “Instrument cluster control system”
i The layout of the menus may vary section (Y page 220). It contains function
depending on your vehicle’s equipment. descriptions and operation of the instrument
This manual shows the menus for a fully cluster multifunction display and the
equipped vehicle. multifunction steering wheel buttons.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 79
Telephone keypad
Control systems
Operating COMAND controller
You can operate the COMAND controller as
X Flip up cover ;. follows:
With telephone keypad : you can Rpress briefly or press and hold
Renter and clear numbers and special Rrotate to the left or right
characters
Rslide to the left, right, up, down or
Rreject, answer, connect and end calls diagonally
(Y page 148)
In this way, you can move through the menus,
Rselect preset radio stations and enter the select menu items or exit menus.
frequency manually (Y page 168)
Rselect
Symbol How to use the COMAND
preset satellite radio stations and
controller
enter the channel number (Y page 174)
Rselect a storage medium from the DVD W X Press briefly
changer (Y page 183) Rto confirm the selection of a
Rselect a track directly in CD mode, DVD menu item or list entry
audio mode or MP3 mode (Y page 183), or Rto exit full-screen image
from a device connected to the media when using navigation or
interface (Y page 204) video functions
Rselect a scene/chapter from a video DVD XPress and hold until the
(Y page 194) selected action has been
Rselect a street in the navigation entry carried out
(Y page 115) Rto save a station
Rto accept a destination for

COMAND controller navigation
Use the COMAND controller to select menu
cVd X Rotate
functions shown on the COMAND display.
Rto move through vertical or
horizontal menus
Rto move through text
Rto select program settings
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 80
Symbol How to use the COMAND i Do not use USB extensions or adapters.
controller They could impair functionality.
The initialization of large USB storage
ZVÆ X Slide devices that contain a large number of files
Rto move through vertical may take several minutes.
menus
Supported USB storage devices
Rto exit horizontal menus
The following USB storage devices are
Control systems
X Slide and hold supported:

Rto move through a navigation RUSB flash drives
map RUSB hard drives (1", 1.8", and 2.5") with a

starting/steady current not to exceed
XVY X Slide 800 mA (separate power supply may be
Rto move through horizontal necessary)
menus
i The USB socket supports USB storage
Rto exit vertical menus
devices of “USB Device Subclass 6”.
X Slide and hold Information on “USB Device Subclass 6” is
Rfor fast forward or reverse for
available from the manufacturer of the
respective device.
audio CD or audio DVD
playback
Media interface
Rto move through a navigation
map
aVb X Slide and hold
Rto move through a navigation
map
USB socket
The media interface is located in the glove

box. For information about using the media
interface, see (Y page 200).
Control panel on rear armrest

Occupants in the rear can adjust the volume
of the active audio source. They can also
select the next or previous track, scene or
Connect USB storage device to the built-in
station.
USB socket : in the glove box to transfer
data (Y page 95) or to playback audio tracks i This function is only available in vehicles
(Y page 176). with rear multicontour seats.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 81
Control systems
Rear armrest
: Adjusting volume
; Selecting next/previous track, scene or
station
Remote control for Rear Seat

Entertainment System and/or
SPLITVIEW
SPLITVIEW includes one remote control for : Switching on/off
the front passenger. ; Switching button backlight on/off
The Rear Seat Entertainment System = Selecting remote control mode
includes two remote controls for the rear
? Selecting menu or menu item4
passenger compartment.
A Confirming selection or setting5
If your vehicle is equipped with Rear Seat
Entertainment System and SPLITVIEW, the B Mute on/off (with wired headphones)
remote controls are interchangeable. C Volume (with wired headphones)
For information on using SPLITVIEW, see D Skip, fast forward, fast rewind
(Y page 90). E Track/scene direct selection
For information on using the Rear Seat F Back button, leaving menus
Entertainment System, see (Y page 189).
i Replace the batteries of the remote
control when they are low (Y page 502).
Selecting remote control mode
X Turn thumb wheel = to the desired setting.
COMAND COMAND display (driver)

SPLITVIEW COMAND display (front
passenger)6
4 Corresponds with sliding of the COMAND controller.

5 Corresponds with pressing the COMAND controller.
6 This function is only available in vehicles with SPLITVIEW
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 82
REAR L Left screen7 Selecting menu or menu item and

REAR R Right screen7 confirming selection
X Selecting menu or menu item: Press
i In position COMAND, you can operate arrow buttons ?.
various COMAND functions via remote
X Confirming selection: Press button A.
control buttons ? and A.
Switching SPLITVIEW or rear screens on/ Headphone
off
Control systems
G Warning!
i When the SmartKey is in starter switch
The driver should not wear a headphone while
position 0 or 1 or removed from the starter
operating the vehicle under any
switch, the rear screens switch off after 30
circumstances. The use of a headphone while
minutes automatically. A corresponding
driving the vehicle could drastically impair the
message appears on the screens prior to
ability to react to audible traffic conditions
switching off.
(e.g. emergency sirens from police/fire/
You can switch the screens back on. Keep ambulance, another car’s horn, etc.).
in mind however that this will drain the
vehicle battery. G Warning!
X Switching on with the COMAND system When not in use, headphones or external
already on: Aim the remote control on the video sources should be stored in a safe
screen. location (e.g. one of the vehicle’s storage
compartments) so that they are not loose
X Press button :.
within the passenger compartment during
X Switching off: Aim the remote control on braking, vehicle maneuvers or a traffic
the screen. accident. Objects moving within the
X Press button :. passenger compartment could cause serious
personal injury to vehicle occupants.
Switching button backlight on/off
X Press button ;. G Warning!
Due to a potential choking hazard, wired
i When you do not use the remote control headphone usage by children should only
for approximately 15 seconds, the button occur with adult supervision.
backlight switches off automatically.
For information on using SPLITVIEW, see
Mute on/off (for wired headphones or (Y page 90).
COMAND) For information on using the Rear Seat
X Press button B. Entertainment System, see (Y page 189).
7 This function is only available in vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment System
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 83
Wireless headphone for Rear Seat Entertainment System or SPLITVIEW
Control systems
: Volume
; Selecting screen8
= Battery compartment cover
? Switching wireless headphone on/off
A Indicator lamp, showing various conditions
i Replace the batteries of the headphone comfortable fit by pulling the overhead
when they are low (Y page 502). headband in direction of arrows.
The indicator lamp shows the following X Switching headphone on/off: Press
conditions: button ?.
The headphones will switch off
Green The headphone is on and the batteries
automatically when they do not receive an
are charged.
infrared signal within approximately 3
Red The headphone is on and the batteries minutes in order to preserve the batteries.
are low. X Adjusting volume: Turn volume thumb
Off The headphone is switched off and wheel : to the desired volume.
the batteries are either low or not
X Selecting screen: Press switch ; to L
inserted at all.
(left screen) or R (right screen).
X Adjusting headphone: Unfold both sides Music and voice are transmitted via infrared
of the headphone and adjust to a signal. The headphone and the display must
have visual contact. This provides best
possible transmission of the infrared signal to
the headphone. Please note that the
8 Headphones for Rear Seat Entertainment System only.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 84
headphone has a left and right side and must = L left audio input
be used accordingly. ? R right audio input
The Rear Seat Entertainment System and
SPLITVIEW headphones are not An additional wired headphone can be
interchangeable. connected to each rear screen. The socket is
designed for headphones with a 3.5 mm
stereo jack plug and an impedance of 32 ohm.
i Press buttons C on the remote control
Control systems
(Y page 81) to adjust the volume of a wired

headphone connected to a rear screen.
Wired headphone for SPLITVIEW
The SPLITVIEW wireless headphone can

identified by SPLITVIEW symbol :.
Wired headphones for Rear Seat
Entertainment System
A wired headphone for use with SPLITVIEW

can be connected to socket : in the front
passenger footwell. The socket is designed
for headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack
plug and an impedance of 32 ohm.
: Socket for wired headphone

; V Video input
Operating COMAND
Main function menu overview
Each of the main functions Navi, Audio, Telephone, Video and Vehicle has a main menu
that consists of menus or functions.
Example: The main function Video contains the menus DVD-Video, AUX and the function
Video Off.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 85
Navi Audio Telephone Video Vehicle

Mode FM/AM Radio Video DVD Multi-function
Contour Seat
Settings/
Lumbar Settings
Map Orientation Sat. Radio AUX Rear Window
Sunshade
Control systems
POI Symbols On Map Disc Video OFF Easy Entry/Exit
Traffic Symbols on Memory Card Exterior Lighting
Map Delayed Shut-off
Text Information on Music Register Interior Lighting
Map Delayed Shut-off
ªTopographical Media Interface Ambient Lighting
Map
ªCity (3D) USB ªAutomatic
Mirror Folding
ªHighway Rear ªLocator
Information Lighting
ªAudio Fadeout AUX ªAutomatic
Locking
SIRIUS Service Audio OFF ªTrunk
Opening-height
Restriction
Map Version
Calling up the main menu You can call up the main menu of a main
function in the following manner:
X Moving to the main function line: Slide
ZV.
X Selecting a main function: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd.
X Confirming selection: Press W.
i When a main function (e.g. Navi) is open

and you want to open the menu of the
Audio function for example, the main
function Audio must be selected twice.
Example illustration: Audio main menu
Upon selecting the first time, the COMAND
system selects the main function Audio.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 86
When selecting that main function once Entering characters

more, the Audio main menu opens.
Vertical menus
Control systems
Example illustration: Entering a navigation

destination
Selecting characters
X Moving through the menu: Slide ZVÆ or X Slide XVY or rotate cVd.
rotate cVd. X Confirming selection: Press W.
X Selecting a menu item: Press W.
X Exiting a menu without making a Deleting individual characters
selection: Slide XVY in a horizontal X Select F in the bottom line and press W
direction. once for each character you wish to delete
or
Deleting entire words or numbers
X Press back button % (Y page 87).
X Select F in the bottom line. Press and hold
W until the word or number is deleted.
Horizontal menus
Exiting character entry
X Select % in the bottom line and press
W.
or
X Press back button %.
Switching to the list

X Slide ZV.
or
X Select ¬ in the second line from the
X Moving through the menu: Slide XVY or bottom and press W.
rotate cVd. X Exiting list: Slide XV to select Back and
X Selecting a menu item: Press W. press W.
X Exiting a menu without making a
selection: Slide ZVÆ in a vertical
direction.
or
X Press back button %.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 87
Accepting first entry X Switching to the next higher menu:

X Press W until you exit the character entry Press back button % briefly.
window. COMAND switches to the next higher menu
COMAND completes your entry as soon as level within the currently active operating
it can be clearly identified. In this case, you mode.
do not need to switch to the list. X Switching to the main menu: Press and
hold back button %.
Selecting list item COMAND switches to the main menu of the
Control systems
currently active operating mode.
Basic functions
i The components and operating principles
of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
Sound
X Muting: Press button 8 on the
multifunction steering wheel
Example illustration: List of cities for navigation
(Y page 221).
: Symbol for other selection options (e.g.
The sound of the current audio source is
county)
switched on or is muted.
X Selecting a line: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
i When the sound is muted, symbol 8
cVd.
appears in the status line. When you
X Confirming selection: Press W. change the audio source, the sound is
Additional selection options are available switched on automatically. Navigation
for list entries featuring symbol :. For announcements will be audible even when
example, cities marked with symbol : the sound is muted.
indicate that the selected country has more
than one city featuring that name. Switching navigation announcements off
Confirming such a list entry opens a X Press button 8 on the multifunction
submenu. steering wheel during an announcement.
i The announcements remain switched off
Back button even when you start a new route guidance
or switch COMAND off/on with the u
button. When you switch COMAND off by
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch and then switch the ignition back on
after more than 3 minutes, the
announcements are switched back on
automatically.
X Switching navigation announcements
back on manually: Select Navi Q RPT
(Y page 135).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 88
Adjusting volume Selecting sound settings

You can select different bass and treble
settings for the individual audio and video
sources. The respective sound menu can be
found via the submenu for which you wish to
make settings.
Example: Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q Sound
Control systems
Adjusting treble or bass

X Select Sound Q Treble or Bass.
The setting last selected is indicated by an
outlined bar.
X Adjusting: Turn thumbwheel H.
or
X Press button W or X on the
multifunction steering wheel.
i Vehicles with rear multicontour seats:
Occupants in the rear can also adjust the
volume using the buttons on the rear
armrest (Y page 80).
Volume of navigation announcements
You can adjust the volume of navigation : Last selected setting
announcements independently of the
; Current setting
respective audio source volume.
During a navigation announcement: X Changing setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
X Turn thumbwheel H. cVd until desired treble or bass setting is
reached.
or
X Saving setting: Slide XVY or press W or
back button %.
The setting is stored and the menu is
You can recall a navigation announcement exited.
manually.
Adjusting balance or fader
X Select Navi Q RPT.
Balance is used to shift the sound focus
Adjusting volume for telephone calls toward the driver’s side or the passenger’s
In hands-free mode, you can adjust the side.
volume of a telephone call while the call is Fader is used to shift the sound focus to the
active. front or to the rear of the vehicle.
During a telephone call: X Select Sound Q Balance/Fader.
X
The setting last selected is indicated by an
Turn thumbwheel H.
outlined bar.
or
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 89
necessary to adapt the audio format

(Y page 185).
i By selecting Logic7® OFF, all compatible

formats are played back as they are
present on the medium. Due to the design
of the passenger compartment, an
optimum audio experience cannot be
Control systems
guaranteed for all passengers.
Adjusting 3-D sound

: Current setting indicated by orange cross
hair symbol With 3-D sound, you can choose between
Logic7® ON and Logic7® OFF.
X Changing setting: Slide ZVÆ or XVY until
X Select Sound Q 3D Sound.
desired balance/fader setting is reached.
X Saving setting: Press W or back button
%.
The setting is stored and the menu is
exited.
3-D sound
With 3-D sound, you can choose between
Logic7® ON and Logic7® OFF.
harman/kardon Logic 7® 3-D sound is
available for the following operating modes: : Current setting
RAudio DVD (MLP™, DTS™, PCM, and Dolby
X Selecting a setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
Digital® audio formats)
cVd.
RVideo DVD (DTS™, PCM, and Dolby
X Saving setting: Press W.
Digital® audio formats)
The setting is saved and the menu is closed.
RAudio CD X Exiting menu without saving changes:
RMP3 Press back button % or slide XVY.
RRadio (FM only, HD Radio™, SIRIUS i Please note the following:
Satellite Radio)
RFor an ideal sound experience in all
RSD
seats, the balance and fader should be
RUSB adjusted to the center of the passenger
RAUX compartment with Logic 7® switched on.
RMusic RThe best sound results are achieved by
Register
playing high-quality audio and video
RMedia interface DVDs.
i Since some DVDs contain stereo as well RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
as multi-channel audio formats, it may be least 128 kbit/s.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 90
R3-D sound does not work for mono-signal SPLITVIEW

sources, such as on analog AM radio or
in Weather Band. SPLITVIEW enables the driver and front
passenger to use separate COMAND
RIn the event of poor radio reception functions at the same time. Two different
quality, e.g. inside a tunnel, you should displays appear in the COMAND screen. For
switch off Logic 7®, as a dynamic switch example, a Navigation display is only viewable
from Stereo to Mono could occur, form the driver’s seat while a DVD Video
resulting in temporary sound distortion. display is only viewable from the front
Control systems
RWith some stereo recordings, the passenger’s seat.

resulting sound may deviate from COMAND is operated via SPLITVIEW from the
conventional stereo playback. front passenger seat using the SPLITVIEW
remote control and the special wireless,
Switching the audio/video source off/ infrared headphone. You may also use a wired
on headphone via the 3.5 mm socket in the front
passenger footwell.
i When you load a CD or DVD, the audio or For information about using the remote
video source is activated automatically. control, see (Y page 81).
Active audio source For information about using the headphone,
X
see (Y page 82).
Switching off: Select Audio Q Audio
OFF. Depending on the production date of your
Playback is paused and the audio source is vehicle, it may be equipped with SPLITVIEW.
switched off; Audio OFF appears in the At the time of this printing, the use of
COMAND display. SPLITVIEW is NOT allowed in the following US
states (AL, AZ, CO, IL, LA, MA, MD, NH, PA,
X Switching on: Select Audio, then the
VA, VT, WA, WI, and WV) or Canadian
desired audio source. provinces (Manitoba, Newfoundland, New
or Brunswick, and Prince Edward Island).
X Load a CD/DVD (Y page 179) or an SD SPLITVIEW must NOT be operated in these
card (Y page 180). states or provinces. The driver is responsible
or for observing ALL local statutory provisions.
X Connect a USB storage device If your vehicle is registered in a non-approved
(Y page 80) or media interface device state or province, then the feature will need
(Y page 200) to COMAND. to be deactivated. Contact your authorized
Mercedes-Benz dealer to verify if SPLITVIEW
Active video source is allowed in your state or province.
X Switching off: Select Video Q Video
OFF. Notes
The audio source is switched off; Video RThe audio volume of the wireless
OFF appears in the COMAND display. headphone for the front passenger side
X Switching on: Select Video, then the must be adjusted on the headphone
desired video source. directly. The audio volume of a wired
or headphone can be adjusted via the remote
X Load a DVD (Y page 179).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 91
COMAND system settings 91
control. Make sure the volume is not set X Switching on: Select Vehicle Q
too high before putting on a headphone. SplitView ON.
RThe DVD changer can playback only one or
media source at a time. Example: if the X Press the SPLITVIEW remote control ON
driver is playing an audio CD, the front button.
passenger can not play a different medium The SPLITVIEW symbol : appears and
(e.g. DVD video) from the DVD changer. status ; changes to SplitView OFF.
However, it is possible for the front
Control systems
X Switching off: Select Vehicle Q
passenger to play media from radio,
SplitView OFF.
memory card, MUSIC REGISTER, media
interface, USB, AUX or Rear Seat or
Entertainment System. X Press the SPLITVIEW remote control ON
RWhen
button.
driver and front passenger are using
Status ; changes to SplitView ON.
the same medium, each can select
individual settings for that medium. The SPLITVIEW screen remains on for
approximately 30 minutes after switching off
RCOMAND transmits music and voice to the
the ignition. After these 30 minutes or once
wireless headphone for the front passenger the SmartKey is removed from the starter
side via infrared signal. The headphone and switch, the settings for the front passenger
the display must have visual contact. This side remain stored for approximately another
provides best possible transmission of the 30 minutes.
infrared signal to the headphone. Please
note that the headphone has a left and right
side and must be used accordingly. COMAND system settings
RWhen SPLITVIEW is on, the front passenger
can operate audio or video functions only. System settings submenu overview
RThe multifunction steering wheel lets you i The components and operating principles
operate functions for the driver’s side only. of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
System settings can be made in the following
Switching SPLITVIEW on/off submenus:
RDisplay Q Day Mode, Night Mode,
Automatic
RTime Q Time, Date, Format, Time Zone
RText Reader Q Speed Q Fast,
Medium or Slow:
Adjusts the reading speed of the Voice
Control System.
RVoice Control Q Help Window, Start
New Individualization, Delete
Individualization
RLanguage: Selecting system language
RFavorites Button *: Assigning the
favorite button
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 92
92 COMAND system settings
RBluetooth Q Search for Bluetooth Time settings

Devices, Bluetooth activated. For
The time of day is set automatically according
information on the Bluetooth® interface
to the GPS signal and the selected time zone.
see (Y page 151).
All time information always applies to the
RUpload/Download Data Q Copy Data local time at the current vehicle position.
to Storage Medium, Import Data from Time information changes when entering a
Storage Medium (Y page 95) different time zone.
Control systems
RReset: Resetting the COMAND system to i The correct time zone, daylight savings
factory settings time/standard time and the time itself
must be set for the following navigation
system functions to operate correctly:
Display settings RRoute guidance on routes with time-
Switching the display on or off dependent traffic guidance
RCalculation of estimated arrival time
X Switching off: Select Vehicle Q
Display OFF. The settings are adopted for the analog
X Switching back on: Rotate cVd or slide
clock in the dashboard.
ZVÆ, XVY or press W. Change the settings in the following order:
or 1. Time zone
X Press button u. 2. Daylight savings time/standard time
3. Time lag (only necessary in exceptional
Setting the display design cases)
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Display.
Setting the time zone and switching
between daylight savings time and
standard time
X Setting time zone: Select Vehicle Q
System Q Time Q Time Zone.
The country list appears. The dot # in front
of a list entry indicates the current setting.
X Select the country in which you are.
A time zone list may also be displayed,
depending on the selected country.
X Select the desired time zone.
X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Subsequent operation depends on
Automatic.
Rwhether your navigation system has GPS
i In the Automatic setting, COMAND sets reception
the display design automatically. The Rwhich country you have set previously
setting depends on the information
retrieved from the vehicle's light sensor. You may either switch between Daylight
Savings Time (Summer) and Standard
Time.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 93
COMAND system settings 93
X Select Daylight Savings Time Voice Control System settings

(Summer) or Standard Time.
The dot # in front of a list entry indicates Switching help window on or off
the current setting. X Select Vehicle Q System Q Voice
X Saving setting and exit the menu: Slide Control.
XVY. X Select Help Window.
A checkmark appears when the help
Adjusting time lags window is switched on.
Control systems
i In some exceptional cases, e.g. where
time zones border, the displayed time and Individualization
the local time may show a time lag. Using individualization, you can fine-tune the
This time lag can be adjusted in steps of 30 Voice Control System to your own voice and
minutes. thus improve voice recognition. The ability of
the system to recognize the commands of
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q other users does not deteriorate as a result.
Time. Individualization consists of two parts. You
X Selecting hour or minutes: Slide XVY. train the system to recognize digits in the first
X Setting value: Rotate cVd or slide ZVÆ. part and specific commands in the second
X Saving setting: Press W. part.
Starting new individualization
Setting the date i The vehicle must be stationary to start
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q individualization. After starting the session,
Date. acoustic instructions will guide you through
X Selecting month, day, or year: Slide the individualization.
XVY. X Select Vehicle Q System Q Voice
X Setting value: Rotate cVd or slide ZVÆ. Control Q Start New
X Saving setting: Press W. Individualization.
A prompt appears asking whether you
i Setting the date is only necessary or even would like further information.
possible if the COMAND system does not X Select Yes or No.
receive a GPS signal.
If you select No, the first part of
individualization begins.
Setting the time/date format
If you select Yes, an information display will
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Time Q be shown with audio instruction.
Format. X Closing display: Select OK.
The format list appears. The dots # in The first part of individualization begins.
front of the list entries indicate the current At the end of the first part, you will see a
setting. prompt asking whether you want to begin
X Changing format setting: Select desired the second part.
format. X Select Yes or No.
X Saving setting and exit the menu: Slide If you select No, individualization will be
XVY. canceled. The data from the first part is
saved automatically.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 94
94 COMAND system settings
If you select Yes, the second part begins. Assigning the favorite button
Individualization is completed at the end of
the second part. You will see a message to
this effect. The data from the second part is
saved automatically.
Canceling during the first or second part
of individualization
Control systems
X Select Cancel.
really do want to cancel.
X Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, individualization will be You can assign the following predefined
canceled. The data from the part at which functions to favorite button g:
you exited is not saved.
RDriver's Seat Massage (Y page 219)
If you select No, the part at which you
You can switch the massage function for
stopped begins again.
the driver’s seat on or off.
Deleting existing individualization data RFront Passenger Seat Massage
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Voice (Y page 219)
Control Q Delete You can switch the massage function for
Individualization. the passenger seat on or off.
A prompt appears asking whether you RDriver and Front Passenger Seat
really do want to delete. Massage (Y page 219)
X Select Yes or No. You can switch the massage function for
The individualization data will either be the driver’s and passenger seat on or off.
deleted or not, depending on your RDisplay OFF (Y page 92)
selection. You can use the favorite button to switch
the COMAND display on or off.
RRepeat Navigation Command
Setting the system language (Y page 135)
X Select Vehicle Q System Q When route guidance is activated, you can
Language. use the favorite button to generate or call
The language list appears. A dot # up a current navigation announcement.
indicates the current setting. X Select Vehicle Q System Q
X Changing setting: Select the desired Favorites Button *.
language. The list of predefined functions appears.
The language is set. The dot # in front of the list entry indicates
the current setting.
i For some system languages, the
X Changing setting: Rotate cVd and select
navigation announcements are made in
English (Y page 135). desired function.
X Saving setting and exiting the menu:
Press W.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 95
COMAND navigation (introduction) 95
Upload/Download of Data Among other things, all personal data are

deleted, for example
This function lets you transfer COMAND data
Rthe address book entries
to a memory card or a USB storage device and
vice versa. Rthe entries in the destination memory
The following COMAND data can be Rthe list of last destinations of the
transferred: navigation system
RNavigation destination memory and last
Control systems
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Reset.
destination
RAddress
book entries
really want to reset.
RAudio/Video presets memory X Select Yes or No.
RSystem settings If you select Yes another prompt will
appear asking whether you really want to
i You can use this function, for example, to reset.
save your COMAND data and transfer them X Select Yes or No.
to another vehicle.
If you select Yes, COMAND will be reset
X Insert an SD card into the SD card slot and restarted.
(Y page 180) or connect a USB storage
device to the built-in USB socket in the
glove box (Y page 80). The USB jack of the COMAND navigation (introduction)
optional media interface is not intended for
this purpose. Safety notes
X Select Vehicle Q System Q Upload/ G Warning!
Download Data. For safety reasons, only enter a destination
X Download: Select Copy Data to when the vehicle is stationary. When the
Storage Medium Q On the Memory vehicle is in motion, a passenger should enter
Card or On USB. the destination. Study manual and select
X Select Start Copying. route before driving.
X Upload: Select Import Data from Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Storage Medium Q From Memory Card (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
or From USB.
14 m) every second.
X Select Start Data Import.
COMAND calculates the route to the
X Exiting menu without data transfer:
destination without taking account of the
Select Back. following, for example:
RTraffic lights
Reset RStop and right-of-way signs
RParking or stopping in prohibited areas
i You can reset COMAND back to its
factory settings. RLane merging
ROther road and traffic rules and regulations
RNarrow bridges
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 96
96 COMAND navigation (introduction)
COMAND may give incorrect navigation Installing the map software

commands if the data in the digital map does
Your vehicle is factory-equipped with map
not correspond with the actual road or traffic
software for the USA (including Alaska and
situation. Maps do not cover all areas nor all
Hawaii), Canada, the U.S. Virgin Islands, and
routes within an area. For example, if the
Puerto Rico.
traffic routing has been changed or the
direction of a one-way road has been You can install new map software from one or
reversed. more DVDs, depending on the size of the map
Control systems
software.
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and
regulations during your journey. Road and
Copy protection of map software
traffic rules and regulations always have COMAND map software is subject to charges.
priority over the navigation commands The map software requires an activation
generated by the system. code. The map software can be used for one
individual vehicle only and is
G Warning! non-transferrable. The six-digit activation
Navigation announcements are intended to code is available at any authorized Mercedes-
direct you while driving without diverting your Benz Center. Contact an authorized
attention from the road and driving. Mercedes-Benz Center in case you have lost
Please always use navigation announcements your activation code or when the COMAND
instead of consulting the map display for system does not accept the activation code
directions. Consulting the symbols or map you have received.
display for directions may cause you to divert When reinstalling a map software that has
your attention from driving and increase your been installed in that vehicle already, an
risk of an accident. activation code is not required.
Installation process
Map software
i The installation process can take
The digital maps generated by the map between 10 and 120 minutes, depending
software become outdated in the same way on the size of the map software. If the radio
as conventional road maps. Optimum route is switched on when you start the
guidance can only be provided by the installation process, you can still adjust the
navigation system in conjunction with the volume. During the installation process,
latest map software. Information about new some COMAND functions are suspended.
map software versions can be obtained from Still available are the COMAND functions
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. for automatic air conditioning operation
and canceling the installation process.
Displaying installed map version If possible, carry out the installation when
X Navi Q Map Version the vehicle is stationary. When the vehicle
The installed map version is displayed. is stationary, the reading rate of the DVD
drive is higher than in a moving vehicle and
For information on installing new map
the installation process requires less time.
software see (Y page 96).
i COMAND may switch off during the
installation process automatically in order
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 97
to protect the battery. This may happen X Confirming message: Press W.

when the engine is switched off and the The DVD is ejected.
vehicle battery has insufficient power. If X Remove the DVD from the slot.
this occurs, restart the installation with the X Have the system software updated at an
engine running. Similarly, if the SmartKey
position is unintentionally switched to 0,
restart the installation. The system software must be updated before
you can install the map software.
G Warning!
Control systems
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your Map software compatible with
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon navigation software and current
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause system software
unconsciousness and lead to death. Do not
The COMAND system verifies whether the
run the engine in confined areas (such as a
map data on the DVD have been installed
garage) which are not properly ventilated.
already.
Map data installed already

Installing
A message that indicates that the map data
Notes about handling DVDs (Y page 179).
have been installed already appears. Also,
X Load the map software DVD into the DVD you are being asked if you would like to install
changer (Y page 179). the map software anyhow.
The COMAND system verifies the DVD and X Select Yes or No.
a respective message appears in the
When you select Yes, the current map data
COMAND display.
will be overwritten.
When you select No, the DVD will be ejected
Map software incompatible with automatically and the installation process
navigation system is cancelled.
A message indicates that installation of the X Remove the DVD from the slot.
map software is not possible.
X Confirming message: Press W. Map data not installed yet
The DVD is ejected.
The versions of the map software on the DVD
X Remove the DVD from the slot.
and of the installed map software appear in
X Insert a DVD that is compatible with the the COMAND display. You are then asked if
navigation system of the vehicle. you want to install the map software.
X Select Yes or No.
Map software incompatible with the When you select Yes, the map data will be
current system software installed.
A message indicates that the system When you select No, the DVD will be ejected
software and the map software are automatically and the installation process
incompatible. is cancelled.
When an activation code is required, you will
be prompted to enter it.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 98
to insert the next DVD. Follow the

instructions on the COMAND display.
X Continue installation without
canceling: Let the installation continue
without pressing any buttons.
When the installation has been completed,
a corresponding message appears.
X Confirming message: Press W.
Control systems
The DVD is ejected.

The installation is finished.
X Enter the activation code and confirm by
pressing !. When the installation has been completed
successfully, a corresponding message
Installation of the map software starts.
appears.
When you enter an invalid activation code,
X Confirming message: Press W.
you are prompted to reenter the activation
code. After entering an invalid activation code The DVD is ejected.
for the third time, the prompt for reentering X Remove the DVD from the slot.
the activation code will be delayed. The delay If the installation was unsuccessful:
increases by 5 minutes each time an invalid RThe DVD is dirty or scratched.
activation code is entered to a maximum
X Clean the DVD (Y page 179).
delay of 5 hours.
X Start the installation of the map
Map software installation software once more.

RThe system may be overheated due to
Immediately before installation, the
COMAND system reboots. excessive temperature in the vehicle
A corresponding message and a progress bar interior.
appear during the installation process. X Wait until the vehicle interior has
X Canceling installation on the DVD

cooled.
changer: Press the respective magazine X Start the installation of the map
tray button. software once more.

X Remove the DVD from the slot. RIf these measures do not solve the problem:
i When you cancel the installation, the X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

navigation system will be inoperative. You Center.
can resume a canceled installation at a
later time.
General notes
X Installation of multiple DVD map
software: After installation of the first Operational readiness of the navigation
DVD, a message appears that prompts you system following a system software
update by an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center
After a system software update by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the
installed map software may no longer be
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 99
compatible. If this is the case, the navigation Route guidance after transporting the
system will not be operational. vehicle or exiting a parking garage
You will know if this is the case, when the COMAND has to redetermine the position of
following message will appear when you the vehicle if the vehicle has been transported
switch to navigation mode: The system (e.g. by ferry, by train or after towing).
software has been updated. The map
COMAND may also have to redetermine the
software must be updated now. Please
vehicle position when leaving a parking
insert the DVD with the map software.
garage.
Control systems
X Updating map software: Proceed as
The proper position of the vehicle will even be
described in the “Updating the map found if you are driving with COMAND
software” section (Y page 96). Use map switched off. The duration of the positioning
software which is compatible with the recalculation will vary case by case.
system software.
During positioning, route guidance may be
i Please note that the update must be inaccurate and may show the following:
allowed to run to the end in this case. If you RNavigation announcements, route
interrupt it, the navigation system will guidance displays and displayed street
continue to be non-operational. names are not consistent with the actual
location of the vehicle.
Initial use or use following a system RCOMAND does not generate navigation
software update
announcements.
In both these cases, the navigation system RInstead of the route guidance displays, you
must determine the position of the vehicle. see the Off Road display and a direction
You may have to drive for a while before arrow. The direction arrow shows the
precise route guidance is possible. compass heading to the destination.
GPS reception After the vehicle position has been
redetermined, route guidance with navigation
The Navigation system relies on a number of announcements and route guidance display
factors to function correctly. GPS reception is available again.
is very important.
In certain situations GPS may be impaired, for Interrupting the journey during route
example: guidance
Rin tunnels The following applies if you interrupt the
Rin parking garages journey during route guidance and continue
Rdue
the journey later:
to snow on the GPS antenna
RCOMAND resumes route guidance
If there is snow on the GPS antenna, you
automatically if you continue the journey
should remove it. The GPS antenna is at the
within 2 hours.
back of the vehicle roof.
RRoute guidance is canceled if you continue
A roof cargo container may also impair GPS
coverage. the journey after more than 2 hours. It will
be necessary to resume the canceled route
guidance manually (Y page 135).
i The journey is interrupted if you park the
vehicle and switch off COMAND. The
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 100
journey is continued when you switch measurement can only be changed via the
COMAND back on and start driving. instrument cluster control system.
Hard disk errors Input restrictions

COMAND has an integrated hard disk on There is an input restriction for vehicles in
which the map software is stored. certain countries.
If the message Navigation Unavailable. The restriction is active for vehicle speeds
Control systems
Please refer to the operating above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). The

instructions. appears: restriction is deactivated as soon as the
X Switch the COMAND off. speed falls below approximately 2 mph
X Switch the COMAND back on.
(3 km/h).
Certain entries cannot be made when the
i If the message appears again, contact an restriction is active.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. This is indicated by the fact that certain menu
items cannot be selected, e.g. entering a
Units of measurement destination via map.
The units of measurement in navigation mode
are identical to those set in the instrument
cluster (Y page 235). The units of
Navigation submenu overview

i The components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 101
Info Traffic Route Position RPT Destination

(only (only with
with route
route guidance
guidance active)
active)
Informati Calling up RDisplaying RSaving Calling up a REntering
Control systems
on about real-time detour vehicle current destination
the active traffic function position navigation or stopover
route messages RDisplaying RCalling up announcement RSaving
guidance alternative “Where am destination
route I?” function RSuspending
RDisplaying RCentering or
symbol map on continuing
information vehicle route
RDisplaying position guidance
route RCentering
information map on
destination
RCentering
map on
stopover
RDisplaying
compass
Calling up the map display and

switching to navigation mode
X In the main function line, select Navi.
or
X Press shortcut button S once or twice.
i The number of times you have to press
shortcut button S depends on the
operating mode currently selected.
Both of these actions will call up the map
display. You will see the map with the menu Example illustration: Map with route guidance
system either shown or hidden. inactive and with the menu system shown
: Current vehicle position
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 102
: Currently set map scale as number

Control systems
; Scale
= Pointer indicating the currently set map
scale
Example illustration: Map with route guidance
inactive and with the menu system hidden (full ? Previously set value (only visible when the
screen map display) setting has been changed)
: Current vehicle position As soon as you rotate cVd, scale ; appears.
; Map orientation (Y page 103) Rotating clockwise zooms out, rotating
= Map scale (Y page 102) counterclockwise zooms in.
Hiding or showing the menu system Saving current vehicle position as

destination in last destinations list
X Hiding: Slide ZV.
The Full Screen menu item appears in X Showing menu system, if necessary:
the main area of the display. Press W.
X Press W. X Saving: Select Position Q Store
or Vehicle Position.
X Press and hold back button % in the
COMAND saves the current vehicle
position as a destination in the last
center console (Y page 87).
destinations (Y page 147).
The menu system is hidden. The map can
be seen in the full screen. i The cross hair may not be visible when
X Showing: Press W in the full-screen map using this function. Otherwise the position
display. of the cross hair will be stored.
Adjusting the map scale Moving the map
i It is only possible to adjust the map scale i It is only possible to move the map with
with the menu system hidden (full-screen the menu system hidden (full-screen map
map display). display).
X Rotate cVd until the desired map scale is X Slide ZVÆ, XVY or aVb.
set. A cross hair appears on the map.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 103
Centering the map on the vehicle,

destination or stopover position
i If you have moved the map, you can use
this function to rapidly return the map to
the position of the vehicle or destination. It
is only possible to center the map on the
destination position when route guidance
is active.
Control systems
X Centering on the vehicle’s position:
: Cross hair Select Navi Q Position Q Vehicle
Position Map.
; Details of the cross hair position
or
= Map scale
X Press back button % when the cross
i Display ; may be the name of a road or hair is displayed.
a road icon, for example, provided the X Centering on the destination: Select
digital map contains the necessary data. Navi Q Position Q Destination
If no data is available, display ; shows: Map.
X Centering on a stopover: Select Navi
Rthe coordinates of the cross hair if the
Geo Coordinates display is switched on Q Position Q Stopover Map.
(Y page 105) and the GPS signal is
strong enough
Basic settings
Rno display if the Geo Coordinates
display is switched off (Y page 105) i You can make the following settings
regardless of whether route guidance is
Saving cross hair position as destination active or inactive.
in last destinations list
X Showing menu system, if necessary: Map orientation
Press W.
X Saving: Select Position Q Save
Crosshair Position.
COMAND saves the cross hair position as
a destination in the last destinations list
(Y page 147).
Hiding the cross hair

The following orientations are available:
X Press back button % in the center
RNorth Up: Map display : is oriented to the
console (Y page 87). North; the North is always at the top of the
The cross hair disappears and the map is map.
centered on the vehicle position.
RHeading Up: Map display : is oriented in
or
the direction into which you are heading;
X Set the map to the vehicle or destination
the direction into which you are heading is
position, see the explanation below.
always at the top of the map; the orange tip
of the symbol points to the North.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 104
RBird’s-eye View: Map display : is oriented X Adjusting: Select Navi Q POI Symbols
in the direction into which you are heading; on Map.
the orange tip of the symbol points to the The map display list appears. A dot #
North. indicates the current setting.
R3-D Map: Certain buildings in selected X Select Standard symbols, Personal
cities are displayed in detail as a 3-D (three- symbols or No symbols.
dimensional) model. The map displays If you select Personal symbols, the list of
mountains and valleys three- POIs appears.
Control systems
dimensionally. The 3-D map is country- X Switching POI symbol display on or

specific and is connected with the function off: Select the desired POI.
City (3D) (Y page 105). The corresponding symbol displays are
X Selecting map orientation: Select Navi switched on or off, depending on the
Q Map Orientation. previous status. A checkmark indicates
The list of available map orientations which status is active. You can switch on
appears. The dot # indicates the currently the symbol displays for more than one POI.
selected map orientation. i The list shows all symbols that are
X Select North Up, Heading Up, Bird's- contained in the digital map across all
eye View, or 3-D Map and press W. states (USA) and provinces (Canada). Not
X Exiting menu: Slide XVY. all POIs in all states (USA) or in all provinces
(Canada) are available, however. Certain
POI symbols may not be displayed on the
Setting POI symbols map, even if the symbol display is switched
You can set which points of interest (POIs) on. You can use this list as a map legend.
should be displayed as symbols in the map. The map legend also contains, in addition
POIs are parking facilities, hotels, restaurants to the POI symbols, the names of the POI
or movie theaters, for example. categories.
i Depending on the map scale, POI symbols X Exiting menu: Slide XVY or press back
may not be visible although their display is button % in the center console
activated. In addition, POI symbols may be (Y page 87).
covered by other POIs or names displayed
on the map. Selecting traffic symbols on the map
The following settings are possible:
You can select what kind of traffic information
RStandard symbols (factory setting) is displayed on the map (Y page 139).
RPersonal symbols (you can select the
desired POIs) Selecting text information on the map
RNo symbols COMAND can display various text
information below the map:
RTime of arrival and distance to destination
RCurrent street
RGeo coordinates
RNone
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 105
X Calling up menu: Select Navi Q Text i When the map does not show the cross
Information on Map. hair, :, ; and = are displayed. Geo
The list of available text information coordinates ; will then indicate the
appears. The dot # indicates the currently current vehicle position.
selected setting.
X Select Geo Coordinates.
X Exiting menu: Slide XVY.
The geo coordinates are displayed by
Time of arrival and distance setting the dot to Geo Coordinates.
Control systems
X Select Arrival Time/Distance. None
The time of arrival and the distance for the X Select None.
main destination are displayed by setting
The text information below the map is
the dot to Arrival Time/Distance.
hidden by setting the dot to None.
Current street
X Select Current Street. Topographical map
The street you are currently on is displayed The map can be displayed as a topographical
by setting the dot to Current Street. map. Varying terrain levels can be recognized
by the different shades of colors. The color
Geo coordinates shades are available for map scales of 10 mi
- 500 mi (10 km - 500 km).
X Select Navi.
X Check the check box for menu item
Topographical Map.
City model
: Altitude You can display selected cities three-
; Geo coordinates dimensionally when the map orientation is set
= Number of receivable GPS satellites to 3-D map (Y page 103).
i GPS reception must be sufficient in order

to display :, ; and =. The displayed
altitude : may differ from the actual
altitude as the navigation system uses the
GPS signals to compute the value.
Display options with geo coordinates
selected
When the map shows the cross hair (map has
been moved manually), only geo
coordinates ; are displayed. In this case, the : Mountains
geo coordinates of the cross hair or other ; Buildings
data for the cross hair position such as a
= Landmark buildings
street name are displayed. Such data can only
be displayed when the digital map contains
that particular data.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 106
106 COMAND navigation system (entering a destination)
X Select Navi. X Select Navi Q Mode.

X Check the check box for menu item City The mode list appears.
(3D). X Switching mode on or off: Select desired
modes.
Setting route type Depending on the previous status, the
mode is switched on or off. A checkmark
You can set the following route types: indicates that the mode is switched on. It
RFast Route: COMAND calculates a route is possible to switch on more than one
Control systems
with minimized driving time. mode.

RDynamic X Exiting menu: Slide XVY or press back
Route: COMAND calculates a
route with minimized driving time and takes button % in the center console
into account traffic messages received (Y page 87).
along the route. Thus, the navigation COMAND will verify whether it can
system can dynamically recalculate the incorporate the modes if you select them
route. Roads that are blocked will be with route guidance active.
avoided whenever possible. For If possible, COMAND calculates a new
information on traffic messages see route considering the selected options.
(Y page 138). If the route cannot be recalculated with the
RShort Route: COMAND calculates a route selected options, a message appears and
with minimized route length. an announcement is made. COMAND
calculates a new route. Only options that
X Select Navi Q Mode. are possible will be considered.
The list of available rote types appears. The
dot # indicates the currently selected
Displaying highway information
setting.
X Select route type: Fast Route, Dynamic When this function is enabled, highway
Route or Short Route. information ahead will display automatically
X Exit menu: Slide XVY.
(Y page 137).
i If you change the route type setting during Audio fadeout

active route guidance, COMAND calculates X Select Navi Q Audio Fadeout.
a new route. If you change the setting when
When the check box is checked U the
route guidance is inactive, COMAND uses
the new setting for the next route guidance. volume of the current audio source fades
during a navigation announcement.
Setting route mode
With this function you can select the following COMAND navigation system
options for route calculation: (entering a destination)
RMinimize Highways Introduction
RMinimize Toll Roads
G Warning!
RMinimize Tunnels
For safety reasons, only enter a new
RMinimize Ferries destination when the vehicle is stationary.
RMinimize Motorail Trains
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 107
COMAND navigation system (entering a destination) 107
i It is possible to enter a destination A zip code/postal code entry replaces the

regardless of whether route guidance is city entry.
active or not.
The following destination entry options are Calling up the address input menu
available: X Select Navi Q Destination Q
RBy address Address Entry.
RFrom the destination memory The address input menu appears. It shows
a state (USA) or a province (Canada), the
Control systems
RFrom a list of last destinations vehicle is currently located at.
RFrom a point on the map
RA stopover
RA POI
Entering a destination by address

Introduction
i It is not possible to enter an address when
the vehicle has exceeded a certain speed.
As soon as the vehicle speed drops below : State (USA) or province (Canada)
a certain value, the function is available
again. Menu items in the address input menu
Some menu items may not or not yet be
i If Russian or Chinese is set as the system available, depending on the sequence in
language, the address must be entered which you enter the address and the data
using Latin characters. Setting the system version.
language (Y page 94). Example: If you have not made any entries,
To enter an address you may proceed as menu items No., Center, Intersection,
follows: POI, Start and Save will not yet be available.
REnter state (USA) or province (Canada),
Entering a state (USA)
street and city
REnter state (USA) or province (Canada), city X In the address input menu, select State/
and street Prov. Q States (U.S.).
A list of states appears with the predictive
REnter state (USA) or province (Canada), city
speller.
and city center
REnter state (USA) or province (Canada), zip
code/postal code and city center
REnter state (USA) or province (Canada), zip
code/postal code and street
i As additional information to the street
entry, you can enter either a house number
or an intersection.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 108
List of states with predictive speller X Deleting individual characters: Select

F in the bottom line and press W.
X Deleting an entire entry: Select F in the
bottom line and press W and hold until the
entire entry is deleted.
X Canceling an entry: Select % in the
bottom line and press W.
Control systems
or
console (Y page 87).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute the
: Top list entry based on the input data up characters entered to a state, predictive
to that point speller C disappears automatically. You see
; Characters entered by the user the list of states without the predictive
= Characters automatically added by the speller. Here you can confirm the current
system entry or make another selection.
? Clear last character entry During character entry, you can also manually
A Currently selectable characters switch to the list of states without the
B Currently non-selectable characters predictive speller at any time.
X Switching manually to list of states
C Predictive speller
without predictive speller: Slide ZV.
D List of states
or
E Currently selected character
i In the predictive speller C, you can only bottom and press W.
select currently selectable characters.
Which characters are included depends on List of states without predictive speller
the sequence in which you have entered
your destination and the digital map.
While the numbers are being selected as
described below, the top list entry : always
shows the state which best matches to the
input data as it has been entered up to that
point.
At the same time, COMAND automatically
adds matching characters = to the
characters ; already entered by the user.
X Selecting characters: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd.
X Confirming character selection:
Press W.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 109
X Selecting a state: Slide ZVÆ or rotate RStreet: Entering a street (Y page 114)
cVd. within the selected province
X Canceling selection: Select Back by RZip Code: Entering the postal code
sliding XV and press W. (Y page 109) within the selected province
or X Continuing destination entry: Select one
X Press back button % in the center of the menu items mentioned above.
Control systems
X Confirming selection: Press W. Quick access to most recently entered
The address input menu appears again. It states (USA) or provinces (CDN)
shows the abbreviation for the selected
X In the address input menu, select State/
state.
Prov. Q Last States/Provinces.
The following menu items are now available:
The list of most recently entered states
RMap: Entering a destination from the map (USA) or provinces (Canada) appears. The
(Y page 122) last entry is at the top of the list.
RState/Prov.: Change state (USA) or X Select desired state (USA) or desired
province (Canada) province (Canada).
RCity:
The address input menu appears again. It
Entering a city (Y page 111) within
shows the abbreviation for the selected
the selected state
state (USA) or province (Canada).
RStreet: Entering a street (Y page 114) The following menu items are now available:
within the selected state
RMap: Entering a destination from the map
RZip Code: Entering the zip code (Y page 122)
(Y page 109) within the selected state
RState/Prov.: Change state (USA) or
X Continuing destination entry: Select one province (Canada)
of the menu items mentioned above.
RCity: Entering a city within the selected
state (USA)/province (Canada)
Entering a province (Canada) (Y page 111)
X In the address input menu, select State/ RStreet: Entering a street within the
Prov. Q Provinces (Canada). selected state (USA)/province (Canada)
A list of provinces appears. (Y page 114)
X Select desired province. RZip Code: Entering the zip code/postal
The address input menu appears again. It code within the selected state (USA)/
shows the abbreviation for the selected province (Canada) (Y page 109)
province.
X Continuing destination entry: Select one
The following menu items are now available:
of the menu items mentioned above.
RMap: Entering a destination from the map
(Y page 122)
Entering the zip code/postal code
RState/Prov.: Change state (USA) or
province (Canada) i It is not possible to enter a zip code/
postal code if you have already entered
RCity: Entering a city (Y page 111) within other address data aside from the state
the selected province (USA) or province (Canada).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 110
You can only enter those zip codes/postal At the same time, COMAND automatically
codes which are saved on the digital map. adds digits = to the digits ; already entered
The available zip codes/postal codes by the user.
depend on the state (USA) or province X Selecting digits: Slide XVY or rotate
(Canada) currently entered. cVd.
X In the address input menu, select Zip or
Code. A list of zip codes/postal codes X Enter digits with the telephone keypad
appears with the predictive speller.
Control systems
using buttons Å - Ã (Y page 79).

X Confirming digit selection: Press W.
List of zip codes/postal codes with
predictive speller X Deleting individual digits: Select F in
the bottom line and press W.
or
: Top list entry based on the input data up digits entered to a zip code/postal code,
to that point predictive speller ? disappears
; Digits entered by the user automatically. You see the list of zip codes/
= Digit automatically added by the system postal codes without the predictive speller.
? Predictive speller Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection.
A Currently selectable digits
During character entry, you can also manually
B Currently selected digit
switch to the list of zip codes/postal codes
C Currently non-selectable digits without predictive speller at any time.
D List of zip codes/postal codes X Switching manually to list of zip codes/
postal codes without predictive
i In predictive speller ?, you can only
speller: Slide ZV.
select digits which can be currently
entered. Which characters are included or
depends on the sequence in which you X Select ¬ in the second line from the
have entered your destination and the bottom and press W.
digital map.
While the digits are being selected as
shows the zip code/postal code which best
matches to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 111
List of zip codes/postal codes without RCenter: Entering a center (Y page 116)
predictive speller within the selected state (USA)/province
(Canada) and zip coder area
RPOI: Entering a point of interest
(Y page 124) within the selected state
(USA)/province (Canada) and zip coder
area
Control systems
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
city seen in the address input menu.
RSave: Saving a destination in the
destination memory (Y page 145)
RStart: Starting the route calculation
X Selecting a zip code/postal code: Slide (Y page 120)
ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
X Continuing or completing destination
X Canceling selection: Select Back and
entry: Select one of the menu items
press W. mentioned above.
or
X Press back button % in the center Entering a city
i You can only enter cities which are
available on the digital map.
You will see the address input menu again. It is not possible to enter a city when you
It shows one of the following items of have already entered a street which is
information: available in one city only. In that case,
RCity, state (USA) or province (Canada) and COMAND takes this city automatically.
zip code/postal code If a street is available within several cities,
RState
COMAND offers a list of those cities.
(USA) or province (Canada) and zip
If you start your destination entry with the
code/postal code
city, all cities within the selected state
Which of the following menu items are now (USA)/province (Canada) are available.
available depends on the already entered
destination information and the digital map. X In the address input menu, select City.
The menu items which are not available The list of cities appears.
cannot be selected.
RMap: Using the map to enter a destination
(Y page 122)
i In this case, using the map for destination
entry is based on the city seen in the
address input menu.
RStreet: Entering a street (Y page 114)
within the selected state (USA)/province
(Canada) and zip coder area
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 112
List of cities with predictive speller X Selecting characters: Slide XVY or

rotate cVd.
Press W.
X Deleting individual characters: Select
Control systems

: Top list entry based on the input data up
or
to that point
; Characters entered by the user
= Characters automatically added by the
system
characters entered to a city, predictive
? Predictive speller speller ? disappears automatically. You see
A Currently non-selectable characters the list of cities without the predictive speller.
B Currently selectable character Here you can confirm the current entry or
C List of cities make another selection.
D Currently selected character During character entry, you can also manually
switch to the list of cities without predictive
i In predictive speller ?, you can only speller at any time.
select currently selectable characters. X Switching manually to the list of cities
Which characters are included depends on without predictive speller: Slide ZV.
the sequence in which you have entered or
The top list entry : at first shows either the bottom and press W.
city in which the vehicle is currently located
or the city which best corresponds to the List of cities without predictive speller
input data as it has been entered up to that
point.
i The current city is shown as first list entry
if you have accepted the state or province
the vehicle is currently located in.
As soon as you enter a character from
predictive speller ?, the top list entry :
shows the city that best matches to the input
data as it has been entered up to that point.
adds matching characters = to : Symbol for more selection options
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 113
X Selecting a city: Slide ZVÆ or rotate RPOI: Entering a point of interest

cVd. (Y page 124)
X Canceling selection: Select Back and i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
press W. city seen in the address input menu.
or RSave: Saving a destination in the
X Press back button % in the center destination memory (Y page 145)
console (Y page 87). RStart: Starting the route calculation
Control systems
X Confirming selection: Press W. (Y page 120)
Cities with symbol : are available more
than once within the selected state (USA)
entry: Select one of the menu items
or province (Canada). Confirming one of
these cities will take you to a further sub- mentioned above.
selection. Selecting the current city
Select one of the available cities or select The entry “City” in the “Address” menu is
All. For more information, see “Multiple always empty at first because you can enter
hits for city name ” (Y page 113). the street before entering a city
If there are no other selection options, the (Y page 115). You can modify the last
address input menu appears again. entered destination such as selecting another
It shows one of the following items of street in the last city.
information: X Destination Q From Last
RCity and state (USA) or province (Canada) Destinations
RStreet, city and state (USA) or province X Select the last destination.
(Canada) X Select Change and press W.
i The street is visible if you have entered it Multiple hits for city name
before entering the city. When there are multiple cities with the same
Which of the following menu items are now name, you can enter or select a street name
available depends on the situation, or may in addition. COMAND will then select the city
depend on the digital map. The menu items in which the entered street name exists.
which are not available cannot be selected.
(Y page 122)
address input menu.
RStreet: Entering the street (Y page 114)
RNo.: Entering the house number
(Y page 117)
RCenter: Entering the center (Y page 116)
X Enter a city (Y page 111).
RIntersection: Entering the intersection
X Select ALL.
(Y page 118)
X Enter or select the street name.
X Select the desired city.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 114
Entering a street i In predictive speller B, you can only

i It is not possible to enter a street if you
Which characters are included depends on
have already entered a city center.
i You can only enter streets which are your destination and the digital map.
available on the digital map. The top list entry : first shows the street first
If you have not entered a city before alphabetically and best corresponds to the
entering the street, only those streets input data as it has been entered up to that
Control systems
within the state (USA) or province (Canada) point.

previously entered are available. If you have As soon as you enter a character from
already entered a city, streets within that predictive speller B, the top list entry :
city are available. shows the street which best matches to the
If you have entered a zip code before input data as it has been entered up to that
entering the street, only those streets point.
within the zip code area are available. At the same time, COMAND automatically
X In the address input menu, select Street. adds matching characters = to
The list of streets appears either with or characters ; already entered by the user.
without the predictive speller X Selecting characters: Slide XVY or
(Y page 115). Whether or not the rotate cVd.
predictive speller appears depends on how X Confirming character selection:
many streets are available for the selected Press W.
city.
Street list with predictive speller F in the bottom line and press W.
or
characters entered to a street, predictive
: Top list entry based on the input data up speller B disappears. You see the street list
to that point without the predictive speller. Here you can
; Characters entered by the user confirm the current entry or make another
= Characters automatically added by the selection.
system During character entry, you can also manually
? Currently non-selectable characters switch to the street list without predictive
A Currently selectable character speller at any time.
B Predictive speller
C Street list
D Currently selected character
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 115
X Switching manually to the street list It shows one of the following items of
without predictive speller: Slide ZV. information:
or RStreet and state (USA) or province
X Select ¬ in the second line from the (Canada)
bottom and press W. RStreet, city and state (USA) or province
(Canada)
Street list without predictive speller
i The city is visible if you have entered it
Control systems
before entering the street, or if COMAND
can clearly attribute the street entered to a
city.
Which of the following menu items are now
available depends on the situation, or may
depend on the digital map. The menu items
which are not available cannot be selected.
(Y page 122)
: Symbol for more selection options i In this case, using the map for destination
X Selecting a street: Slide ZVÆ or rotate address input menu.
cVd.
RNo.: Entering the house number
or (Y page 117)
X Enter a street number with the telephone RIntersection: Entering the intersection
keypad using buttons Å - Ã
(Y page 118)
(Y page 79).
i Entering an intersection is restricted to
i Example: Pressing button · jumps to streets within the vicinity of the street
the 2nd Avenue. entered.
X Canceling selection: Select Back and RPOI: Entering a point of interest
press W. (Y page 124)
or i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
X Press back button % in the center city seen in the address input menu.
Streets with symbol : run through several
suburbs. Confirming one of these streets
takes you to a further sub-selection. (Y page 120)
If there are no other selection options, the X Continuing or completing destination
address input menu appears again after the entry: Select one of the menu items
confirmation. mentioned above.
Entering street name before city name

You can enter the street name directly before
entering the name of the city. This is useful
especially when entering an address with an
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 116
uncommon street name. COMAND will then i In predictive speller C, you can only
search for cities in which a street with that select currently selectable characters.
name exists. Which characters are included depends on
X Select or enter a state (USA) (Y page 107) the sequence in which you have entered
or province (Canada) (Y page 109). your destination and the digital map.
X Select or enter the street name. While the characters are being selected as
described below, top list entry : always
Entering a city center shows the city center which best matches to
Control systems
the input data as it has been entered up to

i It is not possible to enter a city center if that point.
Ryou have not yet entered a city At the same time, COMAND automatically
Ryou have already entered a street adds matching characters = to
You can only enter city centers which are
available on the digital map.
Depending on the previous entry, city rotate cVd.
centers are available either for the city X Confirming character selection:
entered or the zip code area entered. Press W.
X In the address input menu, select Center.
The list of city centers appears either with F in the bottom line and press W.
or without the predictive speller X Deleting an entire entry: Select F in the
(Y page 117). bottom line and press W and hold until the
List of city centers with predictive speller X Canceling an entry: Select % in the
or
characters entered to a city center, predictive
speller C disappears. You see the list of city
centers without the predictive speller. Here
you can confirm the current entry or make
another selection.
: Top list entry based on the input data up During character entry, you can also manually
to that point switch to the list of city centers without
; Characters entered by the user predictive speller at any time.
= Characters automatically added by the X Switching manually to the list of city
system centers without predictive speller: Slide
? Currently non-selectable characters ZV.
A Currently selectable character or
B Currently selected character X Select ¬ in the second line from the
C Predictive speller bottom and press W.
D List of city centers
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 117
List of city centers without predictive X Continuing or completing destination

speller entry: Select one of the menu items
mentioned above.
Entering a house number

i The house number can only be entered
after the street has been entered.
Control systems
You can only enter house numbers which
are available on the digital map. The digital
map does not contain all house numbers
for all streets.
How the house number is entered depends
X Selecting a city center: Slide ZVÆ or on whether you have already entered just the
rotate cVd. street or both the street and the city.
X Canceling selection: Select Back and
With only the street entered previously:
Always the house number input screen
press W.
appears. You can enter a house number
or immediately.
With the street and city entered
console (Y page 87). previously:
X In the address input menu, select No..
After the confirmation, the address input
The house number input screen appears.
menu appears again. It shows the city
Now you can enter a house number.
center, city and state (USA) or province
(Canada). Enter a house number
available may depend on the digital map.
The menu items which are not available
cannot be selected.
(Y page 122)
entry is based on the city center seen in the
address input menu.
RPOI: Entering a point of interest
(Y page 124) : Numbers entered by the user
i In this case, entering a point of interest is ; Predictive speller
based on the city center seen in the = Currently selected number
address input menu.
(Y page 120)
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 118
X Selecting numbers: Slide XVY or rotate i In this case, entering a POI is based on the
cVd. city seen in the address input menu.
X Confirming number selection: Press W. RSave: Saving a destination in the
or destination memory (Y page 145)
X Entering a number with the telephone RStart: Starting the route calculation
keypad using buttons Å - Ã (Y page 120)
(Y page 79). X Continuing or completing destination
Control systems
X Deleting individual numbers: Select F entry: Select one of the menu items
in the bottom line and press W. mentioned above.
bottom line and press W and hold until the Entering an intersection
i The intersection can only be entered after
the street has been entered.
You can only enter intersections which are
or available on the digital map.
X In the address input menu, select
Intersection.
X Confirming entry: Select ¬ in the
The list of intersections appears either with
second line from the bottom and press W. or without the predictive speller
If COMAND cannot clearly attribute the (Y page 119). Whether or not the
house number to a city, the city input menu predictive speller appears depends on how
appears. many intersections are available for the
Entering city: Proceed as described in the selected street.
“Entering a city” section (Y page 111).
After the city has been entered, the address List of intersections with predictive
input menu appears again. speller
If COMAND can clearly attribute the house
number to a city, the address input menu
also appears.
In both cases, the address input menu
shows the house number, street, city and
state (USA) or province (Canada).
available may depend on the data version of
the digital map. The menu items which are not
available cannot be selected.
(Y page 122) to that point
i In this case, using the map for destination ; Characters entered by the user
entry is based on the city seen in the = Characters automatically added by the
address input menu. system
RPOI: Entering a point of interest ? Predictive speller
(Y page 124) A Currently non-selectable characters
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 119
B Currently selectable character X Slide ZV.

C List of intersections or
D Currently selected character X Select ¬ in the second line from the
bottom and press W.
select currently selectable characters. List of intersections without predictive
Which characters are included depends on speller
Control systems
While the characters are being selected as
shows the intersection which best
corresponds to the input data as it has been
entered up to that point.
adds matching characters = to
X Selecting an intersection: Slide ZVÆ or
rotate cVd.
rotate cVd.
Press W.
Either the address input menu appears
again, or the city input menu.
X Deleting an entire entry: Select F in the i The city input menu appears if the
bottom line and press W and hold until the intersection entered cannot be clearly
entire entry is deleted. attributed to a city.
X Canceling character entry: Select % X Canceling selection: Select Back and
in the bottom line and press W. press W.
or or
X Press back button % in the center X Press back button % in the center
console (Y page 87). console (Y page 87).
As soon as COMAND can clearly attribute the X If the city input menu appears: Enter a
characters entered to an intersection, city.
predictive speller ? disappears. You see the
i A detailed description of how to enter a
list of intersections without the predictive
city can be found in the “Entering a city”
speller. Here you can confirm the current
section (Y page 111).
entry or make another selection.
During character entry, you can also manually After the city has been entered, the address
switch to the list of intersections without input menu appears again.
predictive speller at any time. Which of the following menu items are now
available may depend on the digital map. The
menu items which are not available cannot be
selected.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 120
RMap: Using the map to enter a destination i Route calculation requires time. The time
(Y page 122) depends on factors such as the distance
i In this case, using the map for destination from the destination.
COMAND calculates the route using the
digital map data. The calculated route may
address input menu.
differ from the actual road situation, e.g.
RPOI: Entering a point of interest due to road construction or incomplete
(Y page 124) map data. Please make sure that you
Control systems
i In this case, entering a POI is based on the observe the notes about the digital map
city seen in the address input menu. (Y page 96).
RSave: Saving a destination in the i Routes to destinations that do not have
destination memory (Y page 145) road or ferry access to the current position.
RStart: Starting the route calculation This applies, for example, to routes from
(Y page 120) the mainland to Hawaii.
entry: Select one of the menu items Entering a destination from the
mentioned above. destination memory
X Select Navi Q Destination Q From
Starting the route calculation
Memory.
i You cannot start the route calculation The destination memory list appears either
until all the necessary address data has with or without the predictive speller
been entered. (Y page 121). Whether the predictive
speller appears depends on the number of
X After entering the destination, select entries in the destination memory.
Start.
The route calculation will start if route i The destination memory always contains
guidance has not already been activated. an entry called My Address. You can save
If route guidance has already been your home address, for example, under this
activated, a prompt will appear asking entry (Y page 143).
whether you want to end the current route
guidance. Destination memory list with
X Select Yes or No. predictive speller
If you select Yes, COMAND will stop the
route guidance and start the route
calculation for the new destination.
If you select No, COMAND will continue
with the active route guidance.
The new destination is discarded.
During the route calculation, an arrow will
indicate the direction to the destination.
Below this, you will see the message The
route is being calculated....
Once the route has been calculated, route
guidance begins (Y page 129).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 121
i In predictive speller :, you can only You can also manually switch to the
select currently selectable characters. destination memory list without predictive
Which characters are included depends on speller at any time.
the sequence in which you have entered X Switching manually to the destination
your destination and the content of the memory list without predictive speller:
destination memory. Slide ZV.
While the characters are being selected as or
described below, the top list entry always X Select ¬ in the second line from the
Control systems
shows the destination which best matches to bottom and press W.
the input data as it has been entered up to
that point.
Destination memory list without
predictive speller
adds matching characters to characters
already entered by the user.
X Changing language for the predictive
speller: Select B.
X Select desired language.
X Changing character set for the
predictive speller: Select C.
Depending on the previous setting, you will
change to letters with special characters or
to numbers with special characters.
rotate cVd. X Selecting a destination: Slide ZVÆ or
X Confirming character selection: rotate cVd.
Press W. X Canceling selection: Press back button
X Deleting individual characters: Select % in the center console (Y page 87).
F in the bottom line and press W. or
X Deleting an entire entry: Select F in the X Select Back and press W.
entire entry is deleted. i The Back menu item is only present if this
list was called up from the list with
predictive speller.
or
X Press back button % in the center X Starting route calculation: Select Start,
console (Y page 87). see also (Y page 120).
characters entered to a destination,
predictive speller : disappears. You see the
destination memory list without predictive
speller. Here you can confirm the current
entry or make another selection.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 122
Entering a destination from the list of i Display ; may be the name of a road, for
last destinations example, provided the digital map contains
the necessary data.
If no data is available, display ; shows:
Last Destinations.
The list of last destinations appears. The Rthe coordinates if the Geo
most recent destination is at the top of the Coordinates display is switched on
list. (Y page 105)
Control systems
X Select desired destination. Rno display if the Geo Coordinates

X Starting route calculation: Select Start, display is switched off (Y page 105)
see also (Y page 120).
Moving the map and selecting the
destination
Entering a destination from the map
X Moving map: Slide ZVÆ, XVY or aVb.
i Depending on the factory settings of the X Adjusting map scale: Rotate cVd.
vehicle, it may not be possible to enter a Rotating clockwise enlarges the map,
destination while the vehicle exceeds a rotating counterclockwise reduces it.
preset speed. As soon as the vehicles
X Selecting a destination: Press W.
speed drops to below the preset speed, the
function is available again. If the cross hair is located off the edge of
the digital map, a route cannot be
calculated to this destination and you will
Calling up the map
see the message The destination is
X In the address input menu, select Map located off the map..
(Y page 107). X Select OK.
You will see the map with a cross hair. The X Move the map and select a destination
map is set to the address set in the address again.
input menu. If the destination can be attributed, you will
or see the address of the destination. If not,
X Select Navi Q Destination Q Via you will see the display Destination
Map. from map.
You will see the map with a cross hair. X Starting route calculation: Select Start,
Entering a stopover
When route guidance is active, you can enter
a stopover. Stopovers can be predefined
destinations from the following predefined
categories:
RMercedes-Benz Service Center
RHospital
: Cross hair
RGas Station
; Details of the cross hair position
RParking Lot
= Map scale
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 123
RRestaurant X Selecting a destination: Select the

ROther desired destination from list.
The address of the destination appears.
With the option Other you can enter stopover X Starting route calculation: Select Start,
destinations from the destination memory,
last selected destinations, POIs, or via the
address (Y page 123).
You can enter stopover destinations on the Entering another destination as a
stopover
Control systems
route or in the vicinity of the route.
You can use the stopover function to X Select Navi Q Destination Q
influence the route guidance calculation to Stopover.
the main destination. When you have reached X Entering: Select Other.
your stopover, COMAND automatically You can select between the following menu
calculates the route to the main destination. items:
RAddress Entry
Entering predefined destinations
RFrom Memory
X Select Navi Q Destination Q
RFrom Last Destinations
Stopover.
If a stopover has already been entered, you RFrom POIs
can change it.
X Select a menu item.
Changing: Select Change Stopover.
Subsequent destination entries may differ,
You can now select a category.
depending on your selection:
X Selecting a category: Select category,
RAddress Entry selection:
e.g. Gas station.
X Enter a destination by address
COMAND first looks for destinations along
the vehicle’s route and within the immediate (Y page 107).
vicinity of the vehicle. If there are no RFrom Memory selection:
destinations available there, COMAND
X Enter a destination from the
searches for destinations in an area around
the vehicle position. destination memory (Y page 120).
If COMAND does not find any destinations, RFrom Last Destinations selection:
you will see a message to this effect. X Enter a destination from the list of last
X Select OK. destinations (Y page 122).
You can now select a different category.
RFrom POIs selection:
If COMAND finds destinations, you will see a
list of the destinations and details of how far X Enter a point of interest (POI)
away they are in the right-hand side of the (Y page 124).
display. The information about how far away X Starting route calculation: After entering
the destinations are can take a few seconds a destination, select Start (Y page 120).
to be displayed.
The left-hand part of the display shows the
Changing a stopover
destinations on the map. The destination
marked in the list is highlighted in the map. If a stopover has already been entered, you
can change it.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 124
124 COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry)

Stopover Q Change Stopover.
X Enter another destination as a stopover.
Deleting the stopover

If a stopover has already been entered, you
can delete it.
Control systems

Stopover Q Delete Stopover.
COMAND deletes the stopover and
X Select Call.
calculates the route to the main
destination.
Displaying stopovers on the map COMAND navigation system (Point of

interest entry)
X Enter a stopover (Y page 122).
Entering a POI in the surrounding area
X In the map view while the menu system is
displayed (Y page 102), select
Destination Q From POIs Q
Current Position.
X The list of POIs appears. The available POIs
in the area of your position are displayed.
Entering a POI within the city limits

of a given city
X Select the stopover. X With the menu system displayed
X Select Position Q Stopover Map. (Y page 102), select Destination Q
The stopover is displayed on the map. From POIs Q Other City.
X Select a different state (USA) or province
Calling stopover destinations or POIs (Canada) if necessary (Y page 107).
This function is only available when a mobile X Entering city: Select City.
phone is connected to the COMAND and a The address input menu appears.
phone number for the stopover destination or X Proceed as described in the section
POI is stored in the navigation system “Entering a city” (Y page 111).
database.
X Enter a stopover destination (Y page 122)
or a POI (Y page 124). Entering a POI in the destination area
X Select the stopover destination or POI. With this function you have quick access to
POIs in the vicinity of the selected
destination.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 125
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry) 125
X With the menu system displayed categories sorted alphabetically and POIs
(Y page 102), select Destination Q sorted by distance around the vehicle
From POIs Q Destination area. position are available.
The list of POIs appears. The available POIs RPOI within the city limits of a given city:
in the vicinity of destination are displayed. If you have only entered the state (USA) or
province (Canada) and the city,
alphabetically sorted categories and
Entering a POI by name alphabetically sorted POIs within the city
Control systems
are available.
With this function you can enter or select POIs
by the name of the POI. If you have entered more than the state
(USA) or province (Canada) and the city,
X With the menu system displayed
alphabetically sorted categories and POIs
(Y page 102), select Destination Q
sorted by distance around the address
From POIs Q By Name Q All POIs. entered are available.
When selecting All POIs all POIs in the
RPOI in the destination area:
navigation database are displayed sorted
by name. categories sorted alphabetically and POIs
sorted by distance around the destination
You can also search for POIs in the vicinity of
area are available.
your current position or a particular city.
RPOIs via name search:
Alphabetically sorted POIs are available.
(Y page 102), select Destination Q
From POIs Q By Name Q Current RPOIsvia phone number:
Position or Other City. Numerically sorted POIs are available.
Some search methods display a list of
available main categories. After selecting a
Entering a POI by telephone number main category and, if available, a subcategory
a list of POIs appears.
With this function you can enter or select POIs
by the telephone number of the POI. i The main categories can have up to three
X With the menu system displayed subcategories.
(Y page 102), select Destination Q Other search methods provide a list of POIs
From POIs Q By Telephone Number. immediately.
The telephone numbers of all POIs that are
stored in the navigation database are
displayed.
Choosing a POI category and

selecting a POI
The available categories or POIs depend on
the selected search method.
RPOI in the surrounding area:
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 126
Choosing a main category

Control systems
: First subcategory
Example illustration: Main category list for POIs in ; To show all POIs for all subcategories
the surrounding area under category :
: Main category = Symbol for available POIs or further
; Symbol for available POIs or other subcategories
available subcategories ? Further subcategories
X Selecting a main category: Slide ZVÆ or X Selecting a subcategory: Slide ZVÆ or

rotate cVd. rotate cVd.
X Canceling selection: Press back button X Canceling selection: Press back button
% in the center console (Y page 87). % in the center console (Y page 87).
X Confirming selection: Press W. X Confirming selection: Press W.
Main categories with symbol ; contain After selecting a subcategory, a list of POIs
either POIs or subcategories. Further appears. It contains the POIs available
operation depends on whether the within the search radius of the
selected main category contains subcategory.
subcategories or only POIs.
i If you have selected list item ;, the POI
Selected main category contains
list contains all POIs for all subcategories
subcategories:
within the search radius of main
Selecting such a main category opens a list
category :.
of subcategories.
Selected main category contains no
Choosing a subcategory subcategories, but only POIs:
The following illustration shows an example Selecting such a main category immediately
of the subcategory RESTAURANT : as part of opens a list of POIs. The POI list contains the
the main category EAT & DRINK as well as available POIs within the search radius of the
more subcategories ?. main category.
POI list
Depending on the situation, COMAND first
shows the following list or the POI list with
predictive speller.
The illustration below shows by way of
example the POI list for the BISTRO
subcategory within the surrounding area.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 127
COMAND navigation system (Point of interest entry) 127
= Characters automatically added by the

system
? Predictive speller
A Currently selectable character
B Currently non-selectable characters
C POI list
D Currently selected character
Control systems
: Compass heading to the destination Which characters are included depends on
; Linear distance to the destination the sequence in which you have entered
= Selected destination your destination and the digital map.
While the characters are being selected as
i Compass : and linear distance ; are described below, the top list entry : always
not displayed with all search methods. shows the POI that best matches to the input
Displays : and ; are static; they do not data as it has been entered up to that point.
change while you are driving. At the same time, COMAND automatically
In the POI list, you can either select a POI or adds matching characters = to
enter the name of the POI. characters ; already entered by the user.
Selecting a POI
X Select desired POI.
rotate cVd.
The POI list disappears and the address of X Confirming character selection:
the POI appears. Press W.

X Back to POI list: Press back button % X Deleting individual characters: Select
in the center console (Y page 87). F in the bottom line and press W.
X Starting route calculation: Select Start, X Deleting an entire entry: Select F in the
see also (Y page 120). bottom line and press W until the entire
entry is deleted.
POI list with predictive speller X Canceling an entry: Select % in the
or
characters entered to a POI, predictive
speller ? disappears.
You see the POI list without predictive speller.
Here you can confirm the current entry or
make another selection.
You can also manually switch to the POI list
to that point without predictive speller at any time.
; Characters entered by the user
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 128
X Switching manually to the POI list

without predictive speller: Slide ZV.
or
bottom and press W.
POI list without predictive speller

Control systems
Example illustration: Mercedes-Benz Center is

highlighted
X Selecting map view: Select Map.
X Exiting: Select Back.
X Switching to a different POI: Select
Previous or Next.
X Displaying information for the POI:
Select Details.
X Selecting a POI: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
A window that contains additional
cVd. information appears. Slide omp or press
X Canceling selection: Press back button n to close the window.
% in the center console (Y page 87). X Accepting POI as destination or
X Confirming selection: Press W. stopover destination: Select Start.
X Starting route calculation: Select Start, When you confirm by selecting Yes, the
see also (Y page 120). route to the POI will be calculated.
Additional information by
Showing details ZagatSurvey®
Symbol Info ZagatSurvey® provides additional
information by displaying rating symbols or
With the function Symbol Info you can call
text for selected POIs.
up information on POIs that are close by.
Additional information is available for:
X In the map view while the menu system is
RHotels
displayed, select Route Q Symbol Info.
The nearest POI is highlighted in the map RRestaurants
and indicated in the map header. RGolf courses
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 129
COMAND navigation system (route guidance) 129
Ratings
20 - 25 very good to
excellent
26 - 30 extraordinary to
perfection
Control systems
Ratings apply to the key aspects of each
category covered, for example, Dining,
Facility, Room and Service in the Hotel
Symbol : indicates POIs for which additional category. See Ratings and Symbols in each
information is available. section.
X Select a POI and press W. Cost is covered differently in each category,
as noted in the Ratings and Symbols keys.
Select Details for a brief description of the
respective POI. Surveyor comments are
shown in quotation marks within reviews.
Calling a POI
X Calling a POI (Y page 124).
COMAND navigation system (route

guidance)
Example illustration: Hotel with additional
information available Route guidance
: Open late (hours vary by section)
; No credit cards accepted G Observe Safety notes, see page 95.
= Closed on Sundays
COMAND guides you to the destination using
navigation commands in the form of audible
? Key aspects
navigation announcements and route
A Ratings guidance displays.
B Cost
i The route guidance displays can only be
All ratings throughout this guide function are seen if the display is switched to navigation
on the Zagat 0 to 30 scale as follows: mode.
Ratings If, for any reason, you do not follow the
navigation commands or if you leave the
0-9 poor to fair calculated route, COMAND automatically
10 - 15 fair to good calculates a new route to the destination.
If the map data contains the relevant
16 - 19 good to very good information, COMAND tries to avoid roads
that only have limited access, e.g. roads
closed to through-traffic and non-residents.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 130
130 COMAND navigation system (route guidance)
Examples of displays and The following example illustration shows the

announcements for a driving intersection zoom in the right half.
maneuver
Driving maneuvers have three phases:
RPreparation phase
RAnnouncement phase
Control systems
RManeuver phase
Preparation phase
COMAND prepares you for the upcoming
driving maneuver. Based on the example
: Next road
display below, the driving maneuver is
announced with the Prepare to turn ; Driving maneuver (turn left)
left message. The display is not split and = Graphical representation of the distance
shows the map over the full screen. to the driving maneuver
? Point at which the driving maneuver takes
place (light blue dot, shown in both the left
and right displays)
A Information about distance to the next
driving maneuver
B Route (highlighted in blue; shown in both
the left and right displays)
C Current vehicle position; the triangle
indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
(shown in both the left and right displays)
D Street on which you are currently driving,
: Point at which the driving maneuver takes
if included on the digital map
place (light blue dot)
E Destination flag
; Route (highlighted blue)
= Current vehicle position; the triangle i The filled-in section of distance graphic
points in the vehicle’s direction of travel = gets shorter the nearer you get to the
announced driving maneuver.
Announcement phase
COMAND announces the next driving Maneuver phase
maneuver. Based on the example display COMAND announces the next driving
below, the driving maneuver is announced maneuver. Based on the example display
700 feet in advance with the Turn left in below, the driving maneuver is announced
700 feet to your destination message. 150 feet in advance with the Now turn
The display is divided in two. In the left half, left message. The display is also split into
you see the normal map view. In the right half, two halves, as for the announcement phase.
there is either an enlarged view of the area
surrounding the intersection (intersection i Once the maneuver is completed,
zoom) or simply a symbol for the next driving COMAND automatically switches back to
maneuver. the non-split screen.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 131
COMAND displays the lane

recommendations C, D and E with regard
to the next two driving maneuvers.
i The instrument cluster also provides lane
recommendations but shows
recommended lanes only.
Explanation of lane recommendations
Control systems
RRecommended lane E: This lane can be
used to perform the next two driving
: Graphical representation of the distance
maneuvers without changing lanes.
to the next driving maneuver
RPossible lane D: This lane can be used to
; Information about distance to the next
driving maneuver perform only the next driving maneuver
without changing lanes.
RLane not recommended C: This lane
Lane recommendations cannot be used to perform the next driving
COMAND can display lane recommendations maneuver without changing lanes.
for upcoming driving maneuvers when driving
on selected multilane streets. The respective Display of lane recommendation
data must be available on the digital map.
Additional lanes that open during a driving
maneuver are displayed different from each
other:
Display Meaning
With limiting line New lane that
below (lane C) opened during a
driving maneuver
Without limiting line Through lane
below (lane D
or E)
: Current vehicle position; the triangle
indicates the driving direction
The color of the lane recommendation varies
; Location of next driving maneuver
depending on whether the COMAND display
= Information on direction, intersection, design is set to day or night:
exit number etc.
? Next driving maneuver: Turn left here
A Distance bar representing the distance to
the next driving maneuver
B Distance to the next driving maneuver
C Lane not recommended
D Possible lane
E Recommended lane
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 132
Day mode Night mode see a corresponding display and route

guidance is automatically ended.
Recommended Recommended
lane E = deep blue lane E = light blue
Possible lane D = Possible lane D =
light blue deep blue
Lane not Lane not
Control systems
recommended C: = recommended C: =
grey grey
Example of a display without driving

: Destination on the map
maneuvers
; Destination flag
i An additional announcement may sound

for some destinations, for example
selected POIs or destination entries that
include the house number, telling you
whether the destination is on the left or
right side of the street.
Partially digitized areas

: Main destination O i The digital map may contain areas that
; Stopover P (only visible if a stopover has are only partially attributed.
been entered) G Warning!
= Route (highlighted blue) Due to incomplete digitization, the route
? Current vehicle position; the triangle shown on the map may differ from the actual
indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel road/traffic situation.
A Set map orientation – for an explanation If you follow the route shown on the map, for
and settings, see (Y page 103) example, it is possible that you could drive the
B Set scale – for an explanation and wrong way down a one-way street or that a
settings, see (Y page 102) street cannot be driven on.
When using route guidance in a partially
attributed area, you must therefore be sure to
Destination or destination area observe all relevant traffic regulations and the
reached course of the road.
Once you have reached your destination, you All relevant traffic regulations and the course
will hear the announcement You have of the road always take priority over the route
reached the destination. For certain shown on the map.
POIs (airports or highway junctions), you will
hear the announcement You have reached
the destination area. In addition, you will
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 133
If the destination is within a partially If you try to call up an announcement

digitized area manually, (Y page 135) you will hear the
announcement You are currently in an
COMAND guides you through fully digitized
area where turn by turn guidance
areas for as long as possible. Route guidance
cannot be provided.
is conducted in the usual manner, e.g. with
navigation announcements and route During route guidance, the display is divided.
guidance displays.
Before the vehicle reaches a partially digitized
Control systems
area, COMAND notifies you of this with the
following announcements:
RBe prepared to enter an area where
turn by turn guidance cannot be
provided.
RIn 700 feet you will enter an area
where turn by turn guidance cannot
be provided.
: Current vehicle position
i The indicated distance can be seen here
; Distance to destination (linear distance)
by way of example. In reality, it may be
different. = Direction to destination (compass
heading)
RYou are about to enter an area
? Destination
where turn by turn guidance cannot
be provided. A Suggested route
On the right-hand side you will see direction
i When you call up the route info to this
arrow = showing the compass heading to
type of destination, (Y page 136) the
destination ?.
following data shown there may differ from
the actual situation: On the left-hand side of the display you will
RDistance to the destination see the map with the suggested route.
Suggested route A is indicated with a
REstimated driving time to the destination
dashed blue line. However, it may not be
REstimated arrival time possible to follow the suggested route A
because, for example, the road is closed or
Route guidance within a partially not open for car traffic.
digitized area If, during route guidance, COMAND leads you
back into a fully digitalized area, route
If you start route guidance in this type of area, guidance will simply continue in the usual
you will hear the following announcement: manner.
You are currently in an area where
turn by turn guidance cannot be
provided.
Route guidance is provided by means of a
direction arrow showing the compass
heading to the destination. COMAND will not
generate automatic navigation
announcements.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 134
Off-road and off-map

Route guidance to an off-road
destination
G Warning!
The COMAND navigation system may direct
you to off-road routes that your vehicle may
Control systems
not be capable of traversing through without

damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is
the driver’s sole responsibility to determine
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes : Current vehicle position; the triangle
may be of varying conditions and their indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel
appropriateness for use may be affected by ; Off-road section of the route
various factors such as time of day, time of = Off-road destination
year and immediate weather conditions that
? Direction arrow, shows compass heading
cannot be judged or taken into consideration
to destination
by the COMAND system.
On the off-road section of the route, direction
COMAND can guide you to destinations arrows showing the compass heading to the
within the area covered by the digital map, destination guide you. You will also see the
even if a destination is not located at a road Direction to destination display.
known to the system.
These destinations are shown as off-road Route guidance from an off-road
destinations, which you can enter using the location to a destination
map, for example. In these cases, COMAND
guides you for as long as possible with If there is no road available on map at current
navigation announcements and displays on position of the car, vehicle is off road.
roads known to the system. COMAND is also able to guide you to a
Shortly before you reach the last known the destination from such a location.
point to leave the digitized road network, you At the start of the route guidance, you will see
will hear the announcement The the Off Road message and a direction arrow.
destination is nearby. Follow the The direction arrow shows the compass
arrow on the display. heading to the actual destination.
You will then see an arrow that indicates the The route is highlighted blue from the nearest
direction to the off-road destination. When road known to the system.
the off-road destination is close to the road, As soon as the vehicle is back on a road
Area of dest. reached appears in addition known to the system, route guidance
below the arrow. continues in the usual way.
The section of the route from the last known
point on the map to the off-road destination Off-road during route guidance
is indicated with a dashed line after a certain
length. It simply shows the direction to the The road geometry may differ from the data
off-road destination without taking account of on the digital map, due to road construction,
any type of obstacles in the way. for example.
In such cases, the system cannot allocate the
vehicle position to the digital map and the
vehicle is therefore in an off-road position.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 135
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance) 135
The Off Road message and an arrow showing X Switching off navigation messages:
the compass heading to the destination Press button 8 during an
appear on the display. announcement.
As soon as the system can allocate the You will see the message The driving
vehicle position to the map again, route instructions have been muted. for a
guidance continues in the usual way. short while.
i The announcements remain switched off
Control systems
Navigation announcements even if you start a new route guidance or if
COMAND is switched off/on with button
G Warning! u.
Navigation announcements are intended to If you switch COMAND off by removing the
direct you while driving without diverting your SmartKey from the starter switch and then
attention from the road and driving. switch the ignition back on after more than
Please always use navigation announcements 3 minutes, the announcements are
instead of consulting the map display for automatically switched back on.
directions. Consulting the symbols or map X Switching navigation announcements
display for directions may cause you to divert back on manually: Select Navi Q RPT.
your attention from driving and increase your X Adjusting volume of the messages:
risk of an accident. Adjust the volume during an automatic
announcement (Y page 87).
i If Chinese is set as the system language, or
the navigation announcements are in
X Call up an announcement manually using
English. For information on how to set the
Navi Q RPT and adjust the volume
system language see (Y page 94).
(Y page 87).
Navigation announcements are muted
during telephone calls. You can, however, i You can use the function Audio
call up a current announcement at any Fadeout (Y page 106) to reduce the
time. You can also call up a current volume of audio sources during navigation
announcement at any time if you have announcements.
missed an announcement.
Route guidance is active already.
COMAND navigation system (during
X Calling up a current announcement: route guidance)
Select Navi Q RPT.
Cancel route guidance
or
X Press favorite button h if the button has X Select Destination Q Cancel Route
been programmed with this function Guidance in map view with the menu
(Y page 94). system displayed (Y page 102).
Continuing canceled route guidance

X Select Destination Q Continue
Route Guidance in map view with the
menu system displayed (Y page 102).
COMAND calculates the route.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 136
136 COMAND navigation system (during route guidance)
Displaying info If the destination is located within a

partially digitized area, the following data
X Select Info in map view with the menu may differ from the facts:
system displayed (Y page 102).
RDistance to destination
The route information appears.
REstimated arrival time
REstimated remaining travel time
Control systems
Displaying route information

X Select Route Q Route Info in map view
with the menu system displayed
(Y page 102).
The route information appears.
Example illustration: Display with main destination

and stopover
: Distance/estimated time of arrival/
estimated journey time to the stopover
destination
; Stopover destination P
= Street, city and state/province
? Main destination O
A Distance/estimated time of arrival/
estimated journey time to the main
: Information for highlighted portion of
destination
route
i COMAND uses the time set in COMAND ; Highlighted portion of route
as the basis for calculating the estimated = Next portion of route
arrival time. The clock must be set correctly
X Closing route info: Select Back and press
in COMAND (Y page 92). The arrival time is
displayed in local vehicle time, based on W or press back button % in the center
the time zone set in the vehicle. console (Y page 87).
The following data cannot be seen until the X Displaying next or previous route
route calculation has been completed: section: Select Next or Previous.

X Zooming into or out of route: Select N
RDistance to destination
or M.
REstimated arrival time
REstimated remaining travel time
Where am I?
You can display your current position while
route guidance is active as well as when route
guidance has been canceled.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 137
COMAND navigation system (during route guidance) 137
Symbols indicate POIs in the area of the

respective highway exit.
Control systems
: Current position (city and state/province)
; Next intersection or exit ahead
= Previous intersection or exit
X Showing/hiding highway information:
? Current street Select Navi.
A Current position X Check or uncheck the Highway
X Select Navi Q Position Q Where am information check box.

I?.
Detour function
Compass i The detour function blocks a section of
You can have the current cardinal direction the route ahead of you. You can set the
into which the front of the vehicle points length of the blockage. If possible,
displayed. COMAND calculates a detour route.
X Select Route Q Detour in map view with
the menu system displayed (Y page 102).
The detour function display appears.
X Setting length of the blockage: Select
More or Less until the desired length is set.
: Current cardinal direction

; Geo coordinates
X Select Navi Q Position Q Compass.
Displaying highway information

When this function is enabled, highway
information ahead will display automatically.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 138
138
Control systems COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic)
: Blocked route section : Route distance, time, and time of arrival

; Current vehicle position; the triangle for the currently selected alternative
indicates the vehicle’s direction of travel route marked in deep blue
= Information about the blocked route ; On the Route: Symbols indicate special
section parts, such as tunnels, ferries or toll
roads, on the displayed alternative route.
i Blocked route section : is always = Mode: Current settings for the displayed
highlighted in red/white. The information alternative route
about blocked route section = shows Avoid: Symbols of route parts to avoid,
which section of the route is blocked and for example tunnels, ferries or toll roads
the length of the blocked section.
X Displaying/selecting other alternative
X Starting route calculation: Select Start, routes: Select Previous or Next.
see also (Y page 120). X Accepting the currently selected, deep
X Deleting blockage: Select Navi Q blue route for route guidance: Select
Route Q Detour Q Delete. Start.
Alternative Route COMAND navigation system (real-

time traffic)
You can calculate and display alternative
routes in addition to the route that COMAND Traffic messages
displays automatically. The original route is
displayed in light blue while the alternative
i A subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite
route is dark blue. Radio service provider is required for the
satellite radio reception referred to here.
You can find more information on satellite
(Y page 102), select Route Q radio in chapter “Satellite Radio”
Alternative Route. (Y page 170).
COMAND can receive and incorporate traffic
messages via satellite radio into the
navigation system. Traffic report messages
and map symbols can then be viewed in the
COMAND display.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 139
COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) 139
Display settings Real-time traffic notifications in the

map
You can select what kind of traffic information
is displayed on the map. COMAND can display certain traffic events in
the map. The notifications are shown in the
map scale range from 1/16 mi to 20 mi.
Free Flow traffic messages are only
displayed with a map scale of 1/16 miles to
Control systems
5 miles.
X Set the required map scale (Y page 102).
X Select Navi Q Traffic Symbols on

Map
X Displaying traffic incidents: Select
Incidents.
Road sections for which traffic incidents
are reported are indicated by yellow
symbols and arrows. 1, 2 Marker symbols for the extension of
X Displaying traffic speed and flow: Select the affected route section
Speed & Flow. 3 Symbol for event on the route
Road sections for which traffic 4 Current vehicle position and direction
obstructions are reported are indicated by of travel
yellow or red vehicle symbols.
A Map scale
X Displaying normal traffic flow: Select
Free Flow.
Road sections with reported free flowing
traffic are indicated as green lines.
Real-time traffic notification symbols

i Red and yellow cars and green and yellow lines appear on the map when Speed & Flow,
Free Flow, or Incident are selected via Navi Q Traffic Symbols on Map.
The diamond shaped icons appear when Traffic Q Traffic Symbol Info is selected
from the map submenu.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 140
140 COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic)
Symbol Description Traffic notifications in map display Traffic Traffic

report report
lists message
Green Free-flowing No obstacles for traffic flow. Appears No entry No
line with traffic on the free-flow side (direction) of the message
arrows road.
Yellow Incidents Possible obstacles for traffic flow (e.g. No entry No
Control systems
line with road work). Appears on the affected message

arrows side (direction) of the road.
Warning Indicates a location for which a Appears Appears
(red) warning message has been issued. with with
Red arrow indicate the driving warning warning
direction to which the warning entry type entry type
message applies.
Incident Indicates a location for which a Appears Appears
(yellow) message has been issued. Yellow with with
arrow indicate the driving direction to incident incident
which the message applies. entry type entry type
Traffic jam Appears at the beginning of traffic Appears Appears
on route congestion from the driver's point of with traffic with
(stop-and- view if route guidance is active and jam on traffic jam
go) route goes through congested area. route on route
Yellow car symbols could appear in (stop-and- (stop-and-
combination with this symbol. go) entry go) entry
type type
Traffic jam Appears at the beginning of traffic Appears Appears
on route congestion from the driver's point of with traffic with
view if route guidance is active and jam on traffic jam
route goes through congested area. route entry on route
Red car symbols could appear in type entry type
combination with this symbol.
Blocked Appears at the beginning of a blocked Appears Appears
section on area from the driver's point of view if with with
route route guidance is active and route blocked blocked
goes through blocked area. section section
XX XX symbols could appear in entry type entry type
combination with this symbol.
Traffic jam Traffic congestion, average speed (Not (Not
(stop-and- 25 – 45 mph (40 – 72 km/h). possible) possible)
go) Could appear repeatedly to indicate
(yellow car) length of traffic congestion.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 141
COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic) 141
Symbol Description Traffic notifications in map display Traffic Traffic

report report
lists message
Traffic jam Traffic congestion, average speed (Not (Not
(red car) 5 – 20 mph (8 – 32 km/h). possible) possible)
Could appear repeatedly to indicate
length of traffic congestion.
Control systems
XXXX Blocked Road impassable. (Not (Not
section Could appear repeatedly to indicate possible) possible)
length of blocked area
Displaying real-time traffic reports

X If necessary, switch to navigation mode
and show the menu system (Y page 102).
X Select Traffic.
COMAND searches for satellite radio
channels sending traffic messages.
The message No traffic reports are
currently available for this area.
may appear for the following reasons:
RMessages were not yet received.
1 Country, state or province indicator
RThere are no messages available.
(optional)
X Cancelling the search: Select Cancel. 2 Road concerned
X Closing the message: Select OK
X Displaying a traffic message: Select an
If there are traffic reports, you will see a list item from the list.
or a submenu, depending on whether route The traffic message appears, see “Example
guidance is active or not. of a traffic message” (Y page 142).
i A traffic message may also concern an X Closing the list: Slide XVY once or
area or region rather than a road, e.g. repeatedly.
impaired visibility due to fog. X Displaying traffic symbol information:
List when route guidance is not active Select Traffic Symbol Info
(Y page 142).
The list shows all the roads, areas or regions
for which messages are available.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 142
142 COMAND navigation system (real-time traffic)
List when route guidance is active Example of a traffic message

Control systems
Submenu with route guidance active 1 Area designation
X
2 Affected road
Displaying a list with traffic messages
on the current route: Select Display 3 Affected driving direction
Messages on Route. 4 Message 1 of 8 for the road affected
X Displaying a list with all traffic 5 Turnoff, crossroads or junction before the
messages: Select Display All affected road section
Messages. 6 Text of traffic message
X Displaying traffic symbol information: C Turnoff, crossroads or junction after the
Select Traffic Symbol Info affected road section
(Y page 142). D Traffic symbol
After selecting Display Messages on
X Scrolling within the message or to the
Route or Display All Messages a list with
traffic messages appears. next message: Turn cVd or slide ZVÆ.
X Returning to the message list: Slide
XVY.
Traffic symbol information

X Displaying traffic symbol information:
Select Traffic Symbol Info.
1 Country, state or province indicator

(optional)
2 Road concerned
X Displaying a traffic message: Select an

item from the list.
The traffic message appears, see “Example 1 Selected traffic message
of a traffic message” (Y page 142).
2 Affected driving direction
X Closing the list: Slide XVY once or
repeatedly.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 143
COMAND navigation system (destination memory) 143
X Back to list: Select Back.

X Displaying previous or next traffic
message: Select Previous or Next.
X Displaying details for selected traffic
message: Select Details.
X Switching to map view: Select Map.
Control systems
COMAND navigation system
(destination memory)
Example illustration: Destination memory list with
My address predictive speller :
i The destination memory always contains In the destination memory list with predictive
an entry called My Address. You can save speller :, the predictive speller is
your home address, for example, under this automatically activated.
entry. X Destination memory list without
predictive speller: Press W immediately.
Assigning your address for the first or
time or changing your own address X Destination memory list with
Assigning and/or changing your own predictive speller: Slide ZV repeatedly

address until the predictive speller disappears.
X
The list entry My Address is automatically
Select Navi Q Destination Q From
highlighted as long as you have not entered
Memory.
any characters using the predictive speller.
Depending on the number of entries in the
destination memory, you will see the If you have entered characters from the
destination memory list with or without predictive speller: Rotate cVd or slide
predictive speller. ZV repeatedly until the list entry My
Address is highlighted.
X Press W.
Further operation depends on whether you

want to enter the address manually or use an
address book entry as your own address.
Entering an address manually
X If you want to assign your own address
for the first time: Select Create New
Entry.
or
Example illustration: Destination memory list X If you want to change your own
without predictive speller
address: Select Change Q Create New
In the destination memory list without Entry.
predictive speller, the My Address entry is In both cases, the address input menu
automatically highlighted. appears.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 144
144 COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
X Enter the address. Proceed as described RAlberta or AB

for destination entry in the “Entering a ROntario or ON
destination by address” section
(Y page 107). Depending on which data is missing or cannot
X Select Save after entering the address. be found on the digital map, you must now
Your address is saved. either:
Rselect a state (USA) or province (Canada)
Using the address book entry as your own
Ror enter a city
Control systems
address
Ror enter a street
X If you want to assign your own address
for the first time: Select Assign Ror enter a house number
Address Book Entry. X Selecting a state (USA) or province
or (Canada): Select desired state (USA) or
X If you want to change your own province (Canada) from the list.
address: Select Change Q Assign X Entering a city: Proceed as described for
Address Book Entry Q Home or Work. destination entry in the “Entering a city”
In both cases, the menu appears for section (Y page 111).
searching for an address book entry. X Entering a street: Proceed as described
X Select desired address book entry. for destination entry in the “Entering a
Proceed as described in the “Searching for street” section (Y page 114).
an address book entry” section X Entering a house number: Proceed as
(Y page 160). described for destination entry in the
Once the address data is complete and if it “Entering a house number” section
matches the digital map data, COMAND (Y page 117).
saves the entry as your own address in the If all data is available and matches the
destination memory. digital map data, you can save the address.
If address data is still missing or if it cannot X Saving: Select Save.
be found on the digital map, a message
appears indicating that the address is Selecting your own address for route
incomplete. guidance
X Closing message: Select OK.
i In the address book entry, the city and Memory.
street must be spelled in the same way as The destination memory list appears either
the destination entry so that the data with or without the predictive speller.
matches the digital map data. Whether the predictive speller appears
In order for the state (USA) or province depends on the number of entries in the
(Canada) to match the map data, you may destination memory.
either enter the entire name or the
abbreviation in the address book.
Examples:
RFlorida or FL
RColorado or CO
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 145
COMAND navigation system (destination memory) 145
Destination memory list without If you have entered characters from the
predictive speller predictive speller: Rotate cVd or slide
ZV repeatedly until the list entry My
Address is highlighted.
X Press W.
If your own address has already been
assigned, you will see the menu for starting
route guidance with your own address data.
Control systems
X Starting route calculation/guidance:
Select Start and press W
or
X Exiting menu: Select %.
In the destination memory list without

predictive speller, the My Address entry is
automatically highlighted. Saving a destination in the
X Press W. destination memory
If your own address has already been i This function also saves the destination in
assigned, you will see the menu for starting the address book. There COMAND creates
route guidance with your own address data. an address book entry containing
X Starting route calculation/guidance: complete, navigable address data. You can
Select Start and press W then select this entry in the address book
or and start navigation to the address.
X Exiting menu: Select %. For information on how to enter a destination
from the destination memory, see
Destination memory list with predictive (Y page 120).
speller
Saving after the address has been
entered
X Select Save after entering the address
(Y page 107).
You can now select save options.
Saving during route guidance

X Select Destination Q Save
Destination during route guidance.
You can now select save options.
In the destination memory list with predictive
speller :, the predictive speller is
automatically activated.
X Slide ZV repeatedly until the predictive
speller disappears.
The list entry My Address is automatically
highlighted as long as you have not entered
any characters using the predictive speller.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 146
146 COMAND navigation system (destination memory)
Saving a destination from the list of last the “Creating a new address book entry”
destinations section (Y page 161).
X Select Navi Q Destination Q From Assigning a destination to an address
Last Destinations. book entry
The list of last destinations appears.
i This function assigns the complete,
X Select desired destination.
navigable address data to an already
The address of the destination is displayed.
existing address book entry. You can then
Control systems
X Select Save.
select this entry in the address book and
You can now select save options. start navigation to the address from there.
X Select Assign Address Book Entry.
Selecting save options
X Select desired category, e.g. Home or
Saving a destination without a name Work.
X Select Save without Name. The menu appears for searching for an
COMAND saves the destination in the address book entry.
destination memory and uses the address X Select desired address book entry.
as the destination name. Proceed as described in the “Searching for
or an address book entry” section
X Select Save as "My Address". (Y page 160).
COMAND saves the destination in the If the selected address book entry does not
destination memory as your own address. yet contain any navigable address data,
COMAND saves the data.
Saving a destination with a name If the selected address book entry already
X Select Save with Name. contains navigable address data, you will
X
see a question asking you if the previous
Select desired category, e.g. Home or
data should be overwritten.
Work.
X Select Yes or No.
The input menu appears with the data fields
and the predictive speller. If you select Yes, COMAND saves the data.
Deleting a destination from the

destination memory
Memory.
Depending on the number of entries in the
destination memory, you will see the
destination memory list with or without
predictive speller.
: Selected data field with input mark

(cursor)
; Predictive speller
X Entering data: Proceed as described in the

“Changing the data field” operating step in
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 147
COMAND navigation system (last destinations) 147
COMAND navigation system (last

destinations)
i COMAND automatically saves the last

destinations for which the route calculation
was launched. It is stored in the “last
destinations” memory. If this memory is
full, COMAND deletes the oldest
Control systems
destination. You can also save one
destination from the list of last destinations
in the destination memory. It will be saved
Example illustration: Destination memory list
without predictive speller there permanently.
Saving a destination permanently in

the destination memory
X Proceed as described in the “Saving a
destination from the list of last
destinations” section (Y page 146).
Saving the vehicle position in the list

of last destinations
Example illustration: Destination memory list with X Centering map on the vehicle’s
predictive speller :
position: Select Navi Q Position Q
X Select desired destination. Proceed as Vehicle Position Map.
described for destination entry in the X Saving: Select Navi Q Position Q
“Entering a destination from the Store Vehicle Position.
destination memory” section
(Y page 120).
X Select Delete after selecting the
Saving the cross hair position in the
destination to be deleted. list of last destinations
A prompt appears asking whether you want
to delete the destination. i If you have manually moved the map, you
X Select Yes or No. will see a cross hair on the map
If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the (Y page 102). You can save the cross hair
destination. position as a destination in the list of last
destinations.
i If the navigable address data of the
X Showing menu system, if necessary:
destination to be deleted has also been
assigned to an address book entry, Press W.
COMAND deletes the data there as well. If X Select Position Q Save Crosshair
the corresponding address book entry Position.
does not contain any further data, such as
telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the
entire address book entry.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 148
148 COMAND telephone
Deleting one of the last destinations General notes

X Select Navi Q Destination Q From i USA only:
Last Destinations. This device complies with Part 15 of the
The list of last destinations appears. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
X Select desired destination. following two conditions:
The address of the destination appears. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Select Delete. interference, and
Control systems
X Select Yes or No. 2. this device must accept any

COMAND telephone operation.
Safety notes Any unauthorized modification to this
G Warning! operate the equipment.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a cellular telephone while driving. i Canada only:
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety This device complies with RSS-210 of
reasons, the driver should not use the cellular Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
telephone while the vehicle is in motion. Stop the following two conditions:
the vehicle in a safe location before placing or 1. This device may not cause interference,
answering a call. and
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile 2. this device must accept any
phone9 while driving, please use the interference received, including
handsfree feature and be sure to pay interference that may cause undesired
attention to the traffic situation at all times. operation of the device.
Use the mobile phone only when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Any unauthorized modification to this
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe device could void the user’s authority to
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself operate the equipment.
and others.
14 m) every second.
9 Observe all legal requirements

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 149
COMAND telephone 149
Using the Bluetooth® interface Rthe COMAND controller

Rthe multifunction steering wheel
COMAND provides telephony via the
Bluetooth® interface by connecting a Rthe Voice Control System (Y page 237)
Bluetooth®-compatible mobile phone. The Unless otherwise specified, the descriptions
following functions can be used when a and illustrations in this section apply to
suitable mobile phone is connected to the COMAND or the telephone keypad in the
Bluetooth® interface: center console. Thus, in order to use the
Control systems
RHands-free phone operation described functions you always have to call
RPhone up the Telephone menu. The fastest way to
book
get to the Telephone menu is pressing
RReception of electronic business cards shortcut button S.
(vCards10) You can control other functions of the mobile
i For further information on suitable mobile phone via the COMAND, instrument cluster
phones and connecting Bluetooth®- control system (Y page 230) or Voice Control
enabled mobile phones to COMAND System (Y page 237).
Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com Caller ID
Rcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer
COMAND can display the telephone number
Assistance Center at
and the name of the caller, e.g. for an
1-800-FOR-MERCedes
incoming call and also in other menus or
(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)
displays.
Rcall Customer Service at For the telephone number to be displayed,
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) the caller must transmit his telephone
number.
Calls disconnected while the vehicle is This is also the case for name displays. For
in motion this, the telephone number and the name of
A call may be disconnected if the caller must also be saved in the mobile
phone book.
Rthere is insufficient network coverage
Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver Functional restrictions
area (cell) into another and no channels are
free or the cell is full You will not be able to use the telephone, or
you may have to wait a while, in the following
situations:
Operating options
RIf the Bluetooth function in COMAND or
i The components and operating principles on the mobile phone is switched off.
of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76). RIf the telephone has not yet logged into the
You can operate the mobile phone using the network.
following: The telephone tries to log into a network
Rthe keys on the mobile phone automatically. If no network is available,
Rthe
you will also not be able to make a “911”
COMAND telephone keypad in the
emergency call. If you attempt to make an
center console
10 vCards are electronic business cards used by e-mail applications, mobile phones, PDAs, etc. to exchange
contact information.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 150
outgoing call, the No Service message will With the telephone keypad : you can:
appear for a short while. REnter and clear numbers and special
RThe SIM card is not inserted in GSM type characters.
phone. RReject, answer, connect and end calls.
RWhen you remove the SmartKey from the
X Entering characters: Flip up cover ;.
starter switch during a call in hand-free
mode, the call will be maintained for up to X Enter characters using buttons ´ -
Æ.
Control systems
30 minutes. It will then be terminated.

Switch to “Private Mode” on the mobile
i You can enter the * character by pressing
phone before switching off COMAND to
maintain the call beyond that time limit. button Ã once. Pressing button Ã
Refer to the operating instructions of your again within 1.5 seconds enters the +
mobile phone. character.
RWhen X Deleting individual characters: Press
you want to switch off COMAND
during a call in hands-free mode, the button $.
message You cannot shut off COMAND X Deleting an entire word or number:
until you have finished your Press and hold button $ until the word
telephone call. appears. or number is deleted.
Activating telephone mode “911” emergency call

X Select Telephone. i The “911” emergency call system is a
or public service. Using it without due cause
X Press button 6 on telephone keypad. is a criminal offense.
or i This function places a call to the local
X Press shortcut button S once or twice. “911” provider. It does not initiate a Tele
Aid call.
i The number of times you have to press
shortcut button S depends on the The following describes how to dial a “911”
operating mode currently selected. emergency call using the COMAND head unit
when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile
phone is connected via the Bluetooth®
Telephone keypad interface to COMAND. Unless otherwise
specified, the descriptions refer to the
COMAND head unit.
Consult the separate mobile phone operating
instructions that came with your mobile
phone for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile phone.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 151
The following conditions must be met for a Placing a “911” emergency call with the
“911” emergency call via COMAND: mobile phone locked
RMobile phone must be switched on. i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can
RThe corresponding mobile make an emergency call on the mobile
communications network must be phone itself, without the use of COMAND.
available.
i Emergency calls may not be possible with Bluetooth interface
Control systems
all telephone networks or if certain network
services and/or telephone functions are Bluetooth® is a technology for wireless
active. Check with your local service exchange of data over short distances of up
providers. to approximately 33 feet (10 m). You can
connect your mobile phone to COMAND or
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
exchange vCards using Bluetooth®.
will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.
Placing a “911” emergency call using Activating and deactivating Bluetooth®

COMAND with the mobile phone X Select Vehicle Q System Q
unlocked Bluetooth Q Bluetooth activated.
X Press button S to switch to telephone
mode.
X Enter 911 using the telephone keypad in
the center console.
X Press button 6 on the telephone
keypad in the center console.
or
X Select 6 in the COMAND display and
press W for dialing to begin.
Connecting call… appears in the
COMAND display while the mobile phone Bluetooth® is activated when the check box
establishes the connection. is checked.
X Wait until the emergency call center
answers, then describe the emergency. Mobile phone prerequisites
i Depending on the phone type, if no SIM A Bluetooth®-compatible mobile phone is
card is inserted in a GSM mobile phone or required for telephony via the COMAND using
if there is no service on a CDMA mobile the Bluetooth® interface.
phone, NO SERVICE may appear in the
COMAND display. In that case, you only can i For further information on suitable mobile
make an emergency call on the mobile phones and connecting Bluetooth®-
phone itself, without the use of COMAND. enabled mobile phones to COMAND
Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 152
1-800-FOR-MERCedes settings. appears. Activate Bluetooth® in

(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA) the COMAND manually (Y page 151).
Rcall Customer Service at Authorizing the mobile phone
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
The mobile phone must be registered, e.g.
The battery of the mobile phone should authorized, before you can use it in
always be charged sufficiently to avoid connection with COMAND for the first time.
malfunctions. You can authorize several mobile phones.
Control systems
You should check the following on your COMAND will always connect to the last
mobile phone (see your mobile phone connected mobile phone within range.
operating instructions) to prepare for i If the connection to the last connected
telephony via the Bluetooth® interface: mobile phone fails, COMAND searches for
RHands-Free Profile (HFP)
the mobile phone that was connected
The mobile phone must support Hands- before that.
Free Profile 1.0 or higher. When authorizing a new mobile phone, it will
i Some displays, such as the signal be connected automatically11.
strength, appear depending on the X Select Data/Connections Q
supported Hands-Free Profile version. Bluetooth Telephones Q Update.
RBluetooth® visibility The COMAND searches for Bluetooth®
With certain mobile phones, the devices within range and lists them in the
Bluetooth® function must be activated but Bluetooth® phone list.
also made "visible" to other devices. The duration of the search depends on the
RBluetooth® device name number of Bluetooth® devices within range
and the characteristics of the mobile
Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
phone, such as Hands-Free Profile version
device name. The device name is arbitrary,
and possibly required visibility.
but it may be identical for all devices of a
single mobile phone manufacturer. You
should therefore assign an individual and
unique device name to your mobile phone.
Connecting the mobile phone

X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the
PIN. Refer to the mobile phone operating
instructions for details.
X Activate the Bluetooth® functionality on
the mobile phone. Refer to mobile phone
operating instructions for detail.
Bluetooth® is activated in the COMAND by
default. If the Bluetooth function in the
COMAND is not activated, the message
Bluetooth not activated in system
11 Function available if supported by the mobile phone.

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 153
The passkey should have at least four digits

in order to establish a secure Bluetooth®
connection.
Entering a passkey in COMAND
You can enter the passkey into COMAND via
the digits in the menu bar or the telephone
keypad.
Control systems
X Entering via the menu bar: Select the
respective digits with the COMAND
controller and confirm the selection.
Example illustration: Bluetooth® phone list
or
: Currently connected # and authorized
X Entering via the telephone keypad:
L mobile phone
Press the respective digits on the
; Mobile phone already authorized but not
telephone keypad.
within range (L appears in grey)
X Confirming: Select ¬ in the menu bar.
= New recognized mobile phone within
range, not authorized yet or
X Press z or ; on the telephone
i When the Bluetooth® phone list is full, you keypad.
will be prompted to deauthorize a X Deleting entry: Select F in the menu bar
Bluetooth® device (Y page 154). If and press W.
COMAND cannot find your mobile phone, or
an external authorization (Y page 154)
X Press $ on the telephone keypad.
may be necessary.
X Authorizing: Choose a mobile phone that Entering a passkey into the mobile phone
is not authorized yet = from the You will be prompted to enter the passkey
Bluetooth® phone list and select Options (identification, code) into your mobile phone
Q Authorize. after the Bluetooth® connection was
The prompt to enter the passkey appears. successful. Refer to the operating
instructions of your mobile phone for details.
X Enter the same passkey that you have
entered into the COMAND.
i You might have to confirm the passkey on
your mobile phone. Check your mobile
phone display.
When the message Error during
authorization process. appears on
your COMAND display, you have either
exceeded the time limit or the passkey was
incorrect. Repeat the process.
The passkey is an arbitrary string of 1 to 16
digits. You have to enter the same passkey The mobile phone is connected with the
for COMAND and the Bluetooth® device that COMAND (authorized). You can now make
you want to authorize. Refer to the operating phone calls via the hands-free function of the
instructions of your mobile phone for details. COMAND.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 154
External authorization Deauthorizing the mobile phone

Certain security settings in your mobile X Select Data/Connections Q
phone may prevent COMAND from finding Bluetooth Telephones.
your mobile phone. In this case, you might X Choose the mobile phone from the list and
want to check if your mobile phone can select Options Q De-authorize.
recognize the COMAND. The Bluetooth® You will be asked whether you want to
device name of COMAND is MB Bluetooth. deauthorize the device.
X Select Data/Connections Q
Control systems
X Select Yes.
Bluetooth Telephones.
X Go to Update and select Options Q i You should delete the device name MB
External Authorization. Bluetooth from the Bluetooth® list of the
mobile phone before authorizing that
X Activate the Bluetooth® search on the
mobile phone again.
mobile phone. Refer to mobile phone
operating instructions for detail. Connecting another mobile phone
X Select MB Bluetooth on the mobile phone. You can switch between several mobile
X When prompted, enter the passkey into phones that you have authorized.
COMAND and the mobile phone i Switching to another authorized mobile
(Y page 153). phone is only possible while no phone calls
are being made.
Show details
Details can be displayed for each mobile X Select Data/Connections Q
phone in the Bluetooth® phone list. Bluetooth Telephones.
X Select Data/Connections Q X Select the mobile phone from the
Bluetooth Telephones. Bluetooth® phone list.
X Choose the mobile phone from the list and X Confirm the selection.
select Options Q Details. The selected mobile phone is connected
The following mobile phone details appear: provided it is within Bluetooth® range and
RBluetooth® name Bluetooth® is activated on the respective
device.
RBluetooth® address
You can only connect one mobile phone at
RAvailability status a time. The currently connected mobile
RAuthorization phone is indicated by a dot # in the
RBluetooth®
Bluetooth® phone list (Y page 153).
Class (mobile phone,
notebook, etc.)
Main telephone menu
X Closing detail display: Slide XVY.
When the connected mobile phone is ready,
the following display appears:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 155
= Receiver symbol ¡ (active) or ¢

(inactive)
? COMAND phone book
A Call lists
B Digits for call number entry
C Bluetooth® name of the currently
connected mobile phone
Control systems
Bars ; indicate the current signal strength
of the mobile network. When all bars full,
: Network status12 reception is best. When all bars are empty,
reception is poor or the mobile network is not
; Signal strength of mobile phone network
available at all.
Ä12
Telephone submenu overview

Data/Connections Call Lists
Bluetooth Telephones Calls Received
Address Book Calls Dialed
Download Contacts Delete Call Lists13
Delete Contacts
Setting Transmission and Reception X Select Data/Connections Q

Volume Bluetooth Telephones.
X When the desired mobile phone is selected:
Incorrect settings for transmission and
reception volume can impair call quality Select Options Q Reception Volume or
significantly. Transmission Volume.
You can therefore optimize these settings. i The options Reception Volume and
For information on best settings for your Transmission Volume will only appear
mobile phone when the selected mobile phone is
Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com authorized.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
(in the USA)
Rcall Customer Service at 1-800-387-0100
(in Canada)
12 Visible when supported by the mobile phone.

13 Only available when using a mobile phone that does not support automatic download of call lists.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 156
After answering the call, you will conduct the

conversation via the hands-free system. The
volume can be adjusted (Y page 88). For more
available functions during a single party call
see (Y page 157).
When a call comes in, the following appears
in the COMAND display:
Rthe phone number of the calling party
Control systems
Rthe name and number of the calling party

provided both are stored in the address
X
book
Changing the volume: Slide ZVÆ and
RCall from Unknown when the caller ID is
press W.
not being sent
i You can answer a call even when
Making calls COMAND is displaying a different main
G Observe Safety notes, see page 148. function. After answering the call, the
display switches to the telephone
Incoming call display14. Once you hang up, the display
switches back to the previous main
function.
Outgoing call
X Enter the phone number via the telephone
or
X Use the COMAND controller to enter the
phone number via the telephone menu.
or
X Use the Voice Control System to enter the
X Rejecting: Select Reject. phone number digit by digit or to enter a
or name from the phone book (Y page 237).
X Press button ~ on the multifunction X Deleting single digits: Press $ on the
steering wheel or on the telephone keypad telephone keypad in the center console
in the center console. briefly.
X Answering: Select Accept. or
or X Select r via the telephone menu and
X Press button 6 on the multifunction press W briefly.
steering wheel or on the telephone keypad
in the center console.
or
X Answer the call via the Voice Control
System (Y page 237).
14 Except you have accepted the call via button 6 on the multifunction steering wheel.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 157
X Deleting entire number: Press and hold Functions during a single party call
$ on the telephone keypad in the center (non-conference calls)
console until the number is deleted.
or
X Select r via the telephone menu and
press and hold W until the number is
deleted.
X Connecting call: Press button 6 on the
Control systems
multifunction steering wheel or on the
telephone keypad in the center console.
or
X Select 6 via the telephone menu
: Called or calling party
Redial ; 6 Active call
X Go to the telephone menu. = NEW Connect to more parties16
X Press 6 on the telephone keypad in the
? Switching hands-free microphone on/off
center console. A Enable touch-tone dialing17
or
B Ending call
X Select SEND from the telephone menu and
press W. Switching hands-free microphone on or
The list of previously dialed number off
appears. The last number you have called This function is available during an active call.
at the top of the list. X Switching off: Select Mike OFF in the
X Selecting number and connecting call: telephone menu.
Slide ZVÆ and press W to select a number Symbol Q appears and the message The
or press 6 on the telephone keypad in microphone is turned OFF. is displayed
the center console. briefly.
X Switching on: Select Mike ON in the
Calling voice mail15
telephone menu.
Your voice mail number must be stored on the Symbol Q goes out. The message The
SIM card of your mobile phone and be microphone is turned ON. appears
assigned to key 4 on the mobile phone briefly.
keypad.
X Press and hold ´ on the telephone Touch-tone dialing17
keypad in the center console. You can use touch-tone dialing to control
answering machines and other devices for
remote inquiry.
When you want to check your answering
machine for example, dial the respective
number.
15 Function only available when supported by the respective network provider.

16 Function only available when the mobile phone supports HFP 1.5 or higher.
17 Not available on all mobile phones.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 158
X Select DTMF from the telephone menu Call waiting, call holding, and
during a call. conference calls with multiple
parties18, 19, 20
You can receive a call while you are already
connected to another party (call waiting). You
can also make another call yourself while still
connected to another party.
Control systems
You can switch between both parties or

initiate a conference call.
You can toggle between two parties using call
hold or initiate a conference call with up to
two participants.
: Sending single digits via the predictive
Call waiting21
speller
When a call comes in while you are already
; Sending a phone book entry as a string
talking to another party, the incoming call
X Sending single digits: Select the desired appears in the COMAND display. In addition,
digit via predictive speller :. a signal sounds.
Each selected digit will be sent X Rejecting: Select Reject.
immediately. or
You can, for example, save the number for an X Press button ~ on the multifunction
answering machine in the phone book. You steering wheel or on the telephone keypad
can then search for the number for the in the center console.
answering machine in the phone book. X Accepting: Select Accept.
X Select Name. or
X Select the desired phone book entry. X Answer the call via the Voice Control
The entry will be sent as a string System (Y page 237).
immediately. or
X Back to call display: Select B on the X Press button 6 on the multifunction
COMAND display. steering wheel or on the telephone keypad
in the center console.
i You can also use touch-tone dialing via
The active call is put on hold. You are now
the Voice Control System (Y page 237).
connected to two parties. The new call you
Ending an active call have accepted is now the active call.
X Press button ~ on the multifunction i If your mobile phone does not support
steering wheel or on the telephone keypad HFP 1.5 or higher, accepting the new call
in the center console or select ~ via the will end the active call.
telephone menu.
18 Function only available when supported by the respective network provider.

19 Function only available when the mobile phone supports HFP 1.5 or higher.
20 Limited availability of these functions with CDMA devices.
21 Only available when the call waiting function on the mobile phone is activated.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 159
Calling an additional party

You can call another party during an active
call. The active call is put on hold.
X Select NEW from the telephone menu and
press W.
or
Control systems
X Enter the number to call manually
(Y page 156) or from the phone book
: Active call
(Y page 162).
; Call on hold
Switching between two parties (call hold) = Initiating conference call
When you are connected to two parties, the
X Initiating conference call: Select
telephone menu appears as follows:
Conference = using the COMAND
controller.
COMAND phone book and address

book
The COMAND phone book is an extract of
entries from the address book that contain at
least one phone number.
: Active call The COMAND address book holds entries
; Call on hold from various sources such as mobile phones,
SD cards, imports from Bluetooth® devices,
X Switching to the other party: Select ; the COMAND phone book, or the navigation
using the COMAND controller. system. These entries can be used for making
or phone calls or for navigation.
keypad in the center console. Importing contacts automatically
or When a mobile phone is connected to
X Press button 6 on the multifunction COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface, the
steering wheel. contacts of the mobile phone are imported
into the COMAND phone book automatically.
Initiating a conference call This may take some time, depending on the
You can initiate a conference call with the mobile phone. Phone book entries stored in
active parties and parties that are on hold. All the mobile phone itself or the SIM card may
participants will be able to hear and talk to be imported, depending on the mobile phone.
each other. Contacts in the COMAND that have been
imported automatically are identified by the
symbols d or 0. Such contacts can only
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 160
be accessed when the respective mobile X Stopping data import: Press W.

phone is connected to COMAND via the or
Bluetooth® interface. X Press %.
When the data have been imported, the
Importing contacts manually message Import successful. appears in
the COMAND display.
When the COMAND phone book memory is
full, the message Memory full.
Control systems
Contacts could not be imported

completely. appears in the COMAND
display.
i When switching to another main function,
such as navigation, while importing data via
Bluetooth®, the import is aborted. The
import of vCards from a memory card
however will be continued.
i Contacts that were imported manually
can always be accessed. Contacts that
Accessing contacts/details
were imported automatically can only be
accessed when the respective mobile You can access contacts via the list or the
phone is connected to COMAND via the predictive speller.
Bluetooth® interface.
Data can be imported
Rfrom memory card
Rvia the Bluetooth® interface (for example
Bluetooth® phone or Bluetooth® PC)
X Importing data: Load the memory card or
activate Bluetooth® in COMAND and the
Bluetooth® mobile phone/PC. Refer to
operating instructions of the respective
Bluetooth® device. Basic address book display
X Select Data/Connections Q Download : List
Contacts Q From Memory Card or Via ¤ Entry containing data that can be used
Bluetooth. for route guidance
X Select Add or Overwrite. ¦ Entry with voice name, see Voice
Control System (Y page 237)
i The contact data, or vCards22, must be
¥ Address book entry
sent from the Bluetooth® device to
COMAND. Refer to operating instructions d Mobile phone entry
of the respective Bluetooth® device. 0 SIM card entry
BT Bluetooth® entry
22 vCards are electronic business cards used by e-mail applications, mobile phones, PADS, etc. to exchange
contact information.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 161
¯ Memory card entry Displaying contact details

G Entry containing multiple phone X Select Options Q Details.
numbers The contact details appear.
; Two-row predictive speller X Back to list: Slide XVY until the list is
B Changing predictive speller highlighted.
language
p Changing character set Creating/editing contacts
Control systems
F Deleting selection i This function is not available at a vehicle
¬ Confirming selection speed of above approximately 3 mph
% Back (5 km/h). When the vehicle speed is below
approximately 2 mph (3 km/h), the
Selecting contacts from list function is available again.
X Phone book: Select Name.
X Address book: Select Data/Connections i You can create address data in the
Q Address Book. address book directly. When you save
phone numbers to the phone book, they are
X Changing from predictive speller to
created in the address book. When you
list: Press ZV until the predictive speller save a destination for navigation, COMAND
disappears. creates an address book entry that
or contains the entire data usable for route
X Select ¬. guidance.
X Selecting contact: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
cVd and press W.
Selecting contacts via predictive speller

X Phone book: Select Name.
X Address book: Select Data/Connections
Q Address Book.
X Changing from list to predictive
speller: Select Back from the list.
or
X Press %.
X Select the contact23 (Y page 160).
X Selecting character: Slide ZVÆ or XVY
X Select Options Q New Entry or
and press W. Repeat this procedure until
Change.
COMAND changes to the list automatically.
The input menu with the data fields
The first character you enter determines
appears.
the first letter of the entry you are
searching. When similar entries exist, the
next character that is different is
highlighted and thus offered for selection.
i You can also enter the characters via the
telephone keypad in the center console.
23 For changing contact only.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 162
Deleting contacts
Control systems
: Cursor
; Data field
X Selecting contact: Select Data/
= Two-row predictive speller
Connections Q Delete Contacts Q
B Selecting language
Internal Contacts or Imported from
p Changing character set memory card. or Imported via
*/E Selecting upper or lower case Bluetooth. or Delete All.
% Back X Confirming selection: Press W.
F Deleting selection You will be asked whether you want to
¬ Confirming selection delete the data.
? Preset category X Select Yes.
X Enter data into the data fields. i Automatically imported contacts cannot
X Entering data into data field: Select the be deleted (Y page 159).
respective characters in predictive speller
=. Calling a number saved in an entry
X Moving the cursor: Select the respective Via phone book
arrow YÆXZ in predictive speller =. X Select Name.
X Changing to other data field: Slide ZV
X Select contact (Y page 160).
until the predictive speller disappears.
X Contact with multiple phone numbers
X Slide ZVÆ and press W.
(entry with symbol G): Rotate cVd and
or press W.
X Select Æ in the predictive speller. or
X Aborting data entry: Select Back. X Press 6 on the telephone keypad in the
When a data field contains data, you will be center console.
asked whether you would like to save the X Contact with one phone number (entry
entry. without symbol G): Press W.
X Saving data: Select ¬.
or
The entry is created in the phone book and
X Press 6 on the telephone keypad in the
the address book.
center console.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 163
Via address book Deleting voice name

X Select Data/Connections. X Search for an address book entry with voice
X Open Address Book. name.
X Select contact (Y page 160). X Select Options Q Voice Name Q
X Press W. Delete.
You will be asked if you want to delete the
X Rotate cVd and press W.
voice name.
or
Control systems
X Select Options Q Call. Listening to a voice name
X Search for an address book entry with voice
Starting route guidance to an entry name.

X Select Options Q Voice Name Q
i You can use this function once you have Listen.
saved a destination to the destination You will hear the voice name.
memory (Y page 120). COMAND will then
also save the entire destination data in the
address book.
Call lists
X Select an address book entry with symbol COMAND displays separate lists of the phone
¤. calls that came in and went out while the
X Display the entry details and select the mobile phone was in operation. The list of
address data field. incoming calls includes the ones you have
X Select Options Q Navigate Q Start. missed.
i The respective menu item can only be
i You can only select the function
selected when calls were made or received
Navigate when the address data field via COMAND or when call lists were
contains complete data usable for route imported from the mobile phone.
guidance. Entries with complete, usable
data is indicated by symbol ¤.
Selecting a call list entry
Voice names X Press shortcut button S.
X Select Call lists.
i Voice names are made via the Voice
A menu appears.
Control System (Y page 237).
Adding or changing voice names
i You can add one voice name for each
address book entry.
X Search for an address book entry. Entries
with voice name are indicated by symbol
¦.
X Select Options Q Voice Name Q Add
or Change.
Further operations is conducted via the
Voice Control System. The Voice Control
System will lead you through the menus.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 164
X Select Calls Received or Calls X Select OptionsQSave Number.

Dialed. X Select New Entry to create a new entry.
The respective list appears.
X Select a phone number category, for
example Home.
X Select a telephone category, for example
Cellular Phone Number.
Number category Symbol (phone
Control systems
and address book)

Unclassified None
Home 6
Work \
Example illustration: List of numbers you have
dialed
: Close list Phone category Symbol (phone
and address book)
; Phone number and name if available
= Options, for example saving Unclassified None
X Selecting entry: Slide ZVÆ. Cellular Phone ¢
X Dialing number: Press button 6.
Number
Incoming calls that you have missed or Pager ¨
rejected are indicated by a symbol in front of
Car ^
the name or number.
i Select Delete Call Lists to delete Landline ¬
both lists at the same time. The Delete Preferred O
Call Lists option is only available when
using a mobile phone that does not support
automatic download of call lists. i When you have not classified the phone
number and telephone category for a
Saving list entries phone number, symbol ; appears in the
display.
When a call comes in, COMAND displays the
phone number in the call list if the caller X Select Next (save).
number is not stored in the address book. You The input menu with the data fields
can save this entry. The entry still appears in appears. The data field for the phone
the call list. The phone number appears when number is filled-out automatically.
the number has not been used yet. The caller
name appears when the entry has been used
already.
Saving to address book as new entry
X Open a call list.
X Select the list entry.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 165
COMAND FM/AM radio 165
X Confirm the selection.

When selecting Yes, a list with the existing
five phone numbers appears.
X Select the phone number to overwrite.
COMAND replaces the selected phone
number with the new data.
Control systems
COMAND FM/AM radio
Safety notes
: Data fields for first name, last name, and
company G Warning!
; Number category Please devote your attention first and
= Phone category foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
? The data field for the phone number is Before your journey, please familiarize
filled-out automatically. yourself with the radio functions.
A Two-row predictive speller Only use the COMAND when road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise you
X Proceed as described in section “Creating/ could be involved in an accident in which you
editing contacts” (Y page 161). or others could be injured.
Adding to an existing address book entry

X Open a call list. FM/AM radio submenu overview
X Select the list entry.
X Select OptionsQSave Number.
X Select Add to add an entry.
X Select a phone number category, for

example Home.
X Select a telephone category, for example
Cellular Phone Number.
X Select Next (save).
The address book search menu appears.
X Select the desired entry (Y page 160).
X Confirm the selection.

COMAND saves the data when the entry
contains less than five phone numbers for
the selected phone number category.
A corresponding message appears.
When the entry contains five phone
numbers already, you are asked whether
you want to overwrite one of the existing
phone numbers.
X Select Yes or No.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 166
166 COMAND FM/AM radio
Radio Presets Channel Info FM or AM Sound

(except (except (only or WB
Weather Band) Weather Weather
Band) Band)
Save Station Autostore Channel list Program Switch to Treble
Information FM wave
band
Control systems
Frequency Entry Preset Switch to Bass

station list AM wave
band
Show Station Switch to Balance/
Info Weather Fader
Band
ª¥Radio 3D Sound
Active Source
for Rear
Rear OFF
Switching to radio mode

X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio.
or
X Press shortcut button R (Y page 77)
once or twice.
The radio display appears once you have
switched to radio mode. You will hear the
last tuned station/channel in the
previously selected wave band, provided
that the station/channel can be received.
Example illustration: Radio mode in FM wave band
i The number of times you have to press : Main area with frequency display
shortcut button R depends on the ; Preset position of selected station
operating mode currently selected. = Frequency of selected station
? Name of selected station; HD Radio™
stations with additional HD Radio™
symbol and program number (HD1,
HD2...)
A Sound settings
B To switch to FM wave band, AM wave
band or Weather Band
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 167
C Additional information provided by radio Switching to HD Radio™

station or HD Radio™ program i Since HD Radio™ stations are embedded
information in the AM/FM wave band, HD Radio™
D Artist and song title (when provided by the operation is very similar to analog AM/FM
radio station) radio operation.
E Preset options
You will only hear HD Radio™ programs if the
F Radio options HD Radio™ function is activated in the radio
Control systems
submenu.
i Station name display ? is available for
the AM/FM wave band and can only be
seen when it is switched on (Y page 170)
and if the station transmits a name.
HD Radio™
Important Notes
i HD Radio™ features include
Rdigital broadcasts in the same wave band
as analog AM/FM; the analog AM/FM
stations remain at their current place on X Select Radio £ HD Radio in the radio
the dial display.
Rthe ability to broadcast multiple program
If the check box Ç is checked, HD Radio™
is activated.
streams over a single FM/AM frequency
(e.g. HD1, HD2, etc.)
Rstatic-free, clear reception Switching wave bands
RFM stations offer CD quality sound, AM
You can switch between the FM, AM and WB
stations sound like analog FM stations
(Weather Band) wave bands.
Ra variety of data services, including text- X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q FM or
based information – artist name, song
AM or WB.
title, etc. – shown on the display
You will hear the last tuned station on the
More information on HD Radio™ you will selected wave band.
find at www.hdradio.com.
i Note that subprograms and program info

Selecting stations/channels
shown in illustrations are dependent on
program content delivered by the radio You have the following selection options:
stations. Program content is subject to RThe search function
change. Therefore, subprograms and
RThe station presets
program info shown in illustrations and
descriptions contained in this manual may RThe manual frequency entry
differ from the subprograms and program RThe channel list (Weather band only)
info delivered by the radio station.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 168
168 COMAND FM/AM radio
Selecting stations/channels using the Selecting stations by entering the

search function frequency manually
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main i This function is not available for Weather
area is selected. Band.
Depending on the direction in which the
X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q FM or
controller is being slid or rotated, the
system searches upward or downward and AM.
stops at the next receivable station/
Control systems
channel. Entering the frequency using the

COMAND controller
or
X Select Radio Q Enter Frequency.
X Press and hold button 9 or : on the
The menu for manual frequency entry
multifunction steering wheel24.
appears.
X Exiting menu without making an entry:
Selecting stations using station presets Press back button % in the center
i This function is not available for Weather console (Y page 87).
Band. X Increasing or decreasing number: Slide
ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
AM. i You can only select available frequencies.
X Select Presets.
X Selecting the next number: Slide VY.
or
X Confirming frequency entry: Press W.
X Press W when the main area is selected.
COMAND tunes in to the frequency
The preset menu appears. The dot # in entered.
front of a preset position indicates that the
currently selected station is saved there. i If you enter a frequency which is outside
X Select station preset by rotating cVd or the frequency range, COMAND tunes in to
sliding ZVÆ and press W. the next lowest frequency.
or Entering the frequency using the
X Enter a position number with the telephone telephone keypad
keypad using buttons ´ - Ã X Press button Ã on the telephone
(Y page 79). keypad (Y page 79).
or X Enter frequency using buttons Å -
X Press button 9 or : on the Ã.
multifunction steering wheel briefly24. COMAND tunes in to the frequency
entered.
Rear occupants can also select a station
using the buttons on the rear armrest Selecting channels using the WB
(Y page 80). channel
i This function is only available for Weather
Band.
24 Function is only available if the Audio menu is selected in the instrument cluster.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 169
X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q WB

Q Channel.
or
The channel list appears. The dot # in
front of a list entry indicates the currently
selected channel.
Control systems
X Select channel by rotating cVd or sliding
ZVÆ and press W.
X Selecting a preset position: Slide ZVÆ or
Rear occupants can also select a channel
using the buttons on the rear armrest rotate cVd.
(Y page 80).
Saving a station to a selected preset
position
Saving stations If you have called up the station preset screen
using option 1:
i Twenty stations can be saved in each
X Press W briefly.
wave band except for Weather Band.
You have the following options: In options 2 and 3:
RSaving X Press and hold W until you hear a signal.
stations manually
The station is saved.
RSaving stations using the autostore
function
Saving using the autostore function
Saving stations manually i This function is not available for Weather
Band. The autostore function saves
Option 1 receivable stations as presets in order of
X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q FM or their reception quality. All stations saved
AM. manually in the preset memory will be lost
X Select Radio Q Save Station. if COMAND finds 20 stations. If COMAND
finds less than 20 stations, for example 9,
Option 2 then the stations saved in preset
positions 1 – 9 will be overwritten.
Option 1
Option 3
X Select Autostore.
AM.
X Select Presets. Option 2
All three of these will call up a station preset X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q FM or
screen. The dot # in front of a preset AM.
position indicates that the currently selected X Select Presets Q Autostore.
station is saved there.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 170
170 COMAND satellite radio
Option 3 Displaying information

X Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q You can display program information or other
Radio Q Save Station Q Autostore. additional information when provided by the
radio station you are listening to.
X Select Info (if available) in the radio
Station name display display.
i In the FM wave band, COMAND can show The available information appears. The
Control systems
the name of the station currently tuned in. content and scope of the information
Station name display : can only be seen depends on the radio station.
when it is switched on and if the station X Closing screen: Slide XVY, press W or
transmits a name. press back button %.
COMAND satellite radio

Safety notes
G Warning!
Please devote your attention first and
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
Before your journey, please familiarize
yourself with the radio functions.
Only use the COMAND when road and traffic
X Switching the station name display on/ conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise you
off: Select Audio Q FM/AM Radio Q could be involved in an accident in which you
FM Q Radio Q Show Station Info. or others could be injured.
The station name display : is switched on
or off, depending on the previous setting.
When the station name display : is
switched on, a checkmark appears in front
of the Show Station Info menu item.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 171
COMAND satellite radio 171
Satellite radio submenu overview

i The components and operating principles of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
Sat. Radio Presets Info Category Sound
Channel List Station presets Showing Selecting Treble
program info category
Save Channel Bass
Control systems
Enter Channel Balance/Fader
Service 3D Sound
Introduction to satellite radio satellite radio’s main menu shows the No

Service screen. At this point, the radio’s
i A subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite functions are restricted.
Radio service provider is required for the
satellite radio operation described in this
section. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Switching to satellite radio
Benz Center for details and availability for
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio.
your vehicle.
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over or
130 channels of digital-quality radio, X Press shortcut button R (Y page 77)
including 100% commercial-free music, once or twice. The satellite radio menu
sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM appears if it was the last active radio mode.
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power The screen which then appears depends on
satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, the activation status of the satellite radio
coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. and service.
Canada. The following conditions are possible:
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming RSatellite radio service is not activated
is available for a monthly subscription fee. (only the preview channel is displayed).
For more information and service availability RSatellite radio service is activated.
call the SIRIUS XM Service Center at
1-888-539-7474, or visit
Rwww.sirius.com
Satellite radio service is not activated
(USA)
Rwww.siriuscanada.ca (Canada) The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
Service Center and the twelve-digit electronic
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular
or interrupted from time to time for a receiver are displayed.
variety of reasons, such as environmental
or topographic conditions and other things
we cannot control. Service might also not
be available in certain places (e.g. in
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
or within or next to buildings) or near other
obstructions. In such situations, the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 172
i If the satellite radio service has not been

activated, only the preview channel is
available. You cannot tune in another
channel. If you try to do this, you will see
the screen described in the section
“Satellite radio service is not activated”
(Y page 171).
Control systems
Satellite radio service is activated

The main satellite radio menu appears. You
This information is required when calling the will hear the last tuned channel, provided that
SIRIUS XM Service Center for an activation it can be received.
request.
i Activating the satellite radio service might Main satellite radio menu
not be available in certain places (e.g. in
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
or within or next to buildings). If a
subscription is not included with system
purchase, credit card information is
required to activate your account.
The activation process takes
approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling
the SIRIUS XM Service Center.
i It is also possible to activate the satellite

radio service online. To do so please visit : Main area with channel display
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio’s website at
; Preset position of selected channel
www.sirius.com (USA) or
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada). = Selected channel
? Selected program category
X Closing screen: Press W.
A Sound settings
B To select program category
Preview channel
C Artist and song title
D Other channel information
E Preset options
F Satellite radio options
i Main area : can show all channels

included in your subscription. Which
channels are shown depends on the
selected program category ?.
Note that categories and channels shown
in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 173
service provider. Programming content is Tuning in channels using channel

subject to change. search function
Therefore, channel and categories shown
in illustrations and descriptions contained i If you try to tune in a channel when the
in this manual may differ from the channels satellite radio service is not activated, you
and categories delivered by the service will see the screen described in the section
provider. “Satellite radio service is not activated”
(Y page 171).
Control systems
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main
Selecting program category area is selected.
i The channels are categorized. Categories Depending on the direction in which the
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting controller is being pressed or rotated, the
a certain type of program. system searches upward or downward and
stops at the next receivable channel.
Satellite radio channels are split up into
categories such as News, Sports, Rock, or i Which channels are found by the channel
Country, if available. search function depends on which
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q channels you have subscribed to and the
Category. program category you have selected
The category list appears. (Y page 173).
X Select category by rotating cVd or sliding Tuning in channels using channel
ZVÆ and press W. presets
When selecting a channel using the
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q
channel search function or the channel list,
you have access to the channels you Presets.
subscribe to and which are included in the or
selected category. X Press W when the main area is selected.
i When you select the category All The preset menu appears. The dot # in
Channels, you have access to all the front of a preset position indicates that this
channels you subscribe to, regardless of is the channel currently selected and being
category, when you are tuning in a channel listened to.
using the channel search function or the
channel list.
Tuning in channels
You have the following selection options:
Rthe channel search function
Rthe channel presets
Rthe manual channel number entry
Rthe channel list
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 174
X Select station preset and briefly press W. X Selecting next number: Slide XVY.
or X Confirming channel entry: Press W.
X Enter a position number with the telephone Further operation depends on whether the
keypad using buttons ´ - Ã selected channel number is valid or if the
(Y page 79). channel is included in your subscription.
COMAND tunes in the corresponding
channel as long as it is included in your Entering the channel number using the
subscription and is still available. telephone keypad
Control systems
X Press button Ã on the telephone

i Vehicles with rear multicontour seats: keypad (Y page 79).
Rear occupants can also select a channel X Enter channel number using buttons Å
using the buttons on the rear armrest
- Ã.
(Y page 80).
Further operation depends on whether the
If the channel is not included in your selected channel number is valid or if the
subscription, you will see the message channel is included in your subscription.
described in the section “Satellite radio
service is not activated” (Y page 171). Channel number is valid and channel is
If the channel is no longer available, you will included in subscription
see the message Invalid Channel. COMAND tunes in the channel entered.
X Closing message: Press W.
Channel number is invalid
You will see the message Invalid Channel.
Tuning in channels using manual
X Closing message: Press W.
channel number entry
i If you try to tune in a channel when the Channel number is valid but channel is
satellite radio service is not activated, you not included in subscription
will see the screen described in the section You will see the screen described in the
“Satellite radio service is not activated” section “Satellite radio service is not
(Y page 171). activated” (Y page 171).
X Closing display: Press W.
Entering the channel number using the
COMAND controller
X Select Audio Q Audio Q Sat. Radio Tuning in channels using the channel
Q Sat. Radio Q Channel Entry.
list
The menu for manual channel number entry X Select Audio Q Audio Q Sat. Radio
appears. Q Sat. Radio Q Channel List.
X Exiting menu without making an entry: The channel list appears. The dot # in
Press back button % in the center front of a list entry indicates the currently
console (Y page 87). selected channel.
X Increase or decreasing number: Slide X Select channel by rotating cVd or sliding
ZVÆ or rotate cVd. ZVÆ and press W.
i The contents of the channel list depends
on which channels are included in your
subscription and which program category
you have selected (Y page 173). If satellite
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 175
radio service is not activated, the channel In options 2 and 3:

list contains only the preview channel. X Press and hold W until you hear a signal.
The channel is saved.
Saving channels
i There are 20 preset positions available. Displaying information
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q Info (if
Option 1
Control systems
available).
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q Sat.
i If the program provider does not offer any
Radio Q Save Channel.
information, the Info menu item cannot be
selected.
Option 2
You will see a screen that may contain the
X Press W when the main area is selected. following information:
Rthe selected program category
Option 3 Rthe selected channel
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q Rthe artist of the track currently being played
Presets. Rthe name of the current track
All three of these will call up a preset menu.
The dot # in front of a preset position i The program provider determines what
indicates that this is the channel currently information is displayed on the screen.
selected and being listened to. COMAND shows no more than two lines per
item of information. If an item of
information is too long, COMAND shortens
it.
X Closing screen: Slide XVY or press W.
Channel update
The service provider may conduct a channel
update.
During the update, the message Updating
X Selecting a preset position: Slide ZVÆ or channels... will appear on the display. No
rotate cVd. functions can be operated in satellite radio
mode during the update.
Saving a channel to a selected preset
position
If you have called up the channel preset
screen using option 1:
X Press W briefly.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 176
176 COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3
Calling SIRIUS XM Service Center covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

14 m) every second.
i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS XM
Service Center if, for example:
RYou want to cancel the subscription or Notes about MP3 mode
resubscribe at a later date.
RYou
Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
have forgotten to pay the bill.
RCD-R and CD-RW
Control systems
RYou sell the vehicle.

RDVD-R and DVD-RW
X Select Audio Q Sat. Radio Q Sat. RDVD+R and DVD+RW
Radio Q Service.
RSD cards
The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
Service Center and the twelve-digit RUSB flash drives
electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the RiPod®
particular receiver are displayed.
RMP3 players
X Closing screen: Slide XVY or press W.
Permissible file systems

COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 RISO9660/Joliet for CDs
Safety notes RUDF for DVDs
G Warning! RFAT16 or FAT32 for storage media
COMAND and the CD/DVD drive in the rear
are classified as Class 1 laser products. You Multisession CDs
must not open the casing. There is a risk of For multisession CDs, the first session type
exposure to invisible laser radiation if you of the CD determines how COMAND will
open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or process the CD.
damaged.
For example, if the first session type is
COMAND and the CD/DVD drive in the rear according to the audio CD standard and the
do not contain any parts that you are able to second session type is according to the data
maintain yourself. For safety reasons, all CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,
maintenance work must be carried out by COMAND will treat the CD as a conventional
qualified technicians. audio CD. This means that it is only possible
to access the audio CD tracks. Access to the
G Warning!
MP3/WMA tracks is not possible.
Only carry out the following when the vehicle
Similarly, if the first session type is according
is stationary:
to the data CD standard containing MP3/
RInserting a disc/device WMA tracks and the second session type is
REjecting a disc/device according to the audio CD standard,
COMAND will treat the CD as a data CD. This
There is a risk of accident by being distracted
means that it is only possible to access the
from road and traffic conditions if you load a
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD
disc/device while the vehicle is in motion.
tracks is not possible.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 177
COMAND audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 177
File structure on a disc Example of a correct track name:

Track1.mp3
When you create an audio disc, the tracks can
be organized in folders. A disc may contain a
maximum of 4000 tracks. Compatible file systems and
The directory depth may not exceed a compression methods
maximum of 8 levels. The system will ignore COMAND supports the following formats:
files in lower levels. RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)25
Control systems
RMicrosoft Windows Media Audio (WMA) V2,
Notes on USB storage media
V7, V8 or V9 that are not copy-proof
Do not store data other than audio data on a
USB storage medium. Doing so will increase
the time required to initialize the USB storage
Bit and sampling rates
medium. MP3
A maximum of 8 directory levels with up to COMAND supports MP3 files of the following
4000 tracks each are supported. types:
For information on connecting USB storage RFixed and variable bit rates from
media to the built-in USB socket in the glove
32 kbit/s up to 320 kbit/s
box see (Y page 80).
RSampling rates of 24 kHz to 48 kHz
Track and folder names
WMA (Windows Media® Audio)
When you create an audio medium, you can Windows Media® Audio (WMA) is an audio
assign names to the tracks and folders. data compression technology developed by
COMAND uses these names for the Microsoft®.
corresponding display. Empty folders or
COMAND supports WMA files of the following
folders which contain data other than MP3/
types:
WMA tracks are not displayed by COMAND.
RFixed and variable bit rates from 5 kbit/s
If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root
directory itself (uppermost directory on up to 384 kbit/s
storage medium), the root directory will also RSampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
be treated as a folder. COMAND will then COMAND does not support WMA files of the
show the name of the root directory as the following types:
folder name. RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded
You must observe the following when files
assigning track names:
Rvariable bit rates
RTrack names must have at least one
RLosless Settings
character.
RWMA Pro
RTrack names must have the extension
“mp3” or “wma”. R5.1-Surround
RThere must be a period between the track i Only use tracks with a bit rate of above
name and the extension. 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of above
44.1 kHz. Lower rates will cause an audible
25 MPEG Layer 3 audio-coding technology under license of Fraunhofer-Institut for Integrated Circuits (IIS) and
Thomson
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 178
loss of sound quality. This applies in Please note the following information about
particular when you have switched on 3-D CDs/DVDs and pay special attention to the
sound. notes on copied and/or self-written CDs/
DVDs.
Notes on copyright i The last track on many audio DVDs does
The music tracks that you create and play not contain audio data. COMAND will then
back in the MP3 or WMA format are generally change to the next medium. This behavior
subject to copyright protection in accordance is system-induced and does not indicate a
Control systems
with the applicable international and national system malfunction.

regulations.
In many countries, reproductions are not
permitted without the prior consent of the Notes about CDs/DVDs
copyright holder, not even for private use. i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
Make sure that you know the applicable compatible with the CD audio standard and
copyright regulations and that you comply therefore may not be able to be played by
with these. COMAND.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your There may be playback problems when
own compositions and recordings, or the playing copied discs.
copyright holder has granted you permission, There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
these restrictions do not apply. software and writers available. This variety
means that there is no guarantee that the
system will be able to play discs that you
Notes about audio DVD operation have written/copied yourself.
COMAND can playback commercially There may be playback problems if you use
available, prerecorded audio DVDs that bear CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have copied
the following label. You will usually find the yourself with a storage capacity of more
label on the DVD booklet, the inlay, or the than 700 MB. These CDs are not
DVD itself. compatible with currently applicable
standards.
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.

These could peel away and damage
i Audio DVDs differ from recordable DVD- COMAND. COMAND is designed to hold
R and DVD-RW discs. discs which comply with the IEC 60908
standard. You can therefore only use discs
Data on audio DVDs are stored either in
with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
uncompressed format or in lossless
compressed format. The sound quality on If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
audio DVDs is therefore better than on contain data on both sides (DVD on one
recordable DVDs that contain MP3 data side and audio data on the other), they
because the MP3 format uses a lossy type of cannot be ejected and can damage
compression. COMAND.
You cannot delete data from or record Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.
additional data to commercially available, Attempting to play discs with a diameter of
prerecorded audio DVDs. 8 cm or playing such discs with an adapter
may cause damage COMAND.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 179
Such damages are not covered by the Magazine tray status:

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. RIndicator lamp on magazine tray button
Only use round discs with a diameter of = is off: Magazine tray is empty
12 cm. RIndicator lamp on magazine tray button
= is on: Magazine tray is loaded
Notes about handling CDs/DVDs
RIndicator lamp on magazine tray button
ROnly hold discs by the edge. = flashes: Magazine tray ready to be
Control systems
RHandle discs carefully to prevent playback loaded
problems. X Loading individual tray: Press button =
RAvoid getting scratches, fingerprints and of the magazine tray you want to load.
dust on discs. X When magazine tray is loaded, remove the
RClean discs from time to time with a disc from slot :.
commercially-available cleaning cloth. Do X Wait until the message Please insert
not wipe them with a circular motion, but disc _. appears in the COMAND display
only in straight lines from the center and the indicator lamp on magazine tray
outwards. button = that you pressed flashes in quick
ROnly use a pen designed for such a purpose succession.
to label discs. X Insert the disc into slot :.
RPlace discs back in their boxes after use. When the disc was inserted correctly and
is of permissible type, the disc is played
RProtect discs from heat and direct sunlight.
back.
X Loading all trays: Press button ;.
Inserting/ejecting CDs and DVDs The DVD changer evaluates which
magazine trays are loaded and changes to
G Observe Safety notes, see page 176. the first empty tray.
X Wait until the message Please insert
i If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this
must face upwards when the CD/DVD is disc _. appears in the COMAND display
inserted. If neither side is printed, the side and the indicator lamp on the respective
to be played should face downwards. magazine tray button flashes in quick
succession.
DVD changer X Insert the disc into slot :.
The DVD changer changes to the next
The DVD changer contains a built-in magazine empty tray.
with six trays.
X Repeat the previous two steps until all
magazine trays are loaded.
When the disc was inserted correctly and
is of permissible type, the disc that was
loaded last is played back.
i When you remove a disc while another
one is played back, the DVD changer stops
the playback. After removing the disc,
playback is continued.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 180
X Removing a disc: Press desired magazine Inserting/ejecting an SD card

tray button =.
X Remove the disc from slot :.
If you do not remove the disc from slot :, i Some SD cards might not be suitable for
the DVD changer will automatically pull it use in temperatures that may occur in a
back in after a short time. vehicle.
X Removing all discs: Press button ?. SD cards with over 32 GB of storage
The DVD changer ejects the disc from the capacity are not recommended.
Control systems
currently selected magazine tray. Due to the number of SD cards available

X Remove the disc from slot :. today, Mercedes-Benz cannot ensure that
The DVD changer changes to the next playback from every SD card is possible.
loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.
X Repeat the last step until all magazine trays
are empty.
CD/DVD drive (vehicles with Rear Seat

Entertainment System)
X Loading SD card: Push the SD card into

slot :. The side with the bevel must point
to the right.
When the SD card contains MP3 tracks,
COMAND will start playback automatically.
X Removing SD card: Briefly push on SD
i Press button ; before loading a disc. card in slot : and release it.
This will ensure that the drive is empty. X Pull the SD card out.
X Removing disc: Press button ;.

X When magazine tray is loaded, remove the Audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 submenu
disc from slot :. overview
If you do not remove the disc from slot :,
the drive will automatically pull it back in
after a short time and playback continues.
X Loading disc: Insert the disc into slot :.
X Playing back disc: Select the main
function Disc in the Rear Seat
Entertainment System (Y page 190).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 181
CD, DVD-A, II/¯/M REC (audio CD Search Media Sound

MP3 (audio DVD mode only)
mode only)
Group Pausing Copying audio Current Selecting Treble
(audio DVD playback II data to hard disk Track List medium
mode only)
Normal Stopping Folder Bass
Control systems
Track playback ¯
Sequence
Medium Mix Restarting Keyword Balance/
playback M Search Fader
Track List Playlists 3D Sound
Mix (MP3
mode only)
Gracenote Artists
Media
Database
(audio CD
mode only)
Active Albums
Source for
Rear
Rear OFF Track
ªShow Genres
Track
Information
(MP3 mode
only)
Composers
Year
Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or or

MP3 mode X Select Audio Q Media, then select Disc,
X Load CD/DVD (Y page 179) or SD card Memory Card, Music Register, USB26,
(Y page 180). Media Interface ... .
or or
X X Press shortcut button R once or twice.
Connect a USB device to the USB socket in
the glove box.
26 Selects the built-in USB socket in the glove box.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 182
i Shortcut button R takes you directly Example display in audio DVD mode
to the previously set disc mode (audio CD/
DVD, MP3-CD/DVD, video DVD). The
number of times you have to press the
shortcut button depends on the previously
set mode.
Example display in audio CD mode

Control systems
: Disc type
; Track name
= Disc number
? Disc name (only when saved on the disc)
A Elapsed track time
B Elapsed track time and track number
: Disc type (graphical display)
; Track number C Sound settings
= Disc number D Current playback option
? Disc name (only when saved on the disc) E Medium selection
A Track name (only when saved on the disc) F Track search
B Elapsed track time G Stop function
C Elapsed track time and track number H Pause function
(graphical display) I Audio DVD functions
D Sound settings
E Current playback option Example display in MP3 mode
F Medium selection
G Track search
H Copying audio data to hard disc
I CD functions
: Disc type
; Disc number
= File name or track name (ID3 tags)
? Medium or folder name
A Current playback option
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 183
B Elapsed track time Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 media

C Elapsed track time and track number X Select Audio Q Media.
(graphical display) The media list appears. The dot # indicates
D Sound settings the currently selected medium.
E Medium selection X Select a medium.
F Track search or
G Artist (ID3 tags) X Enter a media number with the telephone
Control systems
H MP3 functions keypad using buttons ´ - Å
(Y page 79).
CD/DVD/MP3 functions Selecting a track

Stop function Selecting by skipping tracks
i This function is only available in audio X Skipping forward or backward: Slide
DVD mode. XVY or rotate cVd.
X Stopping playback: Select Audio Q or
X Press button 9 or : on the
Media Q DVD-A Q ± (twice).
X Restarting playback: Select Audio Q
Media Q DVD-A Q M. i The skip forward function takes you to the
Playback restarts at the beginning of the next track. The skip backward function
DVD. takes you to the beginning of the current
track, provided it has been played for
Pause function longer that 8 seconds. When the track has
been played for less than 8 seconds, you
In audio CD, audio DVD and MP3 mode will skip to the track before the current one.
X Pausing playback: Press button 8 on When you switch on the option Random
the multifunction steering wheel briefly. Tracks, the track is chosen at random.
X Continuing playback: Press button 8 Selecting a track using the telephone
on the multifunction steering wheel briefly keypad
once more. X Press button Ã on the telephone
In audio DVD mode only keypad (Y page 79).

X Enter track number using buttons ´ -
X Pausing playback: Select Audio Q
Å.
Media Q DVD-A Q «.
M appears instead of «.
X Continuing playback: Select Audio Q
Fast forward/rewind
Audio Q DVD-A Q M. X Select the main area.
« appears instead of M. X Slide XVY and hold until the desired track
part is reached.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 184
Track search
You can use the following criteria to search
for tracks:
RCurrent Track List
RFolder
RKeyword Search
Control systems
RPlaylists
RArtists
RAlbums : Source
RTracks ; Target
RGenres = Total track length of source files
RComposers ? Track selection
RYear
A Starting copy process
B Name of source CD and target storage
X Press W during playback while the main name
area is selected. C Back without copying
or D Medium position in media list
X Select Audio Q Search.
The list of search criteria appears. X Selecting audio data: Select Track
X Select a search criteria and press W. Select..
The track list appears. The track list appears.
X Select All Music Files or select
X Select a track and press W.
individual tracks.
X Select Continue.
Copying audio data to hard disk (audio
The copy menu appears.
CD mode only)
X Copying audio data: Select Start.
You can copy audio data to the internal hard The copying process starts. The status bar
disk while in audio CD mode using the REC E (Y page 185) shows the copying
function.
progress.
X Select Audio Q Media.
X Select an audio CD.
i Do not remove the disc from which you
are copying during the process. Otherwise
X Select REC.
the copied data on the hard disk will be
The copy menu appears. corrupt.
X Back without copying: Select Back.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 185
When the audio disc does not contain text

information, COMAND can recognize
unknown audio tracks using the Gracenote®
Media Database. The respective information
must be stored in the Gracenote® Media
Database and the function Gracenote
Media Database in the CD submenu must be
activated.
Control systems
COMAND will then display the accompanying
data such as artist, album name and track
E Status bar name.
When COMAND accesses the Gracenote®
i The copying process may take a while Media Database while reading an audio disc,
depending on the size of the data. If the the following message appears:
required storage space is insufficient, a
message appears.
X Aborting copying process: Select
Cancel.
The audio data that have been copied
already are stored on the hard disk.
X Deleting audio data: See (Y page 199).
Gracenote® media database

i This function is only available in audio CD Activating Gracenote® Media Database
mode and when operated from the built-in
hard disk. X Select Audio £ Media £ CD£
The COMAND hard disk contains a version of Gracenote Media Database
the Gracenote® Media Database, Emeryville, If the check box Ç is checked,
California, USA. Some audio displays show Gracenote® Media Database is activated.
the company logo in the lower right to
indicate availability.
Setting the audio format
This function lets you choose the audio
format that you would like COMAND to play
and is only available in DVD-Audio mode.
i The tracks on an audio DVD can be stored
in various audio formats. The number of
A large number of audio discs contain text audio formats depends on the audio DVD.
information. COMAND uses this information X Select Audio Q Media Q DVD-A Q
to display the artist, the album name and the Group.
track name.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 186
186 Audio AUX and video AUX
i The Group menu item cannot be selected The sockets for external audio and video
if only one audio format is saved on the sources (AUX) are located
DVD. Rin the glove box (COMAND)
The list of available audio formats appears. A Ron the CD/DVD drive in the rear passenger
dot # indicates the format currently compartment
selected.
Ron the head restraints
X Changing setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
Control systems
cVd. i For operation of the external audio and

X Exiting menu: Slide XVY. video sources, refer to the operating
instructions of the respective device. You
may have to adjust the proper video
standard on the external audio and video
Playback options
source to ensure proper replay.
The following options are available: Do not leave external devices in the vehicle.
RNormal Track Sequence: Tracks are Proper function of the device could be
played back in the order in which they are impaired due to excessive temperatures,
stored on the disc, e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc. for example when exposing to direct
sunlight or when the outside temperature
RMedium Mix: Tracks are played back in is extremely low. Mercedes-Benz does not
random order, e.g. track 3, 8, 5, etc. assume liability for damage to external
RTrack List Mix (MP3 mode only): Tracks devices.
of the current folder and its subfolders are
played back in random order. G Warning!
Operating an external audio source while the
X Selecting an option: Select Audio. vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3. not notice changing road and/or traffic
The option list appears. A dot # indicates conditions which may cause an accident.
which option is switched on. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
X Select an option and press W. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
The option is switched on. For all options covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
except Normal Track Sequence, you will 14 m) every second.
see a corresponding indicator in the main For your safety and the safety of others, pull
area. over to a safe location and stop before
operating an external audio source.
i The Normal Track Sequence option is
automatically activated when you select a G Warning!
different medium. If an option is activated, Due to the different volumes of the external
it remains activated after COMAND is audio sources, system messages of the
switched on/off. vehicle may be much louder. You may need to
disable these system messages or adjust the
volume of these messages manually.
Audio AUX and video AUX
i The volume of external audio sources is
You can play back external audio or video
sources via the systems installed in your extremely variable. It is possible that a
vehicle. device connected as an external audio
source will sound quieter or louder in the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 187
Audio AUX and video AUX 187
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume Audio/video AUX sockets on the Rear
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the Seat Entertainment drive
volume can be set separately. In this case,
start at a moderate volume and increase it
slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback
without distortion, even at high volume.
X Connect external audio and video sources
Control systems
as described in the following sections.
Audio and video AUX sockets in the

glove box
: V Video AUX socket, yellow
; R Audio AUX socket for right audio signal
(red)
= L Audio AUX socket for left audio signal
(white)
Audio/video AUX sockets on the

head restraint
: Video AUX socket, yellow

; Audio AUX socket (white socket for left
channel, red socket for right channel)
i Vehicles with media interface: Instead of

the external audio and video sockets, the
media interface (Y page 200) is located in
the glove box.
: Socket for wired headphone

; V Video AUX socket, yellow
= L Audio AUX socket for left audio signal
(white)
? R Audio AUX socket for right audio signal
(red)
Switching to audio AUX operation

(Rear Seat Entertainment System)
X Connect the audio device to the sockets on
the head restraint or the rear seat and start
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 188
188 Audio AUX and video AUX
playback. Refer to operating instructions of X Select Display Aux for playback via the
the external device. connections in the head restraint.
X Selecting main function: Select Aux. or
X Press button ! on the remote control. X Select Disk Drive Aux for playback via
X Select Source. the connections in the rear seat.
X Select Display Aux for playback via the X Switching from full screen to menu
connections in the head restraint. system: Press button ! on the remote

control.
Control systems
or
X Select Disk Drive Aux for playback via X Screen settings: Select Display Aux.
the connections in the rear seat. A list appears.
X Proceed as described in the section
“Screen settings” (Y page 194).
Switching to audio AUX operation
(COMAND)
X Select Audio Q AUX. Switching to video AUX operation
(COMAND)
The Audio AUX menu appears. You will hear
the medium in the external audio source X Select Video Q AUX.
provided it is connected and set to The video AUX menu appears. You will hear
playback. and see the medium in the external audio
You can adjust the following during audio AUX source provided it is connected and set to
operation: playback.
RVolume (Y page 88) i For operation of the external video
RBalance and fader (Y page 88) source, refer to the operating instructions
RTreble
of the respective device.
and Bass (Y page 88)
R3D
You can adjust the following during video AUX
Sound (Y page 89)
operation:
RBrightness, Contrast and Color
Switching to video AUX operation (Y page 194)
(Rear Seat Entertainment System) RPicture format (Y page 194)
X Connect the video device to the sockets on RVolume (Y page 88)
the head restraint or the rear seat and start RBalance and fader (Y page 88)
playback. Refer to operating instructions of
RTreble and Bass (Y page 88)
the external device.
X Selecting main function: Select Aux. R3D Sound (Y page 89)
X Press button ! on the remote control.
X Select Source.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 189
Rear Seat Entertainment System 189
Rear Seat Entertainment System Remote controls for Rear Seat

Entertainment System
G Observe Safety notes, see page 76. The Rear Seat Entertainment System
G Warning! contains two remote controls for the rear
passenger compartment.
The driver should not wear a Rear Seat
Entertainment headphone while operating the For information on using the remote controls,
vehicle under any circumstances. The use of see (Y page 81).
Control systems
a headphone while driving the vehicle could
drastically impair the ability to react to audible
traffic conditions (e.g. emergency sirens from Headphones for Rear Seat
police/fire/ambulance, another car’s horn, Entertainment System
etc.). The Rear Seat Entertainment System
contains two headphones for the rear
G Warning! passenger compartment.
When not in use, headphones or external For information on using the headphones, see
video sources should be stored in a safe (Y page 82).
location (e.g. one of the vehicle’s storage
compartments) so that they are not loose
within the passenger compartment during Related topics
braking, vehicle maneuvers or a traffic
accident. Objects moving within the RInserting/ejecting CDs and DVDs
passenger compartment could cause serious (Y page 180)
personal injury to vehicle occupants. RConnecting and playing back external
devices (Y page 186)
G Warning!
RRemote control (Y page 81)
Due to a potential choking hazard, wired
headphone usage by children should only RPlaying back audio CDs/audio DVDs
occur with adult supervision. (Y page 176)
RPlaying back video CDs/audio DVDs
You can operate the Rear Seat Entertainment
System via the remote controls (Y page 81) (Y page 191)
that come with the vehicle.
The playback of audio and video sources with
the Rear Seat Entertainment System is CD/DVD drive
identical to playback with the COMAND to a G Observe Safety notes, see page 176.
large extent.
When both screens are used with the CD/
The COMAND and the Rear Seat DVD drive, selecting certain menus or
Entertainment System can be operated changing certain settings on one screen will
simultaneously almost independent of each also be applied to the other screen.
other. However, some menus may cause
The following functions will be applied to both
conflicts when the systems are used by
screens:
multiple users. Conflicts can occur between
the rear screens as well as COMAND and the RChanging Playback options
Rear Seat Entertainment System. RSelecting track
RUsing Play, Pause, and Stop
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 190
190 Rear Seat Entertainment System
RForward and Rewind as well as Skipping In the second case, the setting at which you
tracks have exited the main function the last time
RSelecting the DVD menu and moving within appears.
that menu
RChanging language, subtitles and camera Inserting/ejecting CDs and DVDs
angle
Loading or ejecting a disc is only displayed on
RCalling up interactive DVD contents the screen on which the main function Disc
Control systems
The following functions will be applied to one is selected. Storage of the current settings for
screen only: both screens are reset to the original settings.
RChanging audio, video and screen settings
RSwitching between full screen, menu Simultaneous usage of COMAND and
system and control menu the Rear Seat Entertainment System
Adopting the audio signal from Rear
Switching between main functions Seat Entertainment System for front
passenger
By selecting the main functions you set the
playback options of the various audio and You can transmit the audio signal of the CD/
video sources. DVD drive of the Rear Seat Entertainment
System to the headphone of the front
Main function passenger. The volume is adjusted on the
Disc Playback with rear headphone. The audio signal is transmitted to
CD/DVD drive the COMAND when the main function Disc is
selected on either rear screen. When the
COMAND Playback with main function Disc is not selected on at least
COMAND System one rear screen, the audio signal is not
transmitted to the COMAND.
Aux Playback with an
external device X Select Audio Q Rear in the COMAND.
connected in the
rear Playing the active COMAND source on
the Rear Seat Entertainment System
System Menu for basic
settings
When exiting a main function, the settings are

saved. When calling up again the function
later the following is possible:
RThe main function is already running on
both screens.
RThe main function does not run on the other
screen.
In the first case, the main function appears
the way it is already displayed on the other
screen.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 191
COMAND video DVD 191
X Select Active Source for Rear in the means that there is no guarantee that the
COMAND. system will be able to play discs that you
X Switch to the main function COMAND in the have written/copied yourself.
Rear Seat Entertainment System. Some DVDs may not comply with the NTSC
or PAL TV playback standards. Sound, picture
and other playback problems may occur
COMAND video DVD when you play such DVDs.
COMAND can playback video DVDs meeting
Control systems
Safety notes
the following requirements:
G Observe Safety notes, see page 176. RCorrect regional code
RNTSC or PAL TV standard
Automatic picture fade-out The appropriate information is usually given
either on the DVD or the DVD box. The factory
If a video DVD is playing when the vehicle is
setting of COMAND is regional code 1. This
shifted from park position P into neutral
setting can only be changed five times at
position N or drive position D the picture is
most by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
faded out automatically and the following
Center. This will allow you to playback video
message appears in the display: In order
DVDs with other regional codes, as long as
not to distract driver, picture is
they comply with the NTSC or PAL TV
faded out while the vehicle is in
standard.
motion.
When the vehicle is shifted back into park
position P, the picture comes on again. Notes about DVDs
When the vehicle is shifted into reverse gear
R, the rear view camera appears in the display ! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs.
during video DVD playback. These could peel away and damage
COMAND. COMAND is designed to hold
discs which comply with the IEC 60908
Notes about video DVD operation standard. You can therefore only use discs
with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.
COMAND can playback commercially If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that
available, prerecorded video DVDs that bear contain data on both sides (DVD on one
the following label. You will usually find the side and audio data on the other), they
label on the DVD booklet, the inlay, or the cannot be ejected and can damage
DVD itself. COMAND.
Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.
Attempting to play discs with a diameter of
8 cm or playing such discs with an adapter
may cause damage COMAND.
i Video DVDs differ from recordable DVD- Such damages are not covered by the
R and DVD-RW discs. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Only use round discs with a diameter of
i There may be playback problems when
12 cm.
playing copied DVDs.
There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
software and writers available. This variety
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 192
192 COMAND video DVD
Notes about handling DVDs you try to utilize such functions or carry out
such actions, you will see the K symbol in
For notes about handling DVDs, see
the display.
(Y page 179).
Functional limitations Inserting or ejecting DVDs
Depending on the DVD, it is possible that G Observe Safety notes, see page 176.
Control systems
certain functions or actions may be X Inserting or ejecting a DVD (Y page 179).

temporarily or permanently unavailable. If
Video DVD submenu overview
DVD-V II/M ¯ Media Sound

DVD Functions Pausing Stopping Selecting Treble
playback II playback ¯ medium
Brightness Continuing Bass
playback M
Contrast Balance/Fader
Color 3D Sound
16:9 Optimized
4:3
Widescreen
Active Source
for Rear
Rear OFF
Switching to video DVD mode shortcut button depends on the previously

set mode.
X Insert a DVD (Y page 179).
or
X Select Video Q Video DVD. Showing/hiding the DVD control
or menu
X Press shortcut button R once or twice. X Showing the menu: Slide ZVÆ.
X Hiding the menu: Slide ZVÆ.
i Shortcut button R takes you directly
to the previously set disc mode (audio CD/ or
DVD, MP3-CD/DVD or video DVD). The X Wait for approximately 8 seconds.
number of times you have to press the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 193
Fast forward/rewind
X While in full-screen mode or with activated
control menu, slide XVY and hold until the
desired track part is reached.
Selecting the DVD medium
Control systems
X Select Video Q Video DVD.
X Show the menu system, if necessary
Control menu (Y page 193).
: Disc type X Select Media.
; Current track The media list appears. The dot #
= Current scene indicates the current medium.
X Select a medium.
? Elapsed track time
COMAND changes the medium.
A Show the menu system
Showing/hiding the menu system Stop playback

X Showing the menu: Press W.
X Hiding the menu: Slide ZV to select
(Y page 193).
Full screen and press W.
X Pausing playback: Select ¯.
In the display, II changes to M.
X Continuing playback: Select M.
Play is continued from the point at which it
was stopped.
X Stopping playback: Select ¯ again while
playback is stopped.
or
X Select ¯ twice in quick succession during
playback.
X Resuming playback: Select M.
Menu system
: Video DVD options
Playback starts again from the beginning.
; Pause
= Stop Pause playback
? Full-screen mode
A Medium selection
B Sound settings
(Y page 193).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 194
194 COMAND video DVD
X Pause playback: Select II. X Select DVD-V Q DVD Functions Q

In the display, II changes to M. Title Selection.
X Continue playback: Select M. A selection list appears.
Play is continued from the point at which it X Select a film/track.
was stopped.
Screen settings
Selecting scene/chapter
Control systems
Setting brightness, contrast and color

Entering scene/chapter using the X Select Video Q Video DVD.
COMAND controller
X Make sure that the control menu is shown (Y page 193).
(Y page 192). X Select DVD-V Q Brightness Q
X Skipping forwards or back: Slide XVY or
Contrast or Color.
turn cVd. X Changing settings: Slide ZVÆ or turn
or cVd until you reach the desired setting.
X Press button 9 or : on the X Saving settings: Press W.
i Vehicles with rear multicontour seats: Changing the picture format
Rear occupants can also select a scene/ X Select Video Q Video DVD.
chapter using the buttons on the rear
armrest (Y page 80).
(Y page 193).
X Select DVD-V.
Entering the scene/chapter using the
telephone keypad The DVD-V menu appears. The dot # in
front of a menu item - 16:9 Optimized,
X Press button Ã on the telephone 4:3 or Widescreen indicates the current
keypad (Y page 79). format.
X Enter scene/chapter using buttons j - X Changing the format: Slide ZVÆ or turn
x. cVd, until you reach the desired setting.
COMAND tunes in to the scene/chapter X Saving the format: Press W.
entered.
DVD menu
Selecting film/track
The DVD menu is the menu stored on the DVD
i This function is only available if the DVD itself. It is structured in various ways
is comprised of several films/tracks. according to the individual DVD and permits
X Select Video Q Video DVD. certain actions and settings.
(Y page 193).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 195
Calling up the DVD menu

(Y page 193).
X Select DVD-V Q DVD Functions Q
Menu.
The DVD menu appears.
Control systems
Selecting menu items in the DVD menu
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY. : Stop movie
X Confirming the selection: Press W. ; Skip to the end of a scene
The selection menu appears. = Skip to the beginning of a scene
X Stopping the movie: Select Stop.

X Skipping to the end of a scene: Select
F.
X Skipping to the beginning of a scene:
Select E.
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the
menu items F and E either have no
function or have no function in certain parts
of the DVD menu.
X Reconfirming the selection: Select Switching to the next highest DVD

Select. menu level
COMAND carries out the action defined by
the selected DVD menu item. X Press back button % in the center
console.
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the or
menu item Play either has no function or X Select the corresponding menu item in the
has no function in certain parts of the DVD
DVD menu.
menu.
or
Stopping the movie or skipping to the X Select a menu item of your choice from the
beginning/end of a scene DVD menu.
X Select the menu item Go up in the selection
X Select a menu item of your choice from the
menu.
DVD menu.
The selection menu appears. i Depending on the DVD, the menu item
Go up or the back button % may only be
available in certain DVD menus. On some
DVDs, they may have no function at all.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 196
196 Music Register
Back to the movie determined by the content of the DVD. It

may also be possible to make the settings
X Press back button % until you can see
in the DVD menu (Y page 194).
the movie.
or X Select Video Q Video DVD.
X Select the corresponding menu item in the X Show the menu system, if necessary
DVD menu. (Y page 193).
or X Select DVD-V Q DVD Functions.
Control systems
X Select a menu item of your choice from the X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle.
DVD menu. In both cases a selection list will appear.
X Select the menu item Back (to the The dot # in front of an entry indicates the
movie) in the selection menu. current language.
X Changing the setting: Slide ZVÆ or turn
i Depending on the DVD, the menu item
cVd, until you reach the desired setting.
Back (to the movie) or the back button
X Saving a setting: Press W.
% may be without function.
X Exiting the menu: Slide XVY.
Setting the language

i This function is not available for all DVDs. Interactive content
If it is available, you can set the language i DVDs may include interactive content
for the DVD menu and the audio language. (e.g. a video game). In a video game you can
The number of settings you can make is control the play by selecting and initiating
determined by the content of the DVD. It actions. The type and number of actions
may also be possible to make the settings depends on the DVD.
in the DVD menu (Y page 194).
X Selecting an action: Slide ZVÆ or XVY,
X Select Video Q Video DVD. or turn cVd, until you reach the desired
X Show the menu system, if necessary setting.
(Y page 193). X Initiating an action: Press W.
X Select DVD-V Q DVD Functions. A menu appears, the first entry Select is
X Select Audio Language. highlighted.
In both cases a selection list will appear. X Press W.
The dot # in front of an entry indicates the
current language.
X Changing the setting: Slide ZVÆ or turn Music Register
cVd, until you reach the desired setting.
X Saving a setting: Press W. G Observe Safety notes, see page 76.
X Exiting the menu: Slide XVY. You can save MP3 or WMA audio files in the
Music Register. The storage capacity is
approximately 7 gigabyte.
Subtitles and camera angles ! Keep your original music files in a safe
place. A fault with the COMAND may cause
i This function is not available for all DVDs.
the music files stored in the Music Register
The number of settings you can make is
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 197
Music Register 197
to be lost. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC is not

liable for any loss of data.
Music Register submenu overview
Music Register Search Media Sound

Normal Track Search functions Selecting medium Treble
Control systems
Sequence
Medium Mix Bass
Track List Mix Balance/Fader
Copy Music Files 3D Sound
Rename/Delete Files
Delete All Music Files
Memory Information
Show Track
Information
Active Source for
Rear
Rear OFF
Switching to Music Register X Select MUSIC REGISTER.

The Music Register is being loaded. The
From another main function Music Register display appears.
X Select Audio. No audio files found:
The last selected audio mode is active. A corresponding message appears.
X Select Audio once more. X Copy audio files into the Music Register
The audio menu appears. (Y page 198) first.
X Select MUSIC REGISTER. Audio files found:
The first track in the first folder is played back
i When MUSIC REGISTER was the last or playback starts where you have stopped
selected audio mode, you will only have to listening before.
select Audio once.
Within the audio functions

X Select Audio.
The audio menu appears.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 198
198 Music Register
Selecting medium
X Select MUSIC REGISTER Q Copy Music
Files.
The media list appears. Media with data
that can be copied are highlighted.
Control systems
: Media type Music Register

; Track number
= Track name
? Elapsed track time
A Elapsed track time (graphical display)
B Current playback option (no display in : Selected medium
“Normal Track Sequence”)
X Selecting medium: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
C Sound settings
D Medium selection cVd and confirm with W.
The medium is being loaded.
E Current folder
F Search functions
Selecting audio files
G Medium position in media list
X Select All Music Files.
H Calling up Music Register menu
All audio files of the selected medium are
copied. The symbol in front of All Music
Copying audio data into the Music Files filled.
Register or
X Select individual tracks.
You can copy audio files from storage media
in the DVD changer, a memory card, or from X Select Continue.
external USB storage devices that contain The copy menu appears.
MP3 or WMA audio files. External USB
storage devices must be connected to the
built-in USB socket for that purpose. The
optional media interface is not intended for
this purpose.
i Certain functions are not available while
copying. A corresponding message will
then appear.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 199
Music Register 199
Starting copy process i The copying process may take a while

depending on the size of the data.
Depending on the data source, the required
time may vary. If the required storage
space is insufficient, a message appears.
X Aborting copying process: Select
Cancel.
The audio data that have been copied
Control systems
already are stored in the Music Register.
X Back without copying: Select Back.
: Copies from memory card

; Copies to Music Register Deleting audio files
= Memory requirements, “Calling up This function will delete all audio files in the
memory information” (Y page 199) Music Register.
? Starting copy process ! The deletion process may take several
A Name of source medium and target minutes. Do not operate COMAND during
storage name this time to avoid malfunctions.
B Back without copying
X Select MUSIC REGISTER Q Delete All
C Medium position in media list
Music Files.
X Select Start. You will be asked if you really want to
The copying process starts. The status bar delete.
shows the copying progress.
When the data has been copied, the first track
of the copied album is played. The Music Calling up memory information
Register menu is displayed. You can now copy X Select MUSIC REGISTER Q Memory
more audio files into the Music Register. Information.
! Do not remove the memory card from A window with the following information
which you are copying during the process. opens:
Otherwise the copied data in the Music RStorage capacity
Register will be corrupt. RAvailable memory
ROccupied memory
RContents (folders, tracks)
Folder functions
You can view Music Register contents and
modify and delete files.
: Status bar
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 200
200 Media Interface
X Select MUSIC REGISTER Q Rename/ Playback options

Delete Files.
The following options are available:
or
RNormal Track Sequence
X Press W when the main area is highlighted.
The contents of the current folder are Tracks are played back in the order in which
displayed. they are stored on the disc, e.g. track 1, 2,
3, etc.
RMedium Mix
Control systems
Tracks of the current medium are played

back in random order.
RTrack List Mix
Tracks of the currently active track list are
played back in random order.
X Selecting options: Switch to Music
Register (Y page 197).
X Select MUSIC REGISTER.
: Back The list of options appears. The dot#
; Song title indicates the currently selected option.
= Current folder X Select an option.
The option is activated. The corresponding
X Back to previous folder: Select symbol display appears, except when Normal
U. Track Sequence is selected, see position
The previous folder appears. B in example illustration (Y page 198).
Renaming folders and tracks i The option Normal Track Sequence is

activated automatically when you change
X Select Rename/Delete Files. the current medium or select another
X Selecting folder or track: Slide ZVÆ or medium. An activated option remains
rotate cVd. active after switching COMAND off and on
X Select Options Q Change. again.
X Enter a name for the folder or track.
X Saving changes: Select ¬. Media Interface
Notes on media interface operation
Deleting folder or track:
X Select Rename/Delete Files. G Warning!
X Selecting folder or track: SlideZVÆ or Operating an external audio source while the
vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
rotate cVd.
not notice changing road and/or traffic
X Select Options Q Delete.
conditions which may cause an accident.
You will be asked if you really want to Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
delete. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
14 m) every second.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 201
Media Interface 201
For your safety and the safety of others, pull Supported file formats on USB devices
over to a safe location and stop before The following file formats are supported:
operating an external audio source.
RMP3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)
RWMA: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)

Connections
i Always store the devices in a safe place. Special characteristics of USB devices
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz RDo not store data other than audio data on
Control systems
connector cables. a USB device. Doing so will increase the
Suitable connector cables are located in time required to initialize the USB device.
the vehicle or can be purchased at any RA maximum of 8 directory levels with up to
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 1000 tracks each are supported.
The media interface allows for connection of RDo not use USB extensions or adapters.
the following media to the COMAND: They could impair functionality.
RiPod® RPlaylists on the USB device will be searched
RUSB devices for in the background. Playlists that were

found will be available in separate
RMP3 player categories among the folders. The
i For further information on compatible initialization of large USB storage devices
multimedia devices that contain a large number of files may
take several minutes.
Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com
Rcall
i Files that are protected via DRM
the Mercedes-Benz Customer
Assistance Center at (Digital Rights Management) are not
1-800-FOR-MERCedes supported by the media interface.
(1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)
Rcall Customer Service at Connecting external devices
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
Supported USB devices

The following USB devices are supported:
RUSB flash drives
RUSB hard drives (1", 1.8", and 2.5") with a

starting/steady current not to exceed
800 mA (separate power supply may be
necessary)
Rselected MP3 players
The media interface is located in the glove
i The media interface supports USB box.
storage devices of “USB Device Only connect one device at a time. Otherwise
Subclass 6”. Information on “USB Device you will not be able to operate the external
Subclass 6” is available from the device. For more information contact an
manufacturer of the respective device. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 202
202 Media Interface
i Do not leave external devices in the i Error messages appear while activating a
vehicle. Proper function of the device could device when
be impaired due to excessive RCOMAND does not support the
temperatures, for example when exposing connected device
to direct sunlight or when the outside Rthe power consumption of the connected
temperature is extremely low. Mercedes-
device is too high
Benz does not assume liability for damage
to external devices. Rthe media interface is malfunctioning
Control systems

Center if required.
Notes on operating a device via the AUX

socket
G Warning!
Due to the different volumes of the external
audio sources, system messages of the
vehicle may be much louder. You may need to
disable these system messages or adjust the
: 3.5 mm stereo jack AUX cable (4-pin) for volume of these messages manually.
connecting external devices via AUX port,
e.g. MP3 players (audio and video) i The volume of external audio sources is
; iPod® cable extremely variable. It is possible that a
= USB cable for supported USB devices device connected as an external audio
(optional) source will sound quieter or louder in the
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume
? Example device: iPod®
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the
X Connect the audio device to the media volume can be set separately. In this case,
interface in the glove box using the start at a moderate volume and increase it
required cable :, ;, or = while the slowly. In this way, you can determine
vehicle is standing still. whether the system is capable of playback
COMAND activates the device29. without distortion, even at high volume.
When you disconnect a device, the message
No device connected. appears. Switching to media interface
i Do not operate iPods® or MP3 players via operation
a remote control, for example Bluetooth® i Starting individual function may take
remote control, while operating the several minutes, depending on the external
respective device via the media interface. device and the content of the medium, for
This could cause unpredictable example video podcasts.
interactions.
Do not use software other than the genuine
Connecting a completely discharged
software for uploading your iPod® or MP3
iPod® or MP3 player can increase the player. Otherwise some or all functions
initialization time. may not be available.
29 Does not apply to AUX devices.

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 203
Media Interface 203
From another main function B Track number (graphical display)

X Press shortcut button R. C Current playback option (no display in
COMAND activates the last selected disc “Normal Track Sequence”)
mode. D Sound settings
E Media list
i When media interface operation was
F Album name (if available)
selected before, it is now activated.
G Categories, playlists and/or folders
X Select MediaQ Media Interface.
Control systems
H Artist (if available)
The media list appears. The dot #
indicates the currently played medium. I Submenu for basic settings
i When no device is connected, Media i The connected disc type : is identified

Interface instead of the device name by the respective symbols for iPod®, MP3
appears. player, or USB storage device.
If COMAND does not support the
connected device, the message Device i When the connected device does not
incompatible. appears. The device will contain tracks that can be played, a
be listed in the media list as Not corresponding message appears.
Available. When two devices are
connected, the message Please ensure Within the audio functions
that only one device is connected. X Connect an external device (Y page 201).
appears. COMAND activates the device. Afterwards,
X Confirm with W. the basic display appears.
COMAND activates a connected device. A or
corresponding message appears. X Select Audio Q Media Interface.
Afterwards, the basic display appears.
Selecting audio files

i COMAND lists the stored data on an
iPod®, MP3 player, or USB storage device
according to their own respective file
structure.
Selecting by skipping tracks

X Skipping forward or backward: Slide
XVY or rotate cVd.
Example illustration: iPod® operation
: Disc type or
; Track number
= Track name multifunction steering wheel30.
? Elapsed track time (graphical display) i The skip forward function takes you to the
A Elapsed track time next track. The skip backward function
takes you to the beginning of the current
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 204
204 Media Interface
track, provided it has been played for RCurrent Track List

longer that 8 seconds. When the track has RPlaylists
been played for less than 8 seconds, you
RArtists
will skip to the track before the current one.
When you select an option other than RAlbums
Normal Track Sequence, the track is RTrack
chosen at random.
RPodcasts
Control systems
Selecting via telephone keypad RGenres
X Initiating entry: Press button Ä. RComposers

The input menu appears. The number of RAudiobooks
digits you can enter depends on the
number of stored tracks. i Some categories contain the entry All.
When selecting this entry, the entire
X Entering track number: Press a button,
content of the respective category is
for example Á. played back.
The number on the button you have
pressed is the first digit in the input line.
USB devices
i COMAND ignores invalid digits and does You can select folders and playlists (if
not display them. available). COMAND can display the
X Enter more digits as desired. respective album name and artist, the so-
called metadata, during playback when the
X Confirming entry: Press W. metadata have been read into the system.
or Playlists are indicated in the display by a
X Hold down the last digit button of the special symbol. When you open a playlist, the
desired track number (e.g. track 108, press related tracks are opened and playback starts
´, Å, then hold Â). by selecting a track.
The selected track is played back. For USB storage devices, you can determine
whether the metadata from the tags of coded
Fast forward/rewind audio data or the file name and folder is to be
displayed during playback.
X With the main area active: Slide XVY and
X Displaying album name and artist:
hold until the desired track part is reached.
Select Media Interface Q Display
i With iPods®, the fast-rewind function Metadata.
works within the current track only.
Selecting category and opening folder
X Opening category/folder list: Press W
Selecting category/playlist/folder
when the window is selected.
iPod® and selected MP3 player or
You can select tracks via categories and X Select Music.
folders. The available categories or the folder
Categories, for example, can be: content, e.g. subfolders, are displayed.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 205
Media Interface 205
i The menu option Music is not available X Selecting track: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
yet while the device is being activated. cVd and confirm with W.
The track is played back.
X Back to previous folder: Select U and
confirm.
i Symbol U is always displayed at the
top of the respective folder.
Control systems
Playing back the content of a
category or folder
X Select a category or folder.
Example illustration: Category list
X Press W for longer than 2 seconds.
: Device symbol and name or selected
The content of the selected category or
category
folder is played back according to the
; Available categories
selected playback option (Y page 206).
X Selecting category/playlist/folder:
Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd and confirm with
W. Alphabetical track selection
The content of the selected category or
iPod® and MP3 player
folder appears.
i This function is available for
i The message Please wait... may
alphabetically ordered categories and
appear when data still needs to be read
folders.
from the connected device.
X If necessary, repeat the above step until the X Select a category, for example Artists.
tracks of the desired folder or album are The available artists appear.
displayed. X Press the respective button on the
telephone keypad once or more to enter
the first character of the desired artist
name. For example, press button ·
three times for an artist whose name starts
with a “C”.
The available characters are displayed on
the bottom of the display.
i When the entered character does not
match any entry, the entry that matches a
previously entered character appears first.
Example illustration: Current track list
i The quality of the search results for
: Back
iPods® and MP3 players depends
; Current category
significantly on the version and language of
= Track symbol the software (e.g. iTunes®) that was used
? Current track to upload the medium.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 206
206 COMAND vehicle menu
USB storage device Tracks of the currently active category or

folder and its subfolders are played back in
i This function is available for random order.
alphabetically ordered directories. The
function is not available within playlists for X Selecting playback options: Select
example. Media Interface in the basic display.
The list of options appears. The dot#
X Within a folder, press the respective button indicates the currently selected option.
on the telephone keypad once or more to
Control systems
X Select an option.
enter the first character of the desired
artist name. For example, press button
l three times for an artist whose name
starts with a “C”. COMAND vehicle menu
The available characters are displayed on
Introduction
the bottom of the display.
When the directory contains folders only, G Warning!
COMAND will search for folders. HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
Instructions included in your vehicle literature
Selecting active partition (USB portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
storage devices only) necessary safety information and warning for
the operation of your vehicle.
You can select this function with USB storage
devices when the storage space is In this menu, you can program the following
partitioned. The system supports up to 4 vehicle functions:
partitions (primary or logical, FAT formatted).
Function
i The Windows formatting program
supports FAT partitions of up to 32 gigabyte Multi-function Contour Seat
by default. Settings (Y page 216)
X Select Media Interface Q Select Rear Window Sunshade (Y page 207)

Active Partition. Easy Entry/Exit Feature
(Y page 208)
Playback options Exterior Lighting Delayed Shut-off

(Y page 208)
The following options are available:
RNormal Track Sequence Interior Lighting Delayed Shut-off
Tracks are played back in regular order (e.g. (Y page 208)
in numerical or in alphabetical order). Ambient Lighting (Y page 209)
RRandom Tracks
Automatic Mirror Folding
All available tracks on the current medium (Y page 209)
are played back in random order.
RCategory
Locator Lighting (Y page 210)
Mix or Random Folder (with
USB devices when Folder was selected)
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 207
COMAND vehicle menu 207
X Select Vehicle Q Vehicle.

Function
Submenu : opens. In the submenu, you
Automatic Locking (Y page 210) can select the individual vehicle functions
by sliding ZVÆ or rotating cVd and
Trunk Opening-height Restriction
(Y page 210) confirming the selection with W.
The following sections always describe
You can select the individual vehicle approach 1.
Control systems
functions in two ways.
Approach 1: Selecting vehicle Extending or retracting rear window

functions via the main area of the sunshade
COMAND display i The components and operating principles
This function is used to extend or retract the
rear sunshade.
G Warning!
When operating the rear window sunshade,
be sure that there is no danger of anyone
being harmed by the extending or retracting
procedure.
i At temperatures below -4‡ (-20†), the

: Menu item Vehicle rear window sunshade is switched off.
; Main area
X Select menu item Vehicle :.

Main area ; is active. You can select the
individual vehicle functions by sliding
XVY or rotating cVd.
Approach 2: Selecting vehicle

functions via the submenu
X Select Vehicle.
The main area is active.
X Selecting Rear Window Sunshade
function: Slide XVY or rotate cVd.
X Opening/closing rear window
sunshade: Press W.
: Submenu
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 208
Setting easy-entry/exit feature X Select Vehicle.

i The components and operating principles X Selecting Easy Entry/Exit Feature:
Slide XVY or rotate cVd and press W.
G Warning! X Selecting setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
You must make sure no one can become cVd and press W.
trapped or injured by the moving steering The dot # indicates the currently selected
wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/ setting.
Control systems
exit feature is activated.

To stop seat/steering wheel movement, do
one of the following: Setting interior/exterior lighting
RPress seat adjustment switch. delayed shut-off (night security
RMove
illumination)
steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress one of the memory position buttons i The components and operating principles
or the memory button M. of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
Do not leave children unattended in the Interior lighting: You can set if and for how
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. long the interior lighting remains on in
Children could open the driver’s door and darkness after you have removed the
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit SmartKey from the starter switch.
feature, which could result in an accident Exterior lighting: You can set if and for how
and/or serious personal injury. long the exterior lighting remains on in
darkness after closing the doors. The exterior
Use this function to have the steering wheel lighting goes out automatically after the set
move up and/or the driver’s seat move back time has elapsed.
when entering the vehicle. You select the You can select between the following
following settings: settings:
ROFF, the easy-entry/exit function is R0 seconds, delayed shut-off is switched off.
switched off
R15, 30, 45, 60 seconds, delayed shut-off is
RSteering Column, the steering wheel switched on.
moves up
RSteering Column and Seat, the steering i You can reactivate this function by
wheel moves up and the driver’s seat reopening a door within 1 minute. When
moves back you do not open or close a door or you do
not close an opened door after removing
the SmartKey from the starter switch, the
exterior lighting will go out after
60 seconds.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 209
COMAND vehicle menu 209
Control systems
X Select Vehicle. X Select Vehicle.
The main area is active. The main area is active.
X Selecting Interior Lighting Delayed X Selecting Ambient Lighting: Slide
Shut-off or Exterior Lighting XVY or rotate cVd and press W.
Delayed Shut-off: Slide XVY or rotate A menu appears.
cVd and press W. The dot # indicates the currently selected
A menu appears. setting.
The dot # indicates the currently selected X Selecting setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
setting. cVd and press W.
X Selecting setting: Slide ZVÆ or rotate The dot # indicates the currently selected
cVd and press W. setting.
The dot # indicates the currently selected
setting.
Setting automatic mirror folding
i The exterior lamp switch must be in
position c (Y page 298) before turning i The components and operating principles
off the engine. Otherwise the exterior of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
lighting will not come on when leaving the In the Automatic Mirror Folding menu,
vehicle. you can determine whether the exterior rear
view mirrors fold in when you lock the vehicle.
Setting interior ambient lighting
You can select the following settings:
RSOLAR (amber interior lighting)
RNEUTRAL (white interior lighting)
RPOLAR (blue interior lighting)
RBrightness of the interior lighting ranging
from 0 (off) to 5 (bright)
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 210
X Select Vehicle. X Select Vehicle.

The main area is active. The main area is active.
X Selecting Automatic Mirror Folding: X Selecting Locator Lighting function:
Slide XVY or rotate cVd. Slide XVY or rotate cVd.
X Switching automatic fold-in function X Switching locator lighting on or off:
on/off: Press W. Press W.
Control systems
Locator lighting on/off Automatic locking on/off

i The components and operating principles i The components and operating principles
of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76). of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76).
With the locator lighting feature activated and Use this function to activate or deactivate the
the exterior lamp switch in position c automatic central locking (Y page 278). With
(Y page 298), the following lamps will switch the automatic central locking system
on during darkness when the vehicle is activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
unlocked from the outside: vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
RParking lamps31 (15 km/h).
RFront fog lamps or
low-beam headlamps and LED daytime
running lamps, depending on vehicle
equipment
RDoor entry lamps in the mirror
The locator lighting switches off when the
driver’s door is opened.
If you do not open a door after unlocking the
vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps will
switch off automatically after approximately
40 seconds. X Select Vehicle.
X Selecting Automatic Locking: Slide
XVY or rotate cVd.
X Switching automatic locking on or off:
Press W.
Trunk opening-height restriction on/

off
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system:
31 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, license plate lamps, side marker lamps, and instrument panel
lamps always come on as well.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 211
COMAND automatic climate control 211
You can select whether the trunk lid should RSwitching off cooling (Æ)
open fully or only to the height of the roof. (Y page 213)
RCentral climate control (Mono)
(Y page 214)
RFootwell temperature (Y page 214)
RAir flow from air vents (Y page 215)
RRear climate control (Y page 215)
Control systems
The climate control menu is called up via the
climate control settings.
X Select Vehicle.
X Selecting Trunk Opening-height
Restriction: Slide XVY or rotate cVd.
X Switching trunk opening-height
restriction on or off: Press W.
COMAND automatic climate control Climate control settings with functions (submenus)
: Temperature, driver’s side
Introduction ; Air distribution, driver’s side
i The components and operating principles = Air volume, driver’s side
of COMAND can be found on (Y page 76). ? Central menu, climate control
G Warning! A Air volume, passenger side
Follow the recommended settings for heating B Air distribution, passenger side
and cooling given on the following pages and C Temperature, passenger side
pages in the “Controls in detail” chapter.
Otherwise the windows could fog up,
impairing visibility and endangering you and Setting temperature
others.
You can operate the climate control via Use the temperature controls w
COMAND or via the buttons on the climate (Y page 363) in the center console or
control panel (Y page 363). COMAND climate control settings to
Some of the special climate control functions separately adjust the air temperature on each
can only be operated via COMAND. side of the passenger compartment.
The following climate control functions can X Select climate control settings Q
be operated via COMAND: Temperature, left or right and then press
RTemperature (Y page 211) W.
RAir distribution (Y page 212)
RAir volume (Y page 212)
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 212
212 COMAND automatic climate control
¯ Directs air through the defroster air

vents to the windshield and front door
windows
P Directs air through the center and side
air vents
N Directs air through the center and side
air vents and to the footwells
O Directs air to the footwells
Control systems
W Air distribution is adjusted

automatically
X Changing temperature: Slide ZVÆ or a Directs air through the defroster air
rotate cVd. vents to the windshield and front door
windows and to the footwells
X Exiting menu: Press W, back button
_ Directs air into the entire vehicle
% in the center console (Y page 77) or
interior
slide XVY.
b Directs air through the center, side and
The setting is saved.
defroster air vents to the windshield
and front door windows
Adjusting air distribution X Changing air distribution: Rotate cVd.
The symbol for air distribution changes. The
G Observe Safety notes, see page 365. direction and size of the arrows represent
You can adjust the air distribution separately the air distribution.
for the driver’s and front passenger side. or
i When you change the air distribution, the X Switching back to automatic mode:
automatic function of the climate control Rotate cVd and select AUTO.
system is switched off. X Exiting menu: Press W, back button
X Select climate control settings Q Air % in the center console (Y page 77) or
distribution, driver’s side or passenger slide XVY.
side. The setting is saved.
Adjusting air volume

Use rocker switches K (Y page 363) in
the center console or COMAND climate
control settings to separately adjust the air
volume on each side of the passenger
compartment.
i When you change the air volume, the
automatic function of the climate control
system is switched off.
X Select climate control settings Q Air
volume, driver’s side or passenger side.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 213
Control systems
X Changing air volume: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
Activating/deactivating air
cVd. conditioning
or
The air conditioning is operational while the
X Switching back to automatic mode:
engine is running and cools the interior air to
Rotate cVd and select AUTO.
the temperature set by the operator. In
X Exiting menu: Press W, back button addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
% in the center console (Y page 77) or the interior air and helps prevent window
slide XVY. fogging.
i Condensation may drip out from
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
not an indication of a malfunction.
Central climate control menu via
COMAND G Warning!
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
The central climate control menu is in the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
center of the climate control settings. When
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
the climate control is activated, you will see
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
AC in the central menu. The following
visibility and endanger you and others.
functions can only be operated in the central
climate control menu via COMAND: X Select climate control settings Q Central
RDeactivating cooling (Æ) (Y page 213)
climate control menu.
RCentral climate control (Mono) X Selecting Æ: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
(Y page 214) cVd.
RFootwell temperature (Y page 214) X Confirming selection: Press W.
RAir flow from air vents (Y page 215) A checkmark appears when the cooling is
deactivated.
X Select climate control settings Q Central
Æ appears in the central menu of the
menu.
climate control settings.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 214
214 COMAND automatic climate control
Rchange a climate control setting for the

front passenger side using COMAND
Roperate a button from the climate control
for the front passenger side
Roperate one of the buttons for the rear
climate control system
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated

Control systems
Adjusting footwell temperature

again, this indicates that the air
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
compressor has turned off. the footwell temperature when outside
Have the air conditioning checked at the temperatures are low.
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The Footwell Temperature function is used
to adjust the temperature difference between
Selecting Mono mode the footwell and the rest of the passenger
Mono is used to adjust the climate zones for compartment.
the entire vehicle at the same time. When the The higher the selected value, the higher the
Mono function is switched on and you change temperature in the footwell will be.
the climate on the driver’s side, these X Select climate control settings Q Central
changes will be carried out in the same climate control menu.
manner for all climate zones. X Selecting Footwell Temperature: Slide
X Select climate control settings Q Central ZVÆ or rotate cVd and then press W.
X Selecting Mono: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
cVd.
A checkmark appears when the function
has been selected.
X Changing temperature difference: Slide

ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
X Exiting menu: Press W, back button
X Exiting menu: Press back button % in
the center console (Y page 77) or slide % in the center console (Y page 77) or
XVY. slide XVY.
The Mono function is automatically switched
off when you:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 215
Adjusting air flow from air vents Switching on rear climate control
operation from the front
i In automatic mode, this setting optimizes
the air flow when outside temperatures are
high. climate control menu.
X Selecting RearY: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
The Airflow setting defines air distribution
and air volume in automatic mode: cVd.
RFocused (default setting, increased air
Control systems
flow)
RMedium (reduced air flow)
RDiffuse (minimal air flow)
i When the interior ambient temperature of
the vehicle is very hot and the climate
control is cooling the interior, the setting X Confirming selection: Press W.
for air flow is temporarily overridden. In the climate control setting, Rear appears
in the central menu. The rear climate
X Select climate control settings Q Central control can be operated from the front.
climate control menu Q Airflow.
A selection list appears.
The current setting is indicated by a
dot #.
Climate control settings, rear climate control

: Rear temperature, left
; Rear air distribution, left
= Rear air volume
X Changing air flow: Slide ZVÆ or rotate ? Central menu for rear climate control
cVd. A Rear air distribution, right
X Confirming selection: Press W. B Rear temperature, right
The rear climate control is operated in the
Operating rear climate control from the same manner as the climate control system
front for the driver’s and front passenger side.
The RearY function is used to operate the Central menu for rear climate control
rear climate control via COMAND and the
In the central menu for the rear climate
rocker switches on the control panel from the
control, you can:
front (Y page 363).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 216
216 COMAND seats
Rswitch back to operating the front climate Switching off rear climate control
control system X Select climate control settings Q Central
Rswitch off the rear climate control climate control menu.
Rswitch the automatic function of the rear The current setting is indicated by a
climate control from automatic to manual dot #.
X Selecting Rear Climate Control OFF:
Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
Control systems

The rear climate control is switched off.
Switching on the automatic function of

the rear climate control
Switching off rear climate control
operation from the front X Select climate control settings Q Central

dot #.
X Selecting Rear Automatic: Slide ZVÆ or
dot #.
X Selecting Front Climate Control: Slide
rotate cVd.
ZVÆ or rotate cVd.

X Confirming selection: Press W. The automatic function of the rear climate
control is switched on.
The climate control settings shows the
climate control settings for the driver and
front passenger.
COMAND seats
Operating seats via COMAND
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 217
COMAND seats 217
The following seat adjustments can be made Exiting menu

via COMAND:
There are several ways to exit the
Settings multicontour seat menu.
X Press button T again.
Lumbar support (Y page 217)
or
Multicontour seats, front (Y page 218) X Press any shortcut button.
Drive-dynamic multicontour seats or
Control systems
(Y page 219) X Select another main function from the main
menu line.
Selecting a seat
You must first select the seat for which you
would like to make adjustments. Lumbar support
To support the spine, you can adjust the
curvature of the front seat backrests.
X Press button T.
The main area of the COMAND display is
active. A scale appears.
X Press button T.
X Switching to the bottom menu line: Slide
ZVÆ.
: Scale
; Cursor
= Current seat
? Current setting
X Select seat (Y page 217).

X Adjusting lumbar support: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd until desired setting is
reached.
Example illustration: Drive-dynamic multicontour
X Switching to the bottom menu line: Slide
seat
XVY.
X Selecting seat: Slide XVY or rotate X Confirming selection: Press W.
cVd.
X Confirming selection: Press W. i After you have pressed button T, the
seat last adjusted is active.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 218
218 COMAND seats
Multicontour seats, front

i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air
pressure in the air chambers (on the sides
of the seat cushion and seat backrest) of
the front multicontour seats is increased.
i When you adjust the multicontour seat,

noises may result from pumping air into or
Control systems
releasing air out of the air chambers.

To support the spine, you can individually
adjust the seat backrest contour of the front : Scale
seats by regulating the air pressure in the air ; Cursor
chambers of the multicontour seat. = Current setting
You can adjust the following air chambers:
X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd until desired
RSides of seat cushion setting is reached.
RSides of seat backrest X Saving setting: Press W.
RSeat backrest curvature in lumbar area
RSeat backrest curvature in shoulder area Adjusting seat backrest sides
The settings are made on the COMAND This function is used to adjust the air
display. chambers in the seat backrest sides.
Adjusting sides of seat cushion X Selecting Seatback Sides: Slide ZVÆ or
This function is used to adjust the air rotate cVd.

chambers in the sides of the seat cushion. X Confirming selection: Press W.
X Select seat (Y page 216). A scale appears.
X Selecting Seat Sides: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd.
A scale appears.

setting is reached.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 219
COMAND seats 219
Adjusting seat backrest curvature in

lumbar area
This function is used to adjust the air
chambers in the lumbar area of the seat
backrest.
X Selecting Lumbar: Slide XVY or rotate
Control systems
cVd.
Crosshair appears.
You can use them to make two settings:
setting is reached.
Rvertical: shift the point of greatest
curvature upward or downward
Rhorizontal: adjust the degree of
curvature Drive-dynamic multicontour seats
For information on manual multicontour seat
settings, see “Multicontour seats, front”
(Y page 218).
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the air
pressure in the air chambers (sides of seat
cushion and seat backrest) of the drive-
dynamic multicontour seats is increased.
The drive-dynamic multicontour seat
automatically adjusts the lateral support
provided by the seat backrest to your driving
X Slide ZVÆ or XVY until desired setting is style.
reached. The drive-dynamic multicontour seat
X Saving setting: Press W. electronically controls the air pressure in the
air chambers of the seat backrest side
bolsters. This function improves driving
Adjusting seat backrest curvature in comfort and pleasure.
shoulder area
This function is used to adjust the air X Selecting Dynamic Seat: Slide XVY or
chambers in the shoulder area of the seat rotate cVd.
backrest.
A scale appears.
X Selecting Shoulders: Slide XVY or rotate
cVd.
A scale appears.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 220
220 Instrument cluster control system
You can choose between: X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd until desired
R0: off setting is reached.
R1: level 1 (Less lateral support and slow
air pressure build-up in the air chambers i Depending on the setting, the massage
of the seat backrest side bolsters.) function runs for about 7 to 10 minutes.
R2: level 2 (Strong lateral support and fast
air pressure build-up in the air chambers
Control systems
of the seat backrest side bolsters.) Instrument cluster control system

Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 2.
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to call up statistical
data on your vehicle, and much more.
X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd until desired G Warning!
setting is reached. A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
X Saving setting: Press W. conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving.
Massage For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction
X Select seat (Y page 216). steering wheel should only be done by the
X Selecting Massage: Slide XVY or rotate driver when traffic and road conditions permit
cVd. it to be done safely.
X Confirming selection: Press W. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
A list appears. You can choose between (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
different types of massage: covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
G Warning!
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
necessary safety information and warning for
The control system relays information to the

multifunction display.
The current setting is indicated by a solid circle.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 221
Instrument cluster control system 221
Multifunction steering wheel Press and hold button

The displays in the multifunction display and % to select the standard display
the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the A Press button
multifunction steering wheel. ; to select menus
=
Press button briefly
Control systems
9 to select function or scroll
: through lists
within Audio menu to select
previous or next track, scene or
stored station
within Telephone menu to
switch to the phone book and
select a name or number
: Multifunction display
Press and hold button
; Press button
9 within Audio to select previous
~ to end a call : or next station in station list or
to reject an incoming call wave band
6 to answer a call within Telephone menu to
to dial32 start the quick search in the
to redial32 phone book
8 to mute Press button
Press button a to confirm selection or
messages
W to set the volume
X to operate the RACETIMER33
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
= Press button the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel will alter what appears in the
? to activate the Voice Control
System
The information available in the multifunction
? Press button briefly display is arranged in menus and
% to cancel the Voice Control accompanying functions. For example, in the
Settings menu, you will find functions for
System
making settings to your vehicle. There are
to go back functions for calling up information and for
to confirm messages making settings to your vehicle.
32 Function only available in telephone menu.

33 AMG vehicles only.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 222
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the Multifunction display

functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
X Press button = or ; repeatedly to
switch menus.
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.
Control systems
X Press button % to return to the next

highest menu level.
From a menu’s highest level, you will always
see the screen from the Trip menu that was : Main menus
last active. When you press button %
; Text field
again, you switch to the standard display
(Y page 223). Settings, functions as well as any
malfunctions appear in the text field.
For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(Y page 222).
Menus
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 223
Function
: Trip menu (Y page 223)
; Navi menu (Y page 225)
= Audio menu (Y page 226)
? AMG34 menu (Y page 227)
Control systems
A Telephone menu (Y page 230) In the standard display, the main
odometer : and the trip odometer ;
B Assistance menu (Y page 231) appear in the multifunction display.
C Service menu (Y page 233)
Fuel consumption statistics since start
D Settings menu (Y page 234)
X Press button = or ; to select the
Trip menu.
Trip menu X Press button : or 9 to select From
Start.
In the Trip menu, you can show an additional
display for the speedometer and call up or
reset your vehicle’s statistical data.
The following information is available:
RStandard display (Y page 223)
RFuel consumption statistics since start
(Y page 223)
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
(Y page 224) : Distance driven since start
RResetting values (Y page 224) ; Time elapsed since start
RRemaining
= Average speed since start
driving range and current fuel
consumption (Y page 224) ? Average fuel consumption since start
RDigital Speedometer (Y page 224) All statistics stored since the last engine start
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
Standard display
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
X Press button = or ; to select the Resetting will not occur if you turn the
Trip menu. SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
34 AMG vehicles only.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 224
Fuel consumption statistics since last The fuel consumption statistics reset
reset automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Trip menu.
Remaining driving range and current
X Press button : or 9 to select From
fuel consumption
Reset.
Trip menu.
Control systems
X Press button : or 9 to select the

estimated remaining driving range and
current fuel consumption display.
Note that the values are calculated based
on the current fuel tank level and the
current driving style. Make sure to refuel in
time.
: Distance driven since last reset
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
; Time elapsed since last reset vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
= Average speed since last reset instead of the estimated remaining driving
? Average fuel consumption since last reset range.
Resetting values
You can reset the values for the following
functions:
RTrip odometer
RFuel consumption statistics since start
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset

Digital speedometer
Trip menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the X Press button = or ; to select the
function you wish to reset. Trip menu.
X Press button a. X Press button : or 9 to select the
digital speedometer.
Example illustration: Reset trip odometer

: Digital speedometer
X Press button : to select Yes.
X Press button a to confirm.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 225
Navi menu Driving maneuver announced without

lane advice
The display in the Navi menu depends on
whether route guidance is active or not.
Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
Control systems
The multifunction display shows the direction
of travel and the name of the street you are
currently driving on, if known by the Example illustration
navigation system. : Street into which the driving maneuver
leads
; Symbol for driving maneuver
= Distance to driving maneuver and
graphical distance representation
When you are being notified of a driving
maneuver, you will see a visual distance
display = next to the driving maneuver
symbol. The visual distance display is
: Direction of travel reduced from bottom to top the closer you
; Street you are currently driving on come to the announced driving maneuver.
Driving maneuver announced with lane
Route guidance active advice
The image in the multifunction display Lane advice is displayed only when the
depends on whether you are being notified of respective data are available on the digital
a driving maneuver. map.
When driving on multilane roads or highways,
No notification of driving maneuver
COMAND can display lane advice for the next
driving maneuver.
Example illustration
: Distance to destination
: Road into which the driving maneuver
; Symbol for “follow the course of the road” leads
= Distance to next driving maneuver ; Distance to driving maneuver and
? Street you are currently driving on graphical distance representation
= Lane advice
? Symbol for driving maneuver
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 226
During a driving maneuver additional lanes COMAND cannot calculate a route to the
may become available on the road or selected destination.
highway. RDirection of Dest.
The vehicle has gone off the map during
route guidance (Y page 134).
Audio menu
Control systems
The functions in the Audio menu operate the

audio equipment which you have currently
: Lane that opened up during the driving switched on.
maneuver The following functions are available:
; Through lane RSelecting radio station (Y page 226)
ROperating audio devices/audio media
Navigation status displays in the
instrument cluster (Y page 227)
While route guidance is active, the following ROperating video DVD (Y page 227)
messages may be shown in the multifunction If no audio equipment is currently switched
display: on, the message Audio OFF appears in the
RO multifunction display.
You have reached your destination. X To adjust the volume: Press button
RArea of dest. reached W or X on the multifunction steering
You have arrived in the area of your wheel.
destination. The message appears, for
example, for relatively large POIs. Selecting radio station
RNew route... i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated
COMAND calculates a new route, e.g. as a radio application.
because you have deviated from the Additional optional satellite radio
calculated route or due to a detour report. equipment and a subscription to a satellite
Afterward, COMAND continues route radio service provider are required for
guidance. satellite radio operation. Contact an
RCalculating route authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
COMAND is calculating a route. Afterward, details and availability for your vehicle.
COMAND starts route guidance. For more information on satellite radio
ROff map operation, see “Satellite radio”
(Y page 170).
The vehicle’s location is outside of the
digital map’s range. The vehicle is in an off- X Switch on the COMAND system and select
map position (Y page 134). AM/FM radio (Y page 165) or satellite
ROff mapped road radio (Y page 170).
The vehicle is either on a road that has not
been digitized (Y page 134) or on the side Audio menu.
of a road, e.g. in a parking space. The currently tuned station appears in the
RNo route
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 227
Operating video DVD

X Switch on the COMAND system and select
Video Q Video Q Video DVD
(Y page 192).
Audio menu.
Control systems
Example illustration for FM radio
: Station frequency
; Wave band setting
X Selecting next or previous stored

station: Press button : or 9 briefly
to select a stored station.
X Selecting next or previous station in : Current scene
wave band: Press and hold button : or ; Disc number
9 to select a station.
You can only change the frequency band and X Press button : or 9 to select a
save new stations using the COMAND scene.
system, see (Y page 169) (AM/FM radio) or
(Y page 175) (satellite radio).
AMG menu
Operating audio devices/audio media This function is only available in AMG
X Switch on the COMAND system and select vehicles.
CD, DVD-Audio or MP3 (Y page 176). The main screen of the AMG menu shows you
X Press button = or ; to select the Rthe gear currently engaged
Audio menu. Rthe engine oil temperature
Rthe vehicle supply voltage
AMG menu.
Example: audio CD
: Current track
X Press button : or 9 to select a

track. : Gear indicator
i When you play a CD or DVD with text, the ; Upshift indicator
multifunction display shows the name and = Engine oil temperature indicator
number of the track. For MP3s, only the ? Vehicle supply voltage indicator
track is shown.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 228
The engine oil temperature will be shown in While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
blue if the engine oil temperature has not yet cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
reached 176‡ (80†). During this time, avoid W or X.
driving at full engine speed. X Starting: Press button W.
If the engine reaches the overspeed range in X Displaying intermediate time: Press
the manual shift program, you will see up next button X while the timer is running.
to gear indicator : as a reminder to upshift.
The intermediate time is shown for
Use buttons : or 9 to select the 5 seconds.
Control systems
following functions in the AMG menu: X Stopping: Press button W.

RRACETIMER (Y page 228)
When you stop the vehicle and turn the
ROverall analysis (Y page 229) SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 284) or, in
RLap analysis (Y page 229) vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
RACETIMER when you press button W after switching
G Warning! the ignition back on or restarting the engine.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on When you switch on the Night View Assist
roads and in conditions where high speed Plus (Y page 356) while the RACETIMER is
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is operating, the RACETIMER will continue to
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver run in the background but cannot be operated
is and must always remain responsible for with the multifunction steering wheel
following posted speed limits. buttons.
To stop the RACETIMER, switch off the Night
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save View Assist Plus first.
driving stretches.
X Press button = or ; to select the Saving lap time and starting a new lap
AMG menu. You can save up to 16 laps.
X Press button 9 to select the X Press button X while the timer is
RACETIMER. running.
The intermediate time will be shown for
5 seconds.
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be saved
as a lap time.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.
The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
the intermediate time is called up.
: Gear indicator
; Second hand
= RACETIMER
? Lap
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 284).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 229
Overall analysis
This function is only available if you have
saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
AMG menu.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the
Control systems
: Gear indicator overall analysis appears in the
; RACETIMER multifunction display.
= Best lap time
Resetting current lap

X Press button W while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER
Deleting all laps ; Overall driving time
It is not possible to delete a single saved lap. = Maximum speed
X Press button W while the timer is
? Overall distance driven
running. A Average speed
The timer stops.
X Press button X for at least 3 seconds.
Lap analysis
X Press button W.
The timer starts. The saved laps are This function is only available if you have
deleted. saved at least two laps and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
or
X Press button a.
AMG menu.
The reset menu appears in the
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the lap
analysis appears in the multifunction
display.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing
symbol :.
X Press button : to select Yes and

confirm with button a.
The saved laps are deleted.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 230
X Switch on the telephone and the COMAND

system.
Telephone menu.
One of the following messages will appear
in the multifunction display:
RNo service: No network is available.
Control systems
RReady for Bluetooth telephony...:

: Lap number
The telephone has not been connected
; Lap time
to the COMAND system via Bluetooth®
= Maximum speed during lap
yet.
? Lap length
X Connect the telephone to the
A Average speed during lap COMAND system via Bluetooth®
X Press button : or 9 to see other lap (Y page 152).
analyses. RTelephone Ready or name of the
network provider (if available): The
telephone has found a network and is
Telephone menu ready for use. You can operate it using
the control system.
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
Answering a call
your safety and the safety of others, we When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
recommend that you pull over to a safe you can answer a call at any time with the
location and stop before placing or taking a ignition on. When you are in the Telephone
telephone call. If you choose to use the menu, you will see the following message in
telephone while driving, please use the hands- the multifunction display:
free device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
14 m) every second.
You can connect your telephone to the Example illustration

COMAND system via Bluetooth® X Press button 6.
(Y page 151). The caller’s number appears only if it is
transmitted.
The caller’s name appears only if the number
and the name are stored in the phone book.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 231
Ending a call or rejecting an incoming Redialing

call
The control system stores the most recently
X Press button ~. dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
need to search through your entire phone
Dialing a number from the phone book book.
When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
Telephone menu.
you may select and dial a number from the
Control systems
X Press button 6.
phone book at any time.
Telephone menu. desired number or name.
X Press button 6 or a.
X Press button : or 9 or a to
switch to the phone book. The control system dials the selected
The stored names are displayed in phone number.
ascending alphabetical order.
desired entry.
Assistance menu
If you press and hold button : or In the DriveAssist menu, you can change
9 the system scrolls rapidly through the the settings of your driving systems.
list of names (quick search). After holding The following functions are available:
button : or 9 for a short while the RDisplaying distance graphic, DISTRONIC
scrolling speed increases. Release the PLUS (Y page 334)
button to stop the quick search. The search
stops automatically at the end of the list.
RSwitching ESC on or off (Y page 232)
X
RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake
If the Symbol G appears on the right-hand
(vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS only)
side of the name several entries are
(Y page 232)
present for the same name: Press button
6 or a and select the desired entry. RSwitching ATTENTION ASSIST on or off
(Y page 232)
X Press button 6 or a.
RSwitching Blind Spot Assist on or off
The control system dials the selected
phone number. (Y page 233)
RSwitching Lane Keeping Assist on or off
If the connection is successful and this
feature is supported by your network (Y page 233)
provider, the name of the party (if stored in
your phone book) you are calling will
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory.
or
X Press button ~ if you do not want to
make the call.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 232
Switching ESC on or off continuously, the ESC is not operational due

to a malfunction.
G Warning!
When the ESC is switched off or not
Never switch off the ESC when you see the
operational, vehicle stability in standard
ESC warning lamp ÷ flashing in the
driving maneuvers is reduced.
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows: Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as status of the ESC.
Control systems
possible.
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®
pedal. Brake (vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the only)
prevailing road conditions. X Press button = or ; to select the
Failure to observe these guidelines could DriveAssist menu.
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESC cannot X Press button : or 9 to select the
prevent accidents resulting from excessive PRE-SAFE Brake function.
speed.
X Press button a.
For more Information, see (Y page 66)
X Start the engine.
DriveAssist menu.
ESC function
X Press button a.
X Press button a again if you would like

to change the current status.
After the function has been activated,
PRE-SAFE® Brake indicator Ä appears
on the left-hand side of the multifunction
display. When the HOLD function is
switched on, the PRE-SAFE® Brake
indicator Ä will not appear.
For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,
see (Y page 69).
Depending on the previous status, ESC will
be Enabled or Disabled
Switching ATTENTION ASSIST on or off
G Warning! X Press button = or ; to select the
When the ESC OFF warning lamp å is on, DriveAssist menu.
the ESC is switched off. X Press button : or 9 to select the
When the ESC warning lamp ÷ and the Attention Assist function
ESC OFF warning lamp å are on X Press button a.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 233
Switching Lane Keeping Assist on or off

DriveAssist menu.
Lane Keeping Assist function
X Press button a.
Control systems
After the function has been activated,
ATTENTION ASSIST indicator À appears
on the left-hand side of the multifunction
display.
For more information on ATTENTION ASSIST,
see (Y page 355). X Press button a again if you would like
Switching Blind Spot Assist on or off After the function has been activated, the
X Press button = or ; to select the Lane Keeping Assist indicator Ã
DriveAssist menu. appears on the left-hand side of the
Blind Spot Assist function For more information on Lane Keeping
X Press button a.
Assistance, see (Y page 362).
Service menu
In the Service menu the following functions
are available:
RVehicle status message memory
(Y page 233)
RChecking tire inflation pressure
electronically with the Advanced TPMS
X Press button a again if you would like (Y page 414)
RCalling up the maintenance service
Depending on the previous status, Blind
indicator display (Y page 439)
Spot Assist will be Enabled or Disabled
RChecking engine oil level (S 600 and
For more information on Blind Spot Assist,
see (Y page 359). S 65 AMG) (Y page 406)
Vehicle status message memory

Use the vehicle status message memory
function to scan malfunction and warning
messages that may be stored in the system.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 234
display and are based on conditions or Settings menu

system status the vehicle’s system has
recorded.
The vehicle status message memory function
only appears if there are any messages
stored.
G Warning!
Control systems
Malfunction and warning messages are only

indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The In the Settings menu the following functions
malfunction and warning messages are are available:
simply a reminder with respect to the RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
operation of certain systems. They do not or off (USA only) (Y page 234)
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
RSetting Adaptive Highbeam Assist
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required (Y page 235)
maintenance and safety checks performed on RShowing or hiding additional speedometer
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized (Y page 235)
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the RSelecting speedometer display mode
malfunction and warning messages. (Y page 235)
X Press button = or ; to select the RActivating/deactivating the seat belt
Service menu. adjustment function (Y page 236)
If conditions have occurred causing status RSwitching the radar sensors on or off
messages to be recorded, the number of (Y page 236)
messages appears in the multifunction
display: 2 Messages. Switching daytime running lamp mode
X Press button : or 9 to select the on or off (USA only)
Messages function. X Press button = or ; to select the
X Press button a to confirm.
Settings menu.
For malfunction and warning messages, X Press button : or 9 to select the
see “Vehicle status messages in the
Day Running Lamps function.
multifunction display” (Y page 452).
X Press button a.
X Use button : or 9 to scroll through
the messages.
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and then back to position 2, all
messages will be deleted from the message
memory.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 235
X Press button a again if you would like For more information on the Adaptive
to change the current status. Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 301).
Depending on the previous status, the
Daytime Running Lamps will be switched Showing or hiding additional
on (Enabled) or off (Disabled). speedometer
With Daytime Running Lamps mode You can have an additional digital
Enabled selected and the exterior lamp speedometer shown in the multifunction
switch at position $ or c, the low- display. Depending on the setting for the
Control systems
beam headlamps are switched on when the speedometer display mode (Y page 235), the
engine is running. speed is shown in the unit of kilometers/hour
In low ambient light conditions the following (setting miles) or miles/hour (setting km).
lamps will come on additionally: X Press button = or ; to select the
RParking lamps Settings menu.
RTail lamps X Press button : or 9 to select the
RLicense plate lamps Add. Speedometer function.

X Press button a.
RSide marker lamps
For more information on the daytime running
lamp mode, see “Lighting” (Y page 299).
i Make sure the exterior lamp switch is set
to M or c when you switch off the
daytime running lamps while driving at
night.
Setting Adaptive Highbeam Assist

X Press button = or ; to select the to change the current status.
Settings menu. Depending on the previous status, the
X Press button : or 9 to select the Add. Speedometer will be switched On or
Adapt. High-beam Ass. . Off.
X Press button a.
Selecting speedometer display mode
Settings menu.
Units function.
X Press button a.

Depending on the previous status, the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist will be
Enabled or Disabled.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 236
Switching the radar sensors on or off

If your vehicle is equipped with DISTRONIC
PLUS or BAS PLUS it is equipped with a radar
sensor system which you can switch on and
off.
When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
registered in Canada, you must switch off the
radar sensor system. Canadian law does not
Control systems
X Press button a again if you would like permit the use of the radar sensor system for
to change the current status. vehicles from outside of Canada. When you
Depending on the previous status, the switch off the radar sensor system, the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer will be following functions are deactivated:
switched to miles or km. RBAS PLUS (Y page 64)
The additional speedometer (Y page 235) RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
will be shown in the other unit.
RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 330)
Activating/deactivating the seat belt RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 359)
adjustment function35 i USA only:
Use this function to set the seat belts to be This device has been approved by the FCC
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
front passenger seat belt fastened and the sensor is intended for use in an automotive
starter switch in position 2. radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
For more information on the seat belt altering of the device will void any
adjustment function, see (Y page 52). warranties, and is not permitted by the
Settings menu.
X Press a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the operate the equipment.
Belt Adjustment function.
i Canada only:
and
Depending on the previous status, the Removal, tampering, or altering of the
Belt Adjustment function will be device will void any warranties, and is not
Enabled or Disabled.
35 Depending on vehicle production date

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 237
Voice Control System introduction 237
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use accident in which you or others could be
in any non-approved way. injured.
device could void the user’s authority to G Warning!
operate the equipment. Please devote your attention first and
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
X Press button = or ; to select the While the system permits hands-free phone
Settings menu. operation, attention to traffic may be diverted
Control systems
X Press button : or 9 to select the not only by physical operation of a phone, but
Radar Sensors function. also by the distraction of a phone
X Press button a. conversation while driving. As such, for safety
reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the
vehicle in a safe place before answering or
placing a phone call.
For safety reasons, you should only select a
destination when the vehicle is stationary.
While the navigation system provides
directional assistance, the driver must remain
focused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
X Press button a again if you would like should utilize the system’s audio cues while
to change the current status. driving.
Depending on the previous status, the The navigation system does not supply any
Radar Sensors will be switched on information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
(Enabled) or off (Disabled). regulations or traffic safety rules. Their
observance always remains in the driver’s
i The selected status of the radar sensors personal responsibility. Maps do not cover all
remains stored in memory even if the areas nor all routes within an area.
engine is turned off and restarted.
Traffic regulations always have priority over
The following message appears in the any route recommendations given.
multifunction display if the radar sensors are Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
switched off and you attempt to activate (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
DISTRONIC PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake: covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Radar Sensors 14 m) every second.
(See Oper. Manual)
Disabled G Warning!
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
Voice Control System introduction attention from the road and driving.
Safety notes Please always use navigation announcements
instead of consulting the map display for
G Warning! directions. Consulting the symbols or map
Only use the Voice Control System when road display for directions may cause you to divert
and traffic conditions permit you to do so. your attention from driving and increase your
Otherwise you could be involved in an risk of an accident.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 238
238 Voice Control System introduction
G Warning! i To support the user, the Voice Control

Please do not use the Voice Control System System contains an extensive help function
in an emergency, as the tone of your voice (Y page 267).
may change in a stressful situation. This could You can use the commands “Continue” or
cause a delay in completing your phone call “Back” to scroll up or down in lists.
in a timely manner. This could distract you in The command “Correction” lets you repeat
an emergency situation and cause you to be the entry.
involved in an accident.
Control systems
Controls
General information
Operation via the multifunction
Depending on vehicle equipment, you can steering wheel
operate the following systems via the Voice
The Voice Control System is operational
Control System:
approximately 30 seconds after switching on
RTelephone (Y page 245) the COMAND.
RNavigation (Y page 240)
RAddress book (Y page 249)
RAudio (Y page 252) (AM/FM radio,
Satellite radio, CD/DVD changer, MP3
mode (SD card, USB, Music Register, Media
Interface), AUX)
RVideo
You control these systems using spoken

commands. Moreover, controls such as the
buttons on the multifunction steering wheel
(Y page 238) allow you to keep your hands Item
on the steering wheel.
: ? Activating the Voice Control
The Voice Control System recognizes
System
commands and number sequences,
Answering a call
irrespective of the speaker. To optimize
speech recognition for your voice follow the ; % Canceling the Voice Control
individualization process (Y page 271). System
You can use the Voice Control System to call = W Increasing volume
up all of COMAND’s main menu items.
The commands can be spoken without X Decreasing volume
pausing between the individual words. If an
i The Voice Control System can be
unavailable or incorrect command is used,
the Voice Control System will prompt you for canceled at any time, even during a dialog.
a new command by asking “Please repeat” or Please note that if the Voice Control
“Please repeat your entry”. System is canceled during a dialog, the
complete procedure stops. If reactivated,
The Voice Control System will confirm dialog starts from the beginning.
important commands and inform you in case
of incorrect entries.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 239
Voice Control System introduction 239
Starting the dialog with the Voice X Press button W or X. The volume is
Control System increased or decreased during voice
X
output.
Switch on the ignition (Y page 284).
X Press button ? on the multifunction
or
X Set volume for voice output using the
steering wheel.
An acoustic signal sounds. The dialog is COMAND volume thumbwheel on the lower
started. part of the front center console
(Y page 88).
Control systems
X Speak a command.
i You can also set the text reader speed
Pausing and resuming a dialog (Y page 91).
Pausing Displays
You can pause the dialog when a selection list
is displayed in COMAND. COMAND Display
X Speak the command “Pause”.
Continue With Push-to-talk appears
at the top of the selection list. You can
select an entry using the COMAND
controller.
Resuming
X Press button ? on the multifunction
steering wheel.
The dialog is resumed.
In addition to the acoustic help function, a
Aborting dialog visual help function (Y page 93) is available
X Press button % on the multifunction on COMAND display :.
steering wheel. Upon activating the Voice Control System,
or the most important available commands for
X Speak one of the commands “Stop”, “Quit”, the currently active mode appear on
“Abort”, “Terminate”, “Cancel” or “Exit”. COMAND display :.
This does not apply when entering voice When the Voice Control System requires
names or during the individualization additional information from the user, a
process. selection list is shown on COMAND
or display : in the address book and navigation
X Press any COMAND button. system.
Setting volume level

X Activate the Voice Control System.
X Speak a command, for example “Help”.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 240
240 Voice Control System navigation
Multifunction display Navigation operation

You can use the Voice Control System to
Renter a country, state or province
Renter a city
Renter a district or a center
Renter a street
Control systems
Renter an intersection
Renter a house number
Renter a zip code
For example, telephone numbers are shown Rfind address
in the multifunction display : while dialing
Renter a POI (point of interest)
when the main Telephone menu is selected
in the instrument cluster control system. Rselect one of your last destinations
Rcalling up route information
Rsave a destination
Symbols
Rnavigate to a destination stored in the
The following symbols are found in the Voice
destination memory of the address book
Control System pages:
Rdisplay the map
\ This symbol stands for commands and
voice names you are speaking. Rzoom the map in or out
^ This symbol stands for voice output by Rlisten to the destination memory
the Voice Control System. Rcancel route guidance
_ This symbol indicates that information
Rstart route guidance
is available on the COMAND display.
Rturn guide instructions on or off
Voice Control System navigation Selecting navigation mode

Important notes X Press button ?.
X Speak the command “Navigation”.
Safety notes for using the Voice Control
X Press button ?.
System
X Speak one of the navigation commands.
i You can use spoken navigation
Safety notes for using the navigation commands even when COMAND is in a
system mode other than navigation mode.

Navigation commands
i You cannot start the route guidance until
all necessary address data has been
entered.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 241
Voice Control System navigation 241
For a list of commands, see (Y page 257). Sample dialog:

\ Enter state.
“Help navigation” ^ Please say the name of the state.
Use the command “Help navigation” to read \ New York.
out an option list of available functions and ^ New York accepted.
commands that can be used in conjunction
with the navigation system. “Enter destination”
Control systems
Use the command “Enter destination” to
Entering an address enter a complete destination address.
Speak the commands and address data in The system guides you completely through
whole words. the dialog to route guidance. As soon as a
valid address is entered (at least the town),
The system guides you completely through
you can use the “Start route guidance”
the dialog to route guidance. As soon as a
command to start the route guidance.
valid address is entered (at least the town),
you can use the “Start route guidance” Sample dialog:
command to start the route guidance. \ Enter destination.
When multiple choices for an entry are ^ Preselected state is New York. Do you
available, the system offers a numbered list want to enter town first or street first?
of possible entries in the COMAND display. \ Town first.
You will then have to select a line number.
^ Please say the name of the town.
This number is taken over by the system.
\ Nanuet.
i You can use the commands “Continue” or
^ Nanuet accepted.
“Back” to scroll up or down in lists.
^ Please say the name of the street.
The command “Correction” lets you repeat
the entry. \ Main Street.
^ Main Street accepted.
Sample dialog: ^ Do you want to start route guidance?
_ The system shows a numbered list of \ Yes.
states recognized by the system. ^ Start route guidance.
^ Please select a line number. The system calculates the route and, upon
\ Number two. completing route calculation, starts route
^ Number two accepted. guidance.
The selected entry is adopted from the list. “Points of interest”

i Address entries for Puerto Rico must be Use the command “Points of interest” to
spelled. For information on spelling, see select a point of interest (POI) such as
(Y page 268). airports, railroad stations, gas stations etc.
“Enter state”, “Enter province”

Use the command “Enter state” or “Enter
province” to select a different state or
province on the navigation system.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 242
Sample dialog: Select POIs in your vicinity

\ Points of interest. With following commands you can select POIs
_ The system shows the following list on in your vicinity:
the COMAND display: R“Next gas station”
1. Current position R“Next parking lot”
2. Other state R“Next Mercedes-Benz service center”
3. Other province
Control systems
R“Next restaurant”
4. Other town R“Next hospital”
^ Please select a line number or say an
area name. Sample dialog:
\ Number one. \ Next gas station.
^ Number one accepted. _ The system shows a numbered list of
^ Loading data. gas stations on the COMAND display.
_ The system displays a numbered list of ^ Please select a line number.
available POI categories. \ Number one.
^ Please select a line number or say a ^ Number one accepted.
category. ^ Do you want to start route guidance?
\ Number one (or e.g. Eat & Drink). \ Yes.
^ Number one accepted (or Eat & Drink) The system calculates the route and, upon
accepted. completing route calculation, starts route
^ Loading data. guidance.
_ The system displays a numbered list of
available POIs of the selected “Last destinations”
category.
Use the command “Last destinations” to
^ Please select a line number or say a
select a destination from among a number of
category. destinations last navigated to.
\ Number one.
^ Number one accepted. “Save destination”
^ Do you want to start route guidance?
Use the command “Save destination” to save
\ Yes. the current destination in the address book.
^ Starting route guidance.
i The Voice Control System may recognize
i Depending on the number of categories names even if not saved in your voice. For
and POI’s available for a given area, the best possible call-up performance,
system may display several lists on each of however, you should speak and save the
which you may have to make a selection by names you intend to use yourself.
speaking the desired line number or the If an entry is already available in the
name of a POI. address book, the system will ask you if you
would like to add the address to the
available entry.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 243
Voice Control System navigation 243
Sample dialog: Speak the command “Navigate (to)” and

\ Save destination. the first and last name in any order. This
^ Please say the name. applies to other functions of address book
entries also.
\ John Smith.
^ Please repeat the name. Sample dialog:
\ John Smith. \ Navigate to John Smith.
^ Where do you want to save: home or If more than one address exists for this
Control systems
work? voice name, the Voice Control System
\ Work. will prompt you:
^ The destination has been saved. ^ Navigate to home or work?
\ Work.
“Find address” ^ John Smith work.
Starting route guidance.
Use the command “Find address” to call up
an address from memory and to start route
guidance. “Start route guidance”
Use the command “Start route guidance” to
“Navigate (to) <voice name>” (address start route guidance after entering a valid
book) destination.
Use the command “Navigate (to) <voice Sample dialog:
name>” to start route guidance by selecting \ Start route guidance.
voice name with a saved destination address
from the COMAND address book. ^ Starting route guidance.
A voice name may have two different Route guidance begins.
destination addresses associated with it
(home or work). “Route Information”
The system confirms your command, You can use the “Route Information”
calculates the route, and begins route command to get the following information on
guidance. If only one address is stored, you your currently planned route read out:
can use the command “Navigate (to) <voice RDistance to destination
name>” to select the stored destination
address for that name. RRemaining driving time
If two addresses are stored, you can use the RExpected arrival time
commands
R“Navigate (to) <voice name> home” “Guidance instructions on”
or Use the command “Guidance instructions on”
R“Navigate (to) <voice name> work” to enable the system’s guidance voice output.
to directly select between home or work The Voice Control System repeats the current
address for that name. The system guidance instructions.
confirms your selection, calculates the
route, and begins route guidance. “Guidance instructions off”
i You can also navigate to address book Use the command “Guidance instructions
entries without voice names. off” to mute the system’s guidance voice
output.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 244
“Cancel route guidance” system asks with which entry it is to

start.
Use the command “Cancel route guidance”
to cancel route guidance. ^ Say the name from which the list
should start to read.
Sample dialog: \ John Smith.
\ Cancel route guidance. Starting with this name, the system
^ Are you sure you want to cancel route reads all address book entries that
guidance? include an address.
Control systems
\ Yes. X
Press button ? on the multifunction
Route guidance is canceled. steering wheel briefly when the desired
or entry is read. When more than one address
\ No. for the entry exists, the Voice Control
System will inquire.
^ Cancel.
^ Navigate to: home or work?
The dialog with the Voice Control System is \ Home.
canceled. Route guidance remains active.
The system reads the selected voice
name and starts route guidance.
“Map”
Use the command “Map” to activate or switch
to map display. Commands for entering parts of an
address
“Zoom in”, “Zoom out”
“Enter town”
Use these commands to zoom in on map or
to zoom out of map to the desired level of map You can use the “Enter town” command to
detail. enter any town in the state or province that is
currently selected.
“Zoom in completely”, “Zoom out i You can scroll through the list by using the
completely” “Continue” or “Back” command. Say
“Correction” to enter the town or city again.
These commands are used to adapt the map
display directly to the smallest or largest map Sample dialog:
scale. \ Enter town.
^ Please say the name of the town.
“Read out destination memory”
\ Albany.
Use the command “Read out destination ^ Loading town list.
memory” to listen to all entries in the address _ The system shows a numbered list of
book that contain an address. If applicable possible town names on the display. If
you can start route guidance to an entry. there is only one entry on the list, the
Sample dialog: Voice Control System asks if it is
\ Read out destination memory. correct.
^ Please select a line number.
The system reads all address book
entries that include an address. When \ Number one.
a large number of entries is stored, the ^ Number one accepted.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 245
Voice Control System telephone 245
The city selected is adopted for route “Enter intersection”, “Enter crossing”
guidance.
Use the command “Enter intersection” or
“Enter crossing” to enter an intersection.
“Enter district”, “Enter center”
Sample dialog:
You can use the “Enter district” or “Enter
center” command to enter an area in a city \ Enter intersection.
which you have selected previously. ^ Please say the name of the first street.
\ Forest Drive.
Control systems
Sample dialog:
^ Forest Drive accepted.
\ Enter district.
^ Please say the name of the
^ Please say the name of the district.
intersecting street.
\ Manhattan.
\ Dudley Street.
_ The system displays a list of available
^ Dudley Street accepted.
districts if more than one name
matches the name of a district for the The intersection is adopted for route
given city. guidance.
^ Please select a line number.
\ Number one. “Enter house number”
^ Number one accepted. Use the command “Enter house number” to
enter a house number for the street
The district selected is adopted for route
previously selected.
guidance.
Sample dialog:
“Enter street” \ Enter house number.
You can use the “Enter Street” command to ^ Please say the house number.
enter the name of any street in the selected \ Thirty-two.
city. ^ House number accepted.
i If only a few streets are stored for a The house number is adopted for route
selected town, they will be displayed for guidance.
selection immediately after you give the
“Enter Street” command. “Correction”
Sample dialog: If you have entered a city or street, you can
\ Enter Street. use the “Correction” command to enter the
^ Please say the name of the street. city or street again.
\ Mabel’s Street.
Voice Control System telephone
available street names.
^ Please select a line number. Safety notes
\ Number one. i For more information on telephone, see
^ Number one accepted. (Y page 148).
The street name selected is adopted for route
guidance.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 246
246 Voice Control System telephone
Safety notes for using the Voice Control “Telephone”

System
Use the command “Telephone” to activate
G Observe Safety notes, see page 237. the telephone main menu. Use this command
if you want the digits you are entering to
Safety notes for using the telephone appear on the COMAND display.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 148. “Help telephone”

Control systems
The Voice Control System features a

Telephone operation comprehensive help function.
Use the command “Help telephone” and the
You can use the Voice Control System to Voice Control System will read out an option
Rdial phone number list of available functions and commands that
Rstore names and numbers in the COMAND can be used in conjunction with the telephone
address book (Y page 93).
Rdiala phone number directly from the “Dial number”
COMAND address book
Rdelete
You can dial a phone number using the
the voice name of an address book
command “Dial number”.
entry
The digits 0 to 9 and the word “Plus” are
Rhave the system read out the phone book permitted. “Plus” replaces the international
of the address book entry by entry dialing code “00”.
Rmanage and access an automated Speak the telephone number
answering system/voice mail box36 Ras a continuous string
Rredial
or, with longer phone numbers,
The Voice Control System detects whether Rin digit blocks (three to five digits in each
Ryour telephone is switched on block).
Ryour telephone is connected via Bluetooth® After each digit block (separate the digit
Rthe
blocks by using an approximately 0.5 second
corresponding mobile network is
pause), the Voice Control System repeats the
logged in
recognized digits and waits until you continue
Rit is possible to dial speaking.
If dialing is not possible, the Voice Control Sample dialog:
System will advise you accordingly.
\ Dial number.
i You can continue operating your mobile ^ Please say the number.
phone using the telephone keypad or the \ One two three four five six seven.
keypad on your phone.
^ One two three four five six seven.
\ Ok.
Telephone commands ^ Dialing.
For a list of commands, see (Y page 257). i You can also dial the specified number if
you press button 6 on the multifunction
36 Only when supported by the mobile phone.

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 247
Voice Control System telephone 247
steering wheel instead of the concluding “Delete”

command “Ok”.
Using the command “Delete” will erase all
digits entered. The system then prompts you
“Repeat” to start your input again.
Using the command “Repeat” will repeat all
Sample dialog:
digits spoken up to that point. Upon repeating
the digits, the system will prompt you to \ Dial number.
continue your input. ^ Please say the number.
Control systems
Sample dialog: \ One two three four five six seven.
\ Dial number. ^ One two three four five six seven.
^ Please say the number. \ Delete.
\ One two three. ^ Number deleted. Please say the
^ One two three. number again.
\ Repeat. \ Four two seven three three nine one.
^ One two three, please continue.
^ Four two seven three three nine one.
\ Four five six seven.
\ Ok.
^ Four five six seven.
\ Ok. ^ Dialing.
^ Dialing.
“Redial”
“Correction” Use the command “Redial” to dial the last
dialed number.
Using the command “Correction” will correct
the last entered digit block. After speaking
the command, the last digit block is deleted “Save name” (COMAND address book)
and all previously entered digits are repeated. The command “Save name” saves a phone
The system then prompts you to continue number with a voice name in the address
your input. book. Use this command for names that are
rather difficult or when spelling and
Sample dialog:
pronunciation of a name differ. After speaking
\ Dial number. the command, the Voice Control System
^ Please say the number. prompts you to enter a phone number.
\ One two three. The digits 0 to 9 and the word “Plus” are
^ One two three. permitted. “Plus” replaces the international
\ Four five six seven. dialing code “00”.
^ Five five six seven. i Speak the telephone number as a
\ Correction. continuous string.
^ One two three, please continue. The Voice Control System repeats the
\ Four five six seven. recognized digits and waits for you to
^ Four five six seven continue or to confirm.
\ Ok. After speaking the command “Ok”, the Voice
^ Dialing. Control System prompts you two to three
times to speak the name. When speaking the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 248
248 Voice Control System telephone
name for the second time, make sure to ^ Which number do you want to dial:
pronounce it the same as the first time. Home or work?
Otherwise the name cannot be saved and the \ Work.
Voice Control System aborts saving. ^ Smith work.
After the command “Ok”, you will be Dialing.
prompted up to two times to input the name.
When repeating the name, make sure that you
“Call <entry>” (address book)
pronounce it in the same manner as during
Control systems
the first input. Otherwise the name cannot be Use the command “Call <entry>” to place a
saved and the Voice Control System cancels phone call by directly selecting a name
the save procedure. previously stored in your address book.
One address book entry can have different
Sample dialog:
telephone numbers (mobile/car/land line/
\ Save name. pager) for both the home and work fields.
^ Please say the number. If only one telephone number is stored for a
\ One two three four five six seven. given name, you can recall the entry using the
^ One two three four five six seven. command “Call John Smith”.
\ Ok. If several telephone numbers are associated
^ Do you want to add the number to an with one entry, you can recall the desired
existing entry? telephone number by using the following
\ No. commands:
R“Call John Smith home”
^ Please say the name for the new entry.
\ Smith. R“Call John Smith work”
^ Please repeat the name. R“Call John Smith home mobile”
\ Smith. R“Call John Smith home car”
^ Do you want to save the number in a R“Call John Smith home land line”
category?
R“Call John Smith work mobile”
\ No.
R“Call John Smith work car”
^ The entry Smith has been saved.
R“Call John Smith work land line”
“Call name” (COMAND address book) R“Call John Smith work pager”
The command “Call name” connects you to a The system confirms your input and the
phone number by selecting a name from the number is dialed.
address book. You speak a voice name or a
name entry. When the address book contains Sample dialog:
the last name only, speak the last name. \ Call John Smith.
If several telephone numbers exist for
Sample dialog: the same entry, the Voice Control
\ Call name. System will ask for clarification.
^ Please say the name. ^ Which number do you want to dial:
\ Smith. Home or work?
If several telephone numbers exist for \ Work.
the same entry, the Voice Control ^ John Smith work.
System will ask for clarification. Dialing.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 249
Voice Control System address book 249
“Delete name” (COMAND address book) ^ Which number do you want to dial:
Home or work?
The command “Delete name” deletes a voice
name for an address book entry. The address \ Home.
data are not deleted. ^ Smith home.
Dialing.
Sample dialog:
\ Delete name. “Dialed calls”
^ Please say the name.
Control systems
The command “Dialed calls” displays the last
\ Smith. called phone numbers and to call one of these
^ Do you want to delete Smith. phone numbers.
\ Yes.
“Received calls”
^ The voice name has been deleted.
The command “Received calls” displays the
last calls that came in.
“Read out phone book”, “Read out
address book” and dialing a phone Managing announcement services or
number voice mail
Use the command “Read out phone book” or You can also use the Voice Control System to
“Read out address book” to listen to all manage your voice mail or recorded
entries in the phone book with a phone announcement services.
number stored, and select an entry and dial
X Press button ? while a phone call is in
that number.
progress.
Sample dialog: An acoustic signal confirms that the system
\ Read out phone book. is activated.
The Voice Control System reads all X Say the required digits (“Zero” to “Nine”).
address book entries that are stored or
with a phone number. When a large X Say the required words “Star” and “Pound”.
number of entries is stored, the system
X Say the final command “Ok”.
asks with which entry it is to start.
The system dials the number entered.
^ Please say the name from the starting
point the list should be read.
\ Smith. Voice Control System address book
Starting with this name, the system
reads all address book entries Safety notes
including the phone number.
G Warning!
X Selecting an entry and dialing that Please devote your attention first and
number: For the desired entry, press foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
button ? during or immediately after Before your journey, please familiarize
voice output. yourself with the address book functions.
If more than one phone number exists for Only use the Voice Control System when road
a given entry, the Voice Control System and traffic conditions permit you to do so.
prompts: Otherwise you could be involved in an
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 250
250 Voice Control System address book
accident in which you or others could be Rhave the system read the destination
injured. memory to you (Y page 244)
Rdelete the address book
Ropen the address book
COMAND address book overview
Ropen an entry in the address book
The address book lets you store voice names
Rhave the system read the phone book to
in address book entries.
you (Y page 249)
Control systems
You can dial a phone number from the

address book or start route guidance to a X Press button ? on the multifunction
stored address via the Voice Control System. steering wheel.
In addition to the voice names, the Voice X Speak the command “Address book”.
Control System can also recognize all entries X Press button ? on the multifunction
in the name fields of the address book. steering wheel.
Check address book entries for the following: X Speak one of the following address book
RName entries such as first and last name commands.
are in the correct field.
RDo not use abbreviations or short forms,
e.g. acronyms. Adressbook commands
RAvoid unnecessary blanks within the name For a list of commands, see (Y page 257).
RDo not use special characters.
“Help address book”
You can improve the voice recognition by
adding a voice name to an address book Use the command “Help address book” to
entry. have the system read the most important
commands for the address book to you.
Use a voice name
Rwith names that are difficult to pronounce “Save name”
Rto differentiate names that sound similar For information on “Save name”, see
Rwith names that are pronounced (Y page 247).
significantly different from the way they are
spelled “Call name”
You can store voice names for up to 50 For information on “Call name”, see
address book entries. (Y page 248).
“Call <entry>”
Adressbook operation
For information on “Call <entry>”, see
You can use the Voice Control System to (Y page 248).
Rstore a name
Rselect a name “Find address”
Rdelete a name For information on “Find address”, see
Rhave
(Y page 243).
the system read the address book to
you
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 251
Voice Control System address book 251
“Delete name” the desired entry contains at least one

phone number or one address, the Voice
The command “Delete name” deletes a voice
Control System will ask you what you would
name for an address book entry. The address
like to do. You can either dial the phone
data are not deleted.
number or calculate the route to the stored
Sample dialog: address.
\ Delete name.
^ Please say the name. “Read out destination memory”
Control systems
\ Smith. For information on “Read out destination
^ Do you want to delete Smith? memory”, see (Y page 244).
\ Yes.
^ The voice name has been deleted. “Delete address book”
Use the command “Delete address book” to
“Navigate (to) <voice name>” delete all or individual voice names of the
address book entries. Only the voice name is
For information on “Navigate (to) <voice deleted; the remaining data in the entry are
name>”, see (Y page 243). retained. When the address book entry
contains a voice name only, the entire
“Read out address book”, “Read out address book entry will be deleted.
phone book”
Use the command “Read out address book” “Address book”
or “Read out phone book” to have the system Use this command to open the address book.
read all name entries and voice names in the
address book to you. While the system is
“Open entry”
reading, you can select an entry by pressing
button ? on the multifunction steering Use the command “Open entry” you can open
wheel. any address book entry.
When the name field is empty, the phone Sample dialog:
number or the address is read. You can
\ Open entry.
complete the missing data later.
Sample dialog: entries in the COMAND display.
\ Read out address book. ^ Please select a line number.
The system reads all address book \ Number 1.
entries. When a large number of ^ Number 1 accepted.
entries is stored, the system asks with _ The system opens the first entry from
which entry it is to start.
the list.
^ Please say the name from the starting
When selected entry contains at least
point the list should be read.
one phone number or one address, the
\ Smith. Voice Control System will ask you what
Starting with this name, the system you would like to do. You can either
reads all address book entries. dial the phone number or calculate the
X Selecting address book entry: Press route to the stored address.
button ? on the multifunction steering
wheel when the desired entry is read. When
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 252
252 Voice Control System radio
i The list is displayed only when the The names of all received and stored stations
address book contains a very small number are available for voice recognition. To
of entries. When the address book contains improve voice recognition, you can store a
several entries, the Voice Control System voice name for a specific speaker.
prompts you to speak a name. X To select the radio or satellite radio
You can also use the commands “Open application: Press button ? button on
John Smith”, “Open Smith John”, or “Open the multifunction steering wheel.
<voice name>” to open an address book X Say the command “Radio” or “Satellite
Control systems
entry directly. Radio”.

X Press button ?.
Voice Control System radio X Say one of the radio or satellite radio
commands explained below.
Safety notes
G Warning!
Radio commands
foremost to the traffic situation you are in. For a list of commands, see (Y page 257).
Before your journey, please familiarize You can always give the commands for the
yourself with the radio functions. radio when you are listening to the radio, even
Only use the Voice Control System when road if a different application is shown on the
and traffic conditions permit you to do so. display.
Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be “Help Radio”
injured. Using the “Help Radio” command, the Voice
Control System asks “For which radio
functions do you want help?”. It then reads
Radio operation out a list of topics.
You can use the Voice Control System to
Rselect
“Help Satellite Radio”
a station
Rfind a station Using the “Help Satellite Radio” command,
the Voice Control System asks “For which
Rselect a frequency (FM, AM) radio functions do you want help?”. It then
Rselect a category (satellite radio) reads out a list of topics.
Rselect the wave band (FM, AM or weather
band) “Help HD Radio”
Rreading out the Presets Using the “Help HD Radio” command, you can
have all the commands for the HD Radio™
Rswitch to satellite radio read out.
Rswitch to HD Radio™
Rsave a voice name for a station
Rdelete a station list (voice names only)
Rdelete a station (voice name only)
Rselect a channel number (satellite radio)
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 253
Voice Control System radio 253
Selecting a wave band “Save station”

You can set the wave band with the following Using the “Save station” command you can
commands: give a voice name to the station currently
R“FM” selected. You can also use this command to
improve voice recognition for difficult names
R“AM”
or if you want to use a name of your own. You
R“Weatherband” could, for example, save a station with the
name “Favorite station37”.
Control systems
“Next station”, “Previous station” When you have given the command, the Voice
Control System prompts up to three times to
The following commands are used to start the say the station name. When repeating the
station search and to tune in the next station: station name, make sure that you pronounce
R“Next station” it in exactly the same way as you did the first
R“Previous station” time. Otherwise, the name cannot be saved
and the Voice Control System aborts the
saving procedure.
“Next Category”, “Previous Category”
Sample dialog:
You can use the following commands to
change the category on satellite radio: \ Save station.
^ Please say the station name.
R“Next Category”
\ Favorite station37.
R“Previous Category”
^ Please repeat the station name.
\ Favorite station37.
Selecting frequency (FM range)
^ The station “Favorite station37” has
You can select frequencies within the FM been saved.
range (87.9 to 107.9 MHz) directly. The Voice
Control System also recognizes the words
“Frequency”, “Point” and “Megahertz”.
“Select station”
Using the “Select station” command, you can
Sample dialog:
select a saved station.
\ Ninety five point five megahertz.
The Voice Control System tunes the Sample dialog:
radio to frequency FM 95.5. \ Select station.
^ Please say the station name.
Selecting frequency (AM range) \ Favorite station37.
You can select frequencies within the AM The Voice Control System sets the station.
range (530 to 1710 kHz) directly. Voice
control also recognizes the words “Favorite station37” or e.g. “WNYC”
“Frequency” and “Kilohertz”.
Using this command, you can directly select
Sample dialog: a saved station.
\ Five hundred and thirty kilohertz.
The Voice Control System tunes the
radio to frequency AM 530.
37 Example for a voice name.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 254
254 Voice Control System radio
Sample dialog: To select a station:

\ Favorite station37. X Press button ?, when the system reads
The Voice Control System sets the station. the desired station.
X Canceling the dialog: Press button %.
“Select Category” (satellite radio) The dialog is concluded. The system
confirms “Cancel”.
Using the “Select category” command, you
can select an available category.
Control systems
“Delete station”
Sample dialog:
You can use the “Delete station” command to
\ Select category.
delete a voice name for a station from the
^ Please say the category name. Presets.
\ News.
Sample dialog:
The Voice Control System sets the category.
\ Delete station.
^ Which station name do you want to
“Category News” (satellite radio)
delete?
Use this command to select a satellite radio \ Favorite station37.
category.
^ Do you want to delete Favorite
Sample dialog: station37?
\ Category news. \ Yes.
The Voice Control System sets the category. ^ Favorite station37 deleted.
“Enter Channel Number” (satellite “Delete station list”

radio)
You can use the “Delete station list”
Use the command “Enter channel number” to command to delete all voice names or
select a satellite radio channel. individual ones from the stations of the
Presets.
“List station list” and “Selecting a
Station” (FM only) Sample dialog:
\ Delete station list.
Using the “List station list” command, you ^ Do you want to delete them all?
can hear the stored stations from the
\ Yes.
Presets and you can choose one of them.
^ Are you sure you want to delete all
i If the Voice Control System does not voice names?
recognize the station name, have it read out \ Yes.
the list of stations. This allows you to check
whether you have saved the station you ^ All voice names have been deleted
require in the Presets. from the station list.
The system permanently deletes all voice
Sample dialog: names in the Presets.
\ List station list.
or
The Voice Control System reads out the ^ No
stored stations from the Presets.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 255
Voice Control System CD/DVD changer/MP3 255
The system reads out the list of stations. Operation

When the system reads the station to be You can use the Voice Control System to
deleted:
Rselect a CD/DVD or another medium
X
Press button ?.
Rselect a track
The station to be deleted is selected. The
system reads out the selected station Rselect a folder in MP3 mode
again. Rchange the category when in media
Control systems
^ Do you want to delete “Favorite interface mode
Station37”? Rselect a group in audio DVD mode
\ Yes.
Rselect a chapter or scene when in video
^ Station deleted.
DVD mode
The system deletes the station and reads out
the remaining entries in the Presets. i Upon the command “Next/Previous CD/
or DVD”, the DVD changer switches from one
CD/DVD to the next. It will skip empty
^ No. slots. When you select an empty slot using
The system continues reading the Presets the commands “CD/DVD 1” through “CD/
entry by entry. DVD 6”, the current slot remains selected.
“HD Radio on”, “HD Radio off” i The following commands “DVD audio”,
“DVD video”, “Next/Previous CD/DVD”
Use “HD Radio on” or “HD Radio off” to switch and “CD/DVD 1” to “CD/DVD 6”, cause
the HD Radio™ on or off. the DVD changer to switch from one slot to
another, regardless of the type of medium
“Sirius” found in the selected slot. In your
command, you can therefore replace the
Use “Sirius” to switch to SIRIUS XM Satellite
term “CD/DVD” with “Medium”.
Radio.
Selecting CD/DVD mode
Voice Control System CD/DVD X Press button ? on the multifunction
changer/MP3 steering wheel.
Safety notes X Speak one of the following commands:
R“CD player”
G Warning!
R“CD changer”
foremost to the traffic situation you are in. R“DVD audio”
Before your journey, please familiarize R“DVD video”
yourself with the audio functions. R“Hard disk”
Only use the Voice Control System when road
R“Memory card”
and traffic conditions permit you to do so.
Otherwise you could be involved in an R“Media interface”
accident in which you or others could be R“USB”
injured.
R“Music Register”
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 256
256 Voice Control System CD/DVD changer/MP3
X Press button ? on the multifunction “Track 1” to “Track 99”

steering wheel.
Use the commands “Track 1” to “Track 99”
X Speak one of the following commands.
to select a title number from a loaded
medium.
Commands “Next track”

For a list of commands, see (Y page 257). Use the command “Next track” to select the
Control systems
next track.
Help commands
Use the following commands and the Voice “Previous track”, “Repeat track”
Control System will read out a list of available Use the command “Previous track” or
commands for the audio/video functions: “Repeat track” to play again the track you are
R“Help CD” listening to. When you speak the command
R“Help
during the first seconds of the track, the
DVD audio”
previous track is played back.
R“Help DVD video”
R“Help MP3” “Group 1” to “Group 9”
R“Help hard disk” The “Group 1” to “Group 9” commands are
R“Help memory card” used to select a group on the inserted audio-
DVD.
R“Help media interface”
R“Help USB” “Next group”, “Previous group”
R“Help music register” Use the command “Next group” or “Previous
group” to select a group on the inserted
“Next CD/DVD/Medium” audio-DVD.
Use the command “Next CD”, “Next DVD” or
“DVD audio”
“Next Medium” to select the next available
medium in the CD/DVD changer. Use the command “DVD audio” to start an
audio DVD in the COMAND.
“Previous CD/DVD/Medium”
“DVD video”
Use the command “Previous CD”, “Previous
DVD” or “Previous Medium” to select the Use the command “DVD video” to start a
previous medium in the CD/DVD change. video DVD in the COMAND.
“CD/DVD/Medium 1” to “CD/DVD/ “Select scene”, “Select chapter”

Medium 6”
Use the command “Select scene” or “Select
Use commands “CD/DVD/Medium 1” to chapter” to select a scene or chapter on the
“CD/DVD/Medium 6” to select one of up to current video DVD.
six mediums in your CD/DVD changer.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 257
Voice Control System command list 257
“Hard disk”, “Music Register” “Media Interface”

Use the command “Hard disk” or “Music Use the command “Media Interface” to
Register” to switch to the internal hard disk switch to the media interface in the glove box.
(Music Register) of the COMAND.
“USB”
“Memory card”
Use the command “USB” to switch to the USB
The “Memory card” command is used to interface in the glove box.
Control systems
switch from the DVD drive to the SD card.
Voice Control System command list

Voice Control System external
devices This section contains an overview of the most
important commands for Voice Control
Operation System operation. Which commands are
You can use the Voice Control System to available for use depends on the equipment
Rswitch
level in your vehicle.
to audio AUX mode
Rswitch to media interface mode i Some functions can be operated using
several different commands. In the
Rswitch to the USB interface following list, these commands are
X Selecting application: Press grouped in one cell. When multiple similar,
button ? on the multifunction steering alternative commands are possible they
wheel. are separated by a slash “/”. Choose your
X Speak one of the following commands.
preferred command from those available.
Possible additions to the commands are in
brackets “( )”. Other commands are
possible. Refer to the respective help
Commands function.
For a list of commands, see (Y page 257).
Help commands General commands

Use the following commands to hear all Ryes
commands for external devices:
Rright
R“Help Media Interface”
Rok
R“Help USB-Interface”
Rno
“Audio AUX” Rcancel

Use the command “Audio AUX” to switch to Rstop
audio AUX mode.
Rquit
“Video AUX” Rabort
Rterminate
Use the command “Video AUX” to switch to
video AUX mode. Rexit
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 258
258 Voice Control System command list
Rpause Rhelp voice control system

Rhelp linguatronic
Raddress book
Rgeneral help
RCD-Player
R0 -9
RCD-Changer
RLetters of the alphabet
Rnavigation
Control systems
Rcontinue
Rroute guidance
Rgo forward
Rnavi
Rnext
Rnav
Rnext page
Rdestination guidance
Rgo on
RDVD audio
Rback
RDVD video Rgo back
Rradio Rprevious page
Rsat Rlast page
radio
Rsatellite radio Rhelp Radio
RSIRIUS
Rhelp HD radio
RHD radio Rhelp Satellite radio
Rtelephone (on) Rhelp telephone
Rphone (on)
Rhelp address book
Rvideo
Rhelp disc
Rvehicle
Rhelp CD player
Rservice
Rhelp CD changer
Rsystem
Rhelp audio DVD
Rcorrection Rhelp audio DVD player
Rwrong Rhelp audio DVD changer
Rincorrect Rhelp DVD
Rhelp Rhelp DVD player
Rhelp DVD changer
Rhelp functions
Rhelp Rhelp video DVD
devices
Rhelp Rhelp video DVD player
scope of functions
Rhelp video DVD changer
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 259
Rhelp media Rmake a call

Rhelp media player RI'd like to use the phone
Rhelp media changer RI'd like to telephone
RI'd like to make a call
Rhelp media interface
Rhelp UCI Rsave
Rstore
Control systems
Rhelp USB interface
Rhelp USB Rsave number
Rsave telephone number
Rhelp MP3
Rsave name
Rhelp MP3 player
Rstore number
Rhelp MP3 changer
Rstore telephone number
Rhelp Music Register Rstore name
Rhelp hard disk
Rdial
Rhelp memory card Rdial number
Rhelp SD card Rdial phone number
Rhelp navigation Rdial telephone number
Rhelp navi Rconfirm
Rhelp nav Rconfirm number
Rhelp routing Rconfirm phone number
Rhelp route guidance Rconfirm telephone number
Rhelp navigation guidance Rrepeat
Rhelp destination guidance Rrepeat number
Rhelp Rrepeat phone number
map
Rhelp Rrepeat telephone number
map scale
Rhelp Rread out phone book
points of interest
Rhelp Rlist phone book
POI(s)
Rplay phone book
Rget phone book
Telephone commands Rread aloud phone book
Rall telephone functions Rredial
Rtelephone Rredial last number

Rtelephone on Rredial last phone number
Rphone on Rlast number
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 260
Rcorrection Renter destination

Rwrong number Renter address
Rwrong phone number Rdestination entry
Rwrong telephone number Rdestination input
Rincorrect number Raddress entry
Rincorrect phone number Raddress input
Control systems
Rincorrect telephone number Rchange destination

Rchange address
Rdelete
Rdelete number Rstart/begin/continue route guidance

Rdelete phone number Rstart/begin/continue navigation
Rdelete telephone number Rstart/begin/continue nav
Rerase Rstart/begin/continue routing
Rerase number Rnavigation/route/destination guidance
Rerase phone number on
Rerase telephone number Rcancel/exit/stop/quit/abort route
guidance
Rcancel/exit/stop/quit/abort navigation
Navigation commands Rcancel/exit/stop/quit/abort nav
Rall navi/navigation functions Rcancel/exit/stop/quit/abort routing
Rnavigation Rguidance instruction(s)
Rnav Rguidance instruction(s) on
Rnavi Rswitch guidance instruction(s) on
Rroute guidance Rswitch route guidance instruction(s) on
Rrouting Rswitch on guidance instruction(s)
Rdestination guidance Rswitch on route guidance instruction(s)
Rnavigate (to) <voice name> (work/home) Rguidance instructions off
Rdrive (to) <voice name> (work/home) Rswitch guidance instruction(s) off
Rswitch route guidance instruction(s) off
Rlast destination(s)
Rswitch off guidance instruction(s)
Rlast address
Rswitch off route guidance instruction(s)
Rmute guidance instruction(s)
Rmute route guidance instruction(s)
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 261
Rmap (on) Renter (name of) province

Rshow map Renter another (name of) province
Rswitch on map Rchange (name of) province
Rturn on map Renter province name
Rchange province name
Rzoom in
Rzoom in on map Renter zip code
Control systems
Rmagnify map Renter postal code
Renter post code
Rzoom out
Rminimize map Renter (name of) town
Rzoom away from map Renter (name of) city
Rmake map smaller Renter another (name of) town
Renter another (name of) city
Rzoom in completely
Rchange (name of) town
Rzoom in all the way
Rchange (name of) city
Rzoom in to maximum size
Rtown name
Rmaximum zoom
Rcity name
Rtotal magnification
Rtotal magnify Renter (name of) district
Renter (name of) center
Rzoom out completely
Renter another (name of) district
Rzoom out all the way
Renter another (name of) center
Rzoom (out) to minimum size
Rchange (name of) district
Rminimal zoom
Rchange (name of) center
Rno zoom
Rdistrict name
Rmagnification zoom
Rcenter name
Rmagnify zoom
Renter (name of) street
Renter country
Renter (name of) road
Renter another country
Renter another (name of) street
Rchange country
Renter another (name of) road
Renter (name of) state Rchange (name of) street
Renter another (name of) state Rchange (name of) road
Rchange (name of) state Rstreet name
Renter state name Rroad name
Rchange state name
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 262
Renter (name of) street first Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes-Benz

Renter (name of) road first service
Rnext/nearest/closest workshop
Rstreet name first
Rnext/nearest/closest repair shop
Rroad name first
Rnext/nearest/closest MB service
Rintersection
Rnext/nearest/closest MB service point
Rcrossing
Control systems
Rnext/nearest/closest MB service center

Renter intersection
Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes service
Renter crossing
Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes service
Renter (another) house number point
Rchange house number Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes service
center
Rpoint(s) of interest Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes-Benz
RPOI service point
Renter point(s) of interest Rnext/nearest/closest Mercedes-Benz
Renter POI(s) service center
Rnext/nearest/closest service point
Rlast destination(s)
Rnext/nearest/closest service center
Rlast address
Rnext hospital
Rsave destination
Rnext medical center
Rsave address
Rnearest hospital
Rstore destination
Rnearest medical center
Rstore address
Rclosest hospital
Rnext/nearest/closest gas station Rclosest medical center
Rnext/nearest/closest gas stop
Rnext/nearest/closest parking lot
Rnext/nearest/closest fuel stop
Rnext/nearest/closest parking area
Rnext/nearest/closest restaurant
Rcurrent position
Rdestination area
Rnear destination
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 263
Address book commands Rdelete name

Rall Rerase name
address book functions
Rdelete <voice name>
Raddress book (on)
Rerase <voice name>
Raddress list (on)
Raddresses Rlist/read out/read aloud/play/get/
(on)
recall destination memory
Control systems
Raddress directory (on)
Rlist/read out/read aloud/play/get/
Rlist/read out/read aloud/get/play recall navigation memory
address book
R<voice name>
Rlist/read out/read aloud/get/play
address list R<voice name> car
Rlist/read out/read aloud/get/play R<voice name> land line
addresses
Rlist/read out/read aloud/get/play R<voice name> mobile
address directory
R<voice name> home
Rdelete/clear/erase address book
R<voice name> pager
Rdelete/clear/erase address list
Rdelete/clear/erase R<voice name> work car
addresses
Rdelete/clear/erase address directory R<voice name> work land line
Rfind/open/show/list/select/get/ R<voice name> work mobile
search (for) name
R<voice name> work pager
Rfind/open/show/list/select/get/
search (for) entry Rcall <voice name>
Rcall <voice name> work
search (for) <voice name>
Rfind/open/show/list/select/get/ Rcall <voice name> home
search (for) page
Rcall <voice name> land line
search (for) item Rcall <voice name> car
Rdial/phone/call name Rcall <voice name> work car
Rdial/phone/call <voice name>
Rcall <voice name> work land line
Rsearch for number
Rfind number Rcall <voice name> work mobile
Rcall <voice name> work pager
Rcall <voice name> home car
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 264
Rcall <voice name> home land line Rdial name

Rdial voice name
Rcall <voice name> home mobile
Rsave name
Rcall <voice name> home pager
Rsave <voice name>
Rwork
Rsave number
Roffice
Rsave telephone number
Control systems
Rbusiness
Rstore <voice name>
Rcompany
Rstore number
Rcar Rstore telephone number
Rcar phone/telephone Raccept
Rland line Raccept number
Rland line phone/telephone Raccept telephone number
Rmobile Raccept name
Rcell Rok
phone/telephone
Rmobile Rfinished
phone/telephone
Rcellular phone/telephone R<1> - <8>
Rpager Ruse <1> - <8>
Rnumber <1> - <8>
Rwork car
Rline <1> - <8>
Rwork land line
Rwork mobile
Audio/video commands
Rwork pager
Raudio
Rhome Rvideo
Rhome car
Radio
Rhome land line
Rall radio functions
Rhome mobile
Rradio (on)
Rhome pager
RAM
Rnavigate to <voice name>
RAM radio (on)
Rdrive to <voice name>
RFM
Rnavigate to <voice name> work
RFM radio (on)
Rnavigate to <voice name> home
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 265
Rweatherband radio (on) Example: 95.5 FM

Rninety-five five
R(find) next station
Rninety-five five megahertz
R(find) next channel
Rninety-five point five
R(find) following station
Rninety-five point five megahertz
R(find) following channel
Rfrequency ninety-five five
Rstation search ascending/going up
Control systems
Rfrequency ninety-five point five
Rchannel search ascending/going up
Rfrequency ninety-five five megahertz
Rother/another/find station
Rfrequency ninety-five point five
Rother/another/find channel megahertz
Rradio seek
Rchannel/station 1-x Example: 540 AM
Rchannel/station <voice name> Rfive-hundred-forty
Rfive-hundred-forty kilohertz
Rdelete/clear/erase station (name)
Rfrequency five-hundred-forty
Rdelete/clear/erase channel (name)
Rfrequency five-hundred-forty kilohertz
Rsave/store station
Rsave/store channel HD Radio™
Rselect/choose station RHD radio
Rselect/choose channel Rturn on/switch on HD radio
Rread out/read aloud/list/play/get/ Rturn/switch HD radio on
recall station list
RHD radio off
Rread out/read aloud/list/play/get/
Rturn off/switch off HD radio
recall channel list
Rturn/switch HD radio off
Rdelete/clear/erase station list
Rdelete/clear/erase RHD radio info
channel list
Rprevious/preceding/last/prior station Satellite radio
Rprevious/preceding/last/prior channel
Rsirius (on)
Rstation/channel search coming down
Rsat radio (on)
Rradio info (off/on) Rsatellite radio (on)
R(enter) station number
R(enter) channel number
Rnext/other/another/following category
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 266
Rlist/read out/read aloud/play/get/ Rprevious/last/preceding/prior CD

recall category list Rprevious/last/preceding/prior disc
Rprevious/last category Rprevious/last/preceding/prior medium
Rprevious/last/preceding/prior DVD
Rselect/choose category
(audio/video)
Rall categories Rprevious/last/preceding/prior MP3 CD
Control systems
Rcategory Rprevious/last/preceding/prior MP3

<voice name>
DVD
Rsatellite radio info
Rnext/other/another/following track
Rnext/other/another/following song
CD/DVD/MP3
Rnext/other/another/following MP3
RCD (on)
R(repeat/replay) previous/preceding/
RCD player (on)
last/prior track
RCD changer (on) R(repeat/replay) previous/preceding/
RDVDA/ADVD/audio DVD/DVD audio last/prior song
player (on) R(repeat/replay) previous/preceding/
RDVDA/ADVD/audio DVD/DVD audio last/prior MP3
changer (on)
Rtrack/MP3/song 1-99
RvideoDVD/DVDV/VDVD/movie DVD/
DVD movie/DVD video player Rselect track/MP3/song 1-99
RvideoDVD/DVDV/VDVD/movie DVD/ Rtrack/MP3/song number 1-99
DVD movie/DVD video changer
Rdisc (number) 1-6
RMP3 player/changer (on)
RCD (number) 1-6
Rnext/other/another/following CD R(audio/video) DVD (number) 1-6
Rnext/other/another/following disc Rmedium (number) 1-6
Rnext/other/another/following medium
Rgroup (number) 1-9
Rnext/other/another/following DVD
Rselect group (number) 1-9
(audio/video)
Rnext/other/another/following MP3 CD Rnext/other/another/following group
Rnext/other/another/following MP3 Rprevious/preceding/last/prior group
DVD
Rnext/other/another/following directory
Rnext/other/another/following folder
Rchange audio/music source
Rchange video source
Rselect scene/chapter
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 267
Voice Control System troubleshooting 267
Rnext/other/another/following chapter Aux

Rnext/other/another/following scene Raudio auxiliary/aux (input)
Rchapter/scene up Rauxiliary/aux audio (input)
Rprevious/preceding/last/prior Rvideo auxiliary/aux (input)
scene
Rprevious/preceding/last/prior Rauxiliary/aux video (input)
chapter
Rchapter/scene down
Control systems
Rnext/other/another/following title Voice Control System
Rtitle up troubleshooting
Rprevious/preceding/last/prior
Help function
title
Rtitle To support the user, the Voice Control System
down
contains an extensive help function.
R(select) scene/chapter 1-99 The help function gives you
R(select) scene/chapter number 1-99 Rgeneral hints on how to best use the Voice
Control System
R(select) track/title/movie/film 1-99
Ra listing of all available commands
R(select) track/title/movie/film number
1-99
Help commands
Memory card
“Help voice control”
Rmemory card (on) Using the command “Help voice control” will
RSD card (on) give you information on how to best use the
Voice Control System.
Hard disk, Music Register “Help”
Rhard disk (on) X Press button ? on the multifunction
Rmusic register (on) steering wheel and speak the command
“Help”.
You will receive help for the currently
Media interface selected application.
Rmedia interface (on) When you speak the command “Help” during
a dialog such as after the command “Dial
RUCI (on) number”, you will receive help for the next
dialog steps.
USB interface You can also call up the help function
specifically for a particular system, for
RUSB example using the command “Help
RUSB interface telephone”.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 268
268 Voice Control System troubleshooting
Help window Spelling

You can use the help window to view a RThe letters of the English alphabet and the
selection of valid commands on the COMAND digits 0 - 9 may be used.
display. RSpeak the letters in blocks of 5 - 7 letters
The help functions can be switched on or off at a time.
via COMAND in the System menu RSpeak each individual letter clearly.
(Y page 93).
Control systems
Entering digits and spelling

Entering digits
RDigits from “Zero” to “Nine” may be used.
RSpeaking phone numbers in digit blocks of
3 to 5 digits has proven a very reliable
method for the input of phone numbers.
What to do if ...
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

The Voice You have not operated the system X Operate the Voice Control System
Control from the driver’s seat. only by the driver as the
System does microphone is geared to the driver
not side.
recognize
commands. You have spoken unclearly, too X Speak the commands in a
loudly or too quietly. continuous manner using a normal
tone.
The blower could be set to the X Avoid loud disturbances.

highest setting, vents could be
pointing at microphones or wind
noise could be created due to open
windows.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 269
Voice Control System troubleshooting 269

An address The address book fields for first and X Say both the first name and the
book entry last name are completed. However, last name of the address book
without voice you only spoke the last name or the entry.
name is not first name.
recognized.
Pronunciation of names in the X Make sure the address book
address book does not differ entries are reasonable.
Control systems
sufficiently or the spelling differs Check the address book entries for
from the pronunciation. the following:
RName entries such as first and
last name are in the correct field.
RDo not use abbreviations or
short forms, e.g. acronyms.
RAvoid unnecessary blanks
within the name
RDo not use special characters.
or
X Create a voice name
(Y page 247).
or
X Speak the command “Read out
address book”.
The Voice Control System reads
the address book aloud.
X Press button ? on the
multifunction steering wheel when
the desired name is read.
An address The voice names do not differ from X Make voice names that differ as
book entry each other sufficiently. much as possible. For example,
with voice make the names Wight and Wright
name is not unique by entering them as “Mr
recognized. Wight office” and “Mr Wright
John”.
or
address book”.
the address book aloud.
the desired name is read.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 270
270 Voice Control System troubleshooting

A station list The voice names of the station X Create a voice name for the station
entry is not names do not differ from each other (Y page 253).
recognized. sufficiently. or
station list”.
Control systems
the station list aloud.

the desired station name is read.
The station is selected
(Y page 254).
The Voice The way you have spoken the voice X Pronounce the voice name in the
Control name is different. same way during the entire
System process.
prompts you
to repeat a
voice name
repeatedly
when saving.
You want to Entering part of an address has failed X Spell the entry.
enter a city, after several attempts, e.g. due to
street or city background noise, or you have tried
center but to enter an address in Puerto Rico
you have to (Y page 241).
spell the
entry.
You have X Speak the phone number in groups
entered a of digits, e.g. three to five digits
phone each.
number as a
string but the
Voice
Control
System does
not
understand
you.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 271
Voice Control System individualization 271
Voice Control System

individualization
i The individualization can only be

performed when the vehicle is stationary.
If you drive off, the individualization will be
canceled.
After starting the session, the system will
Control systems
guide you through the individualization by
means of acoustic instructions.
The individualization is used to adapt the
Voice Control System to your own voice and
to therefore improve speech recognition. This
does not affect the speech recognition of
other users.
Individualization consists of two stages:
RDigits
RCommands
You can activate individualization in the

COMAND system settings (Y page 93). A
dialog and screen displays will guide you
through the individualization process.
The system can be reset to the factory
settings at any time.
i You may wish to complete only a portion
of the individualization process.
Completing the digits portion alone may
result in an improved recognition rate.
Individualization can be exited at any time.
The data trained, however, will only be
retained if a given individualization portion
is completed and the data is stored when
prompted to do so by the system.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 272
272
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 273
273
Vehicle equipment ............................ 274

Locking and unlocking ..................... 274
Starter switch positions ................... 284
Seats .................................................. 286
Multifunction steering wheel .......... 293
Mirrors ............................................... 294
Memory function .............................. 297
Lighting .............................................. 298
Wipers ................................................ 305
Controls in detail
Power windows ................................. 307
Driving and parking .......................... 311
Automatic transmission ................... 317
Transfer case .................................... 325
Instrument cluster ............................ 326
Driving systems ................................ 327
Climate control system .................... 363
Rear window defroster ..................... 372
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 373
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 375
Loading and storing .......................... 379
Useful features ................................. 384
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 274
274 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle

(Y page 500).
i This Operator’s Manual describes all X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
features, standard or optional, potentially battery connections checked at an
available for your vehicle at the time of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
purchase. Please be aware that your If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
vehicle might not be equipped with all Roadside Assistance or an authorized
features described in this manual. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Locking and unlocking

Controls in detail
SmartKey
Notes Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. removable mechanical key.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
Rthe doors
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust Rthe trunk lid
its signal volume, contact an authorized Rthe fuel filler flap
Mercedes-Benz Center.
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. An acoustic signal sounds
once, and the locking knobs in the doors
move up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. An acoustic signal sounds
three times, and the locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the trunk must be closed. Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with : & Lock button
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey ; F Unlock button for trunk lid
are discharged, the SmartKey is = % Unlock button
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is
drained. i USA only:
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey This device complies with Part 15 of the
(Y page 277) and replace them if FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
necessary. following two conditions:
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the 1. This device may not cause harmful
driver’s door and the trunk (Y page 499). interference, and
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 275
Locking and unlocking 275
interference that may cause undesired X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
operation. flap: Press button % once.
Any unauthorized modification to this X Global unlocking: Press button %
device could void the user’s authority to twice.
operate the equipment. X Global locking: Press button &.
i Canada only:
KEYLESS-GO
the following two conditions: Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
Controls in detail
and with remote control and a removable
mechanical key.
2. this device must accept any The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
interference received, including the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
interference that may cause undesired checked every time you grasp an outside door
operation of the device. handle.
Any unauthorized modification to this When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
device could void the user’s authority to unlocks
Rthe doors
Factory setting Rthe trunk lid
Rthe fuel filler flap
X Global unlocking: Press button %.
Unless you open a door or the trunk within i USA only:
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking This device complies with Part 15 of the
the vehicle: FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
RThe vehicle will be locked again. following two conditions:
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be 1. This device may not cause harmful
rearmed. interference, and
X Global locking: Press button &. 2. this device must accept any
Selective setting operation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Any unauthorized modification to this
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing device could void the user’s authority to
button % will then only unlock the driver’s operate the equipment.
door and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 277) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 276
i Canada only: cannot be locked or the engine started via

This device complies with RSS-210 of the KEYLESS-GO system.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
the following two conditions: (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
1. This device may not cause interference, the SmartKey)
and - when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
2. this device must accept any stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
interference received, including with the outside door handle the
interference that may cause undesired message Key Not Detected appears in
operation of the device. the multifunction display
Controls in detail
Any unauthorized modification to this - with the engine running, the red message
device could void the user’s authority to Key Not Detected appears in the
operate the equipment. multifunction display while driving off
Find the SmartKey or change its present
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO location immediately (e.g. place it on the
RYou
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
can also use the SmartKey with
pocket).
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 274). RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
turn it off again by
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button &). button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you. - inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
RNever store the SmartKey together with and the automatic transmission is in park
- electronic items such as a mobile phone position P
or another SmartKey
RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
- metallic objects such as coins or metal unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
foil of the vehicle and
Doing so could impair the function of the - an outside door handle is splashed with
KEYLESS-GO system. water
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey or
must be located outside the vehicle within - you attempt to clean an outside door
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
handle
trunk.
RRemember that the engine can be started
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle inside the vehicle.
and switch on the ignition once to activate Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
the KEYLESS-GO function. one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away If you leave the SmartKey behind when
from the vehicle, the system may no longer exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle appears in the multifunction display.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 277
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle, X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
no SmartKey outside the vehicle): flap: Pull the driver’s outside door handle.
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, X Global unlocking: Pull any outside door
the message Key Detected In Vehicle handle other than the driver’s outside door
appears in the multifunction display. The handle.
vehicle will not be locked. X Global locking: Touch outside of a door
handle :.
Factory setting
X Global unlocking: Pull an outside door
handle. Checking SmartKey batteries
Controls in detail
Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO

X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
handle :. are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 502).
Selective setting
i You can obtain the required batteries at
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to reprogram the SmartKey. Pulling the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i If the batteries are checked within signal
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. range of the vehicle, pressing button
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
% and & simultaneously for accordingly.
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 277) flashes twice.
Loss of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 278
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a door from the inside even
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
when it is locked unless it is secured with the
mechanical key to your car insurance
child safety lock (Y page 61).
company immediately.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
do so.
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement. For
information on replacing the SmartKey, see
Controls in detail
“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 278).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Benz Center will require proof of identity and Example illustration driver’s door
vehicle ownership with original documents, If the vehicle has previously been locked with
including the following: the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration theft alarm system.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 73).
license X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If you are an authorized person:
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration move up.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
license for the authorized individual respective rear door to unlock door.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the X Pull on the inside door handle on the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is respective rear door.
being requested
i Duplicated or photocopied
documentation will not be accepted. Automatic central locking
You can switch the automatic central locking
Activating the key on or off using the COMAND system
(Y page 210).
Once you, or an authorized person, has
provided the appropriate documents, the The doors and the trunk lock automatically
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to when the vehicle is set into motion.
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it You can open a locked front door from the
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- inside. Open door only when conditions are
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. safe to do so.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 279
The doors are designed to unlock If the vehicle was previously locked with the
automatically after an accident if the force of central locking switch
the impact exceeds a preset threshold. Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
The vehicle locks automatically when the the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
ignition is switched on and the wheels are front door is opened from the inside
turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
settings, only the front door opened from
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
the inside is unlocked
on a test stand.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking from the inside unlock using the central unlocking switch.

You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the Opening the trunk
inside using the central locking or unlocking
switch. This can be useful, for example, if you G Warning!
want to lock the vehicle before starting to Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
drive. is running and while driving. Among other
The central locking or unlocking switch does dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or the may enter vehicle interior resulting in
interior storage compartments, such as the unconsciousness and death.
glove box.
! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
You can open the trunk when the vehicle is
stationary.
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.80 m)
is required to open the trunk lid.
Opening the trunk from the outside
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.

When the front passenger door is closed,
the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
switch :.
You can open a locked front door from the
inside. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 280
X Press and hold button F (Y page 274) X Switching on/off: Use the COMAND
on the SmartKey until the trunk unlocks system (Y page 210).
and begins to open.
or
X Pull on handle :. Closing the trunk
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The G Warning!
vehicle must be unlocked. Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked is running and while driving. Among other
separately (Y page 283). dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
Vehicles with trunk opening/closing system: may enter vehicle interior resulting in
Controls in detail
unconsciousness and death.

X Stopping the opening procedure: Press
button F on the SmartKey. G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
Opening the trunk from the inside keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.

Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
You may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunk
lid will lock automatically when closed. All
turn signal lamps flash three times to confirm
Example illustration: Vehicles with trunk opening/ locking.
closing system
X Press remote trunk opening switch : until Closing the trunk from the outside
the trunk begins to open. manually
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
separately (Y page 283).
X To interrupt the opening procedure:
Press remote trunk opening switch :.
Trunk opening-height restriction

The trunk lid opening height can be limited
when transporting goods on a roof rack (e.g.
X Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
presence of an optional MB sport luggage
container). When the trunk opening-height is handles :.
switched on, the trunk opens to X Close trunk with hands placed flat on trunk
approximately the height of the roof edge. lid.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 281
The power closing assist automatically X Press and hold remote trunk opening/
ensures that the trunk lid is pulled completely closing switch : until the trunk is closed.
close (Y page 283).
X To interrupt the closing procedure:
Release remote trunk opening/closing
Closing the trunk from the inside switch :.
automatically
G Warning! Closing the trunk from the outside
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of automatically
the vehicle while operating the trunk lid with
the door mounted switch. Monitor the closing G Warning!
Controls in detail
procedure carefully to make sure no one is in Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
danger of being injured. make sure no one is in danger of being
To interrupt the closing procedure, release injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
the door mounted remote trunk opening/ always keep hands and fingers away from the
closing switch again. trunk opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
Even with the SmartKey removed from the
around. To stop the closing procedure, do one
starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-
of the following:
GO removed from the vehicle, the remote
RPress button F on the SmartKey.
trunk opening/closing switch can be
operated. Therefore, do not leave children RPress the remote trunk opening/closing
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to switch (on the driver’s door).
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised RPress the trunk closing switch.
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
and/or serious personal injury.
switch.
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing RPull the trunk lid handle.
system you can close the trunk from the
inside using the remote trunk opening/ Even with the SmartKey removed from the
closing switch. starter switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an GO removed from the vehicle, the remote
object while closing, the closing procedure is trunk opening/closing switch can be
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly. operated. Therefore, do not leave children
This will happen only while the trunk is in its unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
been piled too high, for example. access to a vehicle could result in an accident
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing

system you can close the trunk separately
from the outside using the trunk closing
switch.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 282
282
Controls in detail Locking and unlocking
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

X Make sure you have the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO with you.
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
switch : briefly.
With all doors closed:
RThe locking knobs in the doors move
down.
RThe trunk lid starts to close
automatically.
RAllturn signal lamps flash three times to
confirm locking once the trunk has
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO closed completely.
X Press trunk closing switch : briefly. RAn acoustic signal sounds three times.
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
object while closing, the closing procedure is
If the trunk lid comes into contact with an
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly.
object while closing, the closing procedure is
This will happen only while the trunk is in its
stopped and the trunk lid reopens slightly.
upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has
This will happen only while the trunk is in its
been piled too high, for example.
upper motion sequence. Check if luggage has
Closing the trunk and locking vehicle been piled too high, for example.
from outside
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing
system and KEYLESS-GO, you can close the Trunk lid emergency release
trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously The trunk lid can be opened from inside the
from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO trunk with the emergency release button.
locking/closing switch.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 283
X Valet locking: Close the trunk.

X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 499).
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
lock.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical
key in that position to lock the trunk.
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
Controls in detail
X Briefly press emergency release You can then only open the trunk with the
button :. mechanical key.
The emergency release button unlocks and X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing the trunk lid lock.
still or in motion. X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
Illumination of the emergency release button: to neutral position 1 and remove the
RThe
mechanical key in that position to unlock
button flashes for 30 minutes after
the trunk.
opening the trunk.
You can now open the trunk.
RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.
The emergency release button does not open Power closing assist for doors and
the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged trunk lid
or disconnected. It is not necessary to slam the door or trunk
lid closed. An electrical power-assisted
mechanism draws doors and trunk lid closed
Valet locking quietly and automatically once door and trunk
You can lock the trunk separately with the lid has been latched. When the electrical
mechanical key. This denies unauthorized power-assisted mechanism has stopped,
access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park doors and/or trunk can be reopened.
the vehicle.
G Warning!
X Leave only the SmartKey less its
To prevent possible personal injury, always
mechanical key with the vehicle. keep hands and fingers away from the door or
trunk opening when closing a door or the
trunk lid. Be especially careful when small
children are around.
In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
door handle, or pull the trunk lid handle.
To prevent personal injury, never actuate the
closing assist mechanism by tampering with
the door or trunk lid latch.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 284
284 Starter switch positions
G Warning! activated. If a lamp in the instrument cluster

Only drive with the doors closed. Otherwise, fails to come on when the ignition is switched
one or more of the doors could open while the on, have it checked and replaced if necessary.
vehicle is in motion, putting you and/or If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on
others at risk. after starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster”
G Warning! (Y page 489).
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine X Always remove the SmartKey from the
is running and while driving. Among other starter switch when the engine is not in
dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases operation.
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
Controls in detail
may enter vehicle interior resulting in

unconsciousness and death. battery discharge or a completely
discharged vehicle battery.
X Power closing assist for doors: Press the If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
doors gently past the initial engage position starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
into the lock. sufficiently charged.
X Power closing assist for trunk lid: Press X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
the trunk lid gently into its lock. necessary (Y page 514).
or
X Get a jump start (Y page 514).
Starter switch positions
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
SmartKey
vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start.
KEYLESS-GO
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
Starter switch inserted in the starter switch and the
g For removing SmartKey SmartKey present in the vehicle.
1 Power supply for some electrical Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
consumers, e.g. wipers without depressing the brake pedal
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical corresponds to the various starter switch
consumers) and driving position positions (Y page 284).
3 Starting position Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in start the engine (Y page 311).
the instrument cluster come on. The high- The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
signal indicator lamps will only come on if
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 285
Starter switch positions 285
then insert the SmartKey into the starter

switch.
i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
not need to be removed from the starter
switch when you leave the vehicle.
However, always take the SmartKey with
you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
electrical systems can be switched on or
the engine can be started using the
Controls in detail
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
= USA only
? Canada only
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Position 1
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once.
; Starter switch This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers.
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
into the starter switch (if not inserted i When you now open the driver’s door, the
already). power supply is switched off.
i Allow for 2 seconds until the system has
detected the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Ignition (or position 2)
button. X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in twice.
park position P. This supplies power for all electrical
X Do not depress the brake pedal.
consumers.
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
in the instrument cluster come on. The
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps will only come
on if activated. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 489).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 286
286 Seats
i When you now press the KEYLESS-GO Observe the following points:
start/stop button once and the driver’s RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
door is open, the power supply is switched
slightly angled when holding the steering
off.
wheel.
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
Seats position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
Safety notes position should be as far back as possible
with the driver still able to operate the
G Warning!
controls properly.
Controls in detail
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle

RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion: close to the head as possible. The center of
the head restraint must support the back of
Rseat adjustment the head at eye level.
Rhead restraint adjustment RNever place hands under the seat or near
Rsteering wheel adjustment any moving parts while a seat is being
Rrear view mirror adjustment adjusted.
Rfastening of seat belts Failure to do so could result in an accident
G Warning!
G Warning!
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
The power seats can be operated at any time.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
backrest in an excessively reclined position as vehicle could result in an accident and/or
this can be dangerous. You could slide under serious personal injury.
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the G Warning!
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious According to accident statistics, children are
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat safer when properly restrained in the rear
belts provide the best restraint when the seating positions than in the front seating
wearer is in a position that is as upright as position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
possible and seat belts are properly children be placed in the rear seats whenever
positioned on the body. possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
G Warning! seated and properly secured in an
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
correctly fasten your seat belt. restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 287
Seats 287
or the child is not properly secured in the child seats will be moved to a more favorable
restraint. seat position.
G Warning! i You can store the settings for the seat

For your protection, drive only with properly position with the memory function
positioned head restraints. (Y page 297).
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close X Head restraint height: Press the switch
to the head as possible and the center of the up or down in direction of arrow :.
head restraint supports the back of the head X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
in direction of arrow ;.
Controls in detail
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
accident or similar situation.
down in direction of arrow = until your
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
restraints. Head restraints are intended to
upper legs are lightly supported.
help reduce injuries during an accident. X Seat cushion depth: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ? until your legs are supported
Seat adjustment comfortably.
X Seat fore and aft: Press the switch
You can adjust the lumbar support, forward or backward in direction of arrow
multicontour seats for driver and front A.
passenger, as well as drive-dynamic
multicontour seats using COMAND i When moving the seat fore or aft, the head
(Y page 216). restraints may readjust automatically.
! When moving the seats, make sure there X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
are no items in the footwell or behind the forward or backward in direction of arrow
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the B.
seats and/or the items.
Rear power seats (rear outer seats)
Power seats
Front power seats
: Seat cushion tilt

; Seat backrest tilt
= Folding head restraint up and down
i If PRE-SAFE® has been activated, the (Y page 291)
front passenger’s seat and/or rear power ? Head restraint tilt
A Seat fore and aft adjustment
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 288
288 Seats
X Adjust the seat using seat When the indicator lamp in button : is on,
switches :, ; and A. you can operate the following features of the
front passenger seat:
Adjusting front passenger seat from
Rseat adjustment
driver’s seat/rear
Rseat heating/ventilation
G Warning!
Rmemory function
When adjusting the front passenger seat,
make sure the seat, if occupied, is as far from
Setting front passenger seat position
the front passenger front air bag as possible.
from rear
Otherwise, the passenger could be seriously
The button is located on the right rear
Controls in detail
or even fatally injured in the event of an

passenger door.
accident or braking maneuver.
Make sure no one is caught or injured while
the seat is being adjusted.
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO removed from the starter switch
or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO removed
from the vehicle, the power seats can be
operated. Therefore, do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an accident
X Press button : to adjust the front
! Do not move the front passenger seat passenger seat.
completely forward if objects are stored in The indicator lamp in button : comes on.
the parcel net in the front passenger-side X Adjust front passenger seat using seat
footwell. Items in the net may be damaged. switches ;, =, ? and A.
X To adjust right rear passenger seat, press
Adjusting front passenger seat from
driver’s seat button : again.
The indicator lamp in button : goes out.
You can adjust the front passenger seat using
the seat switches on the driver’s side. i The front passenger seat cannot be
adjusted from the rear when the override
switch is activated (Y page 61).
X Press button :.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 289
Seats 289
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment exiting the vehicle, the driver’s seat moves to
its most rearward position. The steering
wheel moves to its uppermost position.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated
the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver’s seat moves to its most rearward
position
Rwhen you remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch,
or
Controls in detail
Rwhen you open the driver’s door with the
SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1
X Push or pull on the upper edge of the head or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
restraint cushion to the desired position. position 1
Comfort head restraint The easy-entry/exit feature can be switched
on or off in the Vehicle menu of the
G Warning!
COMAND system (Y page 208).
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the G Warning!
mounting post. You could otherwise be You must make sure no one can become
trapped. trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel and driver’s seat when the easy-entry/
exit feature is activated.
To stop seat/steering wheel movement, do
one of the following:
RPress seat adjustment switch.
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
RPress one of the memory position buttons
or the memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
You can adjust the side cushions of the head Children could open the driver’s door and
restraints individually. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
X Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push side
cushions : into desired position.
X Adjusting forward or backward: Pull or
! Do not activate the easy-entry/exit
push head restraint in direction of feature if the seat backrest is in an
arrow ;. excessively reclined position. Doing so
could cause damage to front or rear seats.
First move the seat backrest to an upright
Easy-entry/exit feature position.
This feature allows for easier entry into and
exit from the vehicle. When entering and
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 290
290 Seats
The steering wheel and driver’s seat will adjusting could cause the driver to lose
return to their last set memory position or a control of the vehicle.
factory-set maximum forward position
Rwhen you close the driver’s door with the Crash-responsive exit aid
ignition switched on
When you open the driver’s door after an
Rwhen you insert the SmartKey into the accident has occurred, the steering column
starter switch moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
Rwhen you press the KEYLESS-GO start/ starter switch is insignificant. This function
stop button once with the driver’s door facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle
closed occupants.
Controls in detail
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be

i For safety reasons, the driver’s seat will triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is
not return to its last set position if the activated via the control system.
system recognizes the last set position as
an extreme forward position. Instead, the
driver’s seat will remain at or move to a Rear seat head restraints
factory-set maximum forward position. To
again fully return the driver’s seat to your G Warning!
last set position or to memory position, For safety reasons, always drive with the rear
adjust the seat to the desired position or head restraints in the upright position when
press and hold the respective memory the rear seats are occupied.
position button (Y page 297). Keep the area around head restraints clear of
articles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct the
i The last set driver’s seat and steering
folding operation of the head restraints.
wheel positions are stored when the
ignition is switched off and the position is G Warning!
stored in memory.
For your protection, drive only with properly
i If the current position for the steering positioned head restraints.
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
steering wheel will not move. is as close to the head as possible and the
If the current seat position is within a center of the head restraint supports the back
factory-set position range and the system of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
recognizes the current seat position to be potential for injury to the head and neck in the
rearward enough for easy entry and exit, event of an accident or similar situation.
the driver’s seat will not move to the rear. With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
The adjustment procedure is interrupted the respective head restraint up from the
briefly when the engine is started. lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
G Warning! Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
Let the system complete the adjustment restraints installed when the rear seats are
procedure before setting the vehicle in occupied. Head restraints are intended to
motion. All driver’s seat and steering wheel help reduce injuries during an accident.
adjustments must be completed before
setting the vehicle in motion. Driving off with
the driver’s seat/steering wheel still
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 291
Seats 291
G Warning! Placing power rear seat head restraints

Make sure the rear seat head restraints upright (rear outer seats)
engage when placing them upright manually. i When you fasten your seat belt in the rear,
Otherwise their protective function cannot be the respective rear outer seat head
ensured. restraint places upright automatically.
The back of the head will not be supported in
the event of a collision. That could cause X Switch on the ignition.
serious or even fatal injuries. Rear seat X Press and hold head restraint release
occupants can be seriously injured or killed. switch : (Y page 291) in the front center
console.
Controls in detail
Folding rear seat head restraints back The rear seat head restraints will fold up.
X Pull the rear center seat head restraint
The rear seat head restraints and the rear
seat power head restraints can be folded upright manually until it locks into position.
backward for increased visibility.
Power rear seat head restraints (rear
outer seats)
X Switch on the ignition.

X Press head restraint release switch : in
the front center console briefly. X Press switch up in direction of arrow :.
The head restraints will fold backward. The head restraint will move to an upright
position.
X Press switch down in direction of arrow
Placing rear seat head restraints
upright =.
The head restraint will fold down.
X Press the switch forward or backward in
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The head restraint will be tilted.
Comfort rear seat head restraints (rear

outer seats)
G Warning!
When folding back the side cushions, never
reach between the side cushion and the
X Pull the head restraint forward until it locks
into position.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 292
292 Seats
mounting post. You could otherwise be X Switch on the ignition.

trapped. X Switching on: Press seat ventilation
button : repeatedly until the desired
ventilation level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
button : repeatedly until all indicator
lamps go out.
Seat heating
Controls in detail
X Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push side

cushions : into desired position.
X Adjusting head restraint angle: Push or
pull on the lower edge of the head restraint
cushion in direction of arrow ;.
Seat ventilation The red indicator lamps in front or rear seat

heating button : come on to show which
heating level you have selected.
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically.
X Switching on: Press respective seat
The blue indicator lamps in seat ventilation heating button : repeatedly until the
button : come on to show which ventilation desired heating level is set.
level you have selected. One or more red indicator lamps in
respective seat heating button : show the
i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
selected heating level.
can be activated using the summer opening
X Switching off: Press respective seat
feature (Y page 309).
heating button : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps go out.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat heating
switches off automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 293
Multifunction steering wheel 293
Multicontour seats, rear Lumbar region support

You can adjust the rear outer multicontour X Selecting greater curvature: Press
seats using the buttons on the center rocker switch A forward.
console. X Selecting less curvature: Pull rocker
switch A backward.
Side bolster adjustment

X Reducing width: Press rocker switch B
forward.
Controls in detail
X Increasing width: Pull rocker switch B
backward.
Multifunction steering wheel

X Selecting a seat: Press rocker switch :
Safety notes
or C forward or backward.
The indicator lamp in the selected rocker G Warning!
switch lights up for a short while. Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving
Gentle massage could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle.
X Switching on: Press rocker switch ;
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
forward.
feature can be operated at any time.
X Switching off: Pull rocker switch ;
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
backward. in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
Vigorous massage vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
X Switching on: Press rocker switch =
forward. Make sure
X Switching off: Pull rocker switch = Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
backward. arms slightly bent at the elbows
Ryou can move your legs freely
Position of seat backrest curvature
Rall displays (including malfunction and
X Moving upward: Press rocker switch ? indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
forward. are clearly visible
X Moving downward: Pull rocker switch ?
backward.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 294
294 Mirrors
Steering wheel adjustment i The steering wheel heating will not switch
on, when the temperature of the vehicle
interior is above 86‡ (30†).
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
stalk in direction of arrow ;.
Indicator lamp = goes out.
i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
case of power surge or undervoltage or if
the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
Controls in detail
i The steering wheel heating switches off

X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move automatically when you remove the
stalk in direction of arrows :. SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;. door.
i The memory function (Y page 297) lets The steering wheel heating switches off
you store the settings for the steering automatically:
wheel together with the settings for the Rwhen you remove the SmartKey from the
seat position and the exterior rear view starter switch
mirrors. Ron vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the
driver’s door
Heated steering wheel
Rwhen the temperature of the vehicle
The steering wheel heating warms up the interior is above 86‡ (30†)
leather area of the steering wheel.
Rafter approximately 24 minutes
For more information on the steering wheel,
see “Multifunction steering wheel”
(Y page 221).
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
X Switch on the ignition. view of the road and traffic conditions.
X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the
stalk in direction of arrow :.
Interior rear view mirror
Indicator lamp = comes on.
X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
manually.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 295
Mirrors 295
Exterior rear view mirrors i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
G Warning! automatically.
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
closer than they appear. Check your interior
side and the interior rear view mirror will
rear view mirror and glance over your
respond automatically to glare when the
shoulder before changing lanes.
ignition is switched on and incoming light
Controls in detail
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
The rear view mirrors will not react if the
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R or the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
i You can store the settings for the exterior react, for example, if the rear window
rear view mirror position with the memory sunshade is in raised position.
function (Y page 297). Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
X Switch on the ignition. (incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic
X Press button = for the driver’s side
conditions and could cause an accident.
exterior rear view mirror or button ; for
the passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
Exterior rear view mirror parking
comes on.
position
X
To assist during parking maneuvers, you can
Press adjustment button : up, down, left
set the passenger-side exterior rear view
or right according to the desired setting.
mirror so that you can see the rear wheel and
If you do not make adjustments to the the road curb.
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You Setting and storing the parking position
will then have to select the desired exterior
rear view mirror again before adjustments
can be made. Adjustments can only be made
with the indicator lamp for the respective
exterior rear view mirror button illuminated.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 296
296 Mirrors
Calling up the parking position

X Press button =, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
reverse gear R.
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the stored parking
position.
Controls in detail
The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror

X Switch on the ignition. returns to its previously stored driving
X Press button =, to select the passenger- position
side exterior rear view mirror. Rwhen you switch off the ignition
R10 seconds after you have put the gear
reverse gear R. selector lever out of reverse gear R
The passenger-side exterior rear view
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
mirror moves to the preset parking
position. speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear Rimmediately when you press button ? to
view mirror with adjustment button ; so select the driver’s side exterior rear view
that you see the rear wheel and the road mirror
curb. i If you adjust the exterior rear view mirrors
The exterior rear view mirror parking
while they are in the parking position, the
position is stored.
new exterior rear view mirror position is
You can also store the parking position using stored as a new parking position.
the memory button M ::
X Press button =, to select the passenger- Power-folding exterior rear view
side exterior rear view mirror. mirrors
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear ! Before you drive the vehicle through an
view mirror with adjustment button ; so automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
that you see the rear wheel and the road view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
curb. damaged.
X Press memory button M : and within
3 seconds, press one of the arrows of Folding in and out automatically
adjustment button ;.
The function must be activated in the
The parking position is stored if the exterior
COMAND system (Y page 209).
rear view mirror does not move.
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in
i If the exterior rear view mirror does move, automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked
repeat the above steps. After the setting is from the outside.
stored, you can move the exterior rear view The exterior rear view mirrors fold out
mirror again. automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger
door is subsequently opened.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 297
Memory function 297
Folding in and out manually Each memory position button on the driver’s
side can store all of the following settings:
i The mirrors do not fold out if they have
RSeat position
been folded in manually. Please make sure
both mirrors are folded out before driving RMulticontour seat: previously saved
off. settings
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if RDrive-dynamic multicontour seat:
they are not folded out completely. activation/deactivation
RSteering wheel position
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position
Controls in detail
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Each memory position button on the front

passenger side can store all of the following
X Folding in: Briefly press button :. settings:
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in. RSeat position
X Folding out: Briefly press button :. RMulticontour seat: previously saved
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out. settings
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is RDrive-dynamic multicontour seat:
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear), activation/deactivation
reposition it manually by applying firm
pressure until it snaps back into place.
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
Then press button : again to fold mirrors
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
Memory function
Notes
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 298
298 Lighting
Storing positions into memory Exterior lamp switch

X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
Controls in detail
signal sounds.
1 W Standing lamps, left
2 X Standing lamps, right
Recalling positions from memory 3 $ Off
X Press and hold desired memory position Daytime running lamp mode
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved 4 c Automatic headlamp mode
to the stored position completely. On the Daytime running lamp mode
driver’s side, also wait for the steering 5 T Parking lamps38
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to 6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
move to the stored position. headlamps
i Releasing the memory position button 7 R Vehicles without front fog lamps:
stops movement to the stored positions Rear fog lamp
immediately. 7 N Vehicles with front fog lamps: Front
fog lamps
8 R Vehicles with front fog lamps: Rear
Lighting fog lamp
Notes i The exterior lamps (except standing
i If you drive in countries with left-hand lamps or parking lamps) go out
driving, you must have the headlamps automatically when you remove the
modified for symmetrical low beams. SmartKey from the starter switch or open
Relevant information can be obtained at the driver’s door with the ignition switched
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. off.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog
i The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase lamp are switched on and you remove the
usable illumination over conventional SmartKey from the starter switch and open
headlamps because they follow the the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of sounds.
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to In addition, the message Please Switch
either side according to the vehicle’s Off Lights appears in the multifunction
steering angle and speed. display.
38 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, the license plate lamps, the side marker lamps, and the
instrument cluster illumination are also on.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 299
Lighting 299
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog from c to L will briefly switch off the
lamp manually. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps accident.
when leaving the vehicle may result in a
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
discharged battery.
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
i Vehicles without front fog lamps: For operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
better detection of the vehicle, the LED
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
daytime running lamps are dimmed to
parking lamp level when the low-beam switch to position c.
Controls in detail
headlamps are switched on. When ambient light is low: When the
SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
Low-beam headlamps when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
been pressed once, the parking lamps38
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on come on automatically.
and off with the exterior lamp switch. When the engine is running, the low-beam
X Switch on the ignition. headlamps come on additionally.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp When ambient light is bright: When the
switch to position L. SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
The following lamps come on: when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
RLow-beam headlamps been pressed once, all lamps are off.
When the engine is running, the daytime
RParking lamps38
running lamps39 come on automatically.
RGreen indicator lamp T in the exterior
When the low-beam headlamps are switched
lamp switch on, the green indicator lamp T in the
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp exterior lamp switch comes on.
switch to position $. Once the low-beam headlamps are on, the
high-beam headlamps are also available.
Automatic headlamp mode
Daytime running lamp mode
G Warning!
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
If the exterior lamp switch is set to c, the
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
headlamps will not automatically come on
under foggy conditions. In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default.
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
L when driving or when traffic and/or using the control system, see “Switching
ambient lighting conditions require you to do
so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
from position c to L with the vehicle
at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
39 USA only: The daytime running lamp mode must be activated via the control system.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 300
300 Lighting
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA The corresponding exterior lamps come on
only)” (Y page 234). (Y page 298).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$ or c. Fog lamps
When the engine is running and the Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
ambient light is bright, the daytime running exterior lamp switch in position c or
lamps come on. $.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the
following lamps will come on additionally: G Warning!
RLow-beam headlamps In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
Controls in detail
only switch from position c to L with

RParking lamps38 the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Rgreen indicator lamp T in the exterior Switching from c to L will briefly
lamp switch switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
You can only switch on the high-beam driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
headlamps when the low-beam headlamps result in an accident.
are on. Front fog lamps will operate with the parking
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. lamps and/or the low-beam headlamps on.
Canada only The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
with the exterior lamp switch in position
When the engine is running, and you L. Fog lamps should only be used in
Rshift from a driving position to park conjunction with low-beam headlamps.
position P with the vehicle at a standstill or Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle
the electronic parking brake is engaged, Regulations regarding permissible lamp
the daytime running lamps or the low-beam operation.
headlamps will go out with a delay of X Switch on the ignition.
3 minutes
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position T or L (Y page 298).
T, the daytime running lamps and the
Vehicles with front fog lamps
parking lamps38 come on in bright ambient
lighting conditions. X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
Rturn exterior lamp switch to first stop
the exterior lamp switch to position
(Y page 298).
L, the manual headlamp mode has
The green indicator lamp N in the
priority over the daytime running lamp
exterior lamp switch comes on.
mode
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 298). exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
USA only green N and the yellow indicator lamp
When the engine is running, and you turn the R in the exterior lamp switch come on.
exterior lamp switch to position T or X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
L, the manual headlamp mode has lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
priority over the daytime running lamp mode. its stop.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 301
Lighting 301
Vehicles without front fog lamps High beam

X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
exterior lamp switch to its stop L (Y page 298).
(Y page 298). X Switching on: Push the combination
The rear fog lamp and the yellow indicator switch in direction of arrow :.
lamp R in the exterior lamp switch
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
come on. K in the instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off rear fog lamp: Push in the
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
exterior lamp switch to its stop.
in direction of arrow = to its original
position.
Controls in detail
Locator lighting and night security
illumination i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic
The locator lighting and night security headlamp mode (Y page 299) or the
illumination are described in the COMAND daytime running lamp mode (Y page 299).
vehicle menu section under (Y page 208).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Depending on the driving and traffic situation,
Combination switch low-beam leveling and the high-beam
headlamps are controlled via an optical
sensor. The sensor is located on the front of
the overhead control panel. Glare for other
road users is reduced and the illumination of
road ahead is improved. The transitions
between low-beam and high-beam
headlamps take place without a sudden
change of light.
G Warning!
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid
intended to support you while driving. The
Turn signals driver is and remains responsible for proper
vehicle lighting in accordance with the
X Press the combination switch in direction prevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.
of arrow ; or ?.
The system may be impaired or unavailable
The corresponding turn signal indicator when
lamp ! or # in the instrument
Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,
cluster flashes.
or heavy spray
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements. Rthe optical sensor area of the windshield is
To signal minor directional changes: dirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker for
example
X Press the combination switch only to the
point of resistance in direction of
arrow ; or ? and release.
The corresponding turn signal lamps will
flash three times.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 302
302 Lighting
The system cannot recognize the following Adaptive control of the headlamp leveling
road users: takes place at a speed of approximately
RRoad
25 mph (40 km/h).
users without a lighting system of
X Deactivating: Pull the combination switch
their own, e.g. pedestrians
back to its initial position.
RRoad users with dim lighting of their own, The Adaptive Highbeam Assist
e.g. cyclists indicator _ in the multifunction display
RRoad users whose lighting is obstructed, goes out.
e.g. road users behind a guardrail
RIn some seldom cases, even road users with High-beam flasher
Controls in detail
a lighting system of their own may be X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
recognized too late or not at all.
briefly in direction of arrow =.
The automatic high-beam headlamps will then
not be deactivated or it will be activated in
spite of preceding or oncoming road users. Hazard warning flasher
This could endanger you and/or others and
cause an accident. Always pay close attention
The hazard warning flasher can be switched
to the traffic situation and switch off the high
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
beam manually if necessary.
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
X Activating: Enable the Adaptive automatically when an air bag deploys.
Highbeam Assist via the control system S 600 and S 65 AMG (USA only):
(Y page 235). The hazard warning flasher comes on
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position automatically when you brake the vehicle
c. strongly at a speed of more than 50 mph
X Press the combination switch in direction
(70 km/h) and bring it to a complete stop.
of arrow :.
The Adaptive Highbeam Assist
indicator _ in the multifunction display
comes on when switching on the low-beam
headlamps.
When driving faster than approximately
34 mph (55 km/h) and no other road users
are recognized, the high-beam headlamps
are switched on automatically. The high-
beam headlamp indicator lamp K in the
instrument cluster comes on additionally.
When driving slower than approximately X Switching on: Press hazard warning
28 mph (45 km/h), other road users are flasher switch :.
recognized, or the road is illuminated All turn signal lamps are flashing.
sufficiently, the high-beam headlamps are
switched off automatically. The indicator i With the hazard warning flasher activated
lamp K in the instrument cluster goes and the combination switch set for either
out. The Adaptive Highbeam Assist left or right turn, only the respective left or
indicator _ in the multifunction display
remains on.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 303
Lighting 303
right turn signals will operate when the Switching on

ignition is switched on.
X Make sure the engine is running.
X Switching off: Press hazard warning X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
flasher switch : again. L or c (Y page 298).
i If the hazard warning flasher was or
activated automatically, press hazard X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
warning flasher switch : to switch it off. (Y page 299).
S 600 and S 65 AMG (USA only): X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
When the hazard warning flasher was depending on whether you are turning left
Controls in detail
activated by a hard stop automatically, it or right.
will be switched off automatically at a The respective corner-illuminating lamp
vehicle speed of above 6 mph (10 km/h). comes on. If you have switched on the turn
signal for one side but turn the steering
wheel in the other direction, the corner-
Headlamp cleaning system illuminating lamp comes on on the side of
the turn signal.
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
pressure water jet automatically when the or
engine is running and you have X Turn steering wheel in desired direction.
Rswitched
Driving forward: The corner-illuminating
on the headlamps
lamp on the side of your steering direction
and comes on.
Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the Driving in reverse: The corner-illuminating
windshield with washer fluid five times lamp opposite to your steering direction
The counter resets when you switch off the comes on.
ignition. The corner-illuminating lamps will come on
For information on filling up the washer automatically depending on the steering
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp angle, even if you did not switch on either turn
cleaning system” (Y page 409). signal. If the corner-illuminating lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out
automatically depending on the steering
Corner-illuminating lamps angle and vehicle speed.
The corner-illuminating lamps temporarily
The corner-illuminating lamps improve
come on on both sides of the vehicle if you
illumination of the area in the direction into
turn the steering wheel in one direction and
which you are turning.
then again in the other direction shortly
The corner-illuminating lamps will only thereafter.
operate in low ambient lighting conditions.
The corner-illuminating lamp remains lit for a
If you are driving faster than 25 mph short time only. It then goes out
(40 km/h) the corner-illuminating function is automatically.
not available.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 304
304 Lighting
Switching off Runlock the vehicle

X Switch off the left or right turn signal. Rremove the SmartKey from the starter
or switch (Interior Lighting Delayed
X
Switch-off must be switched on
Steer straight ahead.
(Y page 208))
The corner-illuminating lamp goes out.
Ropen a door
i There may be a brief delay before the
The interior lighting goes out after a short
corner-illuminating lamps go out.
time (Y page 208).
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
Controls in detail
Interior lighting in the front go out automatically after approximately

5 minutes.
i Even with the SmartKey being removed
from the starter switch you can still use the X Deactivating: Press button ~.
lighting for the storage compartment, glove The OFF indicator lamp next to the button
box and vanity mirrors, when you open a comes on.
door or press one of the interior lighting
buttons. If a lamp is switched on and you Manual control
do not lock the vehicle, it will be switched
off automatically after 30 minutes. X Switching front interior lighting on/
When you lock the vehicle from the outside, off: Press button c.
the interior lighting is switched off. X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press button s.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective button p.
i The brightness of the ambient lighting is
adjusted via COMAND (Y page 209).
Emergency lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
: p Left front reading lamp on/off Switching off:
; s Rear interior lighting on/off X Press hazard warning flasher switch
= c Front interior lighting on/off (Y page 302).
? ~ Automatic control on/off or
X Press switch ~.
A p Right front reading lamp on/off
or
Automatic control X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
X Activating: Press button ~.
The OFF indicator lamp next to the button Interior lighting in the rear
goes out.
The interior lighting comes on, when you ! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 305
Wipers 305
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
extended period of time with the engine the windshield after the car has been driven
turned off could result in a discharged through an automatic car wash, then wax
battery. or other residue is on the windshield.
Shortly after washing the car in an
automatic car wash, clean the windshield
with washer fluid.
Windshield wipers
Controls in detail
X Observe notes on page (Y page 305).
Switching on/off
: Rear reading lamp

; p Rear reading lamp switch
= Rear interior lamp
Switching rear reading lamp and rear

interior lamp on/off:
X Press reading lamp switch p.
Rear reading lamp : and rear interior lamp
= come on.
X Press reading lamp switch p once Combination switch
more. 1 $ Windshield wipers off
Only rear reading lamp : remains on. 2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping40
X Press reading lamp switch p once 3 Å Fast intermittent wiping41
more. 4 ° Slow continuous wiping
All rear lamps are off. 5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
washer fluid
Wipers
Notes
X Turn the combination switch to the desired
! Do not operate the wipers when the position, depending on the intensity of the
windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on rain.
a windshield might scratch the glass and/
or damage the wiper blades when wiping i When the windshield wipers are switched
occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary on and you stop the vehicle, the wipers
to operate the wipers in dry weather operate more slowly.
conditions, always operate the wipers with
washer fluid.
40 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

41 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 306
306 Wipers
Intermittent wiping Single wipe

Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet X Press the combination switch briefly in
weather conditions or in the presence of direction of arrow B to the resistance
precipitation. point.
When you select intermittent wiping, the rain The windshield wipers wipe one time
sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a without washer fluid.
suitable wiping interval depending on the
wetness of the sensor surface automatically. Wiping with washer fluid
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an X Press the combination switch in direction
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
Controls in detail
of arrow B past the resistance point.

taken to an automatic car wash or during The windshield wipers operate with washer
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will fluid.
operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers i To prevent smears on the windshield or
may be damaged as a result. noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on it is raining.
the surface of the rain sensor or optical For information on filling up the washer
effects may cause the windshield wipers to reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could cleaning system” (Y page 409).
then damage the windshield wiper blades For information on cleaning the headlamps
or scratch the windshield. You should with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
therefore switch off the windshield wipers system” (Y page 303).
when weather conditions are dry.
X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å. Problems with wipers
After the initial wipe, pauses between ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
automatically. immediately.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the For safety reasons, do the following before
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is attempting to remove any blockage:
opened. This protects persons getting into or
RStop the vehicle in a safe location.
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
doors are closed and switch.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive or
position D or reverse gear R RTurn off the engine by pressing the
or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
combination switch door open, starter switch is in position
0, same as with SmartKey removed from
starter switch).
REngage the electronic parking brake.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 307
Power windows 307
RRemove blockage. point and released, by either pressing or

RTurn the windshield wipers on again. pulling the respective switch.
If the windshield wipers fail to function at Activate the override switch when children
all with the combination switch in position are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
Ä or Å, children may otherwise injure themselves,
e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
Rset the combination switch to the next opening.
higher wiper speed
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at G Warning!
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Do not keep any part of your body up against
Controls in detail
Center the window pane when opening a window. The
downward motion of the pane may pull that
part of your body down between the window
Power windows pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
there is a risk of entrapment, release the
Opening and closing switch and pull it to close the window.
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door windows i You can also open or close the door
are located on the driver’s door control panel. windows using the SmartKey, see
The switches for the respective door windows “Summer opening feature” (Y page 309)
are located on the front passenger door and and “Convenience closing feature”
on the rear doors. (Y page 309).
i Operating the rear door windows from i After switching off the ignition or
the rear is not possible when you activate removing the SmartKey from the starter
the override switch (Y page 61). switch, you can operate the door windows
until you open the driver’s or front
passenger door. If no door was opened you
G Warning! can operate the door windows for up to
When opening or closing the door windows, 5 minutes.
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
express operation and automatic reversal
function. If in express operation mode a door
window encounters an obstruction that
blocks its path, the automatic reversal
function will stop the door window and open
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 308
308 Power windows
X Switch on the ignition. Rear door window sunshades

X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
X Extending: With the door window fully
switch : to ? to the resistance point. closed, pull switch = or ?.
The corresponding door window moves The rear door window sunshade will be fully
downward or upward until you release the extended.
switch.
X
i The rear door window sunshade cannot
Express operation: Press or pull
be extended partially.
switch : to ? past the resistance point
and release. X Retracting: Press switch = or ?.
The corresponding door window opens or The rear door window sunshade will be fully
Controls in detail
closes completely. retracted.

X Stopping during express operation:
i The switches on the rear doors can also
Press or pull the respective switch again. be used to close the rear door window
sunshades on the other side of the vehicle.
Closing when a door window is blocked
i The switches on the driver’s door have
G Warning! priority over the rocker switches on the
Make sure that nobody can become trapped other doors.
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
closing a door window with greater force or
without automatic reversal function. Synchronizing door windows
If the upward movement of a door window is The door windows must be synchronized if
blocked during the closing procedure, the they cannot be fully closed (express
door window will stop and open slightly. operation).
Each door window must be synchronized
X Immediately after the door window has
separately.
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the X Close all doors.
door window is fully closed. X Switch on the ignition.

The door window closes with greater force. X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
If the door window is blocked again and opens (Y page 307) until the respective door
slightly: window is closed.
The door window opens again slightly.
X Immediately after the door window was
X Pull and hold the respective switch once
blocked, pull and hold the respective
more immediately until the door window is
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed completely.
closed.
X Hold the respective switch for
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function. approximately 1 second.
The door window is synchronized.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the switch to close the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window
to close without any reversal function for as
long as you hold the switch.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 309
Power windows 309
Summer opening feature When roller sunblinds and/or rear door

window sunshades are retracted
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate or
the vehicle before driving off by when the vehicle is equipped with tilt/
simultaneously sliding sunroof only:
Ropening the door windows X Press and hold button % on the
Rretracting the rear door window sunshades SmartKey.
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof The vehicle unlocks.
Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
The door windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof or the panorama roof with power
sliding panel and roller sunblinds
Controls in detail
tilt/sliding panel open after approximately
Rswitching on the seat ventilation for the 1 second.
driver’s seat X Release button % on the SmartKey to
The summer opening feature can only be interrupt the opening procedure.
activated via the remote control of the
SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
proximity to the driver’s outside door handle. Convenience closing feature
X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
When locking the vehicle, you can
the driver’s outside door handle. simultaneously close
When roller sunblinds and/or rear door Rthe door windows
window sunshades are extended:
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof
X Press and hold button % on the
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
SmartKey.
The vehicle unlocks. panel
The roller sunblinds and/or rear door Afterward, you can extend the roller
window sunshades begin to retract after sunblinds of the panorama roof with power
approximately 1 second. tilt/sliding panel and the rear door window
sunshades.
i When the vehicle is equipped with rear
door window sunshades, the rear window G Warning!
sunshade opens simultaneously. When closing the door windows and the tilt/
sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
X With the roller sunblinds and/or rear door
tilt/sliding panel, make sure there is no
window sunshades fully retracted, press
danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
and hold button % on the SmartKey
procedure.
again.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
The door windows and the tilt/sliding
sunroof or the panorama roof with power RRelease button & to stop the closing
tilt/sliding panel open. procedure. To open, press and hold button
X Release button % on the SmartKey to %. To continue the closing procedure
interrupt the opening procedure. after making sure that there is no danger of
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 310
310 Power windows
anyone being harmed by the closing With KEYLESS-GO

procedure, press and hold button &.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the sensor surface on the outside
door handle to stop the closing procedure.
RImmediately pull on the same outside door
handle and hold firmly. The door windows
and the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel will open
Controls in detail
for as long as the door handle is held but

the door not opened.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
With SmartKey located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
X Close all doors.
the driver’s outside door handle.
X X Touch and hold sensor surface : on an
Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
driver’s outside door handle. outside door handle until the door windows
X Press and hold button & on the
and the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel are
SmartKey until the door windows and the
closed completely.
tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel are closed i Make sure you are only touching sensor
completely. surface :.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
X Release sensor surface : to interrupt the
interrupt the closing procedure.
closing procedure.
X Vehicles with panorama roof with
X Vehicles with panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel and/or rear
power tilt/sliding panel and/or rear
door window sunshades: Press button
door window sunshades: Touch and hold
& on the SmartKey once more.
sensor surface : once more.
The roller sunblinds and/or the rear door
The roller sunblinds and/or the rear door
window sunshades extend.
window sunshades extend.
X Press button % on the SmartKey to
X Pull on the outside door handle and hold
interrupt the extending procedure. firmly to interrupt the extending procedure.
i Vehicles with rear door window i Vehicles with rear door window
sunshades: The rear window sunshade sunshades: The rear window sunshade
extends simultaneously. extends simultaneously.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 311
Driving and parking 311
Driving and parking immediately. If you must drive under these

conditions, drive only with at least one
Safety notes window fully open at all times.
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are Automatic transmission
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance.
Controls in detail
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer
brake or accelerate. This could lead to
accidents and injury.
G Warning! Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

With the engine not running, there is no power : Button for selecting park position P
assistance for the brake and steering j Park position
systems. In this case, it is important to keep k Reverse gear
in mind that a considerably higher degree of i Neutral position
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
h Drive position
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
For more information on how to operate the
G Warning! gear selector lever, see “Automatic
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read transmission” (Y page 317).
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
Instructions included in your vehicle literature park position P.
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all The transmission position indicator in the
necessary safety information and warning for multifunction display should be on P
the operation of your vehicle. (Y page 320).
With SmartKey
Starting the engine
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
G Warning!
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
position 3 (Y page 284) and release it.
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
The engine starts automatically.
unconsciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such With KEYLESS-GO
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. G Warning!
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
cause determined and corrected
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 312
312 Driving and parking
children unattended in the vehicle, as they Starting difficulties

could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
! Remember that extended starting
When leaving the vehicle, always take the attempts can drain the battery.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, The engine does not start. You can hear
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A the starter.
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could There could be a malfunction in the engine
result in an accident and/or serious personal electronics or in the fuel supply system.
injury. Carry out the following steps:
You can start your vehicle without the X If you are starting the engine with the
Controls in detail
SmartKey in the starter switch using the SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. switch to position 0 and repeat the starting
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle. procedure.
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-
GO: Close any doors that may be open to
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
or
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio
signals from another source may be
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button If the engine does not start after several
: USA only starting attempts:
; Canada only X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Center or call Roadside Assistance.
button is inserted in the starter switch The engine does not start. You cannot
(Y page 284). hear the starter.
i To start the engine with the SmartKey The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
instead of the KEYLESS-GO function, X Get a jump start (Y page 514).
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
from the starter switch. Proceed as If the engine will not start despite a jump
described in “With SmartKey” start:
(Y page 311). X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Depress the brake pedal during the starting Center or call Roadside Assistance.
procedure. The starter has been exposed to excessive
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal. temperatures.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
X Repeat the starting procedure.
once.
The engine starts automatically.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 313
If the engine does not start after several ! Simultaneously depressing the
starting attempts: accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz reduces engine performance and causes
Center or call Roadside Assistance. premature brake and drivetrain wear which
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Driving off i Once the vehicle is in motion, the doors
G Warning! and the trunk look automatically. The
locking knobs in the doors move down.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
The automatic door lock feature can be
Controls in detail
order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle deactivated (Y page 210).
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control. Automatic transmission
G Warning!
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
speeds. Running a cold engine at high
transmission out of park position P or neutral
engine speeds may shorten the service life
position N if the engine speed is higher than
of the engine. This is not covered by the
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
S 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed control of the vehicle and hit someone or
is restricted in order to protect it from something. Only shift into gear when the
damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full engine is idling normally and when your right
speed when the engine is cold to prevent foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
premature engine wear and/or diminished
comfort.
! Only shift the automatic transmission into
! You have forgotten to release the reverse gear R or park position P when the
electronic parking brake when driving off if vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
automatic transmission could be damaged.
Ran acoustic warning sounds
X Depress the brake pedal.
Rthe message Please Release
Parking Brake appears in the The gear selector lever can now be used.
multifunction display X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Rthe red indicator lamp for the electronic position D or reverse gear R.
parking brake F (USA only) or ! i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster park position P is only possible with the
flashes brake pedal depressed.
Release the electronic parking brake. Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may down. However, the parking pawl remains
cause serious damage to the drivetrain engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 314
X Wait for the gear selection process to In case of accident

complete before setting the vehicle in
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
motion.
X Release the brake pedal. X Do not start the engine under any
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
circumstances.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
The electronic parking brake releases
automatically. roadway.
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
The red indicator lamp F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument If the extent of the damage cannot be
cluster goes out. determined:
Controls in detail
After a cold start, the automatic transmission X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows Center or call Roadside Assistance.
the catalytic converter to reach its operating
temperature earlier. If no damage on major assemblies, fuel
system, and engine mount can be
For more information on driving, see “Driving
determined:
instructions” (Y page 434).
X Start the engine in the usual manner.
Problems while driving

Parking
The engine runs erratically and misfires
RAn ignition cable may be damaged. G Warning!
Do not park in areas where the hot exhaust
RThe engine electronics may not be system could come into contact with
operating properly. combustible materials. Combustible
RUnburned gasoline may have entered the materials such as grass, hay or leaves could
catalytic converter and damaged it. be ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
X Give very little gas. Unintended vehicle movement could cause
serious personal injury or damage to the
X Have the problem checked at an authorized
vehicle or the vehicle drivetrain. To reduce
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
such risks, always do the following before
turning off the engine and leaving the vehicle:
The coolant temperature is above RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
248‡ (120†)
REngage the electronic parking brake.
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
RShift the automatic transmission into park
the engine.
position P.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
RSlowly release the brake pedal.
as possible.
X Turn off the engine immediately. RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off. front wheels towards the road curb.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
necessary (Y page 408). position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 315
the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS- automatic transmission in reverse gear R
GO start/stop button. the trunk lid must be closed.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the RThe hood is closed.
vehicle when leaving. RYou have fastened your seat belt.
RYou depress on the accelerator pedal.
Electronic parking brake
i If you have not fastened your seat belt,
G Warning! the following conditions must be met in
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the order for the electronic parking brake to
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with release automatically:
Controls in detail
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave RThe driver’s door is closed and you shift
children unattended in the vehicle, or with
the automatic transmission out of park
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
position P.
release the electronic parking brake and/or
shift the automatic transmission out of park or
position P, either of which could result in an RThe driver’s door is closed and you drive
accident and/or serious personal injury. faster than 2 mph (3 km/h).
Engaging electronic parking brake

manually
X Press handle :.
The red indicator lamp F (USA only)
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument
cluster comes on.
i You can engage the electronic parking
brake even when the SmartKey is removed
Engaging electronic parking brake
Releasing electronic parking brake automatically
manually
When at least one of the following conditions
is met, the electronic parking brake engages
X Pull handle :. automatically when the HOLD function
The red indicator lamp F (USA only) (Y page 342) or DISTRONIC PLUS
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument (Y page 330) has brought your vehicle to a
cluster goes out. standstill.
RThe engine is turned off.
Releasing electronic parking brake RThe driver’s door is opened and the seat
automatically
belt is not inserted in the seat belt buckle.
The electronic parking brake releases
RThe hood lock is released.
automatically when all of the following
conditions are fulfilled: RThe trunk lid is opened while the automatic
RThe engine is running. transmission is in reverse gear R.

RThe vehicle is stationary for an extended
RThe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R. With the period of time.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 316
The red indicator lamp F (USA only) i If the engine cannot be turned off as
or ! (Canada only) in the instrument described, see “Emergency engine
cluster comes on. shutdown” (Y page 521).
i In addition to engaging the electronic X Shift the automatic transmission into park
parking brake, the automatic transmission position P.
may shift into park position P
automatically.
i Observe instructions if you want the
Emergency braking with electronic automatic transmission to remain in
parking brake neutral position N, see “Remaining in
neutral position N” (Y page 319).
Controls in detail
In an emergency situation, you can also brake

your vehicle by using the electronic parking
brake. With SmartKey
X While driving, press handle :. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
All four wheels of the vehicle will be braked position 0.
for as long as you press and hold the handle
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
for the electronic parking brake. The longer
switch.
you keep the handle pressed, the stronger
your vehicle will be braked. When you turn off the engine using the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from
During the braking procedure
the starter switch or open a front door, the
Ran acoustic warning sounds automatic transmission will shift into park
Rthe message Please Release Parking position P automatically.
Brake appears in the multifunction display G Warning!
Rthe red indicator lamp for the electronic Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
parking brake F (USA only) or ! only will shift the automatic transmission into
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster neutral position N automatically.
flashes Always shift the automatic transmission into
Once the vehicle comes to a complete stop, park position P before turning off the engine.
the electronic parking brake will engage Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
automatically. could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Turning off the engine With KEYLESS-GO

G Warning! X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle With the driver’s door closed, the starter
has come to a complete stop. With the engine switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
not running, there is no power assistance for door opened, the starter switch is set to
the brake and steering systems. In this case, position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
it is important to keep in mind that a from the starter switch (Y page 284).
considerably higher degree of effort is When you turn off the engine using the
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a
front door, the automatic transmission will
shift into park position P automatically.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 317
Automatic transmission 317
G Warning! G Warning!
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
only will shift the automatic transmission into the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
neutral position N automatically. Instructions included in your vehicle literature
Always shift the automatic transmission into portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
park position P before turning off the engine. necessary safety information and warning for
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which the operation of your vehicle.
could result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury. ! Allow the engine to warm up under low
load use. Do not place full load on the
Controls in detail
i In an emergency you can turn off the engine until the operating temperature has
engine while driving by pressing and been reached.
holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
for approximately 3 seconds. extended period when driving off on
slippery road surfaces.
If you have started the engine with the This may cause serious damage to the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot engine and the drivetrain which is not
turn it off as described above: covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Warranty.
button from the starter switch.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission
The engine turns off. The starter switch is upshifting is delayed. This allows the
in position 0 (Y page 284). catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
to operating temperature.
Automatic transmission
Gear selector lever
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 311).
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
still have sufficient clearance. Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers : Button for selecting park position P
the objects could get caught between or j Park position
under the pedals. You could then no longer k Reverse gear
brake or accelerate. This could lead to i Neutral position
accidents and injury.
h Drive position
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 318
318 Automatic transmission
G Warning! i The gear selector lever always returns to

It is dangerous to shift the automatic its original position.
transmission out of park position P or neutral The current transmission position P, R, N,
position N if the engine speed is higher than or D appears in the multifunction display
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the (Y page 320).
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose Shifting into park position P
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
X With the vehicle at a standstill, press
something. Only shift into gear when the
button : on the gear selector lever.
engine is idling normally and when your right
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
Controls in detail
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.

the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
! The vehicle must be stopped when you from the starter switch or open a front door,
shift the automatic transmission the automatic transmission will shift into park
position P automatically.
Rdirectly between drive position D and KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
reverse gear R using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
Rdirectly between reverse gear R and open a front door, the automatic transmission
drive position D will shift into park position P automatically.
Rdirectly into park position P G Warning!
Otherwise the automatic transmission Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
could be damaged. only will shift the automatic transmission into
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or neutral position N automatically.
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” Always shift the automatic transmission into
(Y page 321). park position P before turning off the engine.
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P is only possible with the
personal injury.
brake pedal depressed.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
gear selector lever can be moved up or
shifts the automatic transmission out of
down, but the parking pawl remains
park position P.
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur.
HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS:
i Depending on vehicle production date: The automatic transmission will shift into
The automatic transmission will shift into park position P automatically when HOLD
park position P automatically when function or DISTRONIC PLUS brings your
Ryou open the driver’s door while driving vehicle to standstill. In addition, at least one
at low speed, and of the following conditions must be met:
RThe engine is turned off.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R RThe driver’s door is opened and the seat
After the vehicle has engaged park position belt is not inserted in the seat belt buckle.
P automatically, you can engage drive In addition to shifting into park position P, the
position D or reverse gear R again to electronic parking brake will engage
override this locking feature purposely. automatically.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 319
Shifting into neutral position N X If engaged release the electronic parking

brake manually.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
brake pedal.
SmartKey in the starter switch.
X Move the gear selector lever up or down to
the resistance point to select neutral With KEYLESS-GO:
position N. X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
When you turn off the engine, the automatic X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
transmission will shift into neutral position brake pedal and keep it pressed.
N automatically. X Shift the automatic transmission into park
SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
Controls in detail
position P.
starter switch or opening a front door after X Release the brake pedal.
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
transmission into park position P
automatically. button from the starter switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic X Switch on the ignition.
transmission into park position P X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
automatically. pressed.
Remaining in neutral position N
neutral position N.
If you want the automatic transmission to
X Release the brake pedal.
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
X If engaged release the electronic parking
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor-
type car wash, observe the following brake manually.
instructions. X Switch off the ignition and leave the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
G Warning!
When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
Shifting into reverse gear R
switch, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
on the ignition which could result in brake pedal.
unsupervised use of vehicle equipment. X Move the gear selector lever up past the
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could resistance point.
result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Shifting into drive position D
With SmartKey: X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever down past the
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed. resistance point.
neutral position N.
Shifting procedure
X Release the brake pedal.
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 320
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 321) Effect

Rthe selected program mode:
B Park position
C/S (Y page 322)
Shift the automatic transmission
or into park position P only when the
M (AMG vehicles only) (Y page 324) vehicle is stopped. The park position
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal is not intended to serve as a brake
Rthe
when the vehicle is parked. Rather,
vehicle speed
the driver should always engage the
With drive position D selected, you can electronic parking brake in addition
influence transmission shifting by to shifting the automatic
Controls in detail
Rlimiting the gear range transmission into park position P to

secure the vehicle.
Rextending the gear range
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
Rchanging the gears manually (AMG vehicles
malfunctioning, the automatic
only) transmission could remain locked in
park position P.
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
Transmission positions system checked at an authorized
The current transmission position appears in Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
the multifunction display. possible.
C Reverse gear
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
: Transmission position indicator

If the current transmission position does not
appear in the multifunction display due to a
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
automatic transmission is in the desired
position.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
position D.
X Select automatic program mode S.
X Do not limit the gear range.
X Drive off carefully.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 321
Effect Rocking the vehicle
A Neutral position Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic

transmission directly between drive position
No power is transmitted from the D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
engine to the drive axle. When the stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
brakes are released, the vehicle can system of this vehicle electronically limits
be moved freely (pushed or towed). directly shifting the automatic transmission
To avoid damage to the between drive position D and reverse gear R
transmission, never shift the to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph
automatic transmission into neutral (9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission
Controls in detail
position N while driving. directly between drive position D and reverse
Exception: If the ESC is switched off gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
or malfunctioning, shift the down past the resistance point.
automatic transmission into neutral
position N if the vehicle is in danger Working on the vehicle
of skidding.
G Warning!
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
When working on the vehicle, engage the
for any other reason with the
electronic parking brake and shift the
automatic transmission in neutral
automatic transmission into park position P.
position N can result in
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
transmission damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
personal injury.
Limited Warranty.
7 Drive position
The automatic transmission shifts Gear ranges
automatically. All forward gears are With the automatic transmission in drive
available. position D and driving in automatic program
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
Driving tips (Y page 323).
Kickdown The current gear range appears in the
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower : Gear range indicator
gear.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 322
Effect
= With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
5 Allows the use of the engine’s
braking effect when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin mountainous regions

Runder extreme operating
Controls in detail
conditions Program mode selector switch on AMG vehicles

4 For maximum use of the engine’s C Comfort For standard driving
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades. S Sport For sporty driving
M Manual For manual gearshifting
Automatic shift program

The current program mode appears in the
The program mode selector switch is used to multifunction display.
adjust
Rthe shift program
Rthe suspension tuning of the AIRMATIC or
the ABC system
Rthe engine control
: Program mode indicator

You should only change the program mode
when the automatic transmission is in park
position P.
The last selected automatic program mode
(C or S) is active when the engine is restarted.
Program mode selector switch
X Press the program mode selector switch
C Comfort For comfort driving repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction
S Sport For sporty driving display.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 323
Selecting program mode C means: Limiting gear range

RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both G Warning!
forward and reverse, except when driving
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
off with full throttle.
RTraction and driving stability are improved result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
on icy roads. control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give this type of loss of control.
more gas. The engine then operates at
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :.
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin. The automatic transmission will shift into
Controls in detail
the next lower gear as permitted by the
Selecting program mode S means that shift program. This action simultaneously
upshifts occur later. limits the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
One-touch gearshifting i To avoid overrevving the engine when
With the automatic transmission in drive downshifting, the automatic transmission
position D and driving in automatic program will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear maximum speed would be exceeded.
range using the steering wheel gearshift
control. Extending gear range
AMG vehicles: For information on using the X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;.
steering wheel gearshift control in manual The automatic transmission will shift into
program mode M, see “Manual shift program” the next higher gear as permitted by the
(Y page 324). shift program. This action simultaneously
extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
Steering wheel gearshift control (example the gear range indicator disappears from
illustration)
the multifunction display.
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel The automatic transmission will shift from
gearshift control when the automatic the current gear range directly into drive
transmission is in park position P, neutral position D.
position N, or reverse gear R.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 324
Shifting into optimal gear range Activating manual shift program

X Pull and hold left gearshift control :. X Press the program mode selector switch
The automatic transmission will select the repeatedly until M appears in the
gear range suited for optimal acceleration multifunction display.
and deceleration automatically. This will The automatic transmission switches to
involve shifting down one or more gears. manual program mode M. Automatic
shifting is switched off. The gear range is
not limited.
Manual shift program You can change the gears manually with drive
position D selected. You can upshift or
The manual shift program is available on AMG
Controls in detail
downshift through the gears in succession.

vehicles only.
Manual program mode M differs with regard i Manual program mode M will not be
to spontaneity, response time, and shifting stored. When the engine is turned off with
smoothness from automatic program mode manual program mode M selected, the
S. automatic transmission will go to
In manual program mode M, system- automatic program mode (C or S) when the
controlled automatic gearshifting is switched engine is restarted.
off. You need to change the gears by manually
upshifting or downshifting using the steering Upshifting
wheel gearshift control. ! In manual program mode M, the
automatic transmission will not upshift,
even if the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Shift up into the next
gear before the engine has reached its
overrevving range. Make absolutely certain
that the engine speed does not reach the
red marking on the tachometer. Otherwise
the engine could be damaged which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Program mode selector switch on AMG vehicles X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;
(Y page 323).
C Comfort For standard driving The automatic transmission shifts into the
S Sport For sporty driving next higher gear.
M Manual For manual gearshifting Upshift indicator
The current program mode appears in the

multifunction display (Y page 322).
For information on automatic program mode
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program”
(Y page 322) and “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 323).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 325
Transfer case 325
In manual program mode M, upshift Deactivating manual shift program

indicator ; in the multifunction display
X Press the program mode selector switch
advises you to upshift before the engine
repeatedly until C or S appears in the
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can
drive at the maximum engine speed for each
gear without overrevving the engine. or
XRestart the engine.
X Shift the automatic transmission from
The automatic transmission will go to
current gear : into the next higher gear.
automatic program mode C.
The fuel supply will otherwise be
interrupted to prevent the engine from Manual program mode M is not stored.
Controls in detail
overrevving.
Emergency operation (limp-home
Downshifting mode)
G Warning! If vehicle acceleration becomes less
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in responsive or sluggish or the automatic
order to obtain braking action. This could transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle transmission is most likely operating in limp-
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent home (emergency operation) mode. In this
this type of loss of control. mode only second gear and reverse gear R
can be selected.
X Briefly pull left gearshift control : X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
(Y page 323). X Shift the automatic transmission into park
The automatic transmission shifts into the
position P.
next lower gear.
X Turn off the engine.
i For maximum acceleration, pull and hold X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
the left gearshift control. Depending on the X Restart the engine.
engine speed the automatic transmission
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
selects the optimal gear for maximum
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
acceleration.
R.
i When you brake or stop, the automatic X Have the automatic transmission checked
transmission shifts down into a gear from at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
which you can easily accelerate or take off. soon as possible.
Kickdown
Transfer case
Using the kickdown while driving in manual
program mode M is not possible.
This section applies to vehicles equipped with
all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
and rear axles are powered at all times when
the vehicle is being operated.
! Only conduct operational or performance
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 326
326 Instrument cluster
otherwise seriously damage the brake G Warning!

system or the transfer case which is not HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
Warranty. Instructions included in your vehicle literature
! Because the ESC operates automatically,
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in The language setting for the multifunction
position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking display can be changed via COMAND
brake is being tested on a brake test (Y page 94).
Controls in detail
dynamometer or when the vehicle is being

towed with one axle raised.
Active braking action through the ESC may Activating the instrument cluster
otherwise seriously damage the brake The instrument cluster is activated when you
system which is not covered by the
Ropen a door
Rswitch on the ignition
Rswitch on the exterior lamps
Instrument cluster
Introduction
Adjusting the instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument
illumination
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
(Y page 32).
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed
Routside temperature
X To brighten illumination: Turn knob :
Rwarning/indicator lamps
clockwise.
Rmalfunction/warning messages X To dim illumination: Turn knob :
Rfailure of any systems counterclockwise.
Driving characteristics may be impaired. i The instrument cluster illumination is
If you must continue to drive, do so with added dimmed or brightened automatically to suit
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes- ambient light conditions.
Benz Center as soon as possible. The instrument cluster illumination will also
be adjusted automatically when you switch
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 327
Driving systems 327
Coolant temperature gauge Outside temperature indicator

The coolant temperature gauge is located on The outside temperature indicator is on the
the left side in the instrument cluster bottom left-hand side of the instrument
(Y page 32). cluster (Y page 32).
Driving when your engine is overheated can The outside temperature indicator is not
cause some fluids which may have leaked into designed to serve as an ice-warning device
the engine compartment to catch fire. You and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
could be seriously burned. Indicated temperatures just above the
Controls in detail
Steam from an overheated engine can cause freezing point do not guarantee that the road
serious burns which can occur just by opening surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the Fuel gauge
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of the
the engine has cooled down.
instrument cluster (Y page 32). Once the fuel
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop- level has fallen below the reserve mark, the
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may yellow segment indicator for the fuel reserve
rise close to 248‡ (120†), i.e close to the comes on.
red zone of the temperature gauge.
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a Driving systems
warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a Introduction
coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†), This section describes the following driving
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant systems of your vehicle:
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
RCruise control
serious engine damage which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RDISTRONIC PLUS
Warranty. RHill-start assist system
RHOLD function
Tachometer RAIRMATIC
The red marking on the tachometer RActive Body Control (ABC)

(Y page 32) denotes excessive engine speed. RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC)
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, RParktronic system with Parking Guidance
as it may result in serious engine damage RRear view camera
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. RNight View Assist Plus
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is RATTENTION ASSIST
interrupted if the engine is operated within RBlind Spot Assist
the red marking.
RLane Keeping Assist
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 328
328 Driving systems
The driving safety systems ABS, Adaptive previously set speed and wishes to resume
Brake, Adaptive Brake Lights, BAS, BAS this particular preset speed.
PLUS, EBP, ESC and PRE-SAFE® Brake are
described in the “Safety and security” section G Warning!
(Y page 63). When the cruise control is braking, the brake
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
Cruise control must not be impeded by any obstacles:
The cruise control maintains the speed you RDo not place any objects in the footwell.
set for your vehicle automatically. RMake sure that the floormats and carpets
Controls in detail
The use of the cruise control is recommended are securely in place.

for driving at a constant speed for extended
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
periods of time.
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
The currently set speed or last set speed
(“Resume” function) appears in the You could otherwise cause an accident and
multifunction display for approximately injure yourself and/or others.
5 seconds. The set speed is shown by a
triangle in the speedometer and the
corresponding speedometer segments from
the selected speed to the vehicle maximum
speed in the multifunction display are
illuminated.
G Warning!
The cruise control is a convenience system
designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
and for safe brake operation. : Setting current or higher speed
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic, ; Setting current or lower speed
and weather conditions make it advisable to = Canceling the cruise control
travel at a constant speed. ? Activating the cruise control or resuming
RThe use of the cruise control can be to last set speed
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe Activating cruise control
driving at a constant speed.
You can activate the cruise control at a
RThe use of the cruise control can be vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
You cannot activate the cruise control
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
Rwhen you brake
spin and loss of control.
RDeactivate Rwhen you have engaged the electronic
the cruise control when driving
in fog. parking brake
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 329
Driving systems 329
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park The cruise control also switches off
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral automatically when
position N Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
Rthe ESC is switched off or has switched off (30 km/h)
due to a malfunction Rthe ESC is in operation
The vehicle speed displayed in the Rthe ESC is switched off via the control
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed system
setting for the cruise control system.
Rthe ESC has switched off due to a
Setting current speed malfunction
Controls in detail
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
neutral position N while driving
speed.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in The speedometer segments in the
direction of arrow : or press in direction multifunction display go out and an acoustic
of arrow ;. warning will sound. Observe additional
messages in the multifunction display that
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
may appear.
pedal.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may deactivate the cruise control. After a brief
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
the grade eases, the set speed will be control will resume the last set speed.
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control Changing the set speed
maintains the set speed by braking with the
G Warning!
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on
longer downhill grades the automatic Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
transmission will downshift automatically. until the vehicle has made the necessary
adjustments.
Canceling cruise control Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
X Depress the brake pedal. legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
or and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
direction of arrow =. or serious injury to you and others.
The last set speed is stored for later use. You can increase or decrease the set speed
The last stored speed is deleted from memory in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
when the engine is turned off. 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
The cruise control switches off automatically When you use the cruise control lever to
when you depress the brake pedal or you decelerate, the brake system will brake the
engage the electronic parking brake. In this vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
case, the speedometer segments in the power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
multifunction display will go out.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 330
330 Driving systems
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: arising from returning to the preset speed

1 km/h) increments could cause an accident and/or serious injury
i The set speed value is increased or to you and others.
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down to the direction of arrow ?.
resistance point. If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control X Remove your foot from the accelerator
lever up to the resistance point in direction pedal.
of arrow :.
Controls in detail
The last stored speed is deleted from memory

X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise when the engine is turned off.
control lever down to the resistance point
in direction of arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever. DISTRONIC PLUS
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
Safety notes
accelerate or decelerate.
When activated, the DISTRONIC PLUS
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: adaptive cruise control system increases the
10 km/h) increments driving convenience afforded by the cruise
i The set speed value is increased or control while traveling on expressways and
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) other major roadways.
increments each time you lift or press the RIf the DISTRONIC PLUS distance sensor
cruise control lever up or down past the detects a slower moving vehicle directly
resistance point. ahead, your vehicle speed will be reduced
so that you follow that vehicle at your
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control preset following distance.
lever up past the resistance point in
RIf there is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
direction of arrow :.
the DISTRONIC PLUS will function in the
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
same way as standard cruise control
control lever down past the resistance (Y page 328).
point in direction of arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever. G Warning!
The new speed is set and the vehicle will The DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity with
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that its operational characteristics. We strongly
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle recommend that you review the following
has reached the set speed. information carefully before operating the
system.
Setting stored speed (Resume
function) G Warning!
G Warning! the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
The set speed stored in memory should only Instructions included in your vehicle literature
be set again if prevailing road conditions and portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
legal speed limits permit. Possible necessary safety information and warning for
acceleration or deceleration differences the operation of your vehicle.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 331
Driving systems 331
G Warning! as motorcycles and vehicles driving in an

When the DISTRONIC PLUS is braking, the offset formation.
brake pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
must not be impeded by any obstacles: conditions. Additionally, the driver must
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. provide the steering, braking and other driving
inputs necessary to remain in control of the
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets vehicle.
are securely in place.
High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake speed measuring systems etc. can cause the
Controls in detail
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped. DISTRONIC PLUS system to temporarily
You could otherwise cause an accident and cease functioning.
injure yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
G Warning! The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road and
The DISTRONIC PLUS is a convenience traffic conditions into account. Only use the
system. Its speed adjustment reduction DISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather and
capability is intended to make cruise control traffic conditions make it advisable to travel
more effective and usable when traffic speeds at a constant speed.
vary. It is not however, intended to, nor does
it, replace the need for extreme care. G Warning!
Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
in tire traction can result in wheel spin and
importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
loss of control.
stopping distance, always remains with the
driver. The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function in
adverse sight and distance conditions. Do not
The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street and
use the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions of
traffic conditions into account.
fog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.
Complex driving situations are not always
fully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. This G Warning!
could result in wrong or missing distance The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weather
warnings. conditions into account. Switch off the
DISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if:
G Warning!
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or
The DISTRONIC PLUS adaptive cruise control
is not a substitute for active driving ice. The wheels could lose traction while
involvement. It does not react to pedestrians braking or accelerating, and the vehicle
or on stationary objects, nor does it recognize could skid.
or predict the curvature and lane layout or the Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system sensor covers
movement of preceding vehicles. The are dirty or visibility is diminished due to
DISTRONIC PLUS can only apply a maximum snow, rain or fog, for example. The distance
of 40% of the vehicle’s braking power. control system functionality could be
The DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow impaired.
vehicles possibly driving in front of you, such Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS is
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 332
332 Driving systems
switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able speed range of 20 to 120 mph
to recognize dangerous situations until it is (Canada: 30 to 200 km/h).
too late. This could cause an accident in which Always obey applicable speed limits.
you and/or others could be injured. Do not use the DISTRONIC PLUS if you are
driving on a road with steep uphill or downhill
G Warning! slopes.
The “Resume” function should only be When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
operated if the driver is fully aware of the registered in Canada, you must switch off the
previously set speed and wishes to resume radar sensor system (Y page 236). Canadian
this particular preset speed. law does not permit the use of the radar
Controls in detail
sensor system for vehicles from outside of

G Warning!
Canada. When you switch off the radar sensor
Close attention to road and traffic conditions system, the following functions are
is imperative at all times, regardless of deactivated:
whether or not the DISTRONIC PLUS is RDISTRONIC PLUS
activated.
RBAS PLUS (Y page 64)
Use of the DISTRONIC PLUS can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy traffic RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
because conditions do not allow safe driving RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 359)
at a constant speed.
The DISTRONIC PLUS will not react to i Due to its radar-emitting nature
stationary objects in the roadway (e.g. a DISTRONIC PLUS may have an appearance
stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled similar to a radar detector to law
vehicle). The DISTRONIC PLUS will also not enforcement officials. You may want to
respond to oncoming vehicles. refer to this section of your Operator’s
Switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS: Manual when asked.
Rwhen changing from the left to the right i USA only:
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in This device has been approved by the FCC
the left lane as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off sensor is intended for use in an automotive
ramp radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
Rin complex driving situations, such as in altering of the device will void any
highway construction zones warranties, and is not permitted by the
In these situations, the DISTRONIC PLUS will any non-approved way.
continue to maintain the set speed unless
deactivated.
The DISTRONIC PLUS is designed and operate the equipment.
intended only to maintain a set speed and
keep a set distance from moving objects in
front of it.
The DISTRONIC PLUS functions in a speed

range of 0 to 120 mph
(Canada: 0 to 200 km/h) if a preceding
vehicle is detected. If no preceding vehicle is
detected the DISTRONIC PLUS functions in a
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 333
Driving systems 333
i Canada only: If the DISTRONIC PLUS calculates that there

This device complies with RSS-210 of is a danger of collision, the distance warning
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to lamp · in the instrument cluster comes
the following two conditions: on and an intermittent warning sounds.
1. This device may not cause interference, X Immediately apply the brake to avoid a
and collision.
Under no circumstances should the driver
await the intermittent warning sound
before braking. See the following warning
note.
Controls in detail
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
Removal, tampering, or altering of the the distance warning lamp · goes out
device will void any warranties, and is not when the necessary distance to the vehicle
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use ahead is again established.
in any non-approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this G Warning!
device could void the user’s authority to An intermittent warning sounds and the
operate the equipment. distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in system calculates that the distance to the
multifunction display vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current
speed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS will
not be capable of slowing the vehicle
sufficiently to maintain the preset following
distance, which creates a danger of a
collision.
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The
warning sound is intended as a final caution
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
: Speed of the vehicle ahead operation of the warning signal to intercede
; Marker with your own braking. This will result in
= Distance warning lamp potentially dangerous emergency braking
which will not always result in an impact being
If the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, avoided.
marker ; indicates the set speed. Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed G Warning!
setting on the DISTRONIC PLUS system. The DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle
If the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle with a maximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2
directly ahead, the ring on the speedometer (4 m/s2). This corresponds to approximately
dial comes on between the speed of the 40% of the maximum deceleration of your
vehicle ahead : and the set speed. vehicle.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 334
334 Driving systems
You must also apply the brakes yourself to X Press = or ; to select the
avoid a collision. The DISTRONIC PLUS brakes DriveAssist menu.
the vehicle in an effort to restore the preset X Press : or 9 to select the
distance or to maintain the set speed. The Distance Display function.
brake pedal is automatically applied as this X Press a.
happens which results in the brake pedal
The DISTRONIC PLUS distance graphic
moving
appears and you will see one of the
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, following displays in the multifunction
including the area under the brake pedal. display.
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
Controls in detail
movement which could interfere with the

DISTRONIC PLUS activated
braking ability of the DISTRONIC PLUS
system. If you switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS, you will
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal see the set speed in the multifunction display
– your foot could become caught. for approximately 5 seconds. When the
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated the following
G Warning! display appears in the multifunction display.
If you do not receive visual or acoustic
warning signals during a critical traffic
situation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either not
recognized the collision risk, has been
deactivated or is malfunctioning.
Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUS
is operating, it is ultimately always the drivers
responsibility to apply the brakes in order to
control the vehicle and avoid a collision.
Displaying the distance graphic : DISTRONIC PLUS activated

In the DriveAssist menu under Distance ; Your vehicle
Display you see the current settings for = Preset distance threshold to the
DISTRONIC PLUS. The Information shown in preceding vehicle
the multifunction display depends on whether ? Preceding vehicle, if detected
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated or deactivated.
For activating or deactivating the DISTRONIC DISTRONIC PLUS deactivated
PLUS system, see “Activating DISTRONIC
PLUS” (Y page 335) or “Deactivating When the DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated,
DISTRONIC PLUS” (Y page 338). you will see the following display in the
The menu overview can be found on multifunction display.
(Y page 222).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 335
Driving systems 335
You can activate the DISTRONIC PLUS when

the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
It is also possible to activate the DISTRONIC
PLUS when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (30 km/h) and the DISTRONIC PLUS
has detected a preceding vehicle.
If the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the set
speed is indicated with marker ;
(Y page 333) in the speedometer dial.
Controls in detail
: Preceding vehicle, if detected The maximum vehicle speed you can set is
; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h).
= Preset distance threshold to the If the DISTRONIC PLUS is not activated after
preceding vehicle the DISTRONIC PLUS lever is pulled in
? Your vehicle
direction of arrow ? (Y page 335), you will
see the message: DISTRONIC PLUS ---
mph (Canada: DISTRONIC PLUS --- kmh) in
DISTRONIC PLUS lever
In the following cases you cannot activate the
DISTRONIC PLUS:
Rwithin 2 minutes after driving off, following
an engine start
Rif the vehicle is secured with the electronic
parking brake
Rif the ESC is switched off or has switched
off due to a malfunction
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
: Setting current or higher speed position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
; Setting current or lower speed position N
= Deactivating the DISTRONIC PLUS Rif the hood is open
? Activating the DISTRONIC PLUS or Rif the driver’s door is open and the driver
resuming to the last set speed has not fastened his or her seat belt
A Setting following distance Rifthe front passenger or a rear passenger
door is open
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Rif the radar sensors are switched off
G Warning! (Y page 236)
When the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on,
the vehicle can be braked. You should Switching on while driving
therefore switch off the DISTRONIC PLUS if
the vehicle must be towed. You can switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS when
the vehicle speed is above 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 336
336 Driving systems
Below 20 mph (30 km/h), you can only switch X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in
on the DISTRONIC PLUS if the preceding direction of arrow ?.
vehicle has been detected and is shown in the The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on.
multifunction display. If you no longer see the X Tap the DISTRONIC PLUS lever up : or
preceding vehicle in the multifunction display down ; until desired speed is set.
and if it is no longer detected because it has
changed lanes, for example, the DISTRONIC You can adjust the set speed using the
PLUS switches off and a signal sounds. DISTRONIC PLUS lever and the target
distance using the distance setting switch on
X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in
the DISTRONIC PLUS lever (Y page 339).
direction of arrow ? to call up the last set
i If the DISTRONIC PLUS is switched off,
Controls in detail
speed, or if no speed is stored, to set and

store the current speed. the PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69) will warn
The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. of an impending collision if this function has
or been activated with the instrument cluster
control system (Y page 232).
X Tap the DISTRONIC PLUS lever up : or
down ; until desired speed is set. Starting off
The DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on. When the preceding vehicle starts off:
X Remove your foot from the accelerator X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.
pedal. X Pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever briefly in
Your vehicle adapts its speed to the
direction of arrow ?.
preceding vehicle, observing the set speed
as a maximum value. or
If you do not completely remove your foot X Briefly step on the accelerator pedal.
from the accelerator pedal, the message Your vehicle starts off and adapts its speed
DISTRONIC PLUS Override appears in the to the preceding vehicle.
multifunction display. The distance to a
slower-driving vehicle will not be set. You will Driving
drive at the speed you dictate by pressing the
accelerator pedal. If there is no preceding vehicle, the
DISTRONIC PLUS functions like the cruise
control (Y page 328).
Switching on when approaching a
stationary vehicle When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the
preceding vehicle is driving more slowly, it
It is helpful to switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehicle in order to keep the
display in the multifunction display to see that distance specified by you.
a preceding vehicle is detected When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the
(Y page 334). You can only switch on the preceding vehicle is driving faster, it
DISTRONIC PLUS below a speed of 20 mph accelerates the vehicle up to the set speed.
(30 km/h) when a preceding vehicle is
detected. G Warning!
If the preceding vehicle is stationary, you can When you step on the brake pedal, you switch
only switch on the DISTRONIC PLUS if your off the DISTRONIC PLUS except when the
vehicle is also at a standstill. vehicle is at a standstill. The DISTRONIC PLUS
will no longer brake your vehicle. You are
always responsible for maintaining a distance
from other vehicles, observing road speeds
and braking well in advance.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 337
Driving systems 337
Stopping transmission shifts into park position P

automatically when
G Warning! Ropening the driver’s door and releasing the
The braking effect of the DISTRONIC PLUS is seat belt
canceled and the vehicle can start to roll if
Rturning off the engine
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS is switched off using
Ropening the hood
the DISTRONIC PLUS lever
Ra system malfunction occurs
Ryou accelerate
Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS system or the power
supply is malfunctioning, e.g. due to battery The DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
Controls in detail
failure
Rthe electrical components in the engine Setting the current speed
compartment or the fuses have been X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
manipulated speed.
Rthe battery is disconnected X Briefly lift the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
direction of arrow : or depress in
G Warning! direction of arrow ; (Y page 335).
Never get out of the vehicle while the The current speed is set.
DISTRONIC PLUS is switched on! X Remove your foot from the accelerator
The DISTRONIC PLUS must never be operated pedal.
or switched off by passengers or from outside
the vehicle. i If you do not take your foot off of the
The DISTRONIC PLUS is not a substitute for
accelerator pedal and continue to
the electronic parking brake. It must not be
accelerate past the set speed, the following
used to secure the vehicle when parking.
message will appear in the multifunction
display:
When you get out of the vehicle or switch off
the engine, deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS Override
and secure the vehicle from rolling away by The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
engaging the electronic parking brake. front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
speed will then be determined only by the
When the DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the accelerator pedal position.
preceding vehicle is stopping, the vehicle
brakes until it also stops. Once the vehicle is Changing the set speed
at a standstill, it remains stationary, without
depressing the brake pedal. G Warning!
After a short while, the vehicle is secured in Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
place by the electronic parking brake so that until the vehicle has made the necessary
the operating brake can be relieved of load. adjustments.
Depending on the following distance set Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
using the distance setting switch on the a value that the prevailing road conditions and
DISTRONIC PLUS lever (Y page 339), the legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
vehicle will stop adequate away from the and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
preceding vehicle. of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
When the DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and or serious injury to you and others.
the vehicle is at a standstill, the automatic
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 338
338 Driving systems
You can increase or decrease the set speed Setting stored speed (Resume function)
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments. G Warning!
When you use the DISTRONIC PLUS lever to The set speed stored in memory should only
decelerate, the brake system will brake the be set again if prevailing road conditions and
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking legal speed limits permit. Possible
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. acceleration or deceleration differences
arising from returning to the preset speed
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: could cause an accident and/or serious injury
1 km/h) increments to you and others.
Controls in detail
i The set speed value is increased or

X Briefly pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
direction of arrow ? (Y page 335).
increments each time you lift or press the
The DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and
DISTRONIC PLUS lever up or down to the
resumes to the last set speed or, if no
resistance point.
speed is stored, it will set and store the
X Increasing: Briefly lift the DISTRONIC current speed.
PLUS lever up to the resistance point in X Remove your foot from the accelerator
direction of arrow :. pedal.
X Decreasing: Briefly press the DISTRONIC
PLUS lever down to the resistance point in Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
direction of arrow ;.
X Depress the brake pedal (only possible if
X Release the DISTRONIC PLUS lever.
the vehicle is in motion).
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
or
accelerate or decelerate.
X Briefly push the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: direction of arrow = (Y page 335).
10 km/h) increments The last set speed is stored for later use.
i The set speed value is increased or The last stored speed is deleted from memory
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) when the engine is turned off.
increments each time you lift or press the The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off
DISTRONIC PLUS lever up or down past the automatically when
resistance point. Rthe vehicle is secured with the electronic
X
parking brake
Increasing: Briefly lift the DISTRONIC
PLUS lever up past the resistance point in Rthe vehicle speed falls below 15 mph
direction of arrow :. (25 km/h) and no preceding vehicle is
X Decreasing: Briefly press the DISTRONIC detected
PLUS lever down past the resistance point Rthe ESC is in operation, or switched off via
in direction of arrow ;. the control system (Y page 232), or the ESC
X Release the DISTRONIC PLUS lever. has switched off due to a malfunction
The new speed is set and the vehicle will Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that park position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle position N while driving
has reached the set speed.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 339
Driving systems 339
Rthe radar sensors are switched off

Ryou pull the DISTRONIC PLUS lever in
direction of arrow ? (Y page 335) for
driving off and the front passenger or a rear
passenger door is open
The marker for the set speed on the
speedometer dial go out, an acoustic signal
sounds, and the message DISTRONIC PLUS
Off appears in the multifunction display for
approximately 5 seconds.
Controls in detail
G Warning! X Increasing distance: Turn distance
The DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and setting switch : in direction of arrow ;.
releases the brakes when the vehicle Increasing the distance setting tells the
decelerates below the minimum speed of DISTRONIC PLUS to maintain a greater
20 mph (30 km/h) by operation of the system following distance to the preceding vehicle.
unless the DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle X Decreasing distance: Turn distance
directly ahead of you. At that time the driver setting switch : in direction of arrow =.
must apply the brakes in order to reduce Decreasing the distance setting tells the
vehicle speed further or bring it to a stop. DISTRONIC PLUS to maintain a shorter
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not following distance to the preceding vehicle.
deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS. After a brief
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
DISTRONIC PLUS will resume the last set
This section describes a number of driving
speed.
situations where special precaution is
required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
Setting the following distance in to brake in such situations. Braking will
DISTRONIC PLUS deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS system.
You can set the specified following distance G Warning!
for the DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time
The DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain the
setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
speed selected by the driver unless a moving
this time setting and the current speed of
obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
your vehicle, the DISTRONIC PLUS calculates
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
and sets the required following distance to
following another vehicle ahead of you at your
the preceding vehicle.
set distance).
The set distance will be shown in the
This means that:
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
G Warning! you have changed lanes.
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
select the appropriate setting given road
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONIC
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
PLUS could lose sight of the preceding
style and applicable laws and driving
vehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerate
recommendations for safe following distance.
to the previously selected speed.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 340
340 Driving systems
The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only the Turns and bends

distance between your vehicle and those
directly ahead of it. It may not register
stationary objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
traffic and intercede as required by means of
Controls in detail
steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning! In turns or bends, the DISTRONIC PLUS may

The DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used in not detect a preceding vehicle, or it may
snowy or icy road conditions. detect one too soon. This may cause your
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty sensor (located in the hood Offset driving
grille and in the bumper), especially at times
of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, the DISTRONIC PLUS will
switch off, and the message DISTRONIC
PLUS Currently Unavailable See
Oper. Manual appears in the multifunction
display.
For cleaning and care of the sensors, see
(Y page 443).
i If the message DISTRONIC PLUS
Currently Unavailable See Oper. A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from
Manual disappears during driving and the your direct line of travel may not be detected
last speed stored flashes for approximately by the DISTRONIC PLUS. There will be
5 seconds, the dirt (e.g. slush) has insufficient distance to the preceding vehicle.
dissolved; the DISTRONIC PLUS is available
again. Lane changing
Another cause might be that the radar
sensors have been manually switched off in
the instrument cluster control system. Please
verify that the radar sensors are switched on
(Y page 236).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 341
Driving systems 341
The DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected Cross-traffic

the vehicle changing lanes. There will be
insufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle.
Narrow vehicles
Controls in detail
The DISTRONIC PLUS may inadvertently
detect crossing vehicles. If you switch on the
DISTRONIC PLUS, for example, at a traffic
light with cross traffic, the vehicle may
suddenly start to drive off.
Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
traveling near the outer edges of the lane
have not yet been detected by the DISTRONIC Hill-start assist system
PLUS. There will be insufficient distance to
the preceding vehicles. On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system
Obstacles and stationary vehicles for approximately 1 second after you have
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
G Warning!
The hill-start assist system is not designed to
function as a parking brake. It does not
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked
on an incline.
Always engage the electronic parking brake
in addition to shifting the automatic
The DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for transmission into park position P.
obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for The hill-start assist system is inactive
example, the vehicle detected in front of you
Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
changes lanes to bypass an obstacle or
stationary vehicle in front of it, the grades
DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for the Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
obstacle or stationary vehicle. position N
Rwith the electronic parking brake engaged
Rifthe ESC has switched off due to a
malfunction
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 342
342 Driving systems
HOLD function Activating HOLD

The HOLD function can assist you X Make sure the activation conditions are
Rwhen driving off, especially on steep slopes
met.
Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes
X Continue to depress the brake pedal with
Rwhen waiting in traffic increased pedal pressure until the message
The vehicle is kept stationary without the HOLD appears in the multifunction display.
driver having to depress the brake pedal. The HOLD function is activated. You can
Upon depressing the accelerator pedal, the now release the brake pedal.
braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
Controls in detail
function is deactivated.
G Warning!
Activation conditions HOLD function activated

You can activate the HOLD function when i The brake pedal does not return to the
Rthe vehicle is stationary rest position completely while the HOLD
Rthe engine is running function is activated.
Ryour seat belt is fastened or the driver’s i If the HOLD function is not activated when
door is closed depressing the brake pedal, wait briefly and
Rthe electronic parking brake is released repeat the above steps.
Rthe hood is closed G Warning!
Rthe automatic transmission is in neutral The vehicle’s brakes are applied when the
position N, drive position D, or reverse gear HOLD function is activated. Therefore,
R deactivate the HOLD function, for example,
when the vehicle is pulled through an
When the automatic transmission is in
automatic car wash or being towed.
reverse gear R, the trunk lid must be
closed.
Rthe
Deactivating HOLD
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
(Y page 338). The HOLD function is switched off when
Ryou depress the accelerator pedal with the
automatic transmission in drive position D
or reverse gear R
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
park position P
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 343
Driving systems 343
Ryou depress the brake pedal fully again Ra system malfunction occurs
until the message HOLD in the multifunction Rthe on-board voltage is insufficient
display disappears
The HOLD function is deactivated.
Ryou engage the electronic parking brake
Ryou activate the DISTRONIC PLUS
AIRMATIC
i After a while, the vehicle will be secured
by the electronic parking brake to relieve Introduction
the service brake.
The AIRMATIC lets you select the chassis and
G Warning! suspension setup. The chassis and
Controls in detail
The braking effect of the HOLD function is suspension setup adjusts the damping
canceled and the vehicle can start to roll if behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
Rthe
The AIRMATIC consists of two components.
HOLD function is deactivated by
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
depressing the accelerator pedal or the
(Y page 343) and the vehicle level control
brake pedal
(Y page 344).
Rthe HOLD function or the power supply is
malfunctioning, e.g. due to battery failure Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
Rthe electrical components in the engine
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is
compartment or the fuses have been
controlled electronically and operates
manipulated
continuously. It adjusts the damping
Rthe battery is disconnected characteristics to the current operating and
driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
G Warning! individually for each wheel. Driving safety and
Never get out of the vehicle while the HOLD tire comfort are increased.
function is activated! The fine tuning of the damping is dependent
The HOLD function must never be operated on
or deactivated by passengers or from outside Ryour driving style
the vehicle.
Rroad surface conditions
The HOLD function does not replace the
electronic parking brake. It must not be used Ryour personal settings
to secure the vehicle when parking. The selected setting remains stored in
Deactivate the HOLD function when leaving memory even if the SmartKey is removed
or parking the vehicle. Use the electronic from the starter switch.
parking brake to secure the vehicle.
When the HOLD function is activated, the

automatic transmission shifts into park
position P automatically when
Ropening the driver’s door and releasing the
seat belt
Rturning off the engine
Ropening the hood
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 344
344 Driving systems
X Start the engine. You can choose between normal or raised

level when the vehicle is stationary and the
Sporty damping adjustment engine is running.
The firmer suspension tuning in sport driving The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
mode provides enhanced road contact. lowered according to the selected level
Select this mode for example, on winding setting and to the vehicle speed. With
highways. increasing speed, ride height is reduced by up
X If indicator lamp ; is not lit: Press ADS to approximately 0.8 in (20 mm). With
switch :. decreasing speed, the ride height is again
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The sport raised to the selected vehicle level.
Controls in detail
driving mode with a firmer suspension i These height adjustments are so small
tuning is selected. The message that you may not notice any change.
AIRMATIC SPORT appears in the
multifunction display. Adjusting vehicle level manually
G Warning!
Comfort damping adjustment
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and
Vehicle handling in comfort driving mode is feet away from wheel housing area, and stay
softer. Select this mode when you prefer a away from under the vehicle when lowering
more comfortable driving style on straight the vehicle chassis.
freeways.
X If indicator lamp ; is lit: Press ADS Select the normal level for driving on normal
switch :. roads. Select the raised level for driving on
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The comfort rough roads or with snow chains. Select the
raised level only when required by current
driving mode is selected. The message
driving conditions. Otherwise, the handling
AIRMATIC COMFORT appears in the
may be impaired and the fuel consumption
may increase.
The selected vehicle level setting remains
Vehicle level control stored in memory even if the SmartKey is
Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride removed from the starter switch.
height.
The all-around vehicle level control provides
best possible suspension and constant
ground clearance. The vehicle lowers at high
speed automatically in order to increase
driving safety and to reduce fuel
consumption.
The following vehicle levels are available:
Rnormal
Rraised; the vehicle is raised by

approximately 1.0 in (25 mm) compared to Selecting raised level
normal level
X Start the engine.
Rlowered; the vehicle is lowered by
When indicator lamp ; is off:
approximately 0.4 in (10 mm) compared to
normal level
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 345
Driving systems 345
X Briefly press vehicle level control Vehicle level control

switch :.
Your vehicle adjusts its ride height
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The vehicle automatically to increase vehicle safety and
adjusts from normal level to raised level. to reduce fuel consumption.
The message: Vehicle Rising appears in The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or
the multifunction display when adjusting lowered according to the selected level
from normal level to raised level. The setting and to the vehicle speed. With
message disappears when the vehicle is increasing speed, the ride height is reduced
raised. Indicator lamp ; is then lit. by up to approximately 0.6 in (15 mm). With
When the vehicle is in raised level, pressing decreasing speed, the ride height is again
Controls in detail
vehicle level control switch : will return raised to the selected vehicle level.
the vehicle to normal level. These height adjustments are so small that
The vehicle is lowered to the normal level you may not notice any change.
automatically when
G Warning!
Rthe vehicle speed is above 75 mph When you turn off the engine, the entire
(120 km/h) vehicle is lowered. You should therefore make
Rthe vehicle speed stays between 50 mph sure that no one is near the wheel housing or
(80 km/h) and 75 mph (120 km/h) for under the vehicle when you turn off the
approximately 3 minutes. engine. Otherwise, parts of the individuals
Indicator lamp ; in body could be trapped.
vehicle level control switch : goes out.
! When you turn off the engine, the entire
If you do not drive in this speed range, the
vehicle is lowered. When parking, position
selected vehicle level setting remains stored
your vehicle in such a way that it will not
in memory even if the SmartKey is removed
scrape against a curb, for example, when it
is lowered. Your vehicle could otherwise be
Selecting normal level damaged.
X Start the engine.
i S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG only:
When indicator lamp ; is on: When you turn off the engine, the entire
X Briefly press vehicle level control vehicle is lowered by 0.4 in (10 mm).
switch :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle Setting the vehicle level
adjusts from raised level to normal level.
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands and
feet away from wheel housing area, and stay
ABC away from under the vehicle when lowering
The ABC system is an active, computer- the vehicle chassis.
controlled system that adjusts the
suspension hydraulically at all four wheels in
response to various driving situations. It
selects the optimum suspension tuning and
ride height for your vehicle automatically.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 346
346 Driving systems
The following vehicle level settings can be Selecting a normal level

selected when the vehicle is stationary and If indicator lamp ; is on:
the engine is running: X Press vehicle level control switch :.
Level Use for Indicator Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
lamp adjusted to a normal level.
Normal For driving on The
normal roads. indicator Suspension tuning
lamp is off. The suspension tuning of the ABC system is
Raised For driving on The adjusted for each wheel individually and
Controls in detail
rough roads or indicator depends on:

with snow chains lamp is on. Ryour driving style
(Y page 433). Rthe road condition, such as bumps etc.
Ryour individual selection, sporty or
Select the “Raised” level setting only when comfortable
required by current driving conditions.
Rthe vehicle loading
Otherwise the fuel consumption may
increase and/or the handling may be i The selected setting remains stored in
impaired.
memory, even when the engine is turned
i The selected setting remains stored in off and restarted.
memory, even when the engine is turned
off and restarted.
X Start the engine.
X Start the engine. Sporty suspension tuning

The firmer chassis and suspension setup in
Selecting a higher level
sport driving mode provides enhanced road
If indicator lamp ; is off:
contact. Select this mode when you prefer a
X Press vehicle level control switch :. firmer chassis and suspension setup.
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The vehicle is X When indicator lamp ; is off: Press
raised to a higher level. button :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The sporty
chassis and suspension setup is selected.
The message ABC Active Body Control
SPORT appears in the multifunction display.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 347
Driving systems 347
Comfort suspension tuning ! Only conduct operational or performance

Vehicle handling in comfort driving mode is tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
softer. Select this mode when you prefer a tests are necessary, contact an authorized
more comfortable driving style. Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
X When indicator lamp ; is on: Press
system and/or the transfer case which is
button :.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The
Warranty.
comfortable chassis and suspension setup
is selected. i In winter operation, the maximum
The message ABC Active Body Control effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
Controls in detail
COMFORT appears in the multifunction achieved with winter tires (Y page 432) or
display. snow chains as required.
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Parktronic system

In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC), The Parktronic system with Parking Guidance
both axles are powered at all times when the is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC sensors designed to assist the driver during
improves traction in conjunction with the ESC parking maneuvers. The Parktronic system
(Y page 66) and the Electronic Traction indicates the relative distance between the
System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 67). vehicle and an obstacle visually and audibly.
The Parktronic system is activated
G Warning!
automatically when
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
Ryou switch on the ignition
traction:
RWhile
and
driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible. Ryou release the electronic parking brake
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator or
pedal. Ryou start the engine
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the and
prevailing road conditions. Rshift the automatic transmission into drive
Failure to observe these guidelines could position D, reverse gear R, or neutral
cause the vehicle to skid. position N
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
resulting from excessive speed. above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
lower speeds, the Parktronic system
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so activates again.
could damage the transfer case, which is The Parktronic system also deactivates when
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited you shift the automatic transmission into
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the park position P or engage the electronic
ground. Observe instructions for towing the parking brake and turn off the engine.
vehicle with all wheels on the ground. The Parktronic system monitors the
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 348
348 Driving systems
in the front bumper and four sensors in the ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
rear bumper. (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors

Controls in detail
Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper

To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 443).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other critical maneuvers always
remains with the driver.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/ Front sensors
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
injured.
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
! Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes Rear sensors
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
objects may not be detected by the system Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
and can damage the vehicle.
Minimum distance
During parking maneuvers, pay special
attention to objects located above or below Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
Parktronic system will not detect such
objects at close range and damage to your If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
vehicle or the object may result. in this range, all the distance warning
segments illuminate and you hear a warning
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 349
Driving systems 349
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the Current Warning indicator

minimum distance, the actual distance may transmission
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic position
system.
D Front area activated
Warning indicators
R Front and rear area
Visual signals indicate the relative distance activated
between the sensors and an obstacle.
N With the electronic
parking brake
engaged: neither
Controls in detail
activated
With the electronic
parking brake
released: front and
rear area activated
Front area warning indicators

As your vehicle approaches an object, one or
more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance
segment illuminates and a constant
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
2 seconds will sound for the second red
distance segment. The signal is canceled
when the automatic transmission is shifted
Rear area warning indicators into park position P.
Each warning indicator is divided into five RRear area: An intermittent acoustic
yellow and two red distance segments for left warning will sound as the first red distance
side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The segment illuminates and a constant
Parktronic system is ready to measure when acoustic warning lasting a maximum of
the yellow readiness indicators = are 2 seconds will sound for the second red
illuminated. distance segment. The signal is canceled
The current transmission position determines when the automatic transmission is shifted
which warning indicator will be activated. into drive position D or park position P.
Switching the Parktronic system on/

off
The Parktronic system switches on
automatically when the ignition is switched
on.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 350
350 Driving systems
or
X Check the Parktronic system operation at
another location to rule out interference
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Parking Guidance
The Parking Guidance is part of the Parktronic
system. With the Parktronic system switched
on (Y page 349), the Parking Guidance is also
Controls in detail
X Switching off: Press Parktronic available.

switch :. The Parking Guidance is an electronic parking
Indicator lamp ; comes on. aid equipped with ultrasonic sensors. The
ultrasonic sensors scan the area on both
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :
sides of vehicle. When a suitable parking
again. space is found, it is indicated by a parking
i When you switch the Parktronic system space symbol in the multifunction display.
on or off the Parking Guidance You will receive steering instructions for
(Y page 350) is also switched on or off. parking in that space.
G Warning!
Parktronic system malfunction The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may
There is a malfunction in the Parktronic display parking spaces that are not suitable
system, if only the red distance segments for parking such as
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds. Rno-parking zones
The Parktronic system will switch off Rparking space with unsuitable road/ground
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
surface
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
Rdriveways
X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon Rentrances/exits
as possible. The Parking Guidance scans for and measures
If only the red distance segments illuminate potential parking spaces when driving past.
and no acoustic warning sounds, the Subsequent changes to the parking space are
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt, not taken into account. This may be the case
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be if the position of the vehicle parked in front or
interference from other radio or ultrasonic behind the space changes or obstacles in the
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or parking space are moved.
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will The Parking Guidance does not relieve you of
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and the responsibility to pay attention. If you only
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch : rely on the Parking Guidance, you may cause
comes on. an accident and injure yourself and others.
X Switch off the ignition. You are always responsible for safety and
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors must continue to pay attention to your
(Y page 443). immediate surroundings when parking and
X Switch on the ignition. maneuvering.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 351
Driving systems 351
G Warning! RYou may not use the Parking Guidance

The system cannot detect objects located when transporting cargo that protrudes the
above the area that the sensors scan. These vehicle.
objects, e.g. protruding load, overhang, or RDo not use the Parking Guidance when
truck tail lifts, will be ignored when computing driving with snow chains or when a spare
the parking procedure. The Parking Guidance wheel is mounted.
might therefore provide untimely steering RHow well your vehicle will be parked after
instructions. This could cause a collision. completion of the Parking Guidance
Thus, do not use the Parking Guidance in such depends on the position and shape of the
situations. vehicles parked in front of and behind the
Controls in detail
parking space as well as the conditions of
G Warning!
the immediate surroundings. In certain
Make sure no persons or animals are in the cases, the Parking Guidance may guide you
area in which you are maneuvering. You could too far into the parking space or not far
otherwise injure them. enough. If this is the case, cancel the
parking procedure with the Parking
! Special attention must be paid to objects Guidance and correct the vehicle position
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes yourself.
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
Detecting a parking space
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle. The Parking Guidance is active when driving
Use the Parking Guidance for parking spaces forward. The system operates at a vehicle
that are speed of up to 22 mph (35 km/h). It scans
automatically for and measures potential
Rparallel to the direction of travel parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Rlocated on straight streets, i.e. not in
curves
Ron the same level as the street, i.e. not on
sidewalks, for example.
Parking instructions:
ROn narrow streets, drive by the parking
space as close as possible.
RParking spaces that are dirty, overgrown or
located in front of trailers may not be
detected correctly.
: Detected parking space on the left
RSnowfall or heavy rain may cause imprecise
; Parking space symbol
measurement of the parking space.
= Detected parking space on the right
RAlso observe the Parktronic system
warning indicator (Y page 349) while the At a vehicle speed of below 19 mph
Parking Guidance is active. (30 km/h), you see white parking space
symbol ; as a system display in the
multifunction display. As soon as the Parking
Guidance has detected a suitable parking
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 352
352 Driving systems
space, parking space symbol ; changes to the blue parking space symbol in the
blue. multifunction display.
When a parking space has been detected, an X Shift the automatic transmission into
additional arrow to the right = or to the reverse gear R.
left : appears. The message Check Surroundings
In order to be detected by the Parking Press ’OK’ to Confirm appears in the
Guidance, a parking space must be multifunction display.
X Press a on the multifunction steering
Rclosed-in at the rear
wheel to confirm.
Rparallel to the direction of travel The display in the multifunction display
Controls in detail
Rat least 5 ft (1.5 m) wide changes to the Parking Guidance.

Rat least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer than your
vehicle is
A parking space is shown in the multifunction
display when driving by until you have
reached a distance of 50 ft (15 m) from the
space. The Parking Guidance only shows
parking spaces on the passenger side of the
vehicle unless you activate the driver’s side
(left) turn signal. If you would like to park on
the driver’s side, the left turn signal must
remain on until the reverse gear is engaged.
X Where necessary, depending on the
Parking distance to the parking space, back up in a
straight line a short distance.
The following describes the parallel parking This is indicated by a green lane :.
process on the passenger side. Parallel X Back up until you hear an audible warning,
parking on the driver’s side is performed
then stop.
reversed left to right.
The stopping position has been reached,
G Warning! indicated by a white bracket ;.
The Parking Guidance is only an aid and may
not detect all obstacles. The Parking
Guidance does not relieve you of the
responsibility to pay attention. You are always
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your immediate surroundings
when parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,
you could endanger yourself and others.
X Bring the vehicle to a standstill as long as

the desired parking space is displayed by
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 353
Driving systems 353
X When the vehicle is stationary, turn the X When the vehicle is stationary, turn the
steering wheel until red lane = matches steering wheel until red lane : matches
up with yellow lane ?. up with yellow lane ;.
Lane ? then turns green. If the parking Lane ; then turns green and a white arrow
space is located within the display range, a and a white bracket are shown to indicate
white bracket with an arrow for the target the target position.
position is shown at the end of the green
lane. Reaching end position
Driving into the parking space
Controls in detail
Green lane : indicates the correct steering
wheel position.
Green lane : indicates the correct steering X Maintain the steering wheel position and
wheel position. carefully back up until the end position has
X Maintain the steering wheel position and been reached.
carefully back up. The message Parking Guidance
X Stop as soon as you hear the audible Finished appears in the multifunction
warning. display and you will hear an audible
The vehicle has reached the position for warning.
countersteering.
Countersteering
End position
Depending on the size of the parking space,
the vehicle may be positioned at an angle in
the parking space. The Parking Guidance
guides you close to the rear limit of the
parking space where possible.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 354
354 Driving systems
X Adjust the end position by maneuvering as The rear view camera does not relieve you of
needed. the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
X Observe the Parktronic system warning and pay careful attention. The rear view
indicator (Y page 349). camera may not show objects which are
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Canceling the Parking Guidance Runder the rear bumper
X Press the Parktronic switch (Y page 349). Rabove the trunk handle
The Parking Guidance is canceled
immediately and the Parktronic system is You are responsible for safety at all times and
deactivated. must continue to pay attention to the
Controls in detail
immediate surroundings when parking and

The Parking Guidance is canceled
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
automatically if guidance into the parking
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
space is no longer possible or if an error
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
occurs.
The parking space symbol disappears and the G Warning!
message Parking Guidance Canceled The rear view camera either will not function
appears in the multifunction display. or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe trunk lid is open
Rear view camera Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy

Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
like in the rear view mirror. light
In addition, the rear view camera contains Rthe immediate surroundings are
guidelines to help you with driving in reverse. illuminated with fluorescent light (the
COMAND system display can flicker)
G Warning!
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/ e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be the cold (lens condensation)
injured. Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
G Warning!
The rear view camera is only an aid and may In this case, have the position and setting
display obstacles of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
Rfrom a distorted perspective recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
Rinaccurately Benz Center for this purpose.
Rmay not display obstacles at all Do not use the rear view camera in these
situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property
including your vehicle while parking/
maneuvering.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 355
Driving systems 355
G Warning! misjudge the distance which increases the

Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if risk of impacting the objects.
you are color-blind or have impaired color Even when the object you approach is directly
vision. on the ground do not approach the object any
Only use rear view camera if you can see and closer than the red guideline.
distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
rear view camera on the COMAND system
display.
Controls in detail
Red guideline = indicates an approximate
distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice, approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
snow, and slush to function properly. Clean rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not indicate the approximate width required for
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see the vehicle.
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens” i The image from the rear view camera will
(Y page 444).
no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while
Switching on or off reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
X Switching on: Switch on the ignition. image again, disengage and reengage
X Switch on the COMAND system. reverse gear R.
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse X Switching off: Shift the automatic
gear R. transmission into park position P, neutral
The COMAND system display will show the position N, or drive position D.
area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
G Warning!
ATTENTION ASSIST
Please note that objects which do not touch
the ground may appear to be further away The ATTENTION ASSIST supports you during
than they actually are, for example: long, monotonous rides, e.g. on freeways and
Rthe
highways. The ATTENTION ASSIST is active at
bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
a vehicle speed of between 50 mph
Ra trailer hitch (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). Always
Rthe back of a truck obey applicable speed limits. The
ATTENTION ASSIST suggests to take a rest
In such cases, you should not use the
when recognizing fatigue or increasing
guidelines to judge the distance. You may
inattentiveness of the driver.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 356
356 Driving systems
G Warning!
The ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the
driver. It might not recognize fatigue or
increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to
recognize them at all. The system cannot
substitute a rested and attentive driver.
Fatigue can cause you to recognize dangers
too late, to misjudge potential dangers, or to X Switch on the ATTENTION ASSIST via the
react slower. Therefore, make sure to be control system (Y page 232).
rested before and during your trip. Take rests ATTENTION ASSIST indicator : appears in
Controls in detail
early enough and regularly, especially during the multifunction display.

long trips. Failure to do so could cause you to When the ATTENTION ASSIST is active, it will
recognize dangers too late which could result warn you after 20 minutes of driving at the
in an accident and serious injury to you and/ earliest. An intermittent warning will then
or others. sound twice and the message Attention
Assist: Time for a rest? appears in the
The ATTENTION ASSIST interprets your
fatigue or increasing inattentiveness
X If possible park your vehicle in a safe
considering the following criteria:
location and take a rest.
Rthe individual driving style, for example the
X Confirm the message by pressing button
way you steer
a on the multifunction steering wheel.
Rthe driving conditions such as time of day If you do not take a rest and the
and duration of the ride ATTENTION ASSIST continues to recognize
The ATTENTION ASSIST function is restricted fatigue or increasing inattentiveness, you will
and warnings will be delayed or not issued at be warned once more after 15 minutes at the
all when earliest.
Rroad conditions are bad, e.g. heavy bumps During long trips, take regular and duly rests
or potholes that allow you to recover sufficiently.
Rcrosswinds are strong The ATTENTION ASSIST will be reset and
restarts evaluating the degree of your fatigue
Rdriving in a sporty manner with high speed when
in curves or rapid acceleration
Ryou turn off the engine
Rdriving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or
Ryou release the seat belt and open the
faster than 112 mph (180 km/h) most of
the time driver’s door, e.g. during a rest or for a
driver change
Roperating the COMAND or making phone
calls via COMAND
Rchanging lanes or varying the vehicle Night View Assist Plus
speed, i.e. you intervene actively
The Night View Assist Plus illuminates the
road with infrared light in addition to the
Warnings and displays in the normal headlamps.
multifunction display
A camera at the top of the windshield
measures the infrared light and shows a
black-and-white image in the multifunction
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 357
Driving systems 357
display. The image in the multifunction

display corresponds to a road lit up by high-
beam headlamps.
G Warning!
The Night View Assist Plus is only an aid to
support you while driving and cannot
substitute your careful attention. Do not rely
on the display of the Night View Assist Plus;
instead, continue to look through the
windshield. You are always responsible for
Controls in detail
safety and must drive in accordance with The Night View Assist Plus monitors the area
traffic conditions. Otherwise, you could in front of your vehicle via camera :.
endanger yourself and others.
The system may be impaired or unavailable Switching on or off
when
You can only switch on the Night View Assist
Plus if
or heavy spray
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is set to
Rthe camera area of the windshield is dirty, position 2
fogged up or covered by a sticker for
Rit is dark
example
Rdriving Rthe exterior lamp switch is set to c or
through curves or on inclines or
declines L, or if the daytime running lamp mode
is activated (Y page 299)
G Warning! Rthe automatic transmission is not in
The Night View Assist Plus cannot record reverse gear R
objects immediately in front of or next to the
vehicle. When maneuvering, continue to look
through the windshield. Make sure no
persons or animals are in the area in which
you are maneuvering. You could otherwise
injure them.
The Night View Assist Plus image in the

multifunction display is not impaired by the
headlamps of approaching vehicles.
As a result, you can better follow the course
of the road and detect obstacles earlier on.
X Press button : up or down.
i Infrared light is invisible to the human eye
The Night View Assist Plus image appears
and thus does not blind. The Night View
in the multifunction display.
Assist Plus can remain switched on
permanently even with oncoming traffic i The infrared headlamps only come on
present. above a speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h). Therefore, when you are at a
standstill, you do not have a complete view
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 358
358 Driving systems
and cannot check the function of the Night When you have been made aware of a
View Assist Plus. pedestrian, assess the situation by looking
through the windshield. The actual distance
Image on multifunction display between your vehicle and objects or
pedestrians cannot be assessed properly via
When you switch on the Night View Assist a screen display.
Plus, the dial for the speedometer changes on
the multifunction display. The speedometer Other objects apart from pedestrians may
dial is shown as a bar on the lower edge of also be highlighted.
the multifunction display. The line for main G Warning!
menus is no longer available. If you would like The pedestrian detection may be impaired or
Controls in detail
to change a setting using the steering wheel unavailable when

buttons, you must first switch off the Night
Rpedestrians are obstructed fully or in part
View Assist Plus.
by other objects such as parking vehicles
Pedestrian detection Rthe silhouette in the Night View Assist Plus
The Night View Assist Plus detects image is displayed incomplete or
pedestrians by means of specific interrupted, e.g. by significant light
characteristics, e.g. a human silhouette. reflection
Pedestrian detection is activated when Ra pedestrian’s silhouette is not rich enough
Rthe Night View Assist Plus is switched on in contrast compared to the background
Rthe vehicle speed is above approximately Rpedestrians are not in erected position but,
6 mph (10 km/h) for example, sit, crouch down, or lie
Rdriving in darkness, e.g. on highways
without road lighting i Animals cannot be detected.
Adjusting instrument cluster illumination
If you change the brightness of the
instrument cluster while the Night View
Assist Plus is switched on, only the brightness
of the multifunction display is changed.
: Night View Assist Plus image

; Detected pedestrian
= Frame
? Symbol for active pedestrian detection
A Speedometer dial
When pedestrian detection is active, X Make sure the Night View Assist Plus is
symbol ? appears in the Night View Assist switched on.
Plus image. Once a pedestrian is detected, X Brightening illumination: Turn knob :
that pedestrian is highlighted by frame =. clockwise.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 359
Driving systems 359
X Dimming illumination: Turn knob : and warning sounds (collision warning). The
counterclockwise. Blind Spot Assist operates using sensors in
the rear bumper.
Dirty or fogged-up windshield G Warning!
The Night View Assist Plus image is The Blind Spot Assist is only a driving aid and
diminished when the windshield in front of the may not detect all vehicles.
camera is The Blind Spot Assist may not be able to
Rdirty detect narrow vehicles such as motorcycles
or bicycles, or it may not detect them until it
Rfogged up on the outside is too late.
Controls in detail
Rfogged up on the inside The monitoring function may be impaired if
your sensors are dirty, subject to heavy spray,
G Warning! or if visibility is poor due to e.g. snow, rain, or
Please do not forget that your primary fog. This can result in vehicles not being
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s detected or being detected too late.
attention to the road must always be his/her
The Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road,
primary focus when driving. For your safety
traffic and weather conditions.
and the safety of others, stop before trying to
remove window fogging or cleaning the It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
windshield in front of the Night View Assist be attentive to road, weather and traffic
Plus camera. conditions and to provide the steering,
braking and other driving inputs necessary to
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so
could result in recognizing dangers too late,
covering a distance of 44 feet
possibly resulting in an accident and serious
(approximately 14 m) every second.
injury to yourself and others.
X Removing condensation: Check settings In order for the Blind Spot Assist to function,
of the climate control and change them, if the radar sensors must be switched on and
necessary (Y page 363). operational.
X Swing the camera cover downward When traveling in Canada in a vehicle not
(Y page 444). registered in Canada, you must switch off the
X Cleaning inside of windshield: Use a soft, radar sensor system (Y page 236). Canadian
non-scratching cloth (Y page 444). law does not permit the use of the radar
sensor system for vehicles from outside of
Canada. When you switch off the radar sensor
system, the following functions are
Blind Spot Assist
deactivated:
The Blind Spot Assist uses radar sensors to RBlind Spot Assist
monitor the area on both sides of your RBAS PLUS (Y page 64)
vehicle. It will assist you when you change
RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 69)
lanes driving at speeds of above 20 mph
(30 km/h). A red warning lamp will come on RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 330)
in the exterior rear view mirror as soon as
another vehicle is detected. If you then i USA only:
activate the corresponding turn signals to This device has been approved by the FCC
change lanes, the red warning lamp flashes as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 360
360 Driving systems
sensor is intended for use in an automotive

radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
i Canada only:
Controls in detail

and
G Warning!
interference received, including The Blind Spot Assist monitors certain areas
interference that may cause undesired in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.
operation of the device. Vehicles approaching and passing at speeds
that exceed the speed of your vehicle
Removal, tampering, or altering of the significantly will not be detected. There will be
device will void any warranties, and is not no warning display and no audible warning.
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
When driving in a very wide lane, the sensors
in any non-approved way.
may not be able to cover the entire width of
Any unauthorized modification to this the neighboring lane. Vehicles driving on the
device could void the user’s authority to outside of the neighboring lane may not be
operate the equipment. detected.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
Sensor monitoring range be attentive to road, weather and traffic
The Blind Spot Assist is able to monitor a conditions and to provide the steering,
range up to 10 ft (3 m) to the rear and both braking and other driving inputs necessary to
sides of the vehicle. retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so
When driving in a very narrow lane, the
sensors may detect and display vehicles in the
second lane over. This will be the case if there
are vehicles driving on the inside edge of their
lane.
The system may issue causeless warnings in
the area of guardrails or similar structural
boundaries.
The two Blind Spot Assist sensors are built

into the rear bumper. Make sure that the area
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 361
Driving systems 361
of the bumper around the sensors is free of When you shift the automatic transmission in
dirt, ice and snow. The radar sensors must not reverse gear R, yellow indicator lamps : in
be obstructed, for example, by bicycle the exterior rear view mirrors goes out after
carriers or overhanging luggage. approximately 3 seconds. The Blind Spot
! In the event of a significant impact or Assist is then not active.
damage affecting the bumpers, have the The brightness of indicator lamps/warning
radar sensors checked by a qualified lamps : is controlled automatically
specialist workshop such as a Mercedes- depending on the brightness of the ambient
Benz Center. Failure to do this can result in light.
Blind Spot Assist not functioning correctly. G Warning!
Controls in detail
The Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
Indicator and warning lamps below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). The
yellow indicator lamps in the exterior rear
view mirrors are illuminated. You will not be
alerted to the presence of vehicles in the
monitored area at these speeds.
It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
be attentive to road, weather and traffic
conditions and to provide the steering,
braking and other driving inputs necessary to
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so
Exterior rear view mirror, driver’s side injury to yourself and others.
X Make sure that the radar sensors
(Y page 236) and Blind Spot Assist Collision warning
(Y page 233) are switched on.
If a vehicle is detected in the Blind Spot Assist
range and you activate the turn signal, a two-
Red warning lamps : in the exterior rear tone warning will sound once. Red warning
view mirrors come on. lamp : on the corresponding side of the
X Start the engine. vehicle will flash.
Yellow indicator lamps : in the exterior
rear view mirrors come on up to a speed of G Warning!
20 mph (30 km/h). Do not change lanes or make turns, while red
Above a speed of 20 mph (30 km/h), yellow warning lamp : is flashing. Doing so could
indicator lamps : go out and the Blind Spot result in an accident and serious injury to
Assist is active. If the Blind Spot Assist yourself and others.
detects a vehicle in its range, red warning
X Remain on the lane that you are currently
lamp : on the corresponding side of the
on until traffic conditions permit to change.
vehicle comes on. The warning is issued each
time a vehicle enters the area monitored by If the turn signal remains on, red warning
the Blind Spot Assist from behind or from the lamp : will flash to indicate that vehicles
side. When you pass another vehicle, the have been detected. No further audible
warning is issued only when the speed warnings will sound.
differential is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 362
362 Driving systems
Lane Keeping Assist The system does not issue a warning when
Rsteering, braking, or accelerating in a
The Lane Keeping Assist supports you at a
vehicle speed of above 40 mph when you clearly active manner, e.g. when changing
have set the display unit to miles in the lanes, passing, exiting a highway
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: menu in Rcutting a narrow curve
the control system (Y page 235). When you Rmaking a very sharp turn
have set the display unit to km, the system
Ra driving safety system such as the ABS,
supports you at a vehicle speed of above
60 km/h. When the Lane Keeping Assist the BAS, or the ESC has been activated
detects lane markings, the system is When setting the turn signal in either
Controls in detail
designed to alert you in case you leave your direction, the warning will be suppressed. The
lane unintentionally. A warning is usually system will issue a warning if a turn signal has
issued when a front wheel is on the lane been on for an extended period of time.
marking. An interval vibration in the steering
wheel that lasts for up to 1.5 seconds will G Warning!
then alert you. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the
vehicle in the lane. The Lane Keeping Assist
is only an aid to the driver and may not always
recognize lane markings properly or fail to
recognize them at all.
The system may be impaired or unavailable
when
or heavy spray
Roncoming traffic, sun glare or reflection
from other vehicles
The Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in Rthe camera area of the windshield is dirty,
front of your vehicle via camera :. foggy, or otherwise obstructed
The system can distinguish various Rlane markings are not present
conditions in order to alert you early enough Rlane markings are worn, dark, or covered
and to avoid unnecessary warnings when e.g. by snow or dirt
crossing lane markings.
Rthe distance to the preceding vehicle is too
The warning is issued sooner when
short
Rcutting a curve on the outside of the turn Rwhen lane markings are ambiguous, for
Rdriving on very wide lanes such as highway example in road work sections
lanes Rlane markings change rapidly, e.g. on
Rthe system recognizes dividing lines highway exits or turn-off lanes
because crossing them is often crucial due Rlanes are narrow and winding
to soft shoulders or guardrails behind for
example The Lane Keeping Assist cannot take road and
traffic conditions into account. It is the
The warning is issued later however when
driver’s responsibility at all times to be
Rdriving on narrow lanes attentive to road, weather and traffic
Rcutting a curve on the inside of the turn
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 363
Climate control system 363
conditions and to provide the steering, Switching on or off

braking and other driving inputs necessary to X Switch on or off the Lane Keeping Assist via
retain control of the vehicle. Failure to do so the control system (Y page 233).
could result in recognizing dangers too late, The Lane Keeping Assist indicator Ã
possibly resulting in an accident and serious appears in the multifunction display.
Climate control system
Controls in detail
Control panels
Function Recommendation/Notes
Front climate
control panel
1 Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 366)
air volume, driver’s indicator lamp in button Ã comes on.
side (automatic
mode)
2 Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 367)
control, driver’s side
3 Manual fan speed (Y page 370)
adjustment, driver’s
side
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 364
364 Climate control system
4 Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 370)
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
5 Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 371)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
6 Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 366)
off system.
Controls in detail
7 Residual heat/ i With the engine turned off, it is possible (Y page 372)
ventilation to continue to heat or ventilate the
interior.
8 Rear window (Y page 372)
defroster
9 Manual fan speed (Y page 370)
adjustment,
passenger side
a Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 367)
control, passenger
side
b Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 366)
air volume, indicator lamp in button Ã comes on.
passenger side
(automatic mode)
Rear climate
control panel
H Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
control, right
I Air distribution, right
J OFF Rear climate
control on/off
AUTO Rear climate
control automatic
mode
MAN Rear climate
control manual
mode
K Air volume
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 365
L Air distribution, left
M Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†).
control, left
Notes on climate control system G Warning!

i If you have the air distribution and air Follow the recommended settings for heating
and cooling given on the following pages and
Controls in detail
volume automatically controlled, you can
in the “COMAND automatic climate control”
adjust the temperature, footwell
section. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
temperature and air flow. The following
impairing visibility and endangering you and
basic settings are recommended:
others.
RAutomatic air distribution control
(Y page 366) X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
RTemperature: 72‡ (22†) (Y page 367) windshield free of snow and debris.
RFootwell temperature: 0 (Y page 214) Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on
the air flow-through exhaust slots below the
RAir flow: focused (Y page 215) rear window.
The climate control system is operational i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
whenever the engine is running. You can interior before driving off, see “Summer
operate the climate control system in either opening feature” (Y page 309). The climate
the automatic or manual mode. The system control will then adjust the interior
cools or heats the interior depending on the temperature to the set value much faster.
selected interior temperature.
The following climate control functions can
It can only function optimally when you are be operated via COMAND:
driving with the windows, the tilt/sliding
RTemperature (Y page 211)
sunroof or tilt/sliding panel closed.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors RAir distribution (Y page 212)
are filtered out before outside air enters the RAir volume (Y page 212)
passenger compartment through the air
distribution system.
RSwitching off cooling (Æ) (Y page 213)
RCentral climate control (Mono)
G Warning!
(Y page 214)
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
RFootwell temperature (Y page 214)
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged RAir flow from air vents (Y page 215)
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior RRear climate control (Y page 215)
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 366
Deactivating the climate control Operating on the rear climate control

system panel
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch J
G Warning!
(Y page 363) up or down repeatedly until
When the climate control system is OFF mode is selected in display.
deactivated, the outside air supply and
X Reactivating: Press rocker switch J up or
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the down repeatedly until AUTO mode is
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and selected in display.
endangering you and others. or
X Press rocker switch J up or down
Controls in detail
repeatedly until MAN mode is selected in

Deactivating the front climate control display.
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch ^ up
or down.
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch Air conditioning
comes on. You will see Climate Control The air conditioning is operational while the
OFF in the COMAND display. engine is running and cools the interior air to
X Reactivating: Press rocker switch ^ up the temperature set by the operator. In
or down. addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch the interior air and helps prevent window
goes out. You will see the previous settings fogging.
in the COMAND display. G Warning!
Deactivating the rear climate control vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
Operating on the front climate control
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
panel
X Activate the RearY function via
COMAND (Y page 215). This function is i Condensated water may drip out from
used to operate the rear climate control via underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
COMAND and the rocker switches on the not an indication of a malfunction.
control panel from the front.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch ^ up
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
or down. are harmful to the ozone layer.
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch
comes on. The cooling function can be activated or
deactivated via COMAND (Y page 213).
X Reactivating: Press rocker switch ^ up
or down.
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch Automatic mode
goes out. The previous settings are once
again in effect. When operating the climate control system in
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 367
In automatic mode, cooling with or

dehumidification is switched on. This function X Adjust air distribution via COMAND
can be switched off if necessary. (Y page 212).
G Warning! The indicator lamp in rocker switch Ã
goes out.
vehicle will not be cooled when weather i To return to the standard display, activate
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up the Front Climate Control function via
more quickly. Window fogging may impair COMAND (Y page 216).
Operating on the rear climate control
Controls in detail
Automatic mode with the front climate panel
control X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 367).
X Set the desired temperature
X Activating: Press rocker switch J
(Y page 367).
X Activating: Press rocker switch Ã up or
(Y page 363) repeatedly until AUTO mode is
selected in the display.
down.
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch J
comes on. repeatedly until MAN mode or OFF mode is
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch K up
selected in the display.
or down.
or
Setting temperature
X Adjust air distribution via COMAND
(Y page 212). You can adjust the air temperature for each
The indicator lamp in rocker switch Ã of the 5 zones separately. You should raise or
goes out. lower the temperature setting in small
increments, preferably starting at 72‡
(22†).
Automatic mode with the rear climate
control
Operating on the front climate control
panel
X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 367).
COMAND (Y page 215). This function is
used to operate the rear climate control via
COMAND and the rocker switches on the
X Activating: Press rocker switch Ã up or
down.
comes on.
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch K up
or down.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 368
Front temperature with front climate X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
control panel windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
switches w up or down or use COMAND
(Y page 211). passenger compartment free from
The climate control system will obstruction.
correspondingly adjust the interior air i For draft-free ventilation, move the
temperature. adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Rear temperature with front climate
Controls in detail
control panel Center air vents

COMAND (Y page 215). This function is
used to operate the rear climate control via
COMAND and the rocker switches on the
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker
switches w up or down.
Rear temperature with rear climate

control panel
X Increasing/decreasing: Press rocker : Cockpit air vent, fixed
switches w up or down. ; Right center air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable right center air vent
Adjusting air vents ? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
G Warning!
A Left center air vent, adjustable
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
through the air vents can be very hot or very and ? upward or downward.
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
For best possible performance of the climate

control:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 369
Side air vents
Controls in detail
X Opening: Turn thumbwheel : clockwise
Example illustration driver’s side from position 3 to position 2.
: Left side defroster air vent, fixed X Closing: Turn thumbwheel :
; Left side air vent, adjustable counterclockwise from position 2 to
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for position 3.
adjustable left side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = Rear center console air vents
upward or downward.
Ventilated glove box

The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents, when the climate control
system is activated. The level of airflow to the
glove box depends on the airflow and air
distribution settings. The temperature of the
air is approximately the same as that of the
air flowing from the center air vents.
: Left rear center air vent, adjustable
! Close the glove box air vent when heating
the vehicle interior. Activate the air ; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
conditioning (cooling function) when the = Thumbwheel for air volume control for
outside temperature is high. Otherwise, right rear center air vent
temperature-sensitive items stored in the ? Rear climate control panel
glove box could be damaged. A Thumbwheel for air volume control for left
rear center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = or
A in the required direction.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 370
B-pillar air vents X Press rocker switches I or L

(Y page 363) up or down until the desired
symbol appears in the display.
Adjusting air volume

You can adjust the air volume separately on
each side of the passenger compartment.
You can adjust the air volume via COMAND
(Y page 212).
Controls in detail
: Side air vent, adjustable Front air volume with the front climate
; Thumbwheel for air volume control for
control panel
side air vent X Decreasing/increasing: Press rocker
switches K up or down.
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel ; to
the left or to the right.
Rear air volume with the front climate
control panel
Adjusting air distribution X Activate the RearY function via
The air distribution can be adjusted COMAND (Y page 215). This function is
separately on each side of the passenger used to operate the rear climate control via
compartment. COMAND and the rocker switches on the
X Decreasing/increasing: Press rocker
Air distribution in front/rear passenger
compartment via COMAND switches K up or down.
The air distribution can be adjusted via

Rear air volume with the rear climate
COMAND (Y page 212).
control panel
Air distribution in rear passenger X Decreasing/increasing: Press rocker
compartment with rear climate control switch K (Y page 363) up or down.
panel
Symbol Function Front defroster

P Directs air through the rear You can use this setting to defrost the
center air vents windshield, for example if it is iced up.
O Directs air to the rear footwells You can also defog the windshield and the
front door windows.
N Directs air through the rear
center air vents and to the rear i Keep this setting selected only until the
footwells windshield or the front door windows are
clear again.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 371
Activating Deactivating
X Press rocker switch ¬ up or down. X Press rocker switch ¬ up or down.
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch The indicator lamp in the rocker switch
comes on. goes out.
The climate control switches to the following The previous settings are once again in
functions automatically: effect, except air recirculation mode stays
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating off.
power, depending on outside temperature
Rair flows onto the windshield and the front
Windshield fogged on the outside
Controls in detail
door windows X Switch the windshield wipers on
Rthe air conditioning compressor switches (Y page 305).
on at outside temperatures above X Press rocker switch Ã up or down.
approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-drying The indicator lamp in the rocker switch
comes on.
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the
temperature when the front defroster is Maximum cooling MAX COOL
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.
windshield and front door windows.
MAX COOL is only operational when the
X Press rocker switch K up or down to
engine is running.
increase or decrease air volume to the
desired level. If Ã is selected on both the left and right
The air volume increases/decreases to the side and there is a high demand for cooling,
next higher/lower blower speed and the display MAXCOOL appears in the COMAND
heating switches to the temperature that display.
was set before the front defroster was This provides the fastest possible cooling of
switched on. the vehicle interior (when windows and tilt/
The indicator lamp in rocker switch ¬ sliding sunroof or tilt/sliding panel are
goes out. closed).
or
X Press rocker switches w up or down. Air recirculation mode
Heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
switched on. unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
The indicator lamp in rocker switch ¬ a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
goes out. outside air and recirculates the air in the
i The air conditioning compressor remains passenger compartment.
on even with the indicator lamp in button G Warning!
¬ goes out. This helps to prevent Fogged windows impair visibility,
windshield from fogging. endangering you and others. If the windows
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 372
372 Rear window defroster
window fogging persists, make sure the air i If you switch on the residual heat function
conditioning is activated, or press button when outside temperatures are high, only
¬. the ventilation will be switched on.
X Activating: Press rocker switch g up or i Regardless of the selected air volume, the
down. blower operates at low speed when
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch heating. In case of ventilation the blower
comes on. operates at higher speed.
i The air recirculation mode is activated i How long the system will provide heating
automatically at high outside depends on the coolant temperature and
Controls in detail
temperatures. the selected temperature. The blower will

The indicator lamp in rocker switch g is run at low speed regardless of the air
not lit when the air recirculation mode is distribution control setting.
switched on automatically. X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
A quantity of outside air is added when the X Press rocker switch Ì up or down.
cooling demand is not at maximum. The indicator lamp in the rocker switch
If the air conditioning has been turned off comes on.
or the outside temperature is below 41‡
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch Ì up
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
switch on automatically. or down.
X Deactivating: Press rocker switch g up goes out.
or down. The residual heat is deactivated
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch automatically:
goes out.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
i The manually selected air recirculation Rafter approximately 30 minutes
mode is deactivated automatically:
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rafter5 minutes if the outside
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
temperature is below approximately
41‡ (5†)
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is Rear window defroster
turned off
Rafter30 minutes if the outside G Warning!
temperature is above approximately Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
41‡ (5†) removed from the rear window before driving.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
Residual heat and ventilation
The rear window defroster uses a large
With the engine turned off, it is possible to amount of power. To keep the battery drain
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of soon as the rear window is clear. The
the residual heat produced by the engine. defroster is switched off automatically after
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of operation
depending on the outside temperature.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 373
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 373
X Switch on the ignition. shatter. This may result in an opening in the

X Switching on: Press rocker switch ¤ roof.
up or down. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch their seat belts or not wearing them properly
comes on. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
X Switching off: Press rocker switch ¤ opening also presents a potential for injury for
up or down. occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
entire body parts or portions of them may
The rear window defroster switches off when
protrude from the passenger compartment.
the battery voltage is too low. Too many
electrical consumers may be operating
Controls in detail
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
simultaneously.
transport any objects with sharp edges
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
needed if required. sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Power tilt/sliding sunroof result in malfunctions.
Opening and closing If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. Roadside Assistance or an authorized
G Warning! Mercedes-Benz Center.
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding ! Please keep in mind that weather
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
procedure. when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
express operation and automatic reversal could be damaged which is not covered by
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
and open slightly. sunroof using the SmartKey or the
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. opening feature” (Y page 309) and
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof “Convenience closing feature”
is blocked” section for details. (Y page 309).
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
i After switching off the ignition or
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
removing the SmartKey from the starter
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
switch was moved past the resistance point
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
passenger door. If no door was opened you
any direction.
can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
G Warning! to 5 minutes.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 374
374 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow :.
X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
Controls in detail
Sunroof switch
: Raising
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
; Opening
= Closing i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can sunroof must be closed first.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back.
X Switch on the ignition. Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
X Opening manually: Press and hold the direction of arrow =.
sunroof switch to the resistance point in X Release the sunroof switch when the
direction of arrow ;. desired position is reached.
X Release the sunroof switch when the X Express operation: To close the tilt/
desired position is reached. sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ switch past the resistance point in
sliding sunroof completely, press the direction of arrow = and release.
sunroof switch past the resistance point in X Stopping during express operation:
direction of arrow ; and release. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
blocked
i Express opening is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/
Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sliding sunroof must be closed first.
and be seriously or even fatally injured when
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater
resonance noises may result in addition to force or without automatic reversal function.
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will
noises, change the position of the tilt/
stop and open slightly.
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
has stopped and opened because it was
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 375
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 375
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding Panorama roof with power tilt/
sunroof is fully closed. sliding panel
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater
force. Extending and retracting the roller
sunblinds
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and
opens slightly: The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof sunblind can be operated individually.
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
Controls in detail
closed. Operating front roller sunblind
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without
automatic reversal function. G Warning!
When extending the front roller sunblind,
G Warning! make sure no one is in danger of being injured
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to by the extending procedure.
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately The front roller sunblind is equipped with the
after it had been blocked two times will cause express operation and automatic reversal
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any function. If the movement of the front roller
reversal function for as long as you hold the sunblind is blocked during the extending
sunroof switch. procedure, the front roller sunblind will stop
and retract slightly.
The extending of the front roller sunblind can
Synchronizing be immediately halted by releasing the roof
panel switch or, if the roof panel switch was
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized moved past the resistance point and released,
after a malfunction or if it does not open by moving the roof panel switch in any
smoothly. direction.
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
or synchronized, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow : (Y page 374) until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
direction of arrow : for approximately Roof panel switch
1 second. : Retracting
X Check the express operation feature
; Retracting
(Y page 374).
= Extending
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized. X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
Otherwise repeat the above steps. panel switch to the resistance point in the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 376
376 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
required direction of arrow :, ; or = To change directions, you must first extend

until the front roller sunblind has reached or retract the rear roller sunblind completely.
its desired position.
X Express operation: Move the roof panel Operating rear roller sunblind from rear
switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow :, ; or = and release.
G Warning!
The front roller sunblind retracts/extends When extending the rear roller sunblind, make
completely. sure no one is in danger of being injured by
the extending procedure.
The rear roller sunblind is equipped with the
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
Controls in detail
function. If the movement of the rear roller

Operating rear roller sunblind from sunblind is blocked during the extending
front procedure, the rear roller sunblind will stop
G Warning! The extending of the rear roller sunblind can
When extending the rear roller sunblind, make be immediately halted by releasing the
sure no one is in danger of being injured by sunblind switch or, if the sunblind switch was
the extending procedure. moved past the resistance point and released,
The rear roller sunblind is equipped with the by pressing or pulling the sunblind switch
express operation and automatic reversal again.
function. If the movement of the rear roller
sunblind is blocked during the extending
procedure, the rear roller sunblind will stop
The extending of the rear roller sunblind can
be immediately halted by pressing the
sunblind switch again.
Rear door control panel

X Retracting/Extending: Press or pull roller
sunblind switch : until the rear roller
sunblind has reached the desired position.
X Express operation: Press or pull roller
sunblind switch : past the resistance
X Retracting/Extending: Press roller point and release.
sunblind switch :. The rear roller sunblind retracts or extends
The rear roller sunblind retracts/extends completely.
completely. X Stopping during express operation:
X Stopping: Press roller sunblind switch : Press or pull roller sunblind switch :
again. again.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 377
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 377
Opening and closing the panorama ! Please keep in mind that weather
roof with power tilt/sliding panel conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel
G Observe Safety notes, see page 56. when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
G Warning! the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the
Controls in detail
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked” section in this chapter for
Roof panel switch
details.
: Raising
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding panel can be immediately halted by ; Opening
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof = Closing
panel switch was moved past the resistance The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
point and released, by moving the roof panel roller sunblinds retracted.
switch in any direction.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
G Warning! panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer
The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is opening feature” (Y page 309) or see
made out of glass. In the event of an accident, “Convenience closing feature”
the glass may shatter. This may result in an (Y page 309).
opening in the roof.
i If the front roller sunblind is extended
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
while the tilt/sliding panel is being raised,
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
the roller sunblind will retract first.
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for X Switch on the ignition.
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
entire body parts or portions of them may
Opening
protrude from the passenger compartment.
X Opening manually: Press and hold the
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not roof panel switch to the resistance point in
transport any objects with sharp edges direction of arrow ;.
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel. X Release the roof panel switch when the
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is desired position is reached.
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result X Express operation: To open the tilt/
in malfunctions. sliding panel completely, press the roof
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 378
378 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
panel switch past the resistance point in Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is
direction of arrow ; and release. blocked
X Stopping during express operation: G Warning!
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. Make sure that nobody can become trapped
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open, and be seriously or even fatally injured when
resonance noises may result in addition to closing the tilt/sliding panel without
the usual wind noises. They are caused by automatic reversal function.
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
noises, change the position of the tilt/
Controls in detail
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop

sliding panel or open a window slightly.
and open slightly.
Raising X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
stopped and opened because it was
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
panel switch to the resistance point in in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
direction of arrow :. panel is fully closed.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and
desired position is reached.
opens slightly:
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was
sliding panel completely, press the roof
panel switch past the resistance point in blocked and has opened, pull and hold the
direction of arrow : and release. roof panel switch in direction of arrow =
until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
The tilt sliding panel closes without
automatic reversal function.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/sliding G Warning!
panel must be closed first. Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to
close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after
Closing it had been blocked two times will cause the
tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof function for as long as you hold the roof panel
panel switch to the resistance point in switch.
direction of arrow =.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached. Synchronizing the panorama roof
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
The tilt/sliding panel and front roller
sliding panel completely, pull the roof panel sunblinds must be synchronized after a
switch past the resistance point in malfunction or if the tilt/sliding panel does
direction of arrow = and release. not open smoothly.
! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding
panel before the tilt/sliding panel is
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 379
Loading and storing 379
panel could otherwise lock-up in the open X Keep holding roller sunblind switch : for
position. approximately 1 second.
If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or X Check the express operation feature of the
synchronized, contact an authorized front roller sunblind.
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside If the rear roller sunblind retracts
Assistance. completely, the rear roller sunblind is
synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above
Tilt/sliding panel and front roller steps.
sunblind
Controls in detail
Loading and storing
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch several
times in direction of arrow = Loading instructions
(Y page 375) until the tilt/sliding panel is
fully closed. G Warning!
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in Always fasten items being carried as securely
direction of arrow = for approximately as possible using cargo tie-down hooks and
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
1 second.
and size of the load.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch several
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
times in direction of arrow = until the front
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
roller sunblind is fully extended.
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
vehicle occupants unless the items are
direction of arrow = for approximately securely fastened in the vehicle.
1 second.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
X Check the express operation feature of the
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
front roller sunblind. transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
If the front roller sunblind retracts cargo higher than the seat backrests.
completely, the front roller sunblind is
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
synchronized. Otherwise repeat the above
objects. Always use cargo tie-down hooks
steps.
when transporting cargo. Do not place
X Check the express operation feature of the
anything on the rear-window shelf.
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 377).
Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.
If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely,
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
the tilt/sliding panel is synchronized.
enter vehicle interior resulting in
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
unconsciousness and death.
Rear roller sunblind Load distribution

X Switch on the ignition. The total load weight including vehicle
X Pull roller sunblind switch : occupants and luggage/cargo should not
(Y page 376) in the rear door control panel exceed the total load limit indicated on the
several times until the rear roller sunblind corresponding Tire and Loading Information
is fully extended. placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
(Y page 418).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depends greatly on the load
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 380
380 Loading and storing
distribution. It is therefore recommended to

load the vehicle accordingly with the heaviest
items being placed towards the front of the
vehicle.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
Controls in detail
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should X Flip trim covers : open.
always be kept as low as possible against
X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage
front or rear seat backrests.
points under trim covers :.
X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for
Roof rack installation.
For information about further roof rack

equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes- Parcel nets
Benz Center.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes-
weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage
etc.
to the vehicle.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
Follow the manufacturer’s installation
fragile objects may not be transported in the
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
attached roof rack system or its load could
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
become detached from the vehicle.
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of injury to vehicle occupants.
220 lb (100 kg).
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
Take into consideration that when the roof in the event of an accident.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
are different from those when operating the Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
vehicle without the roof rack loaded. footwell and on each side of the left and right
trunk side walls.
Make sure
Ryou can raise the power tilt/sliding sunroof
or the panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel Hooks
completely Coat hooks
Ryou can open the trunk completely
Two coat hooks are located in the vehicle, one
on each side.
Use coat hooks to secure light-weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
coat hook is 6,6 lbs (3 kg).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 381
Controls in detail
X Opening: Press coat hook :. Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
The coat hook moves out. on all cargo tie-down hooks with rope of
sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
X Closing: Press coat hook : until it
engages.
Front storage compartments
Retaining hook
G Warning!
A retaining hook can be used to attach cargo To help avoid personal injury during a collision
items such as bags. or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
! Do not use the retaining hook to tie down storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo. cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Glove box
X Pull strap : of retaining hook ; down. The glove box can be ventilated
(Y page 369).
Cargo tie-down hooks
Four cargo tie-down hooks are located in the
trunk.
Always follow loading instructions
(Y page 379).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 382
382 Loading and storing
X Opening: Press eyeglasses compartment

mark :.
X Closing: Guide eyeglasses compartment
upward until it engages.
Front armrest storage compartment

Controls in detail
X Opening: Press glove box lid release :.

X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.
You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the

vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key. i The Roadside Assistance button º
(Y page 389) and the Information button
E (Y page 392) are located in the
storage compartment.
X Opening storage compartment: Press
button : and swing armrest upward.
Door storage compartments

G Warning!
Keep the door storage compartments closed
1 Glove box unlocked
while vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so may
cause the seat belt to catch at the rear and
2 Glove box locked
prevent proper positioning of the seat belt.
Eyeglasses compartment
X Opening: Pull storage compartment

lid : upward.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 383
Rear storage compartments

G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
Controls in detail
to prevent stored objects from being thrown Vehicles with control panel in rear armrest
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
X Opening: Press button : and swing the
Rbraking
storage compartment cover upward in
Rvehicle maneuvers direction of arrow.
Ran accident
Rear seat storage compartment
Rear armrest storage compartment
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
! Before storing the armrest in the seat

backrest, close the storage compartment
cover.
X Fold the rear armrest down.
X Opening: Pull handle : backward in the

direction of arrow.
Rear storage box

X Fold the rear armrest down.
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
Vehicles without control panel in rear armrest
i When the rear seats are in their basic
X Opening: Pull release catch : and swing position, you can open the cover more
the storage compartment cover upward in easily.
direction of arrow.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 384
384
Controls in detail Useful features
: Trunk floor
X Pull handle : upward in direction of arrow.
; Suitcase storage space
X Swing cover ; down.
Rear storage space
Storage bags Only the S 600 is equipped with the rear
storage space.
G Warning!
Storage bags are intended for storing light-
weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
: Storage space
Storage bags are located on the back of the ; Trunk floor
front seats.
Storage spaces under trunk floor Useful features

Front storage space Cup holders
You can place a suitcase in the hollow under
the front part of the trunk floor. G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
! Fold down the suitcase handle before vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
closing the trunk to avoid damaging the only use containers that fit into the cup
trunk lid. holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 385
Useful features 385
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Rear cup holder

Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
Controls in detail
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury. Vehicles without control panel in rear armrest
X Opening: Press chrome label :.
Cup holder in front center console
The cup holder can be removed for cleaning
purposes.
Vehicles with control panel in rear armrest

X Opening: Press front of cup holder :.
X Opening: Press chrome label ;.

X Removing: Press latch : back and pull
cup holder out.
X Inserting: Insert cup holder and press
latch : forward.
X Closing: Fold cover in until it engages.
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment

X Opening: Press front of cup holder :.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 386
386 Useful features
Sun visors Rear vanity mirrors

G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
Controls in detail
X Opening: Press mark :.

The rear vanity mirror swings down in
direction of arrow.
X Closing: Swing rear vanity mirror up until it
engages.
: Vanity mirror lamp
; Mounting
Rear window sunshade
= Holder, e.g. for gas cards
? Front vanity mirror G Warning!
A Front vanity mirror cover When operating the rear window sunshade
Glare through the windshield harmed by the extending or retracting
procedure.
X Flip sun visor down when you experience The extending or retracting procedure can be
glare. immediately halted by briefly pressing rear
window sunshade switch. To reverse direction
Glare through a door window of movement, press rear window sunshade
X
switch again.
Close vanity mirror cover A if opened.
X Disengage sun visor from mounting ;. G Observe Safety notes, see page 56.
X Pivot sun visor to the side. You can also operate the rear window
sunshade via COMAND (Y page 207). If you
Vanity mirror operate the rear window sunshade via
COMAND, this takes precedence over the
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when rear window sunshade buttons on the rear
the sun visor is engaged in mounting ;. doors.
X Flip sun visor down. i Operating the rear window sunshade
X Lift up vanity mirror cover A. from the rear is not possible if you activate
Vanity mirror lamp : comes on. the override switch (Y page 61).
i The rear window sunshade is switched off

at temperatures below -4‡ (-20†).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 387
Useful features 387
X Opening: Press mark on cover : forward.

X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
insert = on the grooved side and pull it up
and out in the direction indicated by
arrows ;.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert = back into the frame until it
engages.
X Closing: Briefly press mark on cover :.
Controls in detail
X Switch on the ignition. Rear door ashtray
X Extending/Retracting: Press rear
window sunshade switch : briefly.
X Opening: Lift up cover ;.

X Removing ashtray insert: Press open
X Switch on the ignition. cover ; outwards beyond the stop.
X Extending/Retracting: Press or pull the Ashtray insert : pops out of the holder.
rear window sunshade switch : past the X Remove ashtray insert : by pulling it
resistance point. upwards.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert : back into frame until it engages.
Ashtrays X Closing: Push cover ; downwards.
Center console ashtray
Cigarette lighters
G Warning!
Never touch the heating element or sides of
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do
not injure themselves or start a fire with the
hot cigarette lighter.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 388
388 Useful features
To avoid possible injury to children sitting in Power outlets

the rear seat, activate the override switch.
The power outlets can be used to
Activation of the override switch deactivates
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
the rear center console lighter.
(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
being used extensively, the vehicle battery If the engine is off and the power outlets are
may become discharged. being used extensively, the vehicle battery
X Open the cover (Y page 387). may become discharged.
Controls in detail
Power outlet in glove box

X Open the glove box (Y page 381).

X Push in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out
automatically when hot.
X Take out cigarette lighter :.
X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket
Power outlet in rear center console
after use. X Open the cover.
Rear center console

X Open the cover.
X Push in cigarette lighter :.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out
automatically when hot.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 389
Useful features 389
Power outlet in trunk information on to the Customer Assistance

Center
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and
pass the information on to the Customer
Assistance Center.
The Tele Aid system

(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
Controls in detail
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response:
RAutomatic and manual emergency
Tele Aid
RRoadside Assistance
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed. RInformation
To ensure your system is activated and To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele
operational, please press Information Aid call do the following:
button E to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not multifunction steering wheel.
activated. or
If you have any questions regarding X Use the COMAND volume thumbwheel
activation, please call the Customer H on the lower part of the front center
Assistance Center at console (Y page 87).
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more
only). information and a description of all available
Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid features.
acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
and password in the mail. You may use this System self-test
password to access the Tele Aid section in The system performs a self-test after you
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA have switched on the ignition.
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
access to account information, remote door G Warning!
unlock and more. A malfunction in the system has been
The Tele Aid system is available if detected if any or all of the following
Rit
conditions occur:
has been activated and is operational.
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
Activation requires a subscription for
not come on during the system self-test.
monitoring services, connection and
cellular air time RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
Rvehicle
button º does not come on during the
battery power is available
system self-test.
Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 390
390 Useful features
RThe indicator lamp in Information button An emergency call can also be initiated
E does not come on during the system manually (Y page 391).
self-test. Once the emergency call is in progress, the
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button, indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
Roadside Assistance button º, or flash. The message Connecting Call
Information button E remains
appears in the multifunction display.
Emergency Call Activated appears in the
illuminated constantly in red after the
COMAND display and the audio system is
system self-test.
muted. When the connection is established,
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or the message Call Connected appears in the
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the multifunction display. Emergency Call
Controls in detail
multifunction display after the system self- Activated appears in the COMAND display.
test All information relevant to the emergency,
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, such as the location of the vehicle
the system may not operate as expected. In (determined by the GPS satellite location
case of an emergency, help will have to be system), vehicle model, identification number
summoned by other means. and color are generated.
Have the system checked at the nearest i While the emergency call message
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the Emergency Call Activated is displayed,
Customer Assistance Center at operation of the audio system or COMAND
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) system is not possible.
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
The climate control system can be
as soon as possible.
operated using the climate control panel
(Y page 211).
Emergency calls
A voice connection between the Customer
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a Assistance Center and the occupants of the
subscriber agreement must be completed. vehicle will be established automatically soon
To ensure your system is activated and after the emergency call has been initiated.
operational, please press Information The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
button E to perform the acquaintance to determine the nature of the emergency
call. Failure to complete either of these more precisely, provided they can speak to
steps may result in a system that is not an occupant of the vehicle.
activated. i If no vehicle occupant responds, an
If you have any questions regarding ambulance will be sent to the vehicle
activation, please call the Customer immediately.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) G Warning!
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
only). flashing continuously and there was no voice
connection to the Customer Assistance
An emergency call is initiated automatically
Center established, then the Tele Aid system
following an accident in which the Emergency
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
relevant cellular phone network is not
deployed.
available).
i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
emergency call cannot be canceled.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 391
Useful features 391
The message Call Failed appears in the signal and cannot make voice contact with the
multifunction display for approximately vehicle occupants.
10 seconds.
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
Should this occur, assistance must be
summoned by other means. the multifunction steering wheel.
or
i During the emergency call the telephone X Press the respective button for ending a
is switched off automatically and must be telephone call on the telephone keypad.
switched back on to make a call.
Roadside Assistance button
Controls in detail
i The “911” emergency call system is a
public service. Using it without due cause X Open the front armrest storage
is a criminal offense. compartment (Y page 382).
Initiating an emergency call manually
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance

button : for longer than 2 seconds.
X Briefly press on cover ; to open.
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
X Press SOS button : briefly. Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The
The indicator lamp in SOS button : will indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
flash until the emergency call is concluded. button : will flash while the call is in
X Wait for a voice connection to the progress. The message Connecting
Customer Assistance Center. Call will appear in the multifunction
X Close cover ; after the emergency call is display. Roadside Assistance
concluded. Activated appears in the COMAND
Display. The audio system or the COMAND
G Warning! system is muted.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the When the connection is established, the
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, message Call Connected appears in the
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please multifunction display. Roadside
do not wait for voice contact after you have Assistance Activated appears in the
pressed the emergency button. Carefully COMAND display. The Tele Aid system will
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location. transmit data generating the vehicle
The Customer Assistance Center will identification number, model, color and
automatically contact local emergency location (subject to availability of cellular and
officials with the vehicle’s approximate GPS signals).
location if they receive an automatic SOS
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 392
392 Useful features
i The COMAND system display indicates could not be connected! appears in the
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the COMAND display. Confirm the message
call is connected you can change to the pressing W (Y page 79).
navigation menu by pressing shortcut
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
button S. Spoken commands are not
available. the multifunction steering wheel.
or
A voice connection between the Roadside
X Press the respective button for ending a
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established. telephone call on the telephone keypad.
X Describe the nature of the need for
Controls in detail
assistance. Information button

The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance X Open the front armrest storage
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified compartment (Y page 382).
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside X Press and hold Information button : for
Assistance button : is flashing longer than 2 seconds.
continuously and there was no voice A call to the Customer Assistance Center
connection to the Customer Assistance will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
Center established, then the Tele Aid Information button : will flash while the
system could not initiate a Roadside call is in progress. The message
Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular Connecting Call will appear in the
phone network is not available). The multifunction display. Information Call
message Call Failed appears in the Activated appears in the COMAND
multifunction display. Call could not display. The audio system or the COMAND
be connected! appears in the COMAND system is muted.
display. Confirm the message pressing W When the connection is established, the
(Y page 79). message Call Connected appears in the
If the indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance multifunction display. Information Call
button : is flashing continuously and Activated appears in the COMAND display.
there was no voice connection established, The Tele Aid system will transmit data
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate generating the vehicle identification number,
a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the model, color and location (subject to
relevant cellular phone network is not availability of cellular and GPS signals).
available). The message Call Failed
i The COMAND system display indicates
appears in the multifunction display. Call
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 393
Useful features 393
call is connected you can change to the multifunction steering wheel or the
navigation menu by pressing shortcut respective button for ending a telephone call
button S. Spoken commands are not on the telephone keypad.
available.
A voice connection between the Customer Destination Download to the COMAND
Assistance Center representative and the system
occupants of the vehicle will be established. i The components and operating principles
Information regarding the operation of your of the COMAND system can be found on
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes- (Y page 77).
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
Destination Download allows you access to a
Controls in detail
and services is available to you.
database of over 10 million points of interest
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
(POIs) that can be downloaded to your
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA
vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the
destination, the address can be downloaded,
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more.
or can be provided with points of interests
i If the indicator lamp in Information near your location.
button : is flashing continuously and
Route guidance
there was no voice connection established,
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate You will be prompted to confirm that route
an Information call (e.g. the relevant guidance to the entered address is to be
cellular phone network is not available). started.
The message Call Failed appears in the X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd to select Yes
multifunction display. Call could not menu item and confirm by pressing W.
be connected! appears in the COMAND
The system calculates the route and
display. Confirm the message pressing W
subsequently starts the route guidance to the
(Y page 79). defined address.
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on i If you select No, you can save the address
the multifunction steering wheel. to your address book.
or
X Press the respective button for ending a i The Destination Download feature is
telephone call on the telephone keypad. available if the relevant mobile phone
network is available and data connection is
possible.
Call priority
If other service calls such as a Roadside Search & Send
Assistance call or Information call are active,
an emergency call is still possible. In this i In order to utilize Search & Send your
case, the emergency call will take priority and vehicle must be equipped with Tele Aid,
override all other active calls. Navigation, and an active Tele Aid
subscription.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
initiated emergency calls can only be address entry service. A destination address
terminated by a Customer Assistance Center located using Google Maps® or Yahoo Local
representative. All other calls can be Maps® websites can be delivered via Tele Aid
terminated by pressing button ~ on the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 394
394 Useful features
directly to the Navigation system in your multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles equipped

vehicle. with Tele Aid and active accounts, each
destination address sent will be retrievable
Specify and Send a Destination Address by all vehicles associated with the e-mail
i Please refer to any specific instructions address you specified for your Tele Aid
provided by either website regarding account.
entering or sending an address. Each
website functions differently and is subject Remote door unlock
to change.
In case you have locked your vehicle
X Go to www.maps.google.com or unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
Controls in detail
www.maps.yahoo.com and enter a and the reserve SmartKey is not available:

destination address in the address entry X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
field. at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
X Depending on which website you are using, (1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
click on the appropriate button to send the 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
destination address to your Tele Aid You will be asked to provide your password.
account email address. X Then return to your vehicle at the time
X Enter the email address you specified when arranged with the Customer Assistance
you activated your Tele Aid account in the Center and pull the trunk lid handle for a
appropriate field when the “Send” dialog minimum of 20 seconds until the indicator
box appears. lamp in the SOS button is flashing.
X Click “Send”. The message Connecting Call appears in
Retrieve Destination Address As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
X Press the Tele Aid Information button to via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
begin the download of the destination “Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
address to your vehicle's navigation (USA only).
system. i The remote door unlock feature is
i If you have sent more than one available if the relevant cellular phone
destination address to your vehicle you network is available.
must make one Information call for each The SOS button will flash and the message
destination address download. Connecting Call will appear in the
multifunction display to indicate receipt of
X Select Yes when the message appears the door unlock command.
asking if you would like to start navigation. If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more
This will open the start navigation screen. than 20 seconds before door unlock
X Select Start. authorization was received, you must wait
or 15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid
X
handle again.
Select No if you wish to save the
downloaded destination address in the
From Memory destination list for future Remote door lock
use. If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle and
are no longer near it, you can have it locked
i Destination addresses will download in
remotely through the Customer Assistance
the same order they were sent. If you have
Center.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 395
Useful features 395
The vehicle can be remotely locked within Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services
four days after the ignition has been switched
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
off.
X Report the incident to the police.
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes The police will issue a numbered incident
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or report.
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). X Pass this number on to the Customer
You will be asked to provide your password. Assistance Center along with your
When you are inside your vehicle the next password.
time and switch on the ignition, the message The Customer Assistance Center will then
attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
Controls in detail
Tele Aid Doors Locked Remotely will
appear on the multifunction display. Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
located, the Customer Assistance Center
i The remote door lock feature is available will contact the local law enforcement and
if the relevant cellular phone network is you. The vehicle’s location will only be
available and data connection is possible. provided to law enforcement.
Automatic Maintenance Call i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more

than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that notify the Customer Assistance Center
considerably enhances vehicle care. Just automatically.
prior to reaching a vehicle maintenance
milestone, Tele Aid transmits important
vehicle maintenance information that alerts Garage door opener
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center of
required service. This is automatic and does The integrated remote control can operate up
not require driver intervention. This feature to three separately controlled devices
allows your preferred Mercedes-Benz Center compatible with HomeLink® or some other
to significantly improve the process of systems.
arranging your service appointment and G Warning!
ensures that your vehicle receives the best Before programming the integrated remote
possible care. control to a garage door opener or gate
i The Automatic Maintenance Call feature operator, make sure people and objects are
is available if the relevant telephone out of the way of the device to prevent
network is available and data connection is potential harm or damage. When
possible. programming a garage door opener, the door
moves up or down. When programming a gate
operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 396
396 Useful features
When programming a garage door opener, transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
park vehicle outside the garage. and begin directly with step 3.
Do not run the engine while programming the X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
integrated remote control. Inhalation of control A of the device you wish to train
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), from the signal transmitter button (;, =
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
and possible death. indicator lamp : in view.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button B
Controls in detail
and the desired signal transmitter button

(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control start flashing after 20 seconds.
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. observe indicator lamp :.
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
a signal transmitter button and wish to programming is complete and your device
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. should activate when the respective signal
or transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
X If you are programming the integrated and released.
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped with
Do not hold the buttons for longer than
the “rolling code” feature.
30 seconds.
This procedure erases any previous X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
initializes the memory. If you later wish to above starting with step 3.
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 397
Useful features 397
Rolling code programming Gate operator/Canadian programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require
code devices) with the rolling code feature, transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
follow these instructions after completing the after several seconds of transmission which
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of may not be long enough for the integrated
this text. For your convenience and to signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
complete the procedure faster, you might programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
want to have someone assist you. some U.S. gate operators are designed to
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the “time-out” in the same manner.
garage door opener motor head unit. If you live in Canada or if you are having
Controls in detail
difficulties programming a gate operator
i Exact location and color of the button may (regardless of where you live) by using the
vary by garage door opener brand. programming procedures, replace step 4 with
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” the following:
button may also be referred to as “learn” or X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual. release this button until it has been
successfully trained.
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the X While still holding down the signal
garage door opener motor head unit. transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
The “training light” is activated.
your hand-held remote control button B
You have 30 seconds to initiate the as follows: Press and hold button B for
following two steps. 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
programmed signal transmitter button (;, remote control until the frequency signal
= or ?). has been learned.
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and Upon successful training, indicator
release same signal transmitter button a lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
second time to complete the training after several seconds.
process. X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may require i Upon completion of programming the
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and integrated remote control, make sure you
release the same signal transmitter button retain the hand-held remote control that
a third time to complete the training came with the garage door opener, gate
process. operator or other device. You may need it
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door for use in other vehicles, for future
operation by pressing the programmed programming of an integrated remote
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 398
398 Useful features
Reprogramming a single signal Programming tips

transmitter button
If you are having difficulty programming the
To program a device using a signal integrated remote control, here are some
transmitter button previously trained, follow helpful tips:
these steps: RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
X Switch on the ignition. control A (typically located on the reverse
X Press and hold the desired signal side of the remote). The integrated remote
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not control is compatible with radio-frequency
release the button. devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after
Controls in detail
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote

20 seconds. control A. This will increase the likelihood
X Without releasing the signal transmitter of the hand-held remote control sending a
button, proceed with programming starting stronger and more accurate signal to the
with step 3. integrated remote control.
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
Operation of integrated remote control remote control A at different lengths and
X Switch on the ignition. angles from the signal transmitter button
X
(;, = or ?) you are programming.
Select and press the appropriate
integrated signal transmitter button (;, Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
angle at varying distances.
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter RIf another hand-held remote control is
continues to send the signal as long as the available for the same device, try the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. programming steps again using that other
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
Erasing the integrated remote control batteries are in the hand-held remote
memory control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of garage door opener assembly. This may
all three channels. help improve transmitting and/or receiving
X Switch on the ignition. signals.
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal i Certain types of garage door openers are
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for incompatible with the integrated remote
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator control. If you should experience further
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for difficulties with programming the
longer than 30 seconds. integrated remote control, contact an
The codes of all three channels are erased. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 399
Useful features 399
i USA only: X Move the driver’s seat or front passenger

This device complies with Part 15 of the seat as far to the rear as possible.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
operation.
Controls in detail
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
i Canada only: pins :.
This device complies with RSS-210 of X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to retainer pins :.
and Infrared reflecting windshield
2. this device must accept any Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount
interference received, including of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior
interference that may cause undesired through the windows.
operation of the device. The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the
Any unauthorized modification to this transmission of signals through the glass by
device could void the user’s authority to in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic
operate the equipment. toll collection devices.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fastened
using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if Vehicles without Night View Assist Plus
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and : Infrared transparent area (located left and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals. right to the cover of the rain light sensor)
Do not place several floormats on top of each ; Cover of the rain light sensor
other as this may impair pedal movement. = Infrared transparent area
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 400
400
Controls in detail Useful features
Vehicles with Night View Assist Plus

: Infrared transparent area (located left to
the cover of the rain light sensor)
; Cover of the rain light sensor
= Infrared transparent area
To allow the use of these devices in the
vehicle, infrared transparent areas : and
= are placed in the windshield.
You can see them from certain angles when
ambient light condition permits.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 401
401

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 402
At the gas station ............................. 402
Engine compartment ........................ 404
Tires and wheels ............................... 410
Winter driving ................................... 432
Driving instructions .......................... 434
Maintenance ...................................... 438
Vehicle care ....................................... 440
Operation
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 402
402 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment All of the above instructions, as may apply to

your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
i This Operator’s Manual describes all first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine
features, standard or optional, potentially or the rear differential has been replaced.
available for your vehicle at the time of i Always obey applicable speed limits.
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. At the gas station
Refueling
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
G Warning!
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
Operation
during the break-in period, the more satisfied It burns violently and can cause serious
you will be with its performance later on. personal injury.
RDrive your vehicle during the first Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but materials near gasoline!
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. Turn off the engine before refueling.
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
throttle driving) and excessive engine inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
in each gear). Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
RSelect C as the preferred shift program health.
(Y page 322) for the first 1 000 miles
(1 500 km). G Warning!
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown. Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by pressure in the system which could cause a
gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
shifting to a lower gear using the gear
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
selector lever.
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 321)
only when driving at moderate speeds (for ! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
hill driving). with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds engine. Damage resulting from the use of
to the permissible maximum. non-approved fuels or fuel additives or
resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km), Limited Warranty.
do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
(140 km/h). ! If you have accidentally filled the tank
RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
above 4 500 rpm in each gear. switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
RShift gears in a timely manner. the fuel lines. The fuel system must be
drained completely. Contact an authorized
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 403
At the gas station 403
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel X Turn off the engine.

system drained completely.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
! To prevent damage to the catalytic filler cap open can cause the yellow engine
converters, only use premium unleaded malfunction indicator lamp ; to
gasoline in this vehicle. illuminate.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine For more information, see also “Practical
operation should be repaired promptly. hints” (Y page 496).
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to switch.
overheat and potentially start a fire.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This
i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with puts the starter switch in position 0, same
as with the SmartKey removed from the
Operation
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON). starter switch. The driver’s door then can
Information on gasoline quality can be closed again.
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the
contact gas station personnel in case point indicated by the arrow.
labels on the pump cannot be found. X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise.
For more information on gasoline, see X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
“Premium unleaded gasoline”
X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow
(Y page 541), see “Fuel requirements”
(Y page 541), or contact an authorized into holder =.
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel.
www.mbusa.com (USA only). X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the cuts out – do not top off or overfill.
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap. until it audibly engages.
i In case the central locking system does
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
not release the fuel filler flap, or the
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
opening mechanism is clamping, contact
prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Close fuel filler flap :.
The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Check regularly and before a long trip
For information on quantities and
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 537).
Check the following:
REngine oil level (Y page 405)
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 413)
RCoolant level (Y page 408)
RVehicle lighting (Y page 504)
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 404
404 Engine compartment
RWasher system and headlamp cleaning G Warning!

system (Y page 409) To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
RBrake fluid (Y page 409) moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
Engine compartment approximately 30 seconds or may even
restart after the engine has been turned off.
Hood Stay clear of fan blades.
G Warning!
G Warning!
Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
forced open by passing air flow.
it is dangerous to touch any components
Operation
This could cause the hood to come loose and (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
injure you and/or others. socket) of the ignition system
G Warning! Rwith the engine running
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read Rwhile starting the engine
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually
Opening
G Warning!
If you see flames or smoke coming from the
engine compartment, or if the coolant
temperature gauge indicates that the engine
is overheated, do not open the hood. Move
away from vehicle and do not open the hood
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, call
the fire department. X Pull hood lock release lever :.
The hood is unlocked.
G Warning!
You could be injured when the hood is open –
! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
even when the engine is turned off. folded forward away from the windshield.
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
hood could be damaged.
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 405
Engine compartment 405
driving style. Increased oil consumption can

occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
Warranty.
! To avoid damage to the handle never pull
For further information contact an
up the hood on the handle. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Operation
X Pull handle ; to its stop out of radiator
grille. Notes on checking engine oil level
X Pull up on hood. When checking the oil level
The hood will be held open at shoulder Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
height by gas-filled struts automatically.
Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
Closing the vehicle must have been stationary for
at least 5 minutes with the engine turned
G Warning! off
When closing the hood, use extreme caution Rwith the engine not at operating
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that temperature, the vehicle must have been
you do not close the hood on anyone. stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
Make sure the hood is securely engaged engine turned off
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an Checking engine oil level with the oil
accident, for example. The hood could dipstick
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
motion and injure you and/or others. On the S 450 4MATIC, S 550 4MATIC, S 550,
and S 63 AMG you can check the engine oil
X Let the hood drop from a height of level with the oil dipstick.
approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Open the hood (Y page 404).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 406
For more information on engine oil, see

“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 537).
For information on messages in the
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 483).
Checking engine oil level with the

control system
S 550 and S 63 AMG On the S 600 and S 65 AMG you can check
the engine oil level with the control system.
Operation
i The menu overview can be found on

(Y page 222).
X Press = or ; on the multifunction
steering wheel to select the Service
menu.
X Press 9 or : on the multifunction
steering wheel to select Engine Oil
Level.
S 450 4MATIC and S 550 4MATIC
X Press a.
X Pull out oil dipstick :. The following message appears in the
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean. multifunction display:
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the Measuring
dipstick guide tube. Engine Oil Level
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after Accurate Only
When Vehicle Is Level
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading. One of the following messages will
subsequently appear in the multifunction
The oil level is correct when it is between
display:
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :. REngine Oil Level
OK
i S 450 4MATIC, S 550 and S 550 4MATIC:
RAdd 1.0 qts. Engine Oil
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is At Next Refueling
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). (Canada: 1.0 l)
RAdd 1.5 qts. Engine Oil
i S 63 AMG only: At Next Refueling
The filling quantity between the upper and (Canada: 1.5 l)
lower marks on the oil dipstick is RAdd 2.0 qts. Engine Oil
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
At Next Refueling
X If necessary, add engine oil. (Canada: 2.0 l)
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 407
i If you want to interrupt the checking ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
procedure, press button % on the off. It could cause damage to the engine
multifunction steering wheel. and emission control system not covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
X If necessary, add engine oil.
For information on messages in the
For more information on engine oil, see
multifunction display concerning engine oil,
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
see the “Practical hints” section
(Y page 537).
(Y page 483).
Other display messages
If the ignition is not switched on, the following Adding engine oil
message appears in the multifunction ! Only use approved engine oils and oil
display: filters required for vehicles with
Operation
For Engine Oil Level Maintenance System. For a listing of
Ignition Must be On approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
X Switch on the ignition. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Need More Time visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
to Check The following will result in engine or
Engine Oil Level emission control system damage not
X If the engine is at operating temperature, covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
wait 5 minutes before repeating check Warranty:
procedure. RUsing engine oils and oil filters of
X If the engine is not at operating specification other than those expressly
temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes required for the Maintenance System.
before checking oil. RChanging of oil and oil filter at change
If you see the message: intervals longer than those called for by
Engine Oil Level the Maintenance System.
Not Measurable RUsing any oil additives.
With Running Engine
X If the engine is at operating temperature,
wait 5 minutes before checking oil.
X If the engine is not at operating
temperature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
before checking oil.
If there is excess engine oil with the engine at
normal operating temperature, the following
message appears in the multifunction
display:
Reduce Example illustration: S 550
Engine Oil Level
X Have excess oil siphoned or drained off.
Center.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 408
Coolant level
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
Example illustration: S 63 AMG RUse extreme caution when opening the
X
hood if there are any signs of steam or
Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck.
Operation
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or

X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
if the coolant temperature gauge indicates
to overfill with oil. that the coolant is overheated.
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
entering the ground or water.
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained cool down before removing the cap. The
off. It could cause damage to the engine coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and emission control system not covered and is under pressure.
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck. approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
For more information on engine oil, see the to relieve excess pressure. If opened
“Technical data” section (Y page 537) and immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam
(Y page 539). will be blown out under pressure.
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
Transmission fluid level may burn if it comes into contact with hot
The transmission fluid level does not need to engine parts.
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
Active Body Control (ABC) fluid level

Regular fluid level check is not required. If you
notice fluid leaks or malfunction messages in
the multifunction display, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC
system. Example illustration: S 550
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 409
X Using a rag, slowly open cap : During all seasons, use MB Windshield
approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
to relieve excess pressure. with water or premixed washer solvent/
X Continue turning cap : counterclockwise
antifreeze depending on the ambient
temperature (Y page 544).
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar
= in coolant expansion tank ;
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X Add coolant as required.
Operation
X Screw cap : back on and tighten it.
For more information on coolant, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 538) and
(Y page 542). Example illustration: S 550 with AIRMATIC
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Vehicles with Active Body Control (ABC)
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
freezing point. Failure to do so could result of cap : upwards.
in damage to the washer system/fluid X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
reservoir. X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can For more information, see “Washer system
damage the plastic lenses of the and headlamp cleaning system”
headlamps. (Y page 539).
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in

the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the Brake fluid level
washer fluid level sensor could be ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
damaged. fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp mark or below, have the brake system
cleaning system is supplied from the washer checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
fluid reservoir. immediately. Contact an authorized
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 410
410 Tires and wheels
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do the tires have sustained damage, replace

not add brake fluid as this will not solve the them.
problem. For more information, see When replacing rims, only use genuine
“Practical hints”. Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
When checking the brake fluid level, the particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
vehicle must be parked on level ground. in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
Operation
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
The brake fluid level is correct when it is damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
Tires and wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Safety notes nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center tire dealer for repairs.
for information on tested and recommended
rims and tires for summer and winter G Warning!
operation. They can also offer advice Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
concerning tire service and purchase. the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
G Warning! driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
Replace rims or tires with the same with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
designation, manufacturer and type as shown up and possibly a fire.
on the original part. For further information
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If incorrectly sized rims and tires are Important guidelines
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the type and make.
tires may no longer be correct. RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
RBreak in new tires for approximately

G Warning!
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if RRegularly check the tires and rims for
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 411
Tires and wheels 411
inflation pressure loss and damage to the 1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
tire beads. temperature, the driving speed and the tire
RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire load, the tire temperature changes. When the
inflation pressure and correct as required. tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
sharply reduced at tread depths of less warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
than 1/8 in (3 mm). if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should current operating conditions. If you check the
mount new tires on the front wheels first tire inflation pressure when the tires are
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
around). reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
Operation
match the specified cold tire inflation
pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Follow recommended cold tire inflation
G Warning! pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Information placard on the driver’s door
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires B-pillar.
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
affect handling and fuel economy, and are the best handling, tread life and riding
more likely to fail from being overheated. comfort.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can In addition to the Tire and Loading
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, Information placard on the driver’s door
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
because they are more likely to become for any additional information pertaining to
punctured or damaged by road debris, special driving situations. For more
potholes etc. information, see “Important notes on tire
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the inflation pressure” (Y page 412).
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire i Data shown on Tire and Loading
and Loading Information placard on the Information placard example are for
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires illustration purposes only. Tire data are
can overheat them, possibly causing a specific to each vehicle and may vary from
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result data shown in the following illustration.
in handling or steering problems, or brake Refer to Tire and Loading Information
failure. placard on vehicle for actual data specific
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and to your vehicle.
Loading Information placard located on the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 418).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 412
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation

pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
wheels with collapsible tire refer to
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
the recommended cold tire inflation
Operation
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle Rthe “Technical data” section of this
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed Operator’s Manual (Y page 536)
apply to the tires installed as original Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
equipment.
the driver’s door B-pillar
Important notes on tire inflation Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressure pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
G Warning! tires.
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly, i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
check the tires for punctures from foreign label examples are for illustration purposes
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the only. Tire inflation pressure data are
valves or from around the rim. specific to each vehicle and may vary from
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure data shown in the following illustrations.
are also increased while driving, depending Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
on the driving speed and the tire load. vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle.
If you will be driving your vehicle at high
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the approved, factory equipped tires
value for speeds above 100 mph When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation pressure that follows applies to that
pressure label located on the inside of the particular tire size only.
fuel filler flap.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 413
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated

Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for because they are more likely to become
particular tire sizes punctured or damaged by road debris,
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only
Operation
potholes etc.
show the rim diameter instead of the entire
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18". Overinflated tires can
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as Radversely affect handling characteristics
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 426). Rcause uneven tire wear
Rbe more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure

Safety notes
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures G Warning!

specific to rim diameter Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Underinflated tires
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
G Warning! adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Underinflated tires can
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear and Loading Information placard on the
Radversely affect fuel economy driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 414
can overheat them, possibly causing a The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale
in handling or steering problems, or brake (USA) or a low tire pressure telltale (Canada)
failure. in the instrument cluster. Depending on how
the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once pressure condition or a malfunction in the
a month. TPMS system itself:
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
when the tires are cold (Y page 411). or more of your tires is significantly
underinflated. There is no malfunction in
Checking tire inflation pressure the TPMS.
manually
RUSA only: If the telltale flashes for 60
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire seconds and then stays illuminated, the
Operation
inflation pressure: TPMS system itself is not operating

X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. properly.
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve. The TPMS only functions on wheels that are
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire equipped with the proper electronic sensors.
gauge and check against the G Warning!
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 418). If
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the
necessary, add air to achieve the
Tire and Loading Information placard or the
recommended tire inflation pressure.
supplemental tire inflation pressure
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
with the tire gauge.
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
X Install the valve cap.
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
X Repeat this procedure for each tire. steering maneuvers.
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring G Warning!

System (Advanced TPMS) Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced when cold and inflated to the inflation
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced pressure recommended by the vehicle
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure manufacturer on the Tire and Loading
in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in Information placard on the driver’s door B-
case of pressure loss in one or more of the pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the
tires. inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 415
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has If a condition causing the TPMS to
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring malfunction develops, it may take up to
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire 10 minutes for the system to signal a
pressure telltale when one or more of your malfunction using the TPMS telltale
tires are significantly underinflated. flashing and illumination sequence.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure The telltale extinguishes after a few
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check minutes driving if the malfunction has been
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate corrected.
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire multifunction display. The current tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. inflation pressure for each tire appears in the
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency multifunction display after a few minutes of
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s driving.
Operation
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire i Possible differences between the
maintenance, and it is the driver’s readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
responsibility to maintain correct tire hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
pressure, even if underinflation has not vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
reached the level to trigger illumination of the pressure displayed by the control system
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. apply to sea level. In high-altitude
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
USA only:
gauge will be higher than the reading issued
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a by the vehicle’s control system. Do not
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when reduce the tire inflation pressure under
the system is not operating properly. The such circumstances.
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the X Switch on the ignition.
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will X Press button = or ; on the
flash for approximately 1 minute and then multifunction steering wheel to select the
remain continuously illuminated. This Service menu (Y page 233).
sequence will continue upon subsequent X Press button 9 or : to select Tire
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
Press..
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
X Press button a.
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. The current inflation pressure for each tire
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
appears in the multifunction display.
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly. Example illustration
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
i USA only:
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 416
Pressure Displayed After Driving A Tire inflation pressure warnings

Few Minutes appears in the multifunction If the system detects a significant loss of tire
display. inflation pressure in one or more than one
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system tire, a message appears in the multifunction
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure display. In addition, an acoustic warning
of the removed road wheel for some sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that instrument cluster comes on.
the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
spare tire inflation pressure.
i Operating radio transmission equipment

(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
Operation
or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS

to malfunction.
Example illustration
i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the The respective tire and the corresponding tire
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the inflation pressure are indicated in yellow.
following two conditions: Restarting Advanced TPMS
1. This device may not cause harmful G Warning!
interference, and
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
2. this device must accept any inflation pressure to the recommended cold
interference received, including tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
interference that may cause undesired. affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this You might lose control over the vehicle.
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
new reference values for each tire.
i Canada only: The TPMS must be restarted when you have
This device complies with RSS-210 of adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to level (e.g. because of different load or driving
the following two conditions: conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the current tire inflation pressures.
and i Canada only:
The TPMS usually recognizes tire pressure
adjustments and sets new reference values
automatically. You can, however, restart
the TPMS manually as described.
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
recommended for the vehicle operating
condition. Tire inflation pressure should only
be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 417
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have X If you wish to cancel: Press button %.
supplemental tire inflation pressure or
information for driving at high speeds or for X Press button 9 to exit the menu screen.
vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded
vehicle condition. If such information is i When the wheel positions have been
provided, it can be found on the inside of the changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
fuel filler flap. may be displayed for the wrong position
X Using the Tire and Loading Information temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar the inflation pressure will be shown for the
(Y page 418) or the supplemental tire correct position.
inflation pressure information on the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct. Maximum tire inflation pressure
Operation
G Warning!
X Press button = or ; on the
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
multifunction steering wheel to select the pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
Service menu. pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
multifunction steering wheel to select wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
Tire Press.. affect handling and fuel economy, and are
X Press button a. more likely to fail from being overheated.
The current inflation pressure for each tire Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
appears in the multifunction display or the adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
following message appears in the wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
multifunction display: and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
Tire Pressure because they are more likely to become
Displayed After Driving punctured or damaged by road debris,
A Few Minutes potholes etc.
X Press button :.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Use Current
Pressures As New
Reference Values
Press 'OK' to Confirm
X Press button a.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Tire Pressure Monitor
Reactivated
After driving a few minutes the system i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
verifies that the current tire inflation on tires are specific to each vehicle and
pressures are within the system’s specified may vary from data shown in above
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation illustration.
pressures are accepted as reference values
and then monitored.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 418
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation

pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 411) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle

Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard : Driver’s door B-pillar
can be found on the driver’s door Following is a discussion on how to work with
Operation
B-pillar. This placard tells you important the information contained on the Tire and
information about the number of people Loading Information placard with regards to
that can be in the vehicle and the total loading your vehicle.
weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
It also contains information on the proper Tire and Loading Information
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires G Warning!
on your vehicle. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
(2) The certification label, also found on the specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the and Loading Information placard on the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle, driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating can overheat them, possibly causing a
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and in handling or steering problems, or brake
cargo. The certification label also tells failure.
you about the front and rear axle weight
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight Tire and Loading Information placard
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
that can be carried by a single axle (front Information placard example are for
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or illustration purposes only. Load limit data
GAWR for either the front axle or rear are specific to each vehicle and may vary
axle. from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 419
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear

seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 418).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
The Tire and Loading Information placard pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
showing load limit information : is located Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Operation
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 418). X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
X Locate the statement “The combined combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight of occupants and cargo should should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
on the Tire and Loading Information Information placard.
placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
The combined weight of all occupants, the driver and passengers that will be riding
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if in your vehicle.
applicable) should never exceed the weight X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
referenced in that statement. the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Seating capacity X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
i Data shown on Tire and Loading capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
Information placard example are for equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
data are specific to each vehicle and may amount of available cargo and luggage load
vary from data shown in the following capacity is 650 lbs
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Information placard on vehicle for actual
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
data specific to your vehicle.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 422).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
The seating capacity gives you important with varying seating configurations and
information on the number of occupants that
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 420
number and size of occupants. The following

examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 419).
Operation
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 421
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1
Operation
rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 422). (Y page 422) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 422
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle in handling or steering problems, or brake
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or failure.
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 524).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total
allowable weight that can be carried by a
Operation
single axle (front or rear).

To assure that your vehicle does not exceed i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
the maximum permissible weight limits on tires are specific to each vehicle and
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), may vary from data shown in above
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, illustration.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
The maximum tire load rating : is the
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
maximum weight the tires are designed to
commercial scale.
support.
Trailer tongue load For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 427).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important For information on calculating total and cargo
weight to measure because it affects the load load capacities, see (Y page 419).
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo Direction of rotation
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
everything loaded in it. such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
tires rotate in the direction specified.
primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
towing with your vehicle. intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
Maximum tire load unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
G Warning! replaced. Always observe and follow
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the applicable temporary use restrictions and
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire speed limitations indicated on the spare
and Loading Information placard on the wheel.
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 423
Tire care and maintenance Tread depth
Regularly check the tires for damage. Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
control of your vehicle. at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire recommend that you do not allow your tires
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if to wear down to that level. As tread depth
the tires have sustained damage, replace approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
them. properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once Depending upon the weather and/or road
a month. For more information on checking surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Operation
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended widely.
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 411). Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Tire inspection reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
Every time you check the tire inflation (3 mm).
pressure, you should also inspect your tires Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
for the following: law. These indicators are located in six places
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 423) on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s 1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
rubber
considered worn and should be replaced.
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the The recommended minimum tire tread depth
tread or side of the tire for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
Replace the tire if you find any of the above recommended minimum tire tread depth for
conditions. winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
varying factors including but not limited to: band across the tread.
RDriving style
RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 424
Storing tires Treadwear Traction Temperature

! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place 200 AA A
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
damage to the tire.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Always replace a damaged tire. under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
Operation
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

Uniform Tire Quality Grading (1 1/2) times as well on the government
Standards
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. based on straight-ahead braking traction
Government requirement designed to give tests, and does not include acceleration,
drivers consistent and reliable information cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
regarding tire performance. Tire characteristics.
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
resistance =. Although not a Government of the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in measured under controlled conditions on
North America have these grades branded on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
the sidewall. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
on tires are specific to each vehicle and G Warning!
may vary from data shown in above If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
illustration. be substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
Quality grades can be found, where
extreme caution.
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 425
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point. Rotating tires
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 432) with a minimum tread depth of
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
Operation
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. The wheels could come
appropriate caution. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Limited Warranty.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Temperature with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
G Warning! same dimension all around, tires can be
The temperature grade for this tire is rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
established for a tire that is properly inflated pattern that will maintain the intended
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
underinflation, or excessive loading, either (Y page 422).
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
excessive heat build-up and possible tire equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
failure. dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
configuration, tires can be rotated according
the generation of heat and its ability to
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
and reduce tire life, and excessive
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
The grade C corresponds to a level of
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
represent higher levels of performance on the on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 426
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the on tires are specific to each vehicle and
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for may vary from data shown in above
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. illustration.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat For more information, see “Rims and tires”
tire” (Y page 508). (Y page 532).
Tire size designation, load and speed

Tire labeling rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
manufacturer name, a number of markings
can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
Operation
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
= Radial tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load index
B Speed symbol

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
illustration.
(Y page 424)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number General: Depending on the design standards
(Y page 429) used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
= Maximum tire load (Y page 422)
tire size designation.
? Maximum tire inflation pressure
No letter preceding the size designation (as
(Y page 417)
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
A Manufacturer on European design standards.
B Tire ply material (Y page 430) Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
C Tire size designation, load and speed Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
rating (Y page 426) standards.
D Load identification (Y page 429) Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
E Tire name Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 427
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: and Loading Information placard on the
Temporary spare tires which are high driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
pressure compact spares designed for can overheat them, possibly causing a
temporary emergency use only. blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width
failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters. Load index A is a numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire can support.
Aspect ratio
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
relationship between tire section height and tire is designed to support. See also
section width and is expressed in percentage. “Maximum tire load” (Y page 422) where the
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
Operation
maximum load associated with the load index
section height by section width. is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
Tire code For additional information on the load index,
Tire code = indicates the tire construction see “Load identification” (Y page 429).
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter Speed symbol
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
with a speed capability above 149 mph
speed rating of the tires.
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
additional information, see “Tire speed are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
rating” (Y page 427). causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
Rim diameter personal injury and possible death, for you
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead and for others.
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
Load index driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
G Warning!
Speed symbol B indicates the approved
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the
tire failure may be the result which may cause tire.
an accident and/or serious injury to you or Summer tires
others. Index Speed rating
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
on the original part. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
G Warning! S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 428
Index Speed rating Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S42 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S42 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
H M+S42 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
V M+S42 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Operation
RAt
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
winter performance. Make sure the tires
with a speed capability above 149 mph
you use show M+S and the mountain/
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
snowflakeimarking on the tire
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
To determine the maximum speed sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
capability of the tire, the service traction performance requirements of the
description for the tire must be referred to. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
The service description is comprised of
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
load index A and speed symbol B.
for use in snow conditions.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
designation and no service description is
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed R130 mph (210 km/h):
capability. - All models except AMG vehicles
If a service description is given, the speed
R155 mph (250 km/h):
capability is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description. Example: - S 63 AMG
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y” - S 65 AMG
is the service description. The letter “Y”
designates the speed rating and the speed R186 mph (300 km/h):
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph - S 63 AMG (Performance Package)
(300 km/h).
- S 63 AMG with increased top speed
RAny tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” - S 65 AMG with increased top speed
in the size designation AND the service The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
description must be placed in parenthesis. may have a tire speed rating above the
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed symbol in parenthesis designates speed limiter.
the maximum speed capability of the tire Make sure your tires have the required tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
42 or M+Sifor winter tires

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 429
the “Technical data” section (Y page 532),

for example when purchasing new tires.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to assist you.
Load identification
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN

facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
Operation
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such
tires.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
may vary from data shown in above on tires are specific to each vehicle and
illustration. may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
In addition to the load index, special load
identification : may be molded into the tire
DOT (Department of Transportation)
sidewall following the letter designating the
speed symbol B (Y page 426). Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
RNo specification given: absence of any text meets requirements of the U.S. Department
(like in above example) indicates a of Transportation.
standard load (SL) tire.
RXL
Manufacturer’s identification mark
or Extra Load: designates an extra load
(or reinforced) tire. Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
RLight Load: designates a light load tire. denotes the tire manufacturer.
RC,
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
D, E: designates load range associated
with the maximum load a tire can carry at Retreaded tires have a mark with four
a specified pressure. symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 410).
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire size
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire Code = indicates the tire size.
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 430
Tire type code radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
equipment (whether installed or not).
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
Air pressure
the tire.
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
Date of manufacture outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
The date of manufacture A identifies the inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
week and year of manufacture.
The first two figures identify the week, Aspect ratio
starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two Dimensional relationship between tire
Operation
figures represent the year. section height and section width expressed
For example, “3208” represents the 32nd in percentage.
week of 2008.
Bar
Metric unit for air pressure. There are
Tire ply material 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
on tires are specific to each vehicle and Curb weight
may vary from data shown in above The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
illustration. equipment including the maximum capacity
This marking tells you about the type of cord of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
and number of plies in the sidewall : and air conditioning and additional optional
under the tread ;. equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
Tire and loading terminology DOT (Department of Transportation)
Accessory weight A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire

meets requirements of the U.S. Department
The combined weight (in excess of those of Transportation.
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 431
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Maximum permissible tire inflation

pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle This number is the greatest amount of air
must never exceed the GAWR for the front pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle (150 lb).
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if Occupant distribution
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
Operation
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s door their designated seating positions.
B-pillar.
Production options weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The combined weight of those installed
This is the maximum permissible vehicle regular production options weighing over
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
the vehicle including all options, passengers, standard items which they replace, not
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer previously considered in curb weight or
tongue load). It is indicated on the accessory weight, including heavy duty
certification label located on the driver’s door brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
B-pillar. battery, and special trim.
Kilopascal (kPa) PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to Recommended tire inflation pressure
1 bar. The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
Load index and Loading Information placard located on
Numerical code associated with the the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
maximum load a tire can support. handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to
special driving situations can be found on the
Maximum load rating
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds the fuel filler flap.
that can be carried by the tire.
Rim
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, assembly upon which the tire beads are
total load limit, and production options seated.
weight.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 432
432 Winter driving
Sidewall Treadwear indicators

The portion of a tire between the tread and Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
the bead. that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in A tire information system that provides
recall situations or other safety matters consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
concerning tires and gives purchasers the temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification government testing procedures. The ratings
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
Operation
of manufacture”.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Tire ply composition and material used
Load on an individual tire that is determined
This indicates the number of plies or the by distributing to each axle its share of the
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire it by two.
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Winter driving
Tire speed rating General information

Part of tire designation (speed symbol); Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
indicates the speed range for which a tire is Mercedes-Benz Center.
approved.
Total load limit Winter tires
Rated cargo and luggage load plus G Warning!

68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
designated seating capacity. 6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Traction
G Warning!
The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Tread well impair turning stability and that overall
The portion of a tire that comes into contact driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
with the road. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 433
Winter driving 433
Always use winter tires at temperatures 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road as possible when driving on roads without
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires snow.
provide special winter performance. Make Observe the following guidelines when using
sure the tires you use show the mountain/ snow chains:
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall. RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
These tires meet specific snow traction
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 532).
performance requirements of the Rubber
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
have been designed specifically for use in mounting instructions.
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
! If snow chains are mounted to the front
only way to achieve the maximum
wheels, they may scrape against the body
Operation
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
systems such as the ABS and the ESC in
could be damaged as a result.
winter operation.
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
winter tires are of the same make and have Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
the same tread design. Benz Center will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
For information on winter tires for your
vehicle model, see the “Technical data” RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
section (Y page 532). depending on location. Always check local
Always observe the speed rating of the winter and state laws before installing snow
tires installed on your vehicle. chains.
RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
After installing winter tires:
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust i When driving with snow chains, you may
it if necessary (Y page 413). wish to switch off the ESC (Y page 232)
X Restart the Advanced Tire Pressure before setting the vehicle in motion. This
Monitoring System (Y page 414). will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Snow chains Winter driving instructions

! When driving with snow chains, always G Warning!
select the raised level of the vehicle level If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
control. Other settings may result in sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
damage to your vehicle. and from around the vehicle with the engine
running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid resulting in unconsciousness and death.
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
make sure the use of snow chains is a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
permissible as specified in the “Technical not facing the wind.
data” section of this Operator’s Manual.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
covered roads at speeds not to exceed
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 434
434 Driving instructions
G Warning! Driving instructions

The outside temperature indicator is not
Drive sensibly – save fuel
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. To save fuel you should:
Indicated temperatures just above the RKeep tires at the recommended inflation
freezing point do not guarantee that the road pressures.
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, RRemove unnecessary loads.
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
RRemove roof rack when not in use.
G Warning! RAllow engine to warm up under low load
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in use.
RAvoid frequent acceleration and
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
Operation
deceleration.
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
this type of loss of control. RHave all maintenance work performed at
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
The most important rule for slippery or icy Booklet and as required by the
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt Maintenance system. Contact an
acceleration, braking and steering authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control or
DISTRONIC PLUS system under such Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
conditions. in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift
the automatic transmission to neutral
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
Drinking and driving
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow G Warning!
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 433). Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal affect your reflexes, perceptions and
force may become necessary to produce the judgment.
normal brake effect.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when accident are greatly increased when you drink
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can or take drugs and drive.
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
back to normal.
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on taking drugs.
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed.
Pedals
G Warning!
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking Make sure absolutely no objects are
maneuvers. obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 435
Driving instructions 435
obstacles. If there are any floormats or It can also result in the brakes overheating,
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the thereby significantly reducing their
pedals still have sufficient clearance. effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
the objects could get caught between the accident.
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
for some time, rather than immediately park,
injury.
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Power assistance Wet roads
Operation
There is no power assistance for the steering
After driving in heavy rain for some time
and the brake when the engine is not running.
without applying the brakes or through water
Steering and braking requires significantly deep enough to wet brake components, the
more effort and you could lose control of the first braking action may be somewhat
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
in motion. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

Brakes
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
Downhill grades advisable to brake the vehicle with
considerable force prior to parking. The heat
! When driving down long and steep generated serves to dry the brakes.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the Salt-covered roads
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces G Warning!
wear. A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
When using the engine’s braking power, a linings may cause a delay in the braking
drive wheel may not spin for an extended effect, resulting in a significantly increased
period of time, e.g. on slippery road braking distance, which could lead to an
surfaces. This may cause serious damage accident.
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
Continuous or hard braking
layer of salt that may have built up on the
G Warning! brake discs and the brake linings is
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 436
436 Driving instructions
removed without putting other road users covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
at risk Warranty.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
ahead and drive with particular care Because the ESC operates automatically,
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a the engine and ignition must be shut off
trip and immediately after commencing a (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
new trip, so that salt residues are removed 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
from the brake disc position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer.
Brake service
Active braking action through the ESC may
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may otherwise seriously damage the brake
Operation
be too low if the red brake warning lamp in system which is not covered by the
the instrument cluster comes on while the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
engine is running and an acoustic warning
sounds. Observe additional messages in ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
the multifunction display that may appear. Because the ESC operates automatically,
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may the engine and ignition must be shut off
be the reason for low brake fluid in the (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
reservoir. 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
Have the brake system inspected position 0 or 1) when the electronic parking
immediately. Contact an authorized brake is being tested on a brake test
Mercedes-Benz Center. dynamometer or when the vehicle is being
All checks and service work on the brake Active braking action through the ESC may
system should be carried out by qualified otherwise seriously damage the brake
technicians only. Contact an authorized system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. If your brake system is only subjected to
moderate loads, you should occasionally test
G Warning! the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
If other than recommended brake pads are above-normal braking pressure at higher
installed, or other than recommended brake speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
fluid is used, the braking properties of the brake pads.
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe
G Warning!
braking is substantially impaired. This could
result in an accident. Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Only conduct operational or performance Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such System (BAS) (Y page 64) or BAS PLUS
tests are necessary, contact an authorized (Y page 64).
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
system or the transfer case which is not
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 437
Driving instructions 437
High-performance brake system Driving off

The high-performance brake system is only Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
available on S 63 AMG and S 65 AMG. full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached.
G Warning!
New vehicle brake pads and disks, and ! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
replacement brake pads and disks may take not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
several hundred miles of driving until they extended period with the ESC switched off.
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that Doing so may cause serious damage to the
time, you may need to use increased brake drivetrain which is not covered by the
pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
of this and adjust your driving and braking
accordingly during this break-in period. ! Simultaneously depressing the
Operation
Excessive high-demand braking will cause
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
reduces engine performance and causes
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
instrument cluster and brake condition
messages in the multifunction display.
Limited Warranty.
Especially for high-performance driving, it is
important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
Hydroplaning
Depending on the depth of the water layer on
The high-performance brake system is the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
designed to operate under the extremely high speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
operating demands required to when conditions indicate possible
accommodate the performance capabilities hydroplaning:
of the vehicle.
X Reduce vehicle speed.
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
noise depending on the
X Apply brakes cautiously.
Rvehicle speed
Rbrake force applied
Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and Standing water
humidity
! Do not drive through flooded areas.
As with any brake system, the wear of Before driving through water, determine its
individual brake system components such as depth.
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your If you must drive through standing water,
driving style and the conditions under which drive slowly to prevent water from entering
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style the passenger compartment or the engine
calling for high-demand braking will cause compartment. Water in these areas could
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly. cause damage to electrical components or
wiring of the engine or transmission, or
could result in water being ingested by the
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 438
438 Maintenance
Driving abroad specifications. Any adjustments on the

engine should, therefore, be carried out only
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S. by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
or Canada, you should request dealer authorized technicians.
network information for your destination from
Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
Control and operation of radio
requirements. For details refer to the
transmitter
Maintenance Booklet.
Safety notes
G Warning!
G Warning! Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
Operation
Please do not forget that your primary health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
attention to the road must always be his/her unconsciousness and possible death.
primary focus when driving. For your safety Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
and the safety of others, we recommend that as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
you pull over to a safe location and stop If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
before placing or taking a telephone call. entering the vehicle while driving, have the
If you choose to use the telephone43 while cause determined and corrected
driving, please use the hands-free device and immediately. If you must drive under these
only use the telephone when road, weather conditions, drive only with at least one
and traffic conditions permit. Some window fully open at all times.
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
Only operate the COMAND43 (Cockpit Maintenance
Management and Data System) if road, Notes
weather and traffic conditions permit.
Otherwise, you may not be able to observe The Maintenance System in your vehicle
traffic conditions and could endanger yourself tracks the distance driven and the time
and others. elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance
service accordingly.
14 m) every second. We strongly recommend that you have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
Emission control
called for by the maintenance service
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep indicator.
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
within permissible limits required by law.
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
These systems will function properly only and maintenance service indicator at the
when maintained strictly according to factory designated times/mileage will result in
43 Observe all legal requirements.

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 439
Maintenance 439
vehicle damage not covered by the Clearing the maintenance service

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. indicator message
The maintenance service indicator message
is cleared automatically
Maintenance service indicator
message Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
switch on the ignition
Information on maintenance work and
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
maintenance intervals are specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized reaching the service threshold while driving
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional suggested maintenance service term has
information. passed
The maintenance service indicator message
Operation
X Clearing the maintenance service
will notify you when the next maintenance indicator message manually: Press
service is required. button % on the multifunction steering
Starting approximately 1 month before the wheel.
next maintenance service is required, one of The standard display appears in the
the following messages will appear in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. The messages will
appear while you are driving or when you
switch on the ignition (example service A): Maintenance service term exceeded
Next Service A in XXXX miles (km) If you have exceeded the suggested
Next Service A in XX days maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
Service A Due
display:
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX miles
(km)
Service A Exceeded by XXX days
Service A Exceeded By XXX days
In addition, a signal sounds when the
message appears.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of reset the maintenance service indicator
maintenance services and intervals they need following a completed maintenance service.
to be performed at.
Calling up the maintenance service
indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(Y page 222).
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is required.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 440
440 Vehicle care
X Switch on the ignition. engine damage and/or other vehicle

The standard display of the control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
appears (Y page 223). Limited Warranty.
X Press button = or ; on the
multifunction steering wheel to select the
Service menu. Vehicle care
X Press button : or 9 to select Cleaning and care of the vehicle
ASSYST PLUS.
X Press button a on the multifunction
Notes
steering wheel to confirm. Regular and proper care will help to maintain
The maintenance service indicator display the value of your vehicle.
with the maintenance service deadline
appears in the multifunction display. G Warning!
Operation
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.

i If the battery was disconnected, the days Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
of disconnection will not be included in the Always follow the instructions on the
count shown by the maintenance service particular container. Always open your
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
service deadline, you will need to subtract inside.
these days from the days shown in the Never use fluids or solvents that are not
maintenance service indicator message or designed for cleaning your vehicle.
maintenance service indicator display. Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
Resetting the maintenance service
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
indicator
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
In the event that the maintenance service on and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the surface to be cleaned.
maintenance service indicator reset.
While in operation, even while parked, your
The automotive maintenance facility carrying vehicle is subjected to varying external
out the maintenance service will find the influences which, if gone unchecked, can
information for resetting the maintenance attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant underbody and cause lasting damage.
literature for your vehicle.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
Such literature is available at any authorized and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
RAir pollution
Mercedes-Benz.
RRoad salt
! If the maintenance service indicator was
reset inadvertently, have an authorized RTar
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. RGravel and stone chipping
Only reset the maintenance service
indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 441
Vehicle care 441
To avoid paint damage, you should Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or

immediately remove: damage due to negligent or incorrect care
RGrease and oil cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended
RFuel
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
RCoolant authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RBrake fluid The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
RBird droppings “how-to” information as well as references to
RInsects Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RTree resins etc. products.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates Power washer
Operation
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences. ! Follow the instructions provided by the
More frequent washings are necessary to power washer manufacturer on
deal with unfavorable conditions: maintaining a distance between the vehicle
Rnear
and the nozzle of the power washer.
the ocean
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust tires. The intense jet of water can result in
emissions) damage to the tire.
Rduring winter operation Always replace a damaged tire.
You should check your vehicle from time to Always keep the jet of water moving across
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
damage should be repaired as soon as parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
possible to prevent corrosion. rubber parts.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
check is a washing of the underbody followed If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas water, and a SmartKey is within
need to be re-undercoated. approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
Tar stains
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- become more difficult to remove. A tar
Benz because of the possibility of remover is recommended.
incompatibility between materials used in the
production process and others applied later. Paintwork, painted body components
We have selected vehicle-care products and
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and which or similar materials to painted body
always reflect the latest technology. You can components may damage the paintwork.
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz be applied when water drops on the paint
Center. surface do not “bead up”. This should
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 442
442 Vehicle care
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
depending on the climate and washing such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
detergent used. Shampoo.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
should be applied if the paint surface shows diffused jet of water.
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). X Do not spray directly towards the
Do not apply any of these products or wax if ventilation intake.
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
is still hot. and chamois frequently.
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint chamois thoroughly.
damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
doors, etc.).
Operation
finish.
Engine cleaning Automatic car wash

Prior to cleaning the engine compartment, G Warning!
make sure to protect electrical components The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
and connectors from contact with water and or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
cleaning agents. deactivate the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
Corrosion protection, such as MB PLUS before the vehicle is washed in an
Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the automatic car wash.
engine compartment after every engine You can have your vehicle washed in an
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The car washes are preferable.
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
protected from any wax.
recirculation mode using rocker switch
g on the climate control panel.
Vehicle washing
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
road salt as soon as possible. touchless car wash which uses caustic
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
or ornamental moldings.
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: running it through the automatic car wash.
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within ! Make sure the combination switch is set
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. sensor could activate and cause the wipers
to move unintentionally. This may lead to
Hand-wash vehicle damage.
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
in direct sunlight. exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to the vehicle through an automatic car wash
clean the vehicle. to prevent damage to the mirrors.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 443
Vehicle care 443
X When taking the vehicle through an Cleaning the driving systems sensors
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 319).
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
Operation
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth. X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean DISTRONIC PLUS/PRE-SAFE® Brake
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
system sensor cover : by hand.
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
may have chrome appearance, they could To clean DISTRONIC PLUS/PRE-SAFE® Brake
be made of anodized aluminum that will be system sensor cover : and the bumper area
damaged when cleaned with chrome near sensors ; observe the following:
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
those ornamental moldings. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
For very dirty ornamental moldings of with plenty of water.
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, ! If you use a power washer to clean the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz sensor covers, observe the following:
Center. RFollow the instructions provided by the
power washer manufacturer.
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses RMaintain a distance between the sensor
covers and the nozzle of the power
X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as washer.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 444
444 Vehicle care
Cleaning the rear view camera lens covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
14 m) every second.
! Do not clean the lens of the Night View

Assist Plus camera. If the camera lens is
dirty, please contact an authorized
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-

Operation
scratching cloth to clean rear view camera

lens :.
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with X Use recessed handle : of camera cover to
plenty of water. swing camera cover downward.
! Do not clean the camera and the area
around the camera
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
You could otherwise damage the camera.
Cleaning the windshield in front of the

Night View Assist Plus camera
The Night View Assist Plus camera is located X Clean inside of windshield in front of
in front of the interior rear view mirror.
camera ; with a soft, non-scratching
G Warning! cloth.
Please do not forget that your primary
! If you use a windshield cleaning product,
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
make sure that none of the cleaning
attention to the road must always be his/her
product comes into contact with the lens
primary focus when driving. For your safety
of the Night View Assist Plus camera.
and the safety of others, stop before trying to
remove window fogging or cleaning the X Use recessed handles : of camera cover
window in front of the Night View Assist Plus to swing camera cover up.
camera.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 445
Vehicle care 445
Cleaning the windows and the wiper impact from the tensioning spring could
blades crack the windshield.
! The windshield wipers must be in a ! To clean the window interior, do not use
vertical position before folding them away a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
from the windshield. They could otherwise containing solvents. Do not touch the
damage the hood. inside of the windows with hard objects
Never open the hood when the wiper arms such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
are folded forward. damage the windows.
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
Cleaning the panorama roof with power
X Switch on the ignition. tilt/sliding panel
X Turn combination switch to wiper setting
° (Y page 305). The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
Operation
protective layer on the inside.
X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
off the ignition.
cleaning solution.
G Warning! An automotive glass cleaner is
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and recommended.
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper ! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make or cleaners containing solvents. Do not
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have touch the protective layer with hard objects
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply
suddenly turn on and cause injury. strong force and only use a soft, non-
scratching cloth when cleaning the rear
part of the tilt/sliding panel.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
into place. Light alloy wheels
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
inserts with a clean cloth and mild
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
detergent solution.
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces. ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials.
An automotive glass cleaner is Acid may cause corrosion or damage the
recommended. clear coat.
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto ! The vehicle should not be parked for an
the windshield before turning the SmartKey extended period of time immediately after
in the starter switch or pressing the it has been cleaned. This applies especially
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. after the wheel rims have been cleaned
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
arm back. If released, the force of the can lead to increased corrosion of the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 446
446 Vehicle care
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
paint if the vehicle is not driven after These can damage or even destroy the
cleaning. COMAND display screen.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
should always be warmed-up before it is
with light pressure.
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Steering wheel
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
Wheel Care products, take care not to or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
spray them on the brake disks. Leather Care.
Plastic and rubber parts

Carpets
Operation
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
solution.
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution.
Headliner and shelf below rear window
The surface may temporarily change color. X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
If this is the case, wait for it to dry. cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
G Warning!
Seat belts
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the X Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents
will make the surface porous and vehicle ! The seat belts must not be treated with
occupants could suffer serious injuries from chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
bag deployment. (80†) or in direct sunlight.
G Warning!
! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the severely weaken them. In a crash they may
surface. not be able to provide adequate protection.
Hard plastic trim items
Upholstery
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
pressure. clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the
COMAND display upholstery to become permanently
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
! You must switch off the COMAND display intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will
and allow it to cool prior to cleaning. be prevented.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 447
Vehicle care 447
G Warning! Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Only use seat or head restraint covers which Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
have been tested and approved by Mercedes- exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
Benz for your vehicle model. and the classy appearance.
Using other seat or head restraint covers may X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
interfere with or prevent Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
Rdeployment of the front side impact air been washed, especially during the winter.
bags
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags
wheel cleaners as they could cause
Ractivation of the NECK-PRO active front corrosion.
head restraints
Operation
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe with light pressure only.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
As leather is a natural product, it could
otherwise harden or become porous.
RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
should not become wet.
Wood trims
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 448
448
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 449
449

Where will I find ...? .......................... 450
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 452
What to do if … .................................. 489
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 499
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 501
Replacing batteries (SmartKey,
remote control, headphone) ............ 502
Replacing bulbs ................................. 504
Replacing wiper blades .................... 507
Flat tire .............................................. 508
Practical hints
Battery ............................................... 512
Jump starting .................................... 514
Towing the vehicle ............................ 516
Fuses .................................................. 519
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 450
450 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment Center to obtain the tools approved for

your vehicle.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all The vehicle tool kit includes:
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of
RAlignment bolt 44
purchase. Please be aware that your RCollapsible wheel chock44
vehicle might not be equipped with all RFuse chart
features described in this manual.
RJack44
RPair of gloves44
Where will I find ...?
RTowing eye bolt
First aid kit RWheel wrench44
i Check expiration dates and contents for X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 279).
completeness at least once a year and
X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.
Practical hints
replace missing/expired items.

The first aid kit is located in the trunk on the X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
right side storage pocket, secured by a lip.
tensioning strap.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk.
X Loosen tensioning strap :.

First aid kit ; can be removed.
: Collapsible wheel chock

Vehicle tool kit ; Vehicle tool kit box cover
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space = Tool bag
underneath the trunk floor. ? Jack
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not X Open vehicle tool kit box cover ;.
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel Collapsible wheel chock
change are specific to your vehicle. The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
44 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 451
Where will I find ...? 451
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the

vehicle tool kit (Y page 450).
Storage position
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of
X
arrow as far as it will go.
Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.
X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
Practical hints
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 509).
Jack
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle Operational position
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
X Turn the crank handle clockwise.
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is Before placing the jack back into the vehicle
designed only for the purpose of changing a tool kit:
wheel.
X Fully collapse the jack.
When using the jack, observe the safety notes
X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
the notes on the jack.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit Spare wheel
(Y page 450).
The spare wheel is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 279).
X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.
X Engage the trunk floor handle on the upper
trunk lip.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 452
452 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
lower the trunk floor before closing the Certain warning and malfunction messages
trunk. are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual.
High-priority messages are shown in red in
the multifunction display. Messages of lower
priority are shown in yellow or white.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
cleared from the multifunction display using
a or % on the multifunction steering
wheel (Y page 221).
Other messages of high priority and
X Remove spare wheel mounting = by messages of less immediate priority can be
turning it counterclockwise. cleared from the multifunction display using
Practical hints
a or %. They are then stored in the

i Vehicle tool kit box ; can only be vehicle status message memory
removed together with spare wheel (Y page 233). Remember that clearing a
mounting =. message will only make the message
After removing spare wheel mounting =, disappear. Clearing a message will not
you can disengage vehicle tool kit box ; correct the condition that caused the
from spare wheel mounting =. message to appear.
X Remove spare wheel :. G Warning!
The spare wheel bolts are located in a All categories of messages contain important
container on the spare wheel rim. information which should be taken note of
and, where a malfunction is indicated,
X Take off the spare wheel bolts. addressed as soon as possible at an
For information on mounting the spare wheel, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
see “Flat tire” (Y page 508). Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
Storing the spare wheel after use Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
X Place spare wheel : into the spare wheel damage or personal injury.
well (Y page 452).
G Warning!
X Secure spare wheel : by turning spare
No messages will be displayed if either the
wheel mounting = clockwise instrument cluster or the multifunction
(Y page 452). display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
information about your driving conditions,
Vehicle status messages in the such as
multifunction display Rspeed
Notes Routside temperature
Warning and malfunction messages appear in Rwarning/indicator lamps
the multifunction display located in the
instrument cluster.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 453
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 453
Rmalfunction/warning messages portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all

Rfailure of any systems necessary safety information and warning for
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, do so with added Read and observe the notes on the HOLD
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes- function (Y page 342) and parking
Benz Center as soon as possible. (Y page 314) when you park the vehicle.
On the pages that follow, you will find a
G Warning! compilation of the most important warning
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read and malfunction messages that may appear.
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating For your convenience the messages are
Instructions included in your vehicle literature divided into text messages (Y page 454) and
symbol messages (Y page 466).
Practical hints
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 454
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

PRE-SAFE Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Oper. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual possible.
PRE-SAFE Function The PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily unavailable.

Currently The PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated because:
Limited
Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty
See Oper.
Manual Rthe area around the sensors in the front or the rear bumper
Practical hints
is dirty
Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative due to
electromagnetic interference near television and radio
transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring
systems, etc.
Rthe system is out of the operating temperature range
Rthe battery voltage is insufficient
The PRE-SAFE® Brake becomes operational again and the
message in the multifunction display disappears when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe system is within the operating temperature range
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille
(Y page 443).
X Clean the front and the rear bumper (Y page 443).
X Restart the vehicle.
X Wait until the battery recovers.
PRE-SAFE Function The PRE-SAFE® Brake is unavailable due to a malfunction.

Limited The BAS PLUS may also be unavailable.
See Oper.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual
possible.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 455

Front The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Passenger even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Airbag system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
Enabled the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
See Oper. forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the electronic parking brake.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
Practical hints
X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to
the seat are present. The system may recognize such
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp right of the
instrument cluster (Y page 48) and the multifunction display
in the instrument cluster (Y page 32) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Oper. Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual should not appear
in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 456
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Front The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Passenger even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Airbag individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
Disabled acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
See Oper. weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
Practical hints
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp right of the
instrument cluster (Y page 48) and the multifunction display
in the instrument (Y page 32) cluster for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp right of the instrument
cluster should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating
that the OCS (Y page 46) has deactivated the front
passenger front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Oper. Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Oper. Manual should not appear
in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 457
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

ABC Malfunctio You have started driving although the vehicle level is still too
n Stop low.
Vehicle The vehicle is being raised. The ABC message goes out after
a few seconds.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so.
Practical hints
X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
display.
You may then drive off.
ABC Malfunctio The vehicle is losing oil.

n Stop The ABC message appears continuously.
Vehicle X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so.
X Call Roadside Assistance.
or
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
ABC Malfunctio The ABC is malfunctioning.

n Stop The ABC message appears continuously.
Vehicle X Do not turn steering wheel too far to avoid damaging the
front fenders.
X Listen for scraping noises.
X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
possible.
ABC Malfunctio The capability of the ABC system is restricted. This can impair
n handling.
possible.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 458

ABC Vehicle The vehicle’s level is too low while at a standstill. The vehicle
Rising will be raised.
Please X Do not drive off.
Wait X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Briefly
display.
Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.

Control e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Cruise - - - mph One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
Practical hints
20 mph (30 km/h).

X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 328).
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 459

DISTRONIC Currently The DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily unavailable.
PLUS Unavailabl The DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated because:
e See Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator grille is dirty
Oper.
Manual Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation
Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative due to

transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring
systems, etc.
Rthe radar sensors do not sense any other vehicles or
objects, i.e. road sign or similar to this, for a long time
Rthe system is out of the operating temperature range
Rthe battery voltage is insufficient
Practical hints
X If necessary, clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the
radiator grille (Y page 443).
X Restart the vehicle.
X Try activating the DISTRONIC PLUS again later.
X Wait until the system is within the operating temperature
range or the battery recovers.
The DISTRONIC PLUS becomes operational again without the
engine being restarted when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe message in the multifunction display disappears
DISTRONIC Inoperativ The DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioning.

PLUS e The BAS PLUS and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are also not
available.
possible.
DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The DISTRONIC PLUS has switched off.
PLUS X Stop accelerating.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 460

DISTRONIC - - - mph One of the activation conditions for the DISTRONIC PLUS has
PLUS not been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed
below 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for the DISTRONIC PLUS
(Y page 335).
HOLD Off The HOLD function switched off because the vehicle was
sliding, for example on a slippery surface.
X Activate the HOLD function later.
Blind Currently The Blind Spot Assist is deactivated because the area around
Spot Unavailabl the sensors in the front or the rear bumper is dirty.
Practical hints
Assist e See X Clean the front and rear bumper (Y page 443).
Oper.
Manual The Blind Spot Assist is deactivated because the battery
voltage is insufficient.
X Have the battery checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The Blind Spot Assist is switched off because the radar sensor
system is temporarily inoperative due to electromagnetic
interference near television and radio transmitter stations,
toll stations, speed measuring systems, etc.
X Wait until the message in the multifunction display
disappears.
Blind Inoperativ The Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.

Spot e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Assist possible.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 461

Parking Currently The Advanced Parking Guidance is deactivated because the
Guidance Unavailabl area around the sensors in the front or the rear bumper is
e See dirty.
Oper. X Clean the front and rear bumper (Y page 443).
Manual
The Advanced Parking Guidance is deactivated because the
battery voltage is insufficient.
X Have the battery checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The Advanced Parking Guidance is switched off because the

radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative due to
transmitter stations, toll stations, speed measuring systems,
Practical hints
etc.
X Wait to see if the interference is temporary. Try in a location
where the interfering source might not be present.
Parking Canceled The Advanced Parking Guidance has been canceled because:
Guidance Rthe vehicle is sliding
Rthe bumper became dirty in the area of the sensors
Rthere has been a malfunction
X Use the Advanced Parking Guidance again later.
If the parking space symbol is not shown in the multifunction
display at a speed below 10 mph (16 km/h):
X Clean the bumpers (Y page 443).
or
X Restart the engine.
or
Parking Finished Advanced Parking Guidance: The vehicle is in the end

Guidance position.
The display message disappears automatically.
Radar Deactivate You have attempted to activate the DISTRONIC PLUS or the
Sensors d See PRE-SAFE® Brake even though you have switched off the
Oper. radar sensors on the vehicle.
Manual X Check if switching on the radar sensors is permitted
(Y page 236).
X Switch on the radar sensors using the instrument cluster
control system.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 462

Lane Currently The Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.
Keeping Unavailabl The Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated because:
Assist e See Rthe windshield in front of the camera is dirty
Oper.
Manual Rits function is impaired as a result of heavy precipitation or
fog
Rlane markings are not present for an extended period of
time
Rlane markings are worn, dark, or covered by dirt or snow
for example
The Lane Keeping Assist becomes operational again and the
message in the multifunction display disappears when:
Rdirt on the windshield has fallen off while driving (e.g. slush
Practical hints
or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full camera availability
X If necessary, clean the windshield in front of the camera
(Y page 445).
Lane Inoperativ The Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.

Keeping e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Assist
Vehicle

Apply to Shift You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
Brake from 'P' drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
depressing the brake pedal.
Door Open Vehicle You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
Not in transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
Park neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
transmission is in park position P and the electronic parking
brake is engaged.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 463

Service Do Not The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the
Required Shift current transmission position because of a malfunction.
Gears If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to neutral position N,
reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Only You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into

Shift to park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
Practical hints
Position X Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
'P' When X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
Vehicle
Is
Stationary
Shift to to Start You have attempted to start the engine while the automatic
P or N Engine transmission was in reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no

Battery n longer charging.
(message X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
appears in
white)
Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is
Battery n discharged. In case of failure of the on-board electrical
(message system, you may not be able change transmission positions.
appears in X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
red) to do so.
X Do not drive any further.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 464

Next in ... The specified maintenance service must be carried out within
Service X days the remaining time range or driving distance (Y page 439).
in ... X Have the maintenance service carried out at an authorized
mls (km) Mercedes-Benz Center.
Service X Due The specified maintenance service must be carried out

(Y page 439).
X Have the maintenance service carried out at an authorized
Service X by X days The specified maintenance service term has been exceeded
Exceeded by XXX (Y page 439).
mls (km) X Have the maintenance service carried out at an authorized
Practical hints
! Failure to have the vehicle maintained in designated times/mileage will result in

accordance with the Maintenance Booklet vehicle damage not covered by the
and maintenance service indicator at the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Tires

Tire Displayed The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
Pressures After TPMS.
Driving A X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
Few
Minutes
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pressure e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Sensors authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 465

Wheel Missing At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
Sensor(s) The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Practical hints
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Pressure Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Pressure or
Please The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
Rectify each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 413).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 416).
Caution At least one tire is deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 508).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 466

Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
Tires below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
Practical hints
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Check The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Brake Pad X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an
Wear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 467
$ ABS and In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ÷, the yellow
ESC ESC OFF warning lamp å, and the yellow ABS indicator
(USA only) Inoperativ lamp ! come on.
J e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
(Canada Oper. malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the
only) Manual hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive
Brake Lights, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE®
Brake are unavailable.
The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
Practical hints
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
(USA only) Currently lamp ! come on.
J Unavailabl The brake system is still functioning normally but temporarily
(Canada e See the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist
only) Oper. system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the
Manual PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are
unavailable.
The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESC is available again.
If the message does not disappear:
responsiveness.
accident.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 468
(USA only) Currently lamp ! come on.
J Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
(Canada e See insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS,
only) Oper. the ESC, the hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the
Manual Adaptive Brake Lights, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the
PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
responsiveness.
Practical hints
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist system,
the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the
PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are operational
again and the message should disappear.
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
accident.
$ EBR, ABS, In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ÷, the yellow
and ESC ESC OFF warning lamp å, and the yellow ABS indicator
(USA only) Inoperativ lamp ! come on and an acoustic warning sounds.
J e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
(Canada Oper. malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the EBP, the
only) Manual ESC, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the PRE-
SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
responsiveness.
accident.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 469
F Please In addition, the red indicator lamp for the electronic parking
Release brake flashes and an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Parking You are driving with the electronic parking brake engaged, or
! Brake you are carrying out an emergency brake maneuver with the
(Canada electronic parking brake (Y page 315).
only) X Release electronic parking brake.
or
or
X Release the handle for electronic parking brake.
F Please In addition, the red indicator lamp for the electronic parking
Release brake flashes, the yellow warning lamp for the electronic
Practical hints
(USA only) Parking parking brake comes on and an acoustic warning sounds.
! Brake The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning. The braking
(Canada effect is reduced.
only) While driving:
X Release the handle for electronic parking brake.
While at a standstill:
X Press handle for electronic parking brake until the warning
message disappears from the multifunction display.
If the warning message does not disappear:
X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P
(Y page 317).
X Protect vehicle from rolling away while parked by using the
collapsible wheel chock from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 450).
possible.
F Turn On In addition, the red indicator lamp for the electronic parking
the brake comes on.
(USA only) Ignition You have tried to release the electronic parking brake, but the
! to ignition was not switched on.
(Canada Release X Switch on the ignition.
only) the
Parking
Brake
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 470
F Parking In addition, the yellow warning lamp for the electronic parking
Brake See brake comes on. The red indicator lamp for the electronic
(USA only) Oper. parking brake may also come on.
! Manual The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning.
(Canada To release:
only) X Pull handle of electronic parking brake.
or
possible.
To engage:
Practical hints
X Press handle for electronic parking brake for at least

10 seconds until the warning message in the multifunction
display disappears.
If the warning message does not disappear:
(Y page 317).
X Protect vehicle from rolling away while parked by using the
collapsible wheel chock from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 450).
possible.
F Parking In addition, the red indicator lamp for the electronic parking
Brake See brake flashes.
(USA only) Oper. The power supply for the electronic parking brake was
! Manual interrupted.
(Canada X Pull handle of electronic parking brake.
only)
or
or
X Press handle for electronic parking brake until the warning
message in the multifunction display disappears.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 471
F Parking In addition, the red indicator lamp for the electronic parking
Brake See brake flashes and the yellow warning lamp for the electronic
(USA only) Oper. parking brake comes on.
! Manual The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning.
(Canada X Switch ignition off and back on again, and engage or release
only) electronic parking brake.
or
possible.
F Parking When you engage or release the electronic parking brake, the
Brake See red indicator lamp for the electronic parking brake flashes for
(USA only)
Practical hints
Oper. approximately 10 seconds. Afterward, it goes out or comes
! Manual on continuously. The yellow warning lamp for the electronic
(Canada parking brake comes on.
only) The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning or overheated
for example due to overvoltage or undervoltage.
possible.
In the event of overvoltage or undervoltage:
X Remove the cause of the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g.
charge the battery or restart the engine.
X Switch ignition off and back on again, and engage or release
electronic parking brake.
If the electronic parking brake still cannot be released:
possible.
If overheated:
X Let vehicle cool down, and do not engage electronic parking
brake during this time.
or
X Switch ignition off and back on again, and engage or release
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 472
F Parking When you engage or release the electronic parking brake, the
Brake red indicator lamp for the electronic parking brake flashes
(USA only) Inoperativ and goes out after approx. 10 seconds. The yellow warning
! e lamp for the electronic parking brake comes on.
(Canada The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning.
only) X Switch ignition off and back on again, and engage or release
If the electronic parking brake cannot be engaged:
(Y page 317).
X Protect vehicle from rolling away while parked by using a
chock from the vehicle tool kit (Y page 450).
Practical hints
possible.
$ Service S 600 and S 65 AMG only:

See Oper. The brake system sensors are malfunctioning. The brake
(USA only) Manual system continues to function normally with full brake force
J boost.
(Canada X Continue driving with added caution.
only) X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake.
only)
X Do not drive any further.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 473
Safety systems
÷ Inoperativ In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ÷ and the yellow
e See ESC OFF warning lamp å come on.
Oper. The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Manual malfunction, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start
assist system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights,
the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are
unavailable.
Practical hints
responsiveness.
accident.
÷ Currently In addition, the yellow ESC warning lamp ÷ and the yellow
Unavailabl ESC OFF warning lamp å come on.
e See The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
Oper. BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist system, the
Manual HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the PRE-SAFE®
system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake available.
X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESC is available again.
responsiveness.
accident.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 474
÷ Currently If the yellow ESC warning lamp ÷ flashes while driving and
Unavailabl this message appears, the Electronic Traction System (ETS/
e See 4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
Oper. wheel brakes.
Manual The BAS PLUS and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are also not
available.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESC warning lamp ÷ goes out.
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e
Practical hints
X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized

6 SRS There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System

Malfunctio (SRS). The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
n Service could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Required X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
6 Front Components of the driver’s supplemental restraint system

Left SRS may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required
6 Front Components of the front passenger’s supplemental restraint

Right SRS system may not work properly.
Required
6 Rear Left Components of the left rear passenger’s supplemental

SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 475
6 Rear Components of the center rear passenger’s supplemental

Center restraint system may not work properly.
SRS X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center.
n Service
Required
6 Rear Components of the right rear passenger’s supplemental

Right SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
6 Left Side The left window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Curtain X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Practical hints
Airbag Mercedes-Benz Center.
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
6 Right The right window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Side X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Curtain Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbag
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 476
Driving systems
¨ Vehicle Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

Rising The vehicle level is too low.
Please X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Wait
display.
Briefly
¨ STOP Car You have started driving although the vehicle level was too
Too Low low.
The vehicle will be raised.
X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Practical hints
display.
¨ STOP Car The AIRMATIC is malfunctioning.

Too Low X Avoid excessive steering maneuvers. The fenders or tires
could otherwise be damaged. Listen for scraping noises.
X Stop and press the vehicle level control switch to select a
higher vehicle level (Y page 343).
possible.
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
¨ Malfunctio The capability of the AIRMATIC system is restricted. This can

n impair the handling.
X Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
À Attention The ATTENTION ASSIST has determined that your

Assist concentration has declined considering certain criteria. In
Time for addition, an acoustic warning sounds.
a rest? X Take a rest if required.
During long trips, take regular and duly rests that allow you
to recover sufficiently.
À Attention The ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning.

Assist X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 477
Á Night The Night View Assist Plus is malfunctioning.

View X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Assist possible.
Inoperativ
e
Á Night The temperature of the Night View Assist Plus camera is too
View high (Y page 356).
Assist X Wait until the message Night View Assist Available
Currently Again appears.
Unavailabl
In addition you can:
e
X Swing the camera cover down (Y page 444).
X Adjust the air distribution of the climate control so that air
Practical hints
flows upward (Y page 212).
Á Night You have tried to switch on Night View Assist Plus, but the
View exterior lamp switch is not set to c or L.
Assist X Turn the exterior lamp switch to c or L
Lights (Y page 298).
Must Be
Set to
AUTO or ON
Á Night You have tried to switch on Night View Assist Plus while the
View automatic transmission was in reverse gear R.
Assist X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P, neutral
Not In position N or drive position D (Y page 317).
Reverse
Gear
Á Night You have tried to switch on Night View Assist Plus, but the
View exterior lamp switch is not set to c or L.
Assist In addition, the automatic transmission is in reverse gear R.
Lights ON
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to c or L
or AUTO,
Not in R (Y page 298).
Gear X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P, neutral
position N or drive position D (Y page 317).
Á Night You have tried to switch on Night View Assist Plus by daylight.
View You can only switch on Night View Assist Plus when it is dark.
Assist
Only When
It Is Dark
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 478
Vehicle
: The trunk is open.

X Close the trunk (Y page 280).
M You are driving with the hood open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 405).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
C You are driving with at least one door open.

The display symbol shows you which doors are open.
X Close all doors.
Practical hints
E Shift to P You have attempted to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-
GO start/stop button and opened the driver’s door with the
automatic transmission not shift to park position P.
(Y page 317).
or
X Close the driver’s door.
Â Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
Â Don’t This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
Â Take Your You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

Key From X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Ignition
Â Obtain a The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be replaced.

New Key X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Â Close You tried to lock the vehicle but not all doors were closed.
Doors to X Close doors and lock the vehicle again.
Lock
Vehicle
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 479
Â Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicle
Â Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are

Key discharged.
Battery X Replace the batteries (Y page 502).
Â Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
appears in X Engage the electronic parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
Practical hints
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
Â Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the electronic parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 285).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Â Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 285).
red)
Â Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 285).
white)
Â Key Being The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is being initialized in the

Initialize vehicle.
d… Please X Wait until the message disappears from the multifunction
Wait display.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 480
Â Remove The KEYLESS-GO system is malfunctioning.

'Start' X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
Button (Y page 285).
and X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Insert Key
¥ Check The water level has dropped to approximately 1.1 US qts

Washer (1.0 l).
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 409).
Engine

Practical hints
+ Check The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 408).
Level See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Oper.
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 481
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Engage the parking brake.
Engine Off
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
Practical hints
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 482
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Check the poly-V-belt.
Engine Off
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Practical hints
cluster.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 483
4 Check All models except S 600 and S 65 AMG:

Engine The engine oil level has dropped to approximately the
Oil at minimum level.
Next X Check the engine oil level (Y page 405) and add engine oil
Refueling
as required (Y page 407).
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
checked for possible leaks.
4 Check S 600 and S 65 AMG only:

Engine The engine oil level is too low.
Oil Level X Add engine oil (Y page 407) and check the engine oil level
(Add 1
(Y page 405).
quart)
X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
(USA only)
Practical hints
Check checked for possible leaks.
Engine
Oil Level
(Add 1
Liter)
(Canada
only)
If the message Check Engine Oil at Next station to refill your engine oil to the required
Refueling (All models except S 600 and level.
S 65 AMG) or Check Engine Oil Level For information on approved engine oils
(Add 1 quart) (Canada: 1 Liter appears contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
while the engine is running and at operating or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped
to approximately the minimum level. ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle
displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have
damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 484
4 Engine S 600 and S 65 AMG only:

Oil Level The measuring system is malfunctioning.
Cannot Be X Have the measuring system checked at an authorized
Measured

Oil Level You have added too much engine oil. There is a risk of
Too High damaging the engine or the catalytic converter.
X Have oil siphoned or drained off. Observe all legal
requirements with respect to its disposal.

Oil Level The engine oil level is too low. There is a danger of engine
Practical hints
Low Stop damage.

Vehicle X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Turn
to do so.
Engine Off
X Add engine oil (Y page 407) and check the engine oil level
(Y page 405).
C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
7 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Loose fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 403).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 485
Lamps
b Active The active headlamps are malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Check The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Reverse possible.
Lamp
or
Check
Right
Reverse
Practical hints
Lamp
b Check The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Center message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Brake Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Check The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Fog X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Lamp possible.
or
Check
Right Fog
Lamp
b Check The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
Sidemarker
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 486
b Check The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Sidemarker possible.
Lamp
or
Check
Rear
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
b Check The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Front substitute bulb is being used.
Practical hints
Parking possible.
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Parking
Lamp
b Check The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left High X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 504).
Beam
or
Check
Right
High Beam
b Check The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

License possible.
Plate Lamp
or
Check
Right
License
Plate Lamp
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 487
b Auto Lamp The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Function automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X Switch off the daytime running lamp mode in the instrument
cluster control system (Y page 234).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 298).
b Check The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Low X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Beam possible.
Practical hints
or
Check
Right Low
Beam
b Check The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb is being

Rear Left used.
Fog Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Please You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Switch opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
Off Lights removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or c
(Y page 298).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
b Check The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Left Tail message will only appear if a critical number of LEDs have
and Brake stopped working. A substitute bulb is being used.
Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Check
Right
Tail and
Brake Lamp
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 488
b Check The left or right corner-illuminating lamp is malfunctioning.

Cornering possible.
Light
or
Check
Right
Cornering
Light
b Check The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Rear Left substitute bulb is being used.
Turn X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Signal possible.
Practical hints
or
Check
Rear
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left Turn possible.
Signal
or
Check
Front
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Left malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Mirror stopped working.
Turn X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Signal possible.
or
Check
Right
Mirror
Turn
Signal
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 489
What to do if … 489
Tires
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Press. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Warning steering and braking maneuvers.
Caution X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 508).
Tire
Malfunctio
n
h Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Tire below the reference value.
Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Practical hints
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if … signal indicator lamps will only come on if

activated. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
Lamps in instrument cluster fails to come on when the ignition is switched
on, have it checked and replaced if necessary.
Notes
If any of the following lamps in the instrument G Warning!
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read
check when switching on the ignition, have the HYBRID Supplemental Operating
the respective bulb checked and replaced if Instructions included in your vehicle literature
necessary. portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in
the instrument cluster come on. The high-
beam headlamp indicator lamp and turn
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 490
490 What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABS The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
indicator lamp malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the
comes on while hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake
the engine is Lights, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are
running. unavailable.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
responsiveness.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
Practical hints

accident.
! The yellow ABS The brake system still functions normally but due to insufficient
indicator lamp power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the
comes on while hill-start assist system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake
the engine is Lights, the PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are
running. unavailable.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
responsiveness.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 491

! The yellow ABS The brake system is still functioning normally but temporarily the
indicator lamp ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist system,
comes on while the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the PRE-SAFE®
the engine is system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are unavailable.
running. The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
responsiveness.
Practical hints
accident.
÷ The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
å malfunction.
! The ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the ESC, the hill-start assist
The yellow ESC warning system, the HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the
lamp, the yellow ESC PRE-SAFE® system, and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are also switched
OFF warning lamp, and off.
the yellow ABS The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
indicator lamp come on systems specified above available.
while the engine is The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
running and an
acoustic warning
sounds. hard braking, reducing steering capability.
responsiveness.
accident.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 492

F (USA only) The electronic parking brake is malfunctioning or defective.
! (Canada only) X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
The red indicator lamp multifunction display (Y page 452).
for the electronic X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
parking brake flashes Center as soon as possible.
and/or the yellow
warning lamp for the
electronic parking
brake is on.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
Practical hints
the engine is running X Engage the electronic parking brake.

and an acoustic
warning sounds.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 493
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
Practical hints
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 494
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

6 The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
activated when needed in an accident, which
Practical hints
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not

be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 495

å The yellow ESC The ESC has been switched off.
OFF warning Risk of accident!
lamp comes on When the ESC is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
while the engine system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is running. is spinning.
X Switch the ESC back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 67).
X If leaving the ESC switched off, adapt your speed and driving to
the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESC cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
Practical hints
÷ The yellow ESC The ESC is not operational due to a malfunction.
å warning lamp The ABS, the BAS, the BAS PLUS, the hill-start assist system, the
and the yellow HOLD function, the Adaptive Brake Lights, the PRE-SAFE® system,
ESC OFF and the PRE-SAFE® Brake are also switched off.
warning lamp
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
come on while
systems specified above available.
the engine is
running. The ATTENTION ASSIST is disabled.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
accident.
÷ The yellow ESC The ESC or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
driving. X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESC.
Exceptions: (Y page 67).
accident.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 496
Driving systems

· DISTRONIC PLUS You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or
or PRE-SAFE® DISTRONIC PLUS or PRE-SAFE® Brake has recognized a stationary
Brake: The red obstacle on your probable line of travel.
distance warning X Apply the brakes immediately.
lamp comes on X
Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
while driving and
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
an acoustic
warning sounds.
Vehicle

Practical hints
The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
Engine

; There may be a malfunction in
The yellow engine Rthe fuel management system
malfunction indicator Rthe ignition system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rthe emission control system
Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
; A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
The yellow engine cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
malfunction indicator X Check the fuel cap (Y page 402).
lamp comes on when X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
the engine is running. X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 497
Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 452).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Canada only:
Low tire
pressure telltale
Practical hints
for the
Advanced TPMS
illuminates
continuously.
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 452).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
G Warning! determine the proper tire inflation pressure

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), for those tires.
should be checked at least once a month As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
when cold and inflated to the inflation been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
pressure recommended by the vehicle system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading pressure telltale when one or more of your
Information placard on the driver’s door B- tires are significantly underinflated.
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
tires of a different size than the size indicated your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
on the Tire and Loading Information placard them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 498
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency remain continuously illuminated. This

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s sequence will continue upon subsequent
handling and stopping ability. Please note that vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire exists. When the malfunction indicator is
maintenance, and it is the driver’s illuminated, the system may not be able to
responsibility to maintain correct tire detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
pressure, even if underinflation has not TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reached the level to trigger illumination of the reasons, including the installation of
TPMS low tire pressure telltale. incompatible replacement or alternate tires
USA only: or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS from functioning properly. Always
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
the system is not operating properly. The replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
the low tire pressure telltale. When the alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
Practical hints
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately 1 minute and then
Lamp in center console

42 The system is malfunctioning.
The front passenger X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
front air bag off Mercedes-Benz Center.
indicator lamp X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
illuminates and follow corrective steps (Y page 452).
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
G Warning! than a small individual on the front passenger

If the 42 indicator lamp seat, do not have any passenger use the front
illuminates and remains illuminated with the passenger seat until the system has been
weight of a typical adult or someone larger repaired.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 499
Unlocking/locking manually 499

42 The system is malfunctioning.
The front passenger X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
front air bag off and check installation of the child seat.
indicator lamp does not X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
illuminate and/or does seat are present.
not remain illuminated X
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
with the weight of a
out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
typical 12-month-old
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
child in a standard child
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
restraint or less on the
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
front passenger seat.
follow corrective steps (Y page 452).
G Warning! Removing the mechanical key
Practical hints
If the 42 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle SmartKey
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door and the trunk using the
mechanical key.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you
Runlock the driver’s door or the trunk with
the mechanical key
and
Ropen the driver’s door or the trunk
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
the starter switch. X Move locking tab : in the direction of
arrow.
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 500
500 Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the driver’s door ! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
it from the trunk lid lock.
Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s X Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door lock. door.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise X Close the front passenger door, the right
Practical hints
to position 1. rear door, and the trunk.

X Pull the door handle past the resistance i If you cannot close the trunk with the
point until the locking knob moves up. remote trunk opening/closing switch,
The driver’s door is unlocked. lower the trunk lid manually and close it
X Pull the door handle once more to open the with hands placed flat on the trunk lid until
driver’s door. it is engaged in its lock.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove X Press the central locking switch
it from the driver’s door lock. (Y page 279).
The locking knobs of the front passenger
Unlocking the trunk door and the rear doors move down.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.8 m)
drained: Press down the locking knobs on
is required to open the trunk lid.
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Check whether the trunk is locked.
X If it is not locked, lock it with the
mechanical key (Y page 283).
Except for the driver’s door, the vehicle
should now be locked.
X Close the driver’s door.
X Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.

X Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
X Insert mechanical key ; into the trunk lid door.
lock.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise ! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
to position 1. sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 501
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints 501
X Exit the vehicle. Head restraints (standard)

X Close the rear left door.
The vehicle is locked.
i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
filler flap.
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active

front head restraints
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints

have been triggered in a rear-end collision, X Push the head restraint cushion by the
they must be reset. bottom, back as far as it will go ;.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front X Push the head restraint cushion down into
Practical hints
head restraints have been triggered when the guide as far as it will go =.
they have been moved forward and cannot be X Fold the head restraint cushion by the top,
adjusted. back firmly until it engages :.
G Warning! X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active active front head restraint for the second
front head restraints checked at an front seat.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a
rear-end collision.
Comfort head restraints
G Warning!
When pushing back the head restraint
cushion, make sure your fingers do not
become caught between the head restraint
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
lead to injury.
! Be careful not to damage upholstery.
i Pressing the head restraint cushion back

requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
X Take reset tool : out of the Mercedes-
back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Benz literature pouch.
Center. X Guide reset tool : into rectangular
opening ; between head restraint cushion
and head restraint cover.
X Press reset tool : downward in direction
of arrow until you hear the head restraint
release mechanism audibly engage.
X Pull out reset tool :.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 502
502 Replacing batteries (SmartKey, remote control, headphone)
X Firmly press the head restraint cushion SmartKey

backward towards the head restraint cover
in direction of arrow = until it engages. When inserting the batteries, make sure they
are clean and free of lint.
X Repeat this procedure for the second front
When replacing batteries, always replace
seat.
both batteries.
X After resetting the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints store reset tool : in the i The required replacement batteries are
Mercedes-Benz literature pouch. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
For information on NECK-PRO active front
head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
head restraints” (Y page 55). CR 2025 or equivalent.
For information on head restraint adjustment, X Remove the mechanical key from the
see “Seats” (Y page 286). SmartKey (Y page 499).
Replacing batteries (SmartKey)

Practical hints
Replacing batteries (SmartKey,

remote control, headphone)
Notes
If the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized
G Warning!
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
of reach of children. opening until battery compartment
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
immediately. shut.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the

environment if disposed of improperly.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method X Remove the battery compartment cover.
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of hand until battery = falls out.
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 503
Replacing batteries (SmartKey, remote control, headphone) 503
X Insert the new battery with the positive X Return battery compartment ; into
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth. SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment X Slide mechanical key : back into the
cover into the housing and press the cover SmartKey.
closed. X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
X Slide mechanical key : back into the well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
Remote control for Rear Seat
Replacing batteries (SmartKey with Entertainment System and/or
KEYLESS-GO) SPLITVIEW
Practical hints
X Insert mechanical key : into opening.
X Press mechanical key : in direction of
arrow.
Battery compartment ; is unlatched.
X Pull battery compartment ; out of the
SmartKey housing.
The remote control contains two batteries of

size AAA, 1.5 V.
X Remove the cover of battery compartment
3 on the back of the remote control by
pressing down the snap-fit hook 2.
X Take out the empty batteries 5.
X Insert the new batteries. Mind the polarity
marks on the batteries.
X Pull out batteries =. Battery on the left:
X Insert new batteries = under contact The positive terminal (+) must face
springs ? with the positive terminal (+) upwards.
side facing up. Battery on the right:
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 504
504 Replacing bulbs
The positive terminal (+) must face Replacing bulbs

downwards.
X Put the cover with engagement hooks ?
Safety notes
first onto the battery compartment and let Safe vehicle operation depends on proper
the snap-fit hook 2 snap in. exterior lighting and signaling to a large
degree.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
Wireless headphone important. Have headlamps checked and
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
headlamp adjustment.
G Warning!
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb.
Practical hints
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.

Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
The headphone contains two batteries of size Rtouch or move it when hot
AAA, 1.5 V. Rdrop the bulb
X Open battery compartment cover : by
Rscratch the bulb
folding it up. When doing so, hold the left
headphone as shown in the illustration to Wear eye and hand protection.
prevent the inserted batteries from falling Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
out. dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
X Take out the empty batteries. lamp and its components. We recommend
X Insert the new batteries. Mind the polarity
that you have such work done by a qualified
technician.
marks on the batteries.
Battery on the left:
G Warning!
The positive terminal (+) must face
The bulbs in the tail lamps cannot be replaced
upwards.
individually. The tail lamp bulbs are under
Battery on the right: pressure and could explode during an attempt
The positive terminal (+) must face to replace them.
downwards.
If the tail lamps are malfunctioning, have them
X Close the battery compartment.
replaced at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The state indicator LED lights green when Center.
you switch on the headphone and the
batteries were inserted correctly.
i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
highly demanding process, we recommend
to have them replaced at an authorized
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are

fogged up on the inside as a result of high
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 505
Replacing bulbs 505
humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with

the lights on should clear up the fogging.
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Bi-Xenon headlamps (vehicles with halogen Type
daytime running lamps) : High-beam spot: H7 55 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps (vehicles with LED Type
daytime running lamps) : High-beam spot45: H11 55 W
; Infrared light45 (Night View Assist Plus):
H11 55 W
Notes on bulb replacement G Observe Safety notes, see page 504.

ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could with the specified watt rating.
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and to prevent short circuits.
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when
Benz Center.
handling bulbs.
45 Because the driver’s side headlamp is difficult to access, have its bulbs replaced by an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 506
506 Replacing bulbs
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and X Insert the new bulb into bulb socket ;.
grease. X Insert bulb socket ;.
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come Driver’s side headlamp: Wire = is guided
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz to the upper right.
Center. Passenger-side headlamp: Wire = is
i Mercedes-Benz recommends using guided to the lower left.
Longlife (LL) bulbs. X Turn bulb socket ; clockwise.
Handle ? of bulb socket ; is in a
horizontal position.
Replacing bulbs for front lamps X Align housing cover : and turn it
clockwise.
G Warning!
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon High-beam spot (vehicles with LED
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or daytime running lamps)
or
Practical hints
repair the lamp and its components. It is

recommended to have such work done by a infrared light (Night View Assist Plus)
qualified technician. i To replace bulbs of the driver’s side
Before you start to replace a bulb for a front headlamp, the washer fluid reservoir in the
lamp, do the following: engine compartment must be released.
Have such work performed at an authorized
$.
X Open the hood (Y page 404).
High-beam spot (vehicles with halogen

daytime running lamps)
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket ; counterclockwise and
pull it out.
X Press both tabs to the left and right of bulb
socket ; and pull the bulb out of bulb
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
socket ;.
and remove it.
X Insert and press the new bulb into bulb
X Turn bulb socket ; counterclockwise and
socket ; until it engages.
pull it out.
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket ;.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 507
Replacing wiper blades 507
X Insert bulb socket ; into the guide on the impact from the tensioning spring could
headlamp. crack the windshield.
Wire = is guided to the lower right. Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
X Turn bulb socket ; clockwise. windshield glass without a wiper blade
Wire = is guided to the lower left. inserted.
X Align housing cover : and turn it Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
clockwise. this work carried out at an authorized
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps

Placing wiper arms in vertical position
Tail lamp unit
The tail lamps are equipped with HiP bulbs
and LEDs. Have them replaced at an
Practical hints
Replacing wiper blades
Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and Wiper arms in vertical position
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
X Make sure the hood is fully closed.
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the Vehicles with SmartKey
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
injury.
position 1.
G Warning! X Turn the combination switch to wiper
Wiper blades are components that are subject setting °.

to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades X With wiper arms in vertical position, turn
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall. the SmartKey in the starter switch to
Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped position 0.
properly. As a result, you may not be able to X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
observe surrounding traffic conditions and switch.
could cause an accident.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
! To avoid damage to the hood, the wiper
X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
arms should only be folded forward when
in the vertical position. electronics have status 1.
X Turn the combination switch to wiper
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is setting °.
folded forward.
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arm back. If released, the force of the
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 508
508 Flat tire
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Flat tire

repeatedly until the windshield wipers
start. Safety notes
G Warning!
when the wiper arms are in a vertical
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
position.
different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
Removing wiper blades mounted. Adapt your driving style
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. accordingly.
They could tear. The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
into place. not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Practical hints
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESC when a spare wheel
is mounted.
X Turn the wiper blade in direction of Preparing the vehicle

arrow :.
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
retainer in the direction of arrow ;. flat surface.
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
Installing wiper blades
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
X Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm X Engage the electronic parking brake.
until it locks in place. X Shift the automatic transmission into park
X Rotate the wiper blade into a position position P.
parallel to the wiper arm. X Turn off the engine.
X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
windshield. switch.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back. or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades position 0, same as with the SmartKey
may cause windshield damage. removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed again.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 509
Flat tire 509
Open doors only when conditions are safe bracket. The jack must always be vertical
to do so. when in use, especially on inclines or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the declines.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
starter switch. briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a performing maintenance work under the
safe distance from the roadway. Open vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
doors only when conditions are safe to do jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
so. change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
Mounting the spare wheel away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
Introduction capacity jackstands before working under the
X Prepare the vehicle as described vehicle.
Practical hints
(Y page 508). Always make sure the electronic parking
X Take the following out of the vehicle: brake is engaged. In addition, block the
Rspare wheel wheels with wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects before raising the vehicle with the
Rjack
jack. Do not disengage the electronic parking
Rvehicle tool kit brake while the vehicle is raised.
For information on where to find the Make sure that the ground on which the
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?” vehicle is standing and where you place the
(Y page 450) and (Y page 451). jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
factory-equipped with the tools required for a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
change are specific to your vehicle. not be able to achieve its load-bearing
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz capacity if it is not at its full height.
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle. This section describes the Never start the engine when the vehicle is
wheel change using the tools approved and raised.
recommended for your vehicle. Also observe the notes on the jack.
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

Lifting the vehicle
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
G Warning! sizeable objects.
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
which has been specifically approved by chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. (Y page 450). For information on setting up
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the collapsible wheel chock, see
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built (Y page 450).
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 510
510 Flat tire
When changing a wheel on a level surface: If you do not position the jack correctly in the
X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
object in front of and another wheel chock the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
or other sizeable object behind the wheel others.
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed. ! Do not position the jack on the body of
the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
the vehicle.
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a hill:
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
G Warning!
Practical hints
Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on

slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
others.
X Place jack = on firm ground.
X Position jack = under take-up
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is
parked on an incline.
X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do

not yet remove the wheel bolts
(approximately one full turn with wheel
wrench :).
The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = is
of the rear wheel housings. fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
jack base evenly meets the ground.
G Warning!
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 511
Flat tire 511
Removing the wheel Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and

remove it.
X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment Wheel bolt : must be used for light alloy rims
Practical hints
bolt :. and the Minispare wheel with light alloy rim.
X Remove the remaining bolts. Wheel bolt ; must be used for the Minispare
wheel with steel rim. The wheel bolts for the
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
Minispare wheel with steel rim are located in
This could result in damage to the wheel the trunk with the Minispare wheel.
bolts and wheel hub threads.
! Wheel bolts : must be used when
X Remove the wheel. mounting the Minispare wheel with light
alloy rim. The use of any wheel bolts other
Attaching the spare wheel than wheel bolts : for the Minispare wheel
with light alloy rim will damage the vehicle’s
G Warning! brakes.
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
Wheel bolts ; must be used when
or rusted.
mounting the Minispare wheel with steel
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts. rim. The use of any wheel bolts other than
Damaged wheel hub threads should be wheel bolts ; for the Minispare wheel with
repaired immediately. Do not continue to steel rim will damage the vehicle’s brakes.
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call G Warning!
Roadside Assistance. Make sure to use the original length wheel
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened bolts when remounting the original wheel
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off. after it has been repaired.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel
use the correct wheel bolts.
hub.
G Warning! ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. against hub and hold it there while
Other wheel bolts may come loose. installing first wheel bolt.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 512
512 Battery
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of

110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded

in (storage position), see (Y page 451).
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
in the designated storage space.
For information on storing the spare wheel
after it has been replaced by a regular road
wheel, see (Y page 451).
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment i Do not restart the tire inflation pressure
bolt and push it on. monitor until a full size wheel/tire with
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
functioning sensor has been placed back
into service on the vehicle.
slightly.
Practical hints
X Unscrew the alignment bolt.

X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it Battery
slightly.
Safety notes
Lowering the vehicle A battery should always be sufficiently
charged in order to achieve its rated service
X Lower the vehicle by turning the crank
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
counterclockwise until the vehicle is
maintenance intervals.
resting fully on its own weight.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
X Remove the jack.
distance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, Instructions included in your vehicle literature
following the diagonal sequence illustrated portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe necessary safety information and warning for
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). the operation of your vehicle.
Have the tightening torque checked after Observe all safety instructions and
changing a wheel. The wheels could come precautions when handling automotive
batteries.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 513
Battery 513
Risk of explosion. flush affected area with water and seek

medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Fire, open flames and
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
smoking are prohibited
improper connection of jumper cables,
when handling batteries.
smoking etc.
Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Do G Warning!
not allow it to come into Do not place metal objects on the battery as
contact with skin, eyes or this could result in a short circuit.
clothing.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
Wear suitable protective of acid burns in the event of an accident.
clothing, especially gloves,
Take care that you do not become statically
apron and faceguard.
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
Wear eye protection.
Practical hints
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
Rinse any acid spills also should not pull or push the battery over
immediately with clear carpets or other synthetic materials.
water. Contact a physician Never touch the battery first. First touch the
if necessary. outside body of the vehicle in order to release
Keep children away. any possible electrostatic charges.
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
battery could explode if touched due to
Follow the instructions in electrostatic charge or due to spark
this Operator’s Manual. formation.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead

A battery contains materials that can harm Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
the environment if disposed of improperly. A “fleece” battery.
large 12 V storage battery contains lead. Such batteries do not require topping-up of
Recycling of the battery is the preferred the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
method of disposal. Many states (USA only) therefore do not have cell caps and the
or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of battery cover is non-removable. Do not
batteries to accept the old battery for attempt to open the battery as otherwise
recycling. the battery will be damaged.
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of
G Warning!
the electrolyte level. They cannot be
Failure to follow these instructions can result opened to check the electrolyte level.
in severe injury or death. However, the battery condition must be
Never lean over batteries while connecting. checked periodically by performing a
You might get injured. battery conductance test. Refer to
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, testing intervals.
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 514
514 Jump starting
The factory-equipped battery may only be charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is

replaced with a battery that being used. Gases may escape during
Rhas the same security features charging and could cause an explosion that
may result in personal injury, paint damage or
Ris of identical size
corrosion.
Ris of identical voltage An accessory battery charge unit specially
Ris of identical capacity adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
! As any other battery, the battery may available. It permits the charging of the
discharge if you do not operate the vehicle battery in its installed position. Contact an
for an extended period of time. Have the authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
battery disconnected at a qualified information and availability.
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Charge battery in accordance with the
Center in such a case. You may also separate instructions for the accessory
connect an accessory battery charge unit battery charger.
Practical hints
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for

your vehicle model to maintain the battery Have the battery charged at an authorized
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
Benz Center for further information. battery yourself, follow the operating
instructions for your charging device.
The battery, the battery ventilation hose
and the lateral plug must always be Only use a battery charge unit with a
securely installed when the vehicle is in maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
operation. X Charge battery in accordance with the
instructions of the battery charger
! Switch off the engine and switch off the manufacturer.
vehicle’s internal electrical functions
before you disconnect or remove the
battery’s terminal clamps. You could Jump starting
otherwise destroy electronic assemblies
such as the generator.
G Warning!
Remove SmartKey from starter switch Failure to follow these directions will cause
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the damage to the electronic components, and
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0) can lead to a battery explosion and severe
when you turn off the engine and no longer injury or death.
require any electrical consumers. The vehicle Never lean over batteries while connecting or
then uses very little power and the battery is jump starting. You might get injured.
spared.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
If the battery is discharged, you must use the allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
mechanical key to unlock the vehicle. skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
Charging the battery
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
G Warning! which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Never charge a battery while still installed in flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
the vehicle unless the accessory battery
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 515
Jump starting 515
improper connection of jumper cables, If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
smoking, etc. started with jumper cables and the fully
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can charged battery of another vehicle or an
result in it exploding, causing personal injury. equivalent starter pack. Observe the
following:
Read all instructions before proceeding.
RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
G Warning! vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
HYBRID vehicles: It is imperative that you read of the other vehicle, provide jump start
the HYBRID Supplemental Operating power by an external battery or starter
Instructions included in your vehicle literature pack.
portfolio. You may otherwise not receive all RJump starting should only be performed
necessary safety information and warning for when the engine and catalytic converter
the operation of your vehicle. are cold.
RDo not jump start the engine or charge the
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
battery if the battery is frozen. Let the
Practical hints
otherwise seriously damage the automatic battery thaw out first.
transmission which is not covered by the
ROnly jump start from batteries with the
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
! Jump starting should only be performed with a more powerful battery could damage
using the jump-start terminals located in the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
the engine compartment. damage will not be covered by the
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
attempts. ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
Do not attempt to start the engine using a cross-section and insulated terminal
battery quick-charge unit. clamps.
If the engine does not run after several RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
checked at the nearest authorized that move when an engine is started or
Mercedes-Benz Center. running.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by RShould the battery be drained completely,
repeated failed starting attempts may let the donating power source charge the
damage the catalytic converter and may vehicle for several minutes before
present a fire risk. reattempting the starting process.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
loose or missing insulation.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery. X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
X Open the hood (Y page 404).
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 516
516
Practical hints Towing the vehicle
Position A represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from positive
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals : and ;.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
X Have the battery checked at the nearest
X Connect positive terminal : of charged authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
battery A with positive terminal ; with a
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
terminal : of charged battery A first. Towing the vehicle
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
Safety notes
battery A and run at idle speed.
X Connect negative terminal = of charged G Warning!
battery A with negative terminal ? with The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,
negative terminal = of charged battery deactivate the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
A first. PLUS if the vehicle is to be towed.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
discharged battery and run at idle speed. be transported with all wheels off the ground
You can now turn on the electrical using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
consumers. Do not switch on the equipment. This method is preferable to other
headlamps under any circumstances. types of towing.
X Remove the jumper cables from negative
terminals = and ? first. G Warning!
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 517
Towing the vehicle 517
necessary safety information and warning for ! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
the operation of your vehicle. recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! To prevent damage during transport, do
i If the battery is disconnected or
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
suspension parts. discharged
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
If circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle switch
may be towed with all wheels on the ground Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
or front axle raised (except vehicles with park position P
4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the For more information see “Battery”
vehicle moved to a safe location where the (Y page 512) or “Jump starting”
recommended towing methods can be (Y page 514).
employed.
! Before towing the vehicle observe the
Practical hints
following instructions: Installing towing eye bolt
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could Depending on whether you are towing a
otherwise seriously damage the vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
automatic transmission which is not bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited which are located behind covers on each
Warranty. bumper.
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment. The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
Towing with sling-type equipment over vehicle tool kit, located underneath the trunk
bumpy roads will damage radiator and floor (Y page 450).
supports. X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
RTowing of the vehicle should only be

done using the properly installed towing Removing cover in front bumper
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
frame or suspension parts.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the

! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage arrow.
to the chassis alignment. X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 518
518 Towing the vehicle
Removing cover in rear bumper X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
G Warning! clockwise.
In order to avoid possible serious burns or or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
is extremely hot.
towing eye bolt.
Removing towing eye bolt

X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Reinstalling cover: Fit cover :
(Y page 517) and snap it into place.
Practical hints
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel

wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow. Towing with all wheels on the ground
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt. G Warning!
If circumstances require towing the vehicle
Fixing towing eye bolt with all wheels on the ground, always tow with
a tow bar if:
Rthe engine will not run
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
starter switch position 2.
Example illustration front bumper
G Warning!
X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so With the engine not running, there is no power
equipped, the wheel wrench from the assistance for the brake and steering
vehicle tool kit (Y page 450). systems. In this case, it is important to keep
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into in mind that a considerably higher degree of
threaded hole to its stop. effort is necessary to brake and steer the
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 519
Fuses 519
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. X Switch off the automatic central locking
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the (Y page 210).
brake pedal and keep it pressed. X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
X Shift the automatic transmission into (Y page 302).
neutral position N. X Make sure the automatic transmission
X Release the brake pedal. remains in neutral position N. Observe
X If engaged, release the electronic parking instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
brake. position N” (Y page 319).
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
(Y page 302). Because the ESC operates automatically,
! Keep in mind that it is important to have
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
the ignition switched on. Removing the
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
SmartKey from the starter switch or
position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
opening a front door with the ignition
Practical hints
switched off will automatically shift the
automatic transmission into park position Active braking action through the ESC may
P. otherwise seriously damage the brake
system which is not covered by the
! The vehicle may be towed only for Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). ! Keep in mind that it is important for the
SmartKey to be left in starter switch with
i While being towed with the hazard the ignition switched off. As soon as the
warning flasher in use, use the combination SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch in the usual manner to signal turns. switch the automatic transmission will shift
Only the selected turn signal will operate. to park position P.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again.
Fuses
Introduction
Towing with front axle raised
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
! The vehicle may be towed only for switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
If a fuse is blown, the components and
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
systems secured by that fuse will stop
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with operating.
one axle raised. Doing so could damage the G Warning!
transfer case, which is not covered by the Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. with the specified amperage for the system in
All wheels must be on or off the ground. question and do not attempt to repair or
Observe instructions for towing the vehicle bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
with all wheels on the ground. approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
and/or cause damage to electrical
components and/or systems. Have the cause
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 520
520 Fuses
determined and remedied by an authorized

! Switch off the vehicle’s internal electrical

functions when you are working on the
fuses.
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
the amperage recommended in the fuse
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad Fuse box on driver’s side
to advise you on this subject.
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the

cause determined and rectified by an
The fuse chart is located in the trunk with the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 450). The fuse chart
explains the fuse allocation and fuse
amperages. Fuse box on passenger side
X Open the respective door.
Before replacing fuses X Using your hands, pull cover : in direction
X Engage the electronic parking brake. of arrow and remove it.

X Make sure the automatic transmission is in X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into the
park position P. opening at the front.

The transmission position indicator in the ! The fuse box cover must be properly
multifunction display should be on P. positioned as described. Otherwise,
X Switch off all electrical consumers. moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
X Turn off the engine. and possibly impair fuse operation.
Fuse box in passenger compartment

! Do not use sharp objects such as a
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
box cover or the dashboard.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 521
Fuses 521
Fuse box in the rear passenger X Loosen screws : with crank.

compartment X Remove bracket =.
X Remove fuse box cover ;.
X Installing cover: Attach fuse box
cover ;.
X Attach bracket =.
X Tighten screws : with crank.
! The fuse box cover must be properly

positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Opening: Swing down center armrest.
X Open cover behind center armrest.
Practical hints
X Pull cover : forward in direction of arrow.
X Closing: Press cover : backward and
engage.
! Make sure the seal in the cover is not
damaged during opening or closing.
Fuse box in engine compartment Example illustration fuse box on passenger side
The fuse boxes are located in the engine X Removing cover: Press retaining lugs :.
compartment on the driver’s and passenger
X Remove fuse box cover ;.
side.
X Open the hood. X Installing cover: Attach fuse box
cover ;.
X Press fuse box cover ; down.
! The fuse box cover must be properly

positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
Fuse box on driver’s side Emergency engine shutdown

X S 63 AMG: Remove the control box above If the engine cannot be turned off as
the fuse box. described (Y page 316), you may use the
X Removing cover: Take the crank from the following emergency procedure.
Operator’s Manual pouch.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 522
522 Fuses
X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit

(Y page 450).
X Find row “Emergency engine shutdown” in
the fuse chart table to identify the fuses
that have to be removed as well as their
locations.
X Remove the respective fuses.
Practical hints
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 523
523

Parts service ..................................... 524
Warranty coverage ........................... 524
Identification labels .......................... 524
Vehicle specification S 450
4MATIC (221.084) ............................. 527
Technical data
(221.171) ........................................... 527
4MATIC (221.186) ............................. 528
(221.176) ........................................... 529
Vehicle specification S 63 AMG
(221.177) ........................................... 530
Vehicle specification S 65 AMG
(221.179) ........................................... 531
Rims and tires ................................... 532
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 537
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 524
524 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty
i This Operator’s Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
Technical data
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon

Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
distribution centers provide quick and
reliable parts service.
Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 525
Identification labels 525
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can

be found
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door
B-pillar
Rembossed underneath a cover behind the
rear center armrest (Y page 525)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
Technical data
(Y page 525)
Rear center armrest

X Fold down the rear center armrest.
The VIN is embossed underneath a cover
behind the rear center armrest.
X Open the cover.
VIN ? is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)

; VIN
= Paintwork code
All models except AMG vehicles

A Engine number (engraved on engine)
B VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
C Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
; VIN
= Paintwork code
i Data shown on certification label are for

illustration purposes only. These data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
data shown in the illustration. Refer to
certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 526
526 Identification labels
i When ordering parts, please specify

vehicle identification and engine number.
Technical data
AMG vehicles
A Engine number (engraved on engine)
B VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
C Emission control information label,
includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 527
Vehicle specification S 550 (221.171) 527
Vehicle specification S 450 4MATIC Electrical system S 450 4MATIC

(221.084)
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 6A
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Bosch Y 7 MPP33
special bodies and special equipment.
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Technical data
i The S 450 4MATIC is available in Canada electrode gap
only.
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
Engine S 450 4MATIC tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine, type 273
Main dimensions S 450 4MATIC
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection Overall vehicle 200.1 in (5 100 mm)
length
No. of cylinders 8
Overall vehicle 83.5 in (2 120 mm)
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
width47
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm)
Total piston 284.6 cu in height
displacement (4 663 cm3) Wheelbase 119.5 in (3 035 mm)
Compression 10.5:1 Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm)
ratio
Track, rear 63.2 in (1 606 mm)
Output acc. to 335 hp/6 000 rpm
SAE J 134946 (250 kW/6 000 rpm) Turning circle 38.7 ft (11.8 m)
Maximum torque 339 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 700 - 5 000 rpm Weights S 450 4MATIC
(460 Nm/
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
2 700 - 5 000 rpm)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
speed
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Vehicle specification S 550 (221.171)
Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Electrical system S 450 4MATIC Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Alternator 14 V/180 A
i The S 550 is available in the USA only.
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW
46 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
47 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 528
528 Vehicle specification S 550 4MATIC (221.186)
Engine S 550 Main dimensions S 550

Engine, type 273 Overall vehicle 206.7 in (5 250 mm)
length
gasoline injection Overall vehicle 83.5 in (2 120 mm)
width49
No. of cylinders 8
Technical data
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)

height
Wheelbase 124.6 in (3 165 mm)
Total piston 333.3 cu in
Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm)
displacement (5 461 cm3)
Compression 10.7:1
ratio Turning circle 40.0 ft (12.2 m)
SAE J 134948 (285 kW/6 000 rpm) Weights S 550
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/3 000 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 (530 Nm/3 000 rpm)
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Vehicle specification S 550 4MATIC
(221.186)
Electrical system S 550 Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Alternator 14 V/180 A special bodies and special equipment.
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW Engine S 550 4MATIC
Battery 12 V/95 Ah Engine, type 273
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 6A Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,

gasoline injection
Bosch Y 7 MPP33
No. of cylinders 8
electrode gap Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Stroke 3.56 in (90.50 mm)

tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) Total piston 333.3 cu in
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 529
Vehicle specification S 600 (221.176) 529
Engine S 550 4MATIC Main dimensions S 550 4MATIC

Compression 10.5:1 Wheelbase 124.6 in (3 165 mm)
ratio
Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm)
(285 kW/6 000 rpm) Track, rear 63.2 in (1 606 mm)
SAE J 134950
Turning circle 40.0 ft (12.2 m)
Technical data
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm/ Weights S 550 4MATIC
2 800 - 4 800 rpm)
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
speed Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8

Poly-V-belt 2 404 mm Vehicle specification S 600 (221.176)

Electrical system S 550 4MATIC vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Alternator 14 V/180 A
Engine S 600
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
Engine, type 275
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 6A
Bosch Y 7 MPP33 gasoline injection
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) No. of cylinders 12
electrode gap
Bore 3.23 in (82.00 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Total piston 336.4 cu in
Main dimensions S 550 4MATIC
Compression 9.0:1
ratio
length
SAE J 134952 (380 kW/5 000 rpm)
width51
height
51 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 530
530 Vehicle specification S 63 AMG (221.177)
Engine S 600 Weights S 600

Maximum torque 612 lb-ft/ Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 1 800 - 3 500 rpm
(830 Nm/ Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
1 800 - 3 500 rpm)
Maximum engine 5 950 rpm Vehicle specification S 63 AMG
Technical data
speed (221.177)
Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-
6-7-2-11-4-9 The quoted data apply only to the standard
Poly-V-belt 2 370 mm Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Electrical system S 600 Engine S 63 AMG
Alternator 14 V/220 A Engine, type 156
Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
No. of cylinders 8
Spark plugs, type NGK IFR 6Q-G
Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
electrode gap Stroke 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 22 lb-ft Total piston 378.8 cu in
tightening torque (20 - 30 Nm) displacement (6 208 cm3)
Compression 11.3:1
Main dimensions S 600 ratio
Overall vehicle 206.7 in (5 250 mm) Output acc. to 518 hp/6 800 rpm
length SAE J 134954 (386 kW/6 800 rpm)
Overall vehicle 83.5 in (2 120 mm) Maximum torque 465 lb-ft/5 200 rpm
width53 acc. to SAE J 1349 (630 Nm/5 200 rpm)
Overall vehicle 58.2 in (1 479 mm) Maximum engine 7 200 rpm
height speed
Wheelbase 124.6 in (3 165 mm) Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm) Poly-V-belt 2 360 mm
Turning circle 40.0 ft (12.2 m)

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 531
Vehicle specification S 65 AMG (221.179) 531
Electrical system S 63 AMG Engine S 65 AMG

Alternator 14 V/220 A Engine, type 275
Starter motor 12 V/2.1 kW Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
No. of cylinders 12
Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10
Technical data
Bore 3.25 in (82.60 mm)
electrode gap Stroke 3.66 in (93.00 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Total piston 364.9 cu in
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) displacement (5 980 cm3)
Compression 9.0:1
Main dimensions S 63 AMG ratio
Overall vehicle 207.1 in (5 261 mm) Output acc. to 603 hp/
length SAE J 134956 4 800 - 5 100 rpm
(450 kW/
Overall vehicle 83.5 in (2 120 mm) 4 800 - 5 100 rpm)
width55
Overall vehicle 58.7 in (1 490 mm) acc. to SAE J 1349 2 000 - 4 000 rpm
height (1 000 Nm/
Wheelbase 124.6 in (3 165 mm) 2 000 - 4 000 rpm)
Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm) Maximum engine 5 950 rpm

speed
Firing order 1-12-5-8-3-10-
Turning circle 40.0 ft (12.2 m) 6-7-2-11-4-9
Weights S 63 AMG
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Electrical system S 65 AMG
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Alternator 14 V/220 A
Vehicle specification S 65 AMG Battery 12 V/95 Ah
(221.179)
Spark plugs, type NGK IFR 6Q-G
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all

Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 532
532 Rims and tires
Electrical system S 65 AMG Benz can be identified by finding the

following on the tire’s sidewall:
Spark plugs, 0.028 in (0.7 mm) RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
electrode gap equipment tires
Spark plugs, 15 - 22 lb-ft Using tires other than those approved by
tightening torque (20 - 30 Nm) Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
Technical data
Limited Warranty.
Main dimensions S 65 AMG
Overall vehicle
! Using tires other than those approved by
207.1 in (5 261 mm)
length Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental
effects, such as
Overall vehicle 83.5 in (2 120 mm) Rpoor handling characteristics
width57 Rincreased noise
Overall vehicle 58.7 in (1 490 mm) Rincreased fuel consumption
height
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
Wheelbase 124.6 in (3 165 mm) Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit
dimensional variations and different tire
Track, front 63.0 in (1 600 mm) deformation characteristics that could
Track, rear 63.2 in (1 606 mm) cause them to come into contact with the
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the
Turning circle 40.0 ft (12.2 m) tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is

Weights S 65 AMG
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Center. The Tire and Loading Information
placard with the recommended tire
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) inflation pressures for cold tires is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
Rims and tires driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
Notes
condition can be found on the tire inflation
! Only use tires which have been tested and pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
to provide best possible performance in checked regularly and should only be
conjunction with the driving safety systems adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the ESC. manufacturer’s maintenance
Tires specially developed for your vehicle recommendation included with the vehicle.
and tested and approved by Mercedes- For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 411).

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 533
Rims and tires 533
i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must available as standard or optional factory
be equipped equipment, but can be purchased from an
Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
each axle (left and right) Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all require the purchase of rims of the
around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires, or recommended size for use with these
all-season tires etc. winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
Technical data
and the standard or optional factory-
i The following pages also list the approved equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle your vehicle. For more information contact
with winter tires. Winter tires are not an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Same size tires
S 450 4MATIC58 S 600

S 55059
S 550 4MATIC
18" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2 8.5 J x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm) 1.69 in (43 mm)
All-season tires60 255/45 R18 99H M+S —
Winter tires60,61,62 255/45 R18 99V 255/45 R18 99V

M+Si M+Si
S 450 4MATIC58 S 600

S 550 4MATIC
19" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2
All-season tires60 255/40 R19 100V XL —
(Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires60,61,62 255/40 R19 100V XL 255/40 R19 100V XL
(Extra Load) M+Si (Extra Load) M+Si
58 Canada only.
59 USA only.
60 Radial-ply tires.
61 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
62 Not available as factory equipment.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 534
534 Rims and tires
S 450 4MATIC (AMG Sport Package)58

S 550 4MATIC (AMG Sport Package)
19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm)
All-season tires60 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load) M+S
Technical data
Winter tires60,61,62 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load) M+Si
S 63 AMG
S 63 AMG (Performance Package)
S 65 AMG
19" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
Winter tires60,61,62 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load) M+Si
58 Canada only.
60 Radial-plytires.
61 For use with snow chains contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
62 Not available as factory equipment.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 535
Rims and tires 535
Mixed size tires
S 55063
S 60063
18" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
Technical data
All-season tires64 255/45 R18 99H M+S
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 18 H2
All-season tires64,65 275/45 R18 103H M+S
S 55063
S 600
19" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
All-season tires64 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load)
M+S
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
All-season tires64,65 275/40 R19 101V M+S
S 550 (AMG Sport Package)

S 600 (AMG Sport Package)66
19" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2
All-season tires64 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load)
M+S
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2
All-season tires64,65 275/40 R19 101V M+S
63 USA only.
64 Radial-ply
tires.
65 Mustnot be used with snow chains.
66 Canada only.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 536
536 Rims and tires
S 63 AMG
S 65 AMG
Winter tires64,67 255/40 R19 100V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si
Technical data

Winter tires64,65,67 275/40 R19 105V XL (Extra Load)
M+Si
S 63 AMG
S 63 AMG (Performance Package)
S 65 AMG
Summer tires64 255/35 ZR20 XL (Extra Load)
Summer tires64,65 275/35 ZR20 XL (Extra Load)
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
64 Radial-plytires.
67 Notavailable as factory equipment.
65 Must not be used with snow chains.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 537
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 537
All models S 63 AMG

(except AMG vehicles) S 63 AMG (Performance Package)
S 65 AMG
Rim (steel) 4.5 B x 19 H2 —
Rim (light alloy) — 4.5 B x 19 H2
Technical data
Minispare tire68 T 155/70 R19 113M T 155/70 R19 113M
Recommended tire 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar)
inflation pressure
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil S 450 4MATIC69 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine
filter S 55070 oils
S 550 4MATIC
S 600 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
S 65 AMG
S 63 AMG71 9.9 US qt (9.35 l)
68 Must not be used with snow chains.

69 Canada only.
70 USA only.
71 Engine with oil cooler.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 538
538 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

lubricants, etc.
Automatic S 450 4MATIC69 10.6 US qt (10.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission S 550 4MATIC Transmission Fluid
S 55070 9.8 US qt (9.3 l)

Technical data
S 600 7.9 US qt (7.5 l)

S 63 AMG72 9.25 US qt (8.75 l)
S 65 AMG 9.2 US qt (8.7 l)
Rear axle S 450 4MATIC69 1.9 US qt (1.8 l) Hypoid gear oil
S 550 4MATIC (SAE 85W-90)
S 55070 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)

S 600 2.1 US qt (2.0 l)
S 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
S 65 AMG 1.7 US qt (1.6 l)
Hydraulic S 55070 4.2 US qt (4.0 l) MB ABC Fluid
system for S 600
active body
S 63 AMG
control (ABC)
S 65 AMG
Power steering S 450 4MATIC69 approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering
S 55070 Fluid (Chevron
Texaco PSF 9109)
S 550 4MATIC
S 63 AMG
S 600 approx 1.3 US qt (1.2 l)
S 65 AMG
Brake system All models 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling S 450 4MATIC69 approx. 15.6 US qt (14.8 l) MB 325.0
system, Anticorrosion/
vehicles S 55070 approx. 12.2 US qt (11.5 l) Antifreeze
without rear S 550 4MATIC
climate control
69 Canada only.
70 USA only.
72 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 539

lubricants, etc.
Cooling S 450 4MATIC69 approx. 17.1 US qt (16.2 l)
system,
vehicles with S 55070 approx. 13.8 US qt (13.1 l)
rear climate S 550 4MATIC
control
Technical data
S 600 approx. 15.9 US qt (15.0 l)
S 65 AMG
S 63 AMG approx. 11.8 US qt (11.2 l)
Low S 600 approx. 2.8 US qt (2.6 l)
temperature
cooling system S 65 AMG approx. 3.3 US qt (3.1 l)
Fuel tank All models 23.8 US gal (90.0 l) Premium unleaded

gasoline (Minimum
Fuel tank S 450 4MATIC69 approx. 2.9 US gal (11.0 l) Posted Octane 91
reserve S 55070 [Avg. of
S 550 4MATIC 96 RON/86 MON])
S 600
S 63 AMG approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l)
S 65 AMG
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models 6.9 US qt (6.5 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate73
system (Y page 544)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 544)
Approved engine oils For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Engine oils are specifically tested for their Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
suitability in our engines and durability for our
service intervals. Therefore, only use ! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
approved engine oils and oil filters required specification other than those expressly
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
69 Canada only.
70 USA only.
73 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 540
required for the Maintenance System, or Viscosity grades for engine oils
changing of oil and oil filter at change
Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
intervals longer than those called for by the
according to the lowest air temperature
Maintenance System will result in engine or
expected before the next oil change.
emission control system damage not
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
Technical data
recommendations for scheduled oil

changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Model Engine, MB sheet Engine oil additives
type number
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
S 450 4MATIC74 273 229.5 They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil
S 55075 273 229.5
additives are not covered by the Mercedes-
S 550 4MATIC 273 229.5 Benz Limited Warranty.
S 600 275 229.5

S 63 AMG 156 229.576 Air conditioning refrigerant
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
S 65 AMG 275 229.5
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
system.
i MB sheet numbers are printed on the ! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based
outside of oil containers. lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the
system will occur.
Brake fluid
G Warning!
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced
through the absorption of moisture from the
atmosphere.
74 Canada only.
75 USA only.
76 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 541
Under extremely strenuous operating light load such as two persons and no
conditions, this moisture content can lead to luggage.
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
reducing the system’s efficiency. accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced is fully loaded or operating in
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance mountainous terrain.
Booklet for replacement interval.
Technical data
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes- Fuel requirements
Benz Center will provide you with additional Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
information. octane number (posted at the pump) must be
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Premium unleaded gasoline Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
G Warning!
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
It burns violently and can cause serious
unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
personal injury.
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
materials near gasoline! exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
Turn off the engine before refueling. The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials. allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
Direct skin contact with fuels and the ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your used.
health. These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
! To maintain the engine’s durability and knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
If premium unleaded gasoline is not Gasoline additives
available and low octane gasoline is used,
A major concern among engine
follow these precautions:
manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up the use of quality gasoline containing
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
as possible. deposits.
RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
acceleration.
RDo not exceed an engine speed of
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 542
After an extended period of using fuels ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
without such additives carbon deposits can Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
build up, especially on the intake valves and Antifreeze separately from each other,
in the combustion area, leading to engine could cause engine damage not covered by
performance problems such as: the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RWarm-up hesitation If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
RUnstable idle (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
Technical data
RKnocking/pinging
approximately 266‡ (130†).
RMisfire The coolant solution must be used year round
RPower loss to provide the necessary corrosion protection
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to
In areas where carbon deposits may be the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
encountered due to lack of availability of interval.
gasoline which contains these additives, the
use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is Coolant system design and coolant used
recommended. determine the replacement interval. The
replacement interval published in the
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
listing of approved products. Follow or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
directions on the product label. of equal specification are used to renew the
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. coolant concentration or bring it back up to
This only results in unnecessary cost and may the proper level.
be harmful to the engine operation. For information on other Mercedes-Benz
! Damage or malfunction resulting from approved products of equal specification,
poor fuel quality or from blending additional contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
fuel additives other than those tested and or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz To provide important corrosion protection,
vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes- the solution must be at least 50%
Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
or Extended Limited Warranties. freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
Coolants anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: temperature will increase due to the lower
RCorrosion
heat transfer capability of the solution.
protection
Therefore, do not use more than this amount
RFreeze protection of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
point) Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
The cooling system was filled at the factory
system checked for signs of leakage). Please
with a coolant providing freeze protection to
make sure the mixture is in accordance with
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
label instructions.
protection.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 543
The water in the cooling system must meet

minimum requirements, which are usually
satisfied by normal drinking water.
If you are not sure about the water quality,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Technical data
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
parts. The use of aluminum components in
motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
such engines be specifically formulated to
protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
result in a significantly shortened service life.
Therefore, the following product is strongly
recommended for use in your vehicle:
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
concentration checked.
The coolant is also regularly checked each
time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
Z
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 544
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system, S 450 4MATIC77 7.8 US qt (7.4 l) 8.6 US qt (8.1 l)
vehicles without
rear climate S 55078 6.1 US qt (5.75 l) 6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
control S 550 4MATIC
Technical data
Cooling system, S 450 4MATIC77 8.6 US qt (8.1 l) 9.4 US qt (8.9 l)

vehicles with rear
climate control S 55078 6.9 US qt (6.55 l) 7.6 US qt (7.2 l)
S 550 4MATIC
S 600 7.9 US qt (7.5 l) 8.7 US qt (8.3 l)
S 63 AMG 6.0 US qt (5.6 l) 7.0 US qt (6.2 l)
S 65 AMG 7.4 US qt (7.0 l) 8.1 US qt (7.7 l)
Low temperature S 600 1.4 US qt (1.3 l) 1.5 US qt (1.4 l)
cooling system
S 65 AMG 1.6 US qt (1.55 l) 1.8 US qt (1.7 l)
Washer system and headlamp (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
cleaning system [4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
G Warning! 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/ [4.0 l] solvent)
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
77 Canada only.
78 USA only.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 545
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time July 30, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 546
É2215847682>ËÍ
2215847682
Order no. 6515 2344 13 Part no. 221 584 76 82 Edition B 2010

2010 S Class PDF

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

2010 S Class PDF

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

221_AKB; 6; 20, en-US 2009-09-24T13:28:17+02:00 - Seite 1

d2ugruen, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols i Helpful hints or further information you

! Highlights hazards that may result in

Our company and staff congratulate you on

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 27

Introduction ......................................... 21 Safety and security ............................. 39

Control systems .................................. 75

Controls in detail .............................. 273

Operation ........................................... 401

Practical hints ................................... 449

Technical data ................................... 523

1, 2, 3 ... Air bags ................................................ 41

Break-in period .................................. 402 Climate control system .................... 363

Upload/Download of Data ............... 95 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 299

Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 274 Parktronic system .......................... 347

Number .......................................... 525 Fluids

G Low-beam headlamps .................... 299

Inside door handle ...................... 38, 278 Global unlocking (KEYLESS-

ESC OFF ........................................ 495 M

Multifunction display messages Trunk ............................................. 478

O Parking ............................................... 314

PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 54 Headphone ...................................... 82

Speed settings Capacities fuels, coolants,

Call waiting, call holding, and Inflation pressure ........................... 413

Transmission positions .................... 320 Control system .............................. 220

Radio ............................................. 252 Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 447

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Important notice for California retail Maintenance

contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle Montvale, NJ 07645-0350

Rtraffic rules and regulations

Vehicle data recording

Exterior view ....................................... 28

Rear passenger compartment 29

Rear passenger compartment

Function Page Function Page

Function Page Function Page

M Electronic parking brake 315 R Exterior lamp switch 298

N Door control panel 38

Function Page Function Page

Function Page Function Page

2 See separate HYBRID Supplemental Operating Instructions.

Function Page Function Page

Function Page Function Page

3 AMG vehicles only

Center console Function Page

adjustment, passenger side 370

Overhead control panel 37

Overhead control panel Function Page

38 Rear door control panel

Driver’s door control panel Rear door control panel

Function Page Function Page

Vehicle equipment .............................. 40

Safety and security

Vehicle equipment G Warning!

G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

Safety and security

(2) Always sit as upright as possible,

Safety and security

of the air bags, there is the possibility of

Side impact air bags G Warning!